|
43 81*
|
|||||||
|
• '.- /f/f//// ( // ///r ~ J,;,>/{
|
|||||||
|
. - -, .»-
|
|||||||
|
ANATOMY
O F A N
HORSE*
CONTAINING
An exa& and full Defcription of the Frame, Situation and Connexion of all his Parts, ( with their Actions and Vfes )
expreft in Forty nine Copper-plates. To which is Added
An APPENDIX,
Containing two Difcourfes :
The one, of the
GENERATION of ANIMALS;
And the other, of the
M O T I O N of the C H Y L E,
AND THE
CIRCULATION of the BLOUD.
|
||||||
|
By AiVDRE W SNAPE, Jun. Farrier to His MAJESTY.
|
||||||
|
LONDON,
Printed by M* Flefher-for the Authour, and are to be fold
by 7. Fkfber at the Angel and Crown in S. Paul's
Church-yard. An. Dom. 1683.
|
||||||
|
T O
|
||||||||||||
|
His Moft Sacred Majefty,
CHARLES II.
K I N G of Great BRITAIN,
FRANC E and IRELANP,&c. |
||||||||||||
|
May it pleafe Tour Majefly.
■
|
||||||||||||
|
OTHING could have excufed., or in-
duced me unto, the Prefumption of this Addrefs unto Your MAJESTY, if Your Royal Bounty towards me, had not made fuch an Application my Duty. For being a Son of that Family that hath had the honour to ferve the Crown of this King- dom in the Quality of Farriers for the/e two Hundred Years, -and being my felf retain'd by Your MAJESTY'S Favour in that capacity;
A 5 As
|
||||||||||||
|
j
|
||||||||||||
|
The Eiftle Dedicatory.
As thefè hereditary and perfonal Engagements
were the firft Motives that put me upon direc- ting of Horfes, that I might be more capable of ferving Your MAJESTY in my Station ; fo do they entitle Your MAJESTY to the Dif- coveries I have made, as being but the effeóh of fucb Obligations. And I do the rather flat- ter my felf with the hope of Your MAJE- STY'S Pardon in this Particular, in regard that this Effay has Something in it that is newy and withall of Public^ and Common Benefit, which Your Royal Goodnefs hath been pleafèd upon all occafions to Honour with Your Princely Encou- ragement and Approbation. For the Intention*of publifhing this Treatife being to inftruci: Farriers in the Frame, Situation and Life of the Parts of an Horle, which is the Subjed of their Care j They will thereby, I hope, become more skilfull in ap- plying and adminiftring proper Remedies to the Diftempers of that Generous Animal, which yields Your MAJESTY and Your Subjefts that great fervice both in Peace anÓT^ar. May
|
||||
|
The Efiftle Dedicatory.
May God Almighty long continue Your MA»
IE STY's Gracious Reign over a Loyal and Obedient People : And that Your MAJESTY will vouchfafe Your Royal Pardon for the bold- nefs of this Dedication, is the humble Petition of TowMAJESTT's
Mofi Loyal and
Obedient Subjeff
and Servant, A. Snape.
|
||||
|
The Introduction.
THERE is nothing gives a greater check to the progrefs of
an Art, than to believe it is already perfected by thofe that have gone before us, and fo to content our [elves with their determinations : For had our ancient Artifts been thus fupinely credulous, and thought it Sufficient to have traced their prede- cejfors, limiting their wits within other mens bounds, never had time brought to light fucb difcoveries in our Profefjion, nor had the myfteries of our Art been fo far communicated to pofterity as they already are. This confideration induced me to make an attempt for the
cultivating and improving our Art to a greater perfection than it had as yet attain d to : In order to which confidering the fe- ver al parts of it, and obferving that our profeffton has fuch a correfpondence with that of a Phyfuian, that they differ not at all fav ing in the fubjeel they acl upon-, I begun to think, who- foever would excel in the knowledge of the one, mujl arrive at it by the fame method as the others do. Now he that once bends his mind toward the pralike of Phyfick-, firft applies himfelf to the ftudy }of Anatomy, to underfiand all the Parts (with their anions and ufes) of that Body which is to be the fubjeel where^- upon his Art is to be exercifed ; without which no wife man will think, him capable of that profeffion. And yet how rare amongji the gre at eft part of thofe that think, themfelves no mean Far- riers, is the knowledge of that Creature they praclife upon ? whereas it is plain, feeing they know not the fituation and ufe of the parts, they can make but wide guejfes at the feat ór na- ture of the diftemper, andfo muft adminifter their Medicines at random and at all adventures, and be in the mofi opprobrious fenfe Horfe-do&ors. Nay I will be bold to fay fomething more (which I hope I
may fpeak without the envy of Phyficians, for whom I have a profound refpetl) that in fonie regards Anatomy is more necef B hy
|
||||
|
The INTRODUCTION.
fary to Farriers than to them-, in order to find out difeafes : For
befides the pulfe and the urine, and the pathognomonickfigns (as they caU them) of each difiemper, they are affi/ied in their enquiry moreover ( not to fay chiefly) by the complaints and relations of the Patients themfelves : whereas a Farrier having to do with a dumb creature, muft be very curious in his know- ledge of the parts with their offices, and of the fympathy or con- fent that one part hath with another ; or elfe, feeing all his in- formation muft be of his own hammering out, he's like to make but a fhort difcovery of the difiemper. Howneeeflk- Now there are. two things chiefly neceffary to the judging or
ledge of the difcerning of a difeafe, namely the Affection or difiemper, and Eifcer; the part Afre&ed or diftempered ; the fignes of which are many, fe!s.°f di" ^ut efPeciaüy f™*1 the aétion of the part affecled : As for ex- ample, he that knows the atlion of the Stomach to be concoclion or digeftion-, if the concoclion be impaired or hindred, he may eafily judge that the Stomach is ill affecled. So likewife he that knows the fituation of the Liver to be on the right fide, and the Spleen on the left ; if the right fide be fore or do fwell, he can- not but know that the Liver and not the Spleen is affecled, and will therefore apply his remedies accordingly. Now he that is igno- rant of the parts of the Bodyfhall ill know either the fituation or atlion of either thefe parts mentioned or any other : and there is no way to come to the und^ft^^Ain^ 0f them but by Anatomy. Seeing then the profit and necejflty of under/landing Anatomy
'is fuch and of f o great nfe to us, I thought I could not fpend my time and endeavours on any thing more conducing to the ad- vancement of our profeffion, than by apply ingmy f e If unto it in the firji place ; wherein having none that have gone before me or fhew'd me the way, I hope all ingenuous men wiU be favourable to my undertaking, and not be over fever e Cenfors of any Im- perfetiions they may poffibly meet with in the following Treatif e ; and I hope alfo that having broken the Ice, as we fay, all de- ferving Artifts will be excited to Emulation. |
||||||||||
|
This Treatife then defegning to teach the Anatomy of an Horfe,
|
||||||||||
|
A definition we mu
of Anatomy. « |
t in the firft place let you know what Anatomy is : "It
|
|||||||||
|
" is an opening or cutting up of the Body of any Animal or living
"Creature whatfoever, whether frequenting the land or water, |
||||||||||
|
The INTRODUCTION.
" whereby the knowledge of the frame of its body, and the ufe of
"its parts may be attained unto. Now this knowledge may be obtained two ways, namely by How it is
Infpeclion, or by Inftruétion ; both which ways are very ne- cefjary, but the ferfl is the more certain, though the latter car- rieth more grace and fiate. The firfl, which is Infpeétion, is to look, into either the Fi-
gures of the parts of Horfes onely, or into the bodies of Horfes themfelves. The latter, which is Inftru&ion, is by the Voice of a Teacher
or Inftrutlor, or by the Writings of famous and renowned men. As to the Figures of the parts, they are thus far neceffary, The Figures
^1 J •/ Ö r r j ■ i i of the parts
Viz. they daily represent to us Juch -parts as we have ?iot the op- how far ne-
portunity to fee in the bodies themfelves : For it is not eafy toceflkry' find in all places ( nor at fuch times when we ftand in mofi need of them) fuch a flore of dead bodies as is necefary for us to pratlife upon ; wherefore to fupply the want offuch bodies, I do thinks thefe Figures ufefull, and have therefore accordingly by a curious draught or delineation reprefented to you fuch obfer- vations as are made in true dijfetlions, not by copying out every part, but chiefly thofe that arp mofl ucccffaiy for us to under- ftand, omitting thofe of lefs confederation, left I Jhould make this Volume fwell too big, and become too chargeable, whereby fuch would be dijcouraged from buying it, for whom I chiefly in- tend it. But although I approve of thefe Figures as necefary, to be by a caution.
us, upon occafeon 5 yet this caution I mufl give to the Student, that he do not truji too much to thefe Copies, as I may call them, without praHifing upon the original body it felf: For as it is Tiot pofflble to make a good Commander by viewing onely repre- sentative Armies, without pratlice and experience in real En- gagements ; fo is it vain for you to think, to attain to the exaft knowledge of Anatomy by minding the Figures onely. Neither would I have any thatwidertakes this ftudy to be dif-
couyaged, for fear they Jhould not get fuch bodies as I have J} 2 ' *»£»"
|
||||
|
The INTRODUCTION.
mentioned (J mean Horfes bodies ) (ufficient for them to prac-
tife upon; for they may-, to fupply the want of fuch, take the bodies of Afes or Mules, of Sheep and Oxen, Hogs or Dogs, any of which come near the bodies you de fir e, efpecially as to the fi- tuation and ufe, as alfo hidden motions of the Internal parts : for if thofe motions be the fame in Beafis as in Men, as by a * sec Eoaor very worthy *" Authour they are affirmed to be, (who faith that chap.?.' '*' the motions of the Heart, the Arteries, the Midriff, the Brain and Guts are the fame in Beafis as in Men ) they muff certain- ly be the fame in one Beaji as in another. Tiie method Next we come to Jhew after what manner you are to take in
of Anatomy. ^an^ t^ fòffeftiQn of any ofthefe Creatures, and that you muft not doe confufedly nor diforderly, but with due courfe of procee-
ding. For the doing of which take thefe following Rules. Fir ft then, you mufl begin with that which is beft known and
?nofi e afte, which are the external or outward parts 5 for as much as the knowledge of them is moft necejfary, as to Cures Chirur- gical : and thefe parts are commonly dijiinguijhed into two kinds ; one of which are called fpermatical and folid, which arefuppofed to be bred of feed, and fuch are Bones, Grift les and Ligaments ; and the other fanguineous, (aid to be generated of blond, as Mufcles. I Jhall not in this place give you any particular inftruftiofis
for the anatomifing any of thefe parts, referring you for them to the book, it (elf : onely advertif e you of this, that when you de- fire a Body for examining the folid parts, the bodies of old and lean Horfes are the fitte ft, in regard the fiefh and fat will not fo much hinder, rior hide the parts from you, as in fat Horfes they will. You are alfo to obferve that there is a two-fold way of pro-
ceeding in dijfeSlion : The one is where there is a plenty, the other where there is a fear city of dead bodies. If there be a plen- ty, then you may look, Into the Mufcles of one, into the Entrails of another, and into the Ve f e Is of a third, &c. not mattering though you fpoil one part in difcoverivg another : but where they are fo fear ce that you can get but one body and that feldome too, then if you would fee all in that body, great skill muft be ufed to jhew every thing in its order and place. Now
|
||||
|
The INTRODUCTION.
Now order ofdiffediion requires that you fhould firft begin with
the Head, it being the moft noble and excellent fart 5 next to that the Chefi, and laftly the Betty : but this (as I have [aid) is not to be done where there is but one body, for there you muft, begin with thofe parts that are moft fubjeft to Corruption, where- fore you muft fir ft cut up the Lower Belly, then the Cheft, and laftly the Head 5 both which ways are often ufed ; the fir ft be- ing called the way of dignity, and the other of diutumity ; the one being more noble, and the other of a longer durance. I fhatt not here treat of any of the parts contained in thefe
three Regions or Venters, but will leave them till I come to fpeaf^ of them in their order in the following Treatife, my defign being to be as brief as may be, and not to repeat any thing over fe- derai times, as I have [een [ome Authours have done. There- fore I [hall put an end to this Introducimi when I [ball have in- formed you, that all the parts which fall under the Anatomifts knife to be examined are commonly reduced to two heads, name- ly, fimple or fimilar, and compound or dijffimilar. Tho[e that are generally accounted -fimple parts, are in num- The divifion
ber ten, jiamely, a Bone, a Grift le, a Ligament, a Membrane, £,»"*"*' a Fibre, a Nerve, an Artery, a Vein, Flefh and Skfn. Thefe l' Sunple» are called fimple or fimilar, becaufe every particle of them is of the fame name and fubftance ; as every part of a bone is bone, &c. Tet three of thefe ten, though they are generally accounted
fimple parts, if fir idly taken cannot be truly reputed fo ; for fir ft, Veins are made of a coat, fibres and valves 3 fecondly, Arteries are made of two coats or skins different from one ano- ther ; and for Nerves, their inner fubftance is medullar or mar- rowey, and the outward, membranous or skinny : fo that of truly fimilar or fimple parts, there are onely feven, namely, Bones, Griftles, Ligaments, Membranes, Fibres, Flefh and Skin. The Diffimilar or compound parts are thofe, which, con- a^JJ?'
trary to the fimple, may be divided into feveral particles or parcels of unlike or different fubftance and denomination : As for
|
||||
|
The INTRODUCTION.
for example, A Leg may be cut into fever al pieces, yet not
into fever al Legs, but into Flefh, Bones, Veins and other things which it is compounded of; whereas, as was [aid, a fimilar part though it be divided into parcels, yet thofe are jiill lik? one another, and of the fame nature : for fuppofe a Liga- ment be cut into many pieces, every piece partakes onely and truly of the nature of a Ligament, and aU remain what they were before, their length or other accident onely excepted. Thus much for the Introduction, wherein I mainly intended
to fhew the method of Anatomy, and to hint the reafon of my undertaking 5 It now remains that I addrefs my felf to the Work. it felf, which f hall be writ with the greateft plainnefs its nature is capable of, that I may thereby attain to that wifhed endlfet before me, namely, the benefiting of my Reader. |
|||||
|
THE
|
|||||
|
(I)
|
||||||||||||||||
|
THE
|
||||||||||||||||
|
ANATOMY
|
||||||||||||||||
|
O F A N
|
||||||||||||||||
|
HORSE
|
||||||||||||||||
|
B O O K I.
Of the Lo&eft BeUy or Tauncb.
|
||||||||||||||||
|
CHAP. I.,
Of the Parts hefting thewhok Body, and firft of the Hai, ^mi if fSSÏ? pieCÖ this Gool% Cr^re, It wUI not
De amiisƒ I firft g„e you an ac > f j, "i not Cas in a CafM ì£ ? I m adorned with hairs, wherein
whichthei^ befides dy, which are firft JÏ',^. W1£\*^ are "»»fw to the whole bo-
flefhyparmicfc^^^?^» wtehljeth next under it ; then the the Mufcks. Beiides thefe Ì ^ and kftlythe common membrane of are onely fw^r to ttutimfc, ther5 fe °ther InveftinS Parts' butthey their due place, aScfSSST °f ^ ^ V° which * WÌU 5** * Firft then I will beSwXSe£~one%hef
Senfe. They are fgTS nl 7',' lfafthey meet firft with ^ ment of the third concoffi^ £?^Ì r^™™7 a"d T^ Ekiü.»W |
||||||||||||||||
|
Perly to be called parts «f ?£' u j C th?nfc!ws are reP"ted not fo pro-
|
ingendred.
|
|||||||||||||||
|
fenfe L „SKe v^ft aS Excrements' They are void of
have, to wlaiX -e SifgTow?" * "" * 4h *S Pto Thefe
|
||||||||||||||||
|
2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
How umi. Thefe Hairs are by fome thought to have for their nourifiment a pro-
fhed. portionable quantity of that juice of which they are generated, continu- ally miniftred unto them. Others think that the Hairs being hollow and
porous are nourifhed as the Feathers of Fowl are, and that is by bloud ; for if one pull offa Feather from a young Bird that is unfledged, a pretty deal of its fiera will appear bloudy. But though we lhould grant that the matter of their liourifhment were made/of bloud, yet certainly it muft be very much altered and degenerate from its own nature, before it can be adapted to the hair, feeing the hair of a Man's head ( for exam- ple ) grows not onely in living perfons, whofe bloud runs briskly in their Arteries and Veins, whereby it is kept from corruption, but alfo in the dead, in whom the whole mafs of bloud is devoid of all nutritive power, as has been often obferved in bodies preferved unburied. But whatfoever the humour be that nourifhes them, it is thruft through the skin by the pores thereof, the action and heat of the body affifting thereunto, where the purer part of it enters the roots of the hair, but the more earthy 'not being able to enter fuch almoft unperceivable pores, is driven out amongft the hair where it becomes dufl ; which dud is that that is brought forth with the Curry-combe when a Horfe is dreft. From hence then it is, that a Horfe, though he be never fo well dreiled one morning, and ne- ver fo clean kept till the next, he (hall notwithstanding be as full of duur as he was the morning before ; for the cleaner the skin of a Horfe is kept, the more open are its pores to tranfmit a more plentifull nourifh- ment to the hair, whence alfo there is a greater collection of this ex- crementitious duft. how the mw And hence may be gathered a reafon of the Jhedding of the hair, which cems to fa -ls obferved to happen in many Horfes that have ill keeping, fuch as your ®' Cart-horfes that feldom have any labour beftowed upon them, for want of v^hich dre/Tmg, to remove the duft which lieth upon the mouths of
the pores or at the roots of the hairs, the pafTages, through which the juice fhould come that nourifhes the hair, are obftru£ted or flopped, and fo like dead Leaves from a Tree in Autumn thc^ diuj> of£ or as untime- ly Fruit falls before the feafon of the year requireth it. Reafons for As for the Colours of the hairs, they are various, according as is the the diffe-mt humour which doth predominate in the body : for fuch as the humour is yin. ^ lhe which is driven forth towards the skin for their nourifhment, fuch will the colour of the hair be. As for Inftance : If the cholerick humour doth moil predominate, then are the hairs of
a black, a Sorrel or a Cheftnut colour ; If bloud moft predominate, then will the Horfe be a bright Bay or Roan ; If flegme, then the Horfe will be of a milk-white or yellow-dun ; If melancholy, then will the Horfe be of an Iron*gray or Moufe-dun. Thus much for the colour of the hairs, next I come to the ufe of them. their uff. The ufe of the hairs is, firft, to cover the skin; fecondly, to defend it ; thirdly, to be an ornament to it ; and laftly, as I have before fhew- ed, to fuck up that excrementitious Superfluous juice which through the pores of the skin is fent from all parts of the body to them. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
Book L Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch. 3
|
||||||||
|
CHAP. II.
Of the Cuticle or Scarf-skin-
TH E Hide on which the hairs already fpoken of do grow, confifts The Scarf-
of two Skins, the outer of which is called the Scarj-skin, ferving s*-'n' to defend the Body from outward Injuries, and for that intent is of it felf Infenfible, that it may the better indure the violence of the weather, or other harms which many times happen to it. And for that caufe, Na- ture hath fo ordered it, that if at any time it happeneth to be rubb'd off, as often it is by an ill Saddle, and many other ways, it groweth again without a fear or blemiili, provided the Parts under it (as particularly the true Skin ) be not alfo violated ; for they being fpermatical Parts, or made of Seed, cannot eafily be reftored, which is the reafon that moft Wounds will not heal up without a fear. Now this Scarf skin having its matter ( of which it is made ) from the true Skin and the Veflels that terminate in it, which are of all forts, both Veins, Arteries and Nerves, none of which reach any farther than the true Skin, it is apparent that this Skin is without fenfe, it being their office alone to communicate both life, fenfe and motion to all parts of the Body. And that this Skin is void of fenfe, may be feen by the cutting of it ; as thus, If you cut onely through this Skin, when you go to Rowel a Horfe, you ihall not find the Horfe move for it, neither will it bleed ; but if you cut fo far as to touch the true Skin under it, you will find him both fiir and bleed, for then you touch the little threads of the Veflèls, and by violating them, you caufe the Horfe to feel pain, and alfo bloud to ifl£*> £«-***■ The ufe of this Skin, befid^c w.«,B * cuvering to the whole Body, is Its vft.
to cover tne mouths of thofe fmall hairy VelTels already fpoken of, that
the bloud, fpirits, or other ichorous or watery Matter do not ifliie from them, which otherwife they would. Yet its Pores are fo large as to per- mit the vapourous moifture that is thruft out of all parts of the Body to it, to pafs through them, either in the form of fweat, or by infenfible tranfpiration. Thefe Pores being many times obftrufted or conftringed by a fudden cold taken after hard riding, by giving the Horfe cold Wa- ter too foon after it, or by warning him too high in cold Water when he is hot, the Vapours are thereby hindered from coming forth, and fo are detained between the two Skins, and there generate evill Diftempers, or at leaft fall from thence into the Limbs, and there caufe Inflammations and breakings out, which we call Greafe in the heels or Scratchets. |
||||||||
|
C
|
||||||||
|
CHAR
|
||||||||
|
>
|
||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
|
||||||
|
CHAP. III.
Of the Cutis or true S^in.
We true T TNder this Scarf, lieth the true Skin, which the Latines call Cutis.
s^H:m VJL Its fai fiance, as ï have before ihewed, is faid to be fpermatical,
Its'H' fuch as being once loft, cannot be reftored as formerly it was, but is
reunited by a cicatrice or fear, that is bred of the dried and xonftringed flefh under it ; which is the reafon nö hairs will grow upon that part of the Skin where the fear is, becaufe it is callous and deftitute of Pores in which they fhould grow. This Skin doth encompafs the whole Body as well as the Scarf, and hath the fame paflages for the receiving in, and letting out, for the eafe and relief of the Body, as that hath. Veffeis. It hath for its nourifhment, life, and fenfe, Veffeh of all forts, Veins,
Arteries and Nerves, divaricated and branched through it in the fmalleft
hair-like threads, all which terminate in it, none of them being inferted into the Cuticle. Cohur. As for its colour, it varieth as do the humours in the Body; for that
humour which moft abounds, coloureth it with its proper refpective co-
lour ; as for example, If bloud moft abound, then is it moft red ; if choler do moft predominate, then is it yellowifh ; and fo for the other hu- . mours. pfe3 Its ufe is principally to inveft and defend the Body; as I have faid be-
fore of the Scarf-skin : for as that keeps it from the violent impreffion of
either exceffive heat, or cold ; fo doth this Skin reftrain, and, as it were, wall in ( as in a Caftle ) all the fpirits and natural heat, which would other wife in hot weathci, or in violent exercife be fo faft fpent, that they would leave the vital parts deftitute, which would occafion the lofs of your Beaft. But though Nature has made this provilion to hinder the diffipation of the fpirits, yet has fhe framed the Skin ( as well as the Scarf-skin) full of fmall Pores, through which upon violent exercife do ifiue in great plenty hot and moift vapours, which are that we call fweat ; yea though the Beaft be at reft, if the Air be any whit mild or temperate, warm fleams are continually a paffing through them by infen- fible tranfpiration. It's alfo as ferviceable in cold weather, for then the more fiercely it is
befieged by the cold, the narrower do the aforefaid Pores purfe up them- felves, whereby the internal heat is detained within, and the external cold kept out. |
||||||
|
CHAP.
|
||||||
|
Book I* Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch
CHAR IV.
Of the flejhy Pannicle.
|
||||||||
|
NE XT to the true Skin, lieth the flelhy Pannicle, called membrana jhe names of
Carnofa, or pannkulus carnojus, becaufe in moft parts of the Body, ^B^/<? it comes near to the nature of flelh, and is truly mufcular. In Man this Membrane is faid to lie under the Fat, though föme very tts fimMt
curious Anatomifts deny that Man has any fuch Membrane at all, faveani extent- in the Forehead ; and of this opinion is Dr. Gliffbn. I will not intermed- dle in that Con trover fie, as being nor proper for me ; but in Horfes it lies immediately under the Skin, above the Fat, and is more like to a Mufcle than a Membrane. In fleying off the Skin, you mult be very carenali and curious, or elfe you will take this Pannicle off along with it, it is fo clofely knit to it by Fibres and innumerable Veflêls that go be- tween. It is of the fame extent and figure as the true Skin, inveir ing the whole Body as that does ; but in fome Parts it is almoff. wholly flelhy, and in others altogether membranous. It has Fejfels of all forts as the Skin has, for before they can reach the itsrtffeiü
Skin, they muft pierce through this Membrane ; and as they pafs through, they fend forth many fmall twigs into it, both Veins, Arteries and Nerves, but efpecially Nerves to affili its motion, whence it is by fome called the nervous Membrane. The ufe of it is chiefly to ferve for a Mufcle to move the Skin; where- its vfei
by the Beaft flukes off the Flies, or any other thing that offends him. It ferves alfo to defend the neighbouring Parts, and to ftrengthen in their pailàge the Veffels which are diheminated u*» •*«* true òinn. It alfo hinders the Fat from being melted and fpent by the continual motion of the Mufcles. And h(\[y, it helpeth to heal or clofe up the Skin when it is cut or otherwife hurt ; for the Skin being a fpermatick Part cannot be bred anew, and therefore this flelhy Membrane helps to glew as it were the fides ol it together again, growing into'one body with it, and ma- king what we call a Scar. |
||||||||
|
C HA P. V.
Of the Fat, and Common Membrane of the Mufcles, FAT is of two forts, and is diflinguifhed by two feveral Names as fat, itsdif-
well in Latin as Englifli. That which we are to fpeak of in this£££ an Chapter is called in Latin pinguedo, and in Englifh Fat ; but that which is within the Belly and makes up the Caul and Mefentery and covers the Kidneys, is named fevum, Suet or Tallow. The former will not congeal C % fo
|
||||||||
|
é The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
fo quickly or fo hard as this latter will. Both the one and the other are
made of an oily part of the bloud ; and this we are to treat of here, is congealed between the Carnous Membrane defcribed in the foregoing Chapter, and the Common Membrane of the Mufcles. Hove genera- This Fat is the fourth common covering of the whole Body, for there ti>d' is no Part which has the reft of the common coverings, but has this alfo, if the Horfe be not extreme lean ; though the fatteli have it not in any
great plenty. Now as all Food that is eaten, confifts of feveral parts or principles, which the Chymifts can feparate one from another, namely Salt, Spirit and Oyl ; fo the Food, that confifts of thefe feveral princi- ples, when it is taken into the Body, and concofted in the Stomach ( which is natural Chymiftry, as I may call it ) has them fo loofened one from another, that each principle paiïès into the nourifhment and increafe of that part that is of the fame nature with it. Amongft the reft the oily part, ( which is otherwife called the Sulphureous, becaufe it will flame like Brimftone) fweating as it were through the pores of the Vef- fels and fubjacent parts towards the furface of the Body, is ftopt by the clofenefs and compa&nefs of the flelhy Membrane, and there congeals into Fat. Now this Fat is not one continued body as Butter or ( what we call ) tryed Suet is ; but is included in innumerable membranous parti- tions or cells, almoft like Honey-combs, (which it is likely are borrowed from the flelhy Pannicle) which makes the Fat to appear fomewhat fpongy. It is not eafie to give a reafon of this oily humour's turning into Fat ; tor it cannot be by cold, feeing the Beaft is always a&ually warm ; much lefs can it be by heat, which is apter to melt Fat into Oyl, than to harden Oyl into Fat : therefore fome make a moderate heat to be the efficient of it. 'Tis true indeed that the Beaft is moderately hot, and we fee by experience that Fat is generated ; but that that is the caufe of this, I dare not affirm. My apprehenfion of it is this : That when the oily Matter iflues out of the Veins and Arteries, &c. there panes along with it much thin watry humour : And when they both come to the flelhy Membrane, this latter being thin, evaporates through it and is evacuated by fweat or infenfible tranfpiration ; but the other hemg t-hicker and more clammy, is forced to ftay behind, and lofing by degrees that wheyifh humour that before kept it liquid, it curdles into Fat. Tlie ufes of The ufe of the Fat is, like a Garment, to keep the Body warm, and FaU cheriih the natural heat, which by its clamminefs it hinders from evapo- rating too much ; and on the other fide by its thicknefs it ftoppeth the
Pores fo, that the cold cannot enter in. It alfo fills up the empty fpaces between the Mufcles, and the wrinkles
of the Skin, by which the Horfe is made plump, fmooth and beautifull ; and therefore old, lean and decrepit Horfes are deformed for want of Fat. It ferves alfo as a pillow or bulwark againft any violence, either from
blows, bruifes or heavy weights, and the like. Finally, it relieveth fuch Creatures as abound with it, in time of fear-
city or want of fuftenance, by being converted into nourifhment; for it ferves as aliment, and holdeth the parts of the Body in play, till the Creature attain its proper Food. The common ,The fifth and laft common Covering of the Body, is the Common "TmTi ^ Memhrane of the Mufcles. This is fpread over all the Mufcles ( imme- H'c u' diately under the Fat ) and is knit by Fibres to that Membrane which is proper to each Mufcle, but fomewhat loofely, that it might not hinder their
|
||||
|
Boot I. Of the Lowefl Belly or Paunch
their motion by inverting them too clofely. It is faid to arile from the
Back-bone, becaufe it cleaves moft firmly to the Spine thereof, and is ftronger there, than in its other Parts. In an Horfe it is as thick as Parchment, and very ftrong. And its ufe is to confirm and ftrengthen the Mufcles in general in their proper fituation, and to be as it were a Cafe for them to move glibly in, and to defend them from injuries. |
||||||
|
CHAP. VL
Of the Invefling Parts proper to the Lower Belly.
HAVING lhewed you what are the common mvefihg or containing
parts of the whole Body, I come now to Ihew which are thofe that are proper to the Lower Belly in particular, and thofe are onely two, be- sides thofe common ones already fpoken of, namely the Mufcles of the Paunch, and the Rim of the Belly. Now by the Lower Belly we underftand all that cavity (and onely
that ) which is below the Midriff and is encompafTed by the lhort Ribs, the point of the Breaft-bone, Loins, Haunch-bones, and Share-bones, and is filled with the Guts and other Entrails. The Mufcles are in all Horfes of a like number, which is on each fide the MufiM
four. The firit pair that lhew themfelves are called the External ohlique f^/Jj.' pair ; the next are the Internal oblique pair ; the third are the two right pamch. or fir-eight Mufcles; and under thefe are the two tranfverfe Mufcles, fo called from their going crofs the Belly. r. ; .„ But before I proceed any further in defcr\h^5 chele Mufcles, I will
firft fhew what a Mufiie is, and whereof it is compounded, and alfo the feveral ufes of the Muffles in general. The Mufcles, if you take them in a large fignification, are all that which What a M*f-
we call Flefh ; which Flelh may be divided into many pieces or parcelsck *• without cutting or breaking any of them, if with care undertaken ; and each piece fo feparable, is named a Mufcle. - Now thefe pieces have each their feveral diftincl: Epithets, appellations Mufcles <"e
or names from feveral confiderations, as from their fituation, Ihape,^B$\^-. ufe, &c but are all called Mufcles, their office being to perform the imarj mo- voluntary motion : which motion is performed fix feveral ways, namely,U0T- upwards, downwards, forwards, backwards, to the right hand and to the left. All which motions are performed in this manner. You muft know that all or moft of the Mufcles of the Body have each
their Oppofite or Antagonift, fo that the one being contraled or drawn together, (which is its proper motion) the oppofite at the fame time is relaxed or loofned ; and contrarily when that which upon the former mo- tion was relaxed, does it felf enter upon motion, it is contra&ed, whilft that which was before contracted, is now relaxed. As for example, when you flretch out either your Arm, or Leg, that motion is performed by one of thefe Mufcles ; and when you draw your Arm, or Leg back again, that is performed by the other, But
|
||||||
|
8 The Anatomy of an Horje.
But here let none fo far mifunderftand me as to think that either an Arm
or Leg can be either ftretcht forth or drawn back by the help oïone Mufcle alone ; but as to either of the before mentioned Limbs there are feveral parts belonging, fo do the diilinci: Mufcles of every part perform ( at the fame time ) the offices aforefaid. Neither can this voluntary motion be' performed without the help of
a Sinew or Nerve, by which the Spirits are brought from the Brain which
give the Mufcles their moving faculty.
involuntary Now there are other motions of the Body which are not performed by
or natural tne Mufcles, fuch as is ( according to fome ) the pulfation of the Heart
fofmedVhl'- and Arteries, the periftaltick motion of the Stomach and Guts, of the
out Mufdes, pailàge of the Gall, and of the Ureters, and feveral other Parts which
fcaUed* ^ have tnc^r continual motions whether the Horfe be fleeping qr waking,
and will perform their feveral motions as well in Men as Beafts, whether
we will or not. Wherefore thefe are called not Voluntary, or Natural.
I lliall in the next place fhew what parts the Mufcles are compounded
of, and thofe are agreed upon by all Authours of Anatomy to be thefe. a Mufcle it A Mufcle being an organical Part is compofed of Nerves, Flelh, Fibres, TnddMmiTarVems an<^ Arteries, all covered or, inverted with a proper Coat or Skin. plri, ' ' It is called organical, becaufe it is the inftrument or organ of an aélion, to wit, motion. And that it is alfo dirfimilar, the feveral kinds of parts of what firn, whereof it is made, do evidently prove. The feveral ufes of the parts that c«i/$r' " make UP a Mufcle are thefe : The Fibres and Tendon are the immediate inftruments of its action ; The Flelh properly fo called filleth up the in- terfaces or diftances between the Fibres ; The Arteries by importing vital fpirit and bloud do conferve the inbred heat, and help to nourilh it ; The Veins do convey back to the Heart all that bloud that remains from the nourifhment of the Mufcle; The Nerves convey animal Spirit to the Fi- bres and Tendon, whereby they are enabled for their aftion ; and the Membrane or Skin which incompaflèth the Mufcle, doth keep it to- gether, and diftinguifhes one from another. Why called a Having fhewed what a Mufcle is, and the feveral fimple parts whereof Mufcle, jt js mac|e, I fliall next fhew you why it is fo called Tt- is called mm, or mufculus, by the Latins, for that it is like a fley'd Moufe, or a Filli which is called mufculus; and by fome Authours it is called by the name of la- certus, from its fimilitude with a Creature called a Lizard. Yet there can be no one certain figure whereby to refemble it, by reafon of ita fundry fhapes ; but that it is like a fley'd Moufe in colour, cannot be denied. whence Muf- Now the Mufcles being many in number have accordingly many màa Tattle's'. names'. which names they take from either their Figure, their Situation, ' or their Action, and many times from their Ufe ; alfo fometimes from their Infertion, and fometimes from their Magnitude. And although there be fuch difference in the Mufcles, in refpedl: of their
Figures, their Magnitude, their Situation, and the like, yet are they fo united or conjoyned together through the whole Body, in io clofe a manner, that in many places they are hard to be feparated, except at fome times, when either wind, fome wheyifh humour or fome other matter gets between them, and then many times they will gape, and are at fome diftance the one from the other. Yet are they not fo clofely united neither, but that by a carefull and
expert Difië&or they may be feparated, and one divided from another; after
|
||||
|
v.
|
|||||
|
Book] I. Of the Lowejl Betty or Vaunch $
after which, to fee the feveral parts of a Mufcle feverally, you muli di-.
vide it alfo, which is on this manner. Some divide a Mufcle into two parts, which are a flefhy and a tendi- AMufde di-
nous part ; Again, they divide it into other three parts, namely, the™^"*" Head, the Middle and the Tail. By the Head is to be underftood the beginning or original of a Mufcle, which is one while ligamentous and nervous, and otherwhiles flelhy : By the Middle is that part meant which is abfolutely fjeihy ; and by the Tail, the Tendon, coniifting of the nu- merous Fibres that are extended through the Mufcle, and the Membrane that inverts it, which grow by little and little into one body, and com- pofe this Tendon, that is the tail of the Mufcle. It is fometimes round, fometimes broad ; other times long, and otherwhiles fhort, thicker or flenderer according to the part it appertains to, or according to the ufe it is put to ; it being but necefikry that thofe Parts which are moved mofl ftrongly or vehemently, Ihould have thicker and ftronger Tendons. Thus much tor the Mufcles in general. Now I come to the particular Mufcles, the fkft of which are the Muf-
cles of the Abdomfn or Paunch, of which I have fpoken fomething in the beginning of this Chapter, the which I ihall now further profecute, and let you know how they are fituated. The pair that in diffec- tion firft offer themfelves are called the Oblique ( or flanting ) Defcending the oblique External pair, which pair are the broadeft of all the reft, though it is by defcel!dt"e, many Authours faid that the oblique internal are equal in figure, magni- pair. tude, ftrength and a&ion. The original or rife of thefe Mufcles is from the fide of the Bread bone, the lower edge of five or fix of the loweft Ribs, and from thè tips of the crofs or tranfverfe proceflës of the Joints of the Rack-bone in the Loins. Their rife from the Ribs imitates the teeth of a Saw ; for fpringing with a narrow point from the lower fide of the Rib, every fuch point grows broader and broader, till it unite with the two next it on each fide, fo that there is a fpace of above «n inch between every point, into which empty fpaces the greater Saw-like Mufcle of the Breaft ends with like points. From their rife they run Hoping downwards to- ward the white line ('fo called ) in the middle of the Belly ; but before they reach half way thither, they lofe their flefliy fubftance, and become tendinous, and their Tendon is fo united to the common Membrane of the Mufcles, defefibed in the foregoing Chapter, that it feems to become one .with it, and running over the ltreight Mufcles is inferted into the forefaid white Line, down even to the very Share bone, into which alfo it is inferted. The next to thefe are the Oblique Afcending Internal pair, fo called be- r*e oblige
caufe of the contrary courfe of their Fibres to thofe of the External ; for ?£Zt$i™' as thofe defcend obliquely or aflant, fo do thefe afcend in like manner. Their rife is from the Rib of the Haunch bone, and from the procefies of the vertebra of the Loins and osfacrum ; and their Tendon is extended to the fliort Ribs partly, and partly to the white line, above the Navel, ad- hering to the common Membrane of the Mufcles as was faid before of the oblique defcending, where it is not cover'd by the Tendon of that Mufcle. Thefe have a different attion from the former; for whereas the External Their AShn, pair do draw the lower part of the Belly towards the Breaft, where they have their original ; thefe on the contrary draw down the Cheft with a kind of flanting motion towards the Hips ; it being the action of all Mufcles to draw towards their original, and the original of thefe Mufcles is ( as was faid ) at the Rib of the Haunch-bone.
After
|
|||||
|
/
|
|||||
|
io The Anatomy óf an FÌorfe.
The right m After thefe follow the Right or Streight Pair, fo called becaufe their
jireight pair. Fibres run flreight down the Belly as do the Mufcles themfelves : for their original is at the fides of the fword fafhioned Griftle at the end of the Breait-bone, and from the griftly ends of the baftard Ribs, whence they go all along the eminentelt part of the Belly flreight to the Sharé- bone where they terminate. Now in thefe Mufcles there are feveral In- fcriptions or tendinous Interflices, which are, according to the bignefs of the Horfe, more or fewer in number, but moft commonly there are in each Mufcle eight, not fo fair indeed as in Humane Bodies, but yet fo plain, that they do diflinguifh the Mufcles into nine parts ór more, as there are eight of thefe imcriptions or more ; and befides, each part has a diflinft Nerve : and yet notwithflanding, becaufe they cannot be eafily feparated one from another, they do by moft Anatomifts go for onely one pair. On the infide of thefe Mufcles are to be feen the Epigaftrick Arteries and Veins afcending, and the Mammary Arteries and Veins def- cending, which by an ancient Tradition have been held in Humane Bo- dies to inofculate one with another, the Arteries with the Arteries, and the Veins with the Veins ; but later and more inquifkively curious Ana- tomifts have difcovered it to be a mere fancy, invented to fupport the er- roneous Opinion, That whilft the Young was in the Womb, it was nou- rilhed with bloud carried to it by the Hypogaflrick Arteries and Veins ; but after the birth, the bloud altering its courfè, regurgitated up from the Womb, by the Epigaftrick VefTels, which inofculating with the Mam- mary, conveyed it to the Breafts, where it was converted into Milk. This I fay was the opinion as to Women, which has in feveral particu- lars been detected of errour : and may receive a further confutation in Mares, from the different fituation of their Udders from the Breafts in Women ; whereas thefe VefTels have the fame Courfe in both. The Their AZlitn. aition of thefe Mufcles is to ihorten the Belly by drawing the Breaft and Share-bone towards one another, whereby k is drawn as it were on a heap, to fqueez forth the Excrements or Urine, whence Dogs that ftrain fo hard to dung, have thefe Mufcles arifing as high up «a the Channel- bones. The fyrami- There are other two Mufcles (fometimes to be found) which do reft dai Mufcles. Up0n j-j^ Xendons of the Right Mufcles at the lower end of them, which I have not yet fpoken of, and thefe are called the pyramidal Mufcles. They are of a triangular figure, and their ufe is to aflift the flreight Mufcles in their fqueezing forth the Excrements, faith Fallopius. I believe thefe Muf. cles are fo feldom found, that they ought to be accounted lufus Natura, a fport of Nature ; for I do not remember that ever I have obferved any other here, but what ought to be accounted the loweft part or portion of the flreight Mufcles before defcribed. The tranf. Under all thefe lie the tranfverfe or overthwart Mufcles, fo called from JS£« "mi t^ieir own anc* ^eir Fibres running croI"s or overthwart the Belly. They
\ki. are of a quadrangular or fourfquare figure, and do flick fo clofe to the Rim of the Belly ( which is under them) that they cannot eafily be fepa-
rated.
Their Original is from the one or two loweft baftard Ribs, the tranfverfe proceflès of the Joints or vertebra of the Loyns, and the
Haunch-bones; and their Tendons reach to the white line, where they
terminate.
Their ASkn. Their Aliion is to prefs the Guts for the expulfion of Excrements. Now
|
|||||
|
Book I. Of thé Lowejì Belly or Tauhch. i i
Now as each Mufcle has a peculiar action to it felf, which is that The atlhn of
already afcribed to each, fo have all thefe ten Mufcles two Actions gene- ^Wjff ral to them all conjoinedly, which are thefe ; The firft is, that they ferve for a defence or bulwark for all the Parts underneath them, and do by their flefh ( which pretty much abourideth in them ) cherifh their natural heat and affift concoction ; The next is, that they do all affift together in the compreffing of the Guts for the voiding' of the excrements, the Midriff affifting thereunto, by whofe help the excrements are thruft downwards, which otherwife would be onely ftpeezed together, and not thruft any more downward than upward; I think it not amifs in this place to explain what it is I call the white
Line, for fear the naming of it fo often as I have done in this Chapter, without ihewing what it is, mould puzzle the Reader. The white Line is nothing elfe, but the extremities or tendinous end- *?' wh'te .,
ings of thefe Mufcles of the Paunch, and is called white from its colour, £ne " becoming fo, becaufe it confifts of Tendons and Fibres oriely, wherewith no flefhy part or particle is interwoven, whereby to change or alter the colour. It diftinguimeth the Belly into two parts, a right and a left, and is placed all along the middle of the Belly both below and above the Na- vel, running from the fword-pointed Griftle of the Breaft as low as to the Share-bone. I Now the Zidder being an external part of the Belly in Mares, I might
in this place ( in order ) treat of it ; but becaufe its Action, to wit the making of Milk, has fo near relation to the Foal, for which it provides nouriihmerit, I (hall omit it in this place, and defcribe it at the latter end of this firft Book, after I have done with the generative parts of Mares, and the breeding, nourifhing, (SV. of the Young in the Womb. The Second Table reprefènteth ali the Inverting parts of the Abdomett,
as well proper as common, AA Shew the Skin and Scarf-skin turnd hack.
BB The flefhy Membrane hkewife turnd back, with a little fpr inkling of
Fat on its infide.
CC The Common Membrane that invefts the Mufcles, in like manner turnd back.
DD The obliquely defcending Mufcle expreffed in fitu on the righi fide. dd The Tendon of the fame running to the white Line. £$" Its faw-like origine from the Ribs. EE The obliquely afcending Mufcle, with its Tendon e e, on the fame fide, Hkewife in fitu.
FF The S freight expreft to the full on the left fide, but onely in part on the right, becaufe the Tendons of the obliquely defending, and afcending Mufcles run over it. GG The tranfuerfe Mufcle expreft to the full on the left fide, but hid on the right by the two oblique.
gg The white Line and outer Skin of the Rim of the Belly cut in funder, that the Fat contained between the outer and inner Skin of the Rim may appear. HH The perforations in the obliquely afcending Mufcles, by which the fper- matick Veffels do pafs out of the Abdomen into the Cod. II The Stones. K The lard. L Thé Sternum or Breaft-bone.
D CHAP.
|
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
|
|||||
|
CHAP. VII.
Of the Rim of the Belly, called the Peritonaeum. THE Mufcles of the Paunch being all removed, as alfo their Ten-
dons which make the white Line before fpoken of, the Perito- naeum or Rim of the Belly comes next into fight. What the Pe- This Peritoneum is of a fpermatick fubftance (as are all other Mem- ritonxum ». branes or Skins ) and is of an oval Figure, or like a long fafhioned Egg, for it compaflèth all the Lower Belly and ingirts ajl the Parts therein con- tained, and alfo ftrengthneth them, from whence it hath its name, from its office of fpreading and fir etching about. It is thin and foft, that it might not be either heavy or burthenfom ; yet is it very firong and corn- pad, that it might be ftretched without danger, when the Belly is full of Meat, or the Womb is full of the Burthen. Its infide is fmooth, and by reafon of the Guts is daubed with moilture; but its outfide is rough, which makes it ftick fo clofe to the Mufcles that lie above it, that they can hardly be feparated, as I have beiore ihewed. its original. ft takes its original from the vertebra or joints of the Loins, where it is very thick, and is therefore believed to proceed from the Membrane that invefts the Marrow in the Back-bone, and is propagated from the double Membrane of the Brain. It is in all places double, and betwixt its Mem- branes I have always obferved good flore of Fat, which Anatomifts do not fpeak of in other Creatures. The Veflèls run along this Fat between the Membranes, that they may be the better fecured and defended, and may with more fafety difperfe their branches all over it ; and for that pur- tts perfora- pofe it is perforated in feveral places, fo wide as is proportionably necef- thns. fary to the largenefs of the Veflèls that are to go through, and no larger, left in diflentions or flrains they ihould tear, as too apt they are to do, as Experience daily teftifies in Men and Children, when vehement coughs or long and flraining cries do, in fome, open the orifice of the Navel, and in others the orifices in the Groin, where the fpermatick or feminary Vef- fels go forth to the Stones, fo that the widenefs gives liberty for the fmall Guts to fall out of their places into the outward parts, which caufeth Ruptures and broken Bellies. The like I have feen in Horfes. ihe outmoft From the inner Membrane of this Rim of the Belly, all the outmofl fhtt Ìts*tf § * or ^0ats which cover every Part contained in the Lower Belly do the Lmer proceed, and from it have their original, fome thicker and fome thinner, Ben?, have according to the neceffity or ufe of the Part refpeclively. As for Exam- frntbk!** Ple' the Common Membrane of the Kidneys, the proper one of the Li- ver and Spleen (each of which have but one ) are but very thin, for fee- ing they are never ( naturally) extended, there was no neceffity for their being otherwife; but the Common Skin of the Stomach, the Guts, the Bladder and the Womb are fomewhat thicker, but much ftronger and more compaft, becaufe the ufes they are put to require it, that they may without danger be ftretched, when there is occafion. Now as the En- trails are many and of divers kinds, and alfo fituated in feveral places different from one another, fo does their outward Inverting Membrane take
|
|||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch. i %
take its original from that part of this Peritoneum or Rim of the Belly
which is next to them ; as the upper Entrails, which are the Stomach, the Liver, the Spleen, &c. borrow it from that part of the Rim which makes the under Membrane of the Midriff; fo do the lower Entrails (as the Bladder, Womb, &c.) borrow it from that part of the Rim, which cleaveth to the Share-bone, it being the neareft to them. From this Peritoneum or Rim of the Belly do alfo proceed two double
Membranes or Skins, which are thofe of the Caul and of the Mefentery ; as alfo feveral Ligaments, of which the molt remarkable are thofe of the Liver and Guts. This Peritoneum is compofed of membranous and nervous Fibres n> comptft-
which are very fmall. The Veflèls that are difperfed through it are tm' fmall branches of Veins and Arteries which it hath from the Midriff, and other neighbouring Parts, as the Seminary and Mammary ; and for Nerves, it hath them from the branches which are carried to the Mufcles of the Lower Belly. Its Vfes are feveral, the firft of which is, to cover and contain all the its vfei.
Parts or Entrails of the Lower Belly ; fecondly, to further the expulfion of the Excrements by preffing the Stomach and Guts before and on the fides, as the Midriff doth above. Again, it binds with its Ligaments all the Guts in their proper places by mediation of the Mefentery, that no violent motion ( fuch as running or leaping ) ihould move them out : By Ligaments proceeding from it, is the Liver alfo fufpended in its place. Its laft ufe is to be a fafeguard to the Veflèls that run through it, which being but fmall and having a long courfe to run, would be in danger of breaking, were they not fecured between its two Skins. |
|||||||||
|
CHAP. VIII.
Of the Omentum or Caul. |
|||||||||
|
HAVING according to the order of difìècìion, removed all the/tf-
vefling or containing Parts of the Lower Belly, and fhewed which, and what they are ; it now follows that I fhew which are the parts invefted or contained. And becaufe the Caul appears firft in difïèdïion, I will firft treat of it. This Caul is in Latin called Omentum, from Omen, becaufe the Roman **« c?*{
Soothfayers pretended by it to foretell things. It is alfo called mappa -ven-what " *" tris, the Map or Difh-clout of the Belly, becaufe it feemeth to lick up the fuperfluities thereof. It doth cover all or moft of the Guts in many Creatures ; but in a Horfe it is moft times removed from all the lower parts of the Belly, and heth in wrinkles or folds near and about the Sto- mach. The reafon of its being removed, I do fuppofe, is the hard la- bour and violent Exercife a Horfe undergceth ; for whilft he is young, and before he comes to his labour, it is fpread as far over his Entrails as in How far » other Creatures., as hath been obferved by the Learned Marcus Aurelius^Gm™ Severinus, who did in a She foal which he diffè&ed at Naples, fee the D z Caul
|
|||||||||
|
/
|
|||||||||
|
14 The Anatomy of an Horfe. . [
Caul fpread all over the Guts as far as to the bottom of the Womb, to
which it was alfo joined with a firait conne&ion. it it fome- It fometimes happeneth that the Caul/ falleth between the bottom of timet the fa gadder and the neck of the Womb in Women, and then it fo corn- renllfi. **" prefïèth the mouth of the Womb, that it leaveth very little or no paflàge tor the Man's feed to enter in, which when it lb happeneth is a caufe of barrennefs. But I believe no fuch thing can happen in Mares. in connexion It is compofed of two Membranes, the uppermost or formoft of which or origine, arifeth at the bottom of the Stomach to which it is faftned, as alfo to the hollow fide of the Liver and Spleen : The inner or backer Membrane fprings from the Peritonaum, immediately under the Midriff towards the Back, and is tied to that part of the Gut Colon that paflèth under the Stomach lengthways, as like wife to the Sweetbread and to the begins ning of the fmall Gut, next to the lower Orifice of the Stomach. Thefe Membranes are larded with plentifull Fat. Figure. It is in figure like a Purfe net, or Faulkner's Bag, confuting as is faid of a double Coat, feparate at the top, but knit together at the bottom,
where it is round fometimes, and fometimes unequal, but at its upper part or orifice it is orbicular. itsVeffels. It has Veflels of all forts, which do run through the fubfiance thereof. It hath its Veins and Arteries from the Cceliacal and Mefenterical bran- ches, and Nerves from a double branch of the Intercoftal pair. its Fat. In Horfes it has much Fat, efpecially in thofe that are found and have not wafted it by either ficknefs or long faffing, for in fuch it confifts of
little but the Membranes and Veflels, the Fat ferving for a fubfidiary nóu- rifliment to the natural heat to feed upon when the Beaft eats nothing. Now this Fat is not diftributcd equally to all the parts of the Caul, but runs here and there in flreaks accordingly as the larger Bloud-veflèls do, the fpaces between being wholly membranous and feemingly tranfparent-, fo that it imitates a Net, whence in fome Countries they call it {o. Now the Fat adhering to and accompanying the Veflels in this manner, it feems to be bred of an unfruous or oily part of the Bloud that fweats through the Veflels, but is detained by the clofenefs or denfenefs of the Membrane, by whofe refpective coldnefs alfo it is curdled or congealed into Fat. But very unlikely it is that it fhould be made of I know not what Vapours lteaming out of the Parts contained in the Lower Belly, and condenfed- by thefe Membranes ; for not to mention the many abfurdities of this Opinion, if it were fo bred, then would all the Membranes be evenly and equally befmeared with it, which it is obvious to any Eye that they are not. The ufe of The ufe of this plentifull Fat is to cherilh and heat the bottom of the iu Fat. Stomach, the upper part of which has no need of its warmth, it being covered with the Liver, whole Lobes hang over it and lie upon it. It ferves alfo to moiften the Guts, which have great need of being kept flippery and glib, that they may the better perform their continual peri- ftaltick motion. The ufe of its The ufe 0f the Membranes or Skins befides their congealing and inclu- w'skin"" ^in§ tne Fat» is t0 Pr0P UP an(^ ^u^am au the branches of the Veflels
which.lie between and pals through them, to the Stomach, the Spleen, the beginning of the fmall Gut, and Colon, &c.
|
|||||||||||
|
The
|
|||||||||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Paunck t§
■
The Third Table reprefenteth the Guts in fitu, as they appear after the Caul is taken away. •
AAAA Sheweth the Gut Colon or Colick Gut with its Convolutions or Folds, as alfo what parts of the lower Belly it takes up.
BB The fir eight or Arfe-gut. CCC The Gut Cxcum or Hind Gut. DDD The Diaphragm or Midriff. EE The Horfes Tard. _____________________,-------,--------------------------——----------——.---------------
C H A P. IX.
■
Of the Gullet and Stomach. |
||||||
|
AFTER the Caul is removed, the Inteftins or Guts do appear in
their natural fituation, as is fhewed in the foregoing Figure ; but there is another Part that lies abfconded under them, which muft firfl: be fpoken of according to the order of diflecTion, and that is the Stomach. It is fingle in an Horfe as it is in Man, though fnch Creatures as have Horns, as Beeves, Sheep, &c. and füch as having no Horns yet chew the Cud, as Camels, Hinds, &c. have four. This is the Kitchin of the Body and receptacle of Meat and Drink ; as alfojthe feat of Appetite, by reafon of the Nerves that are. difperfed chiefly in its upper Orifice, but run in fmall twigs alfo through its whole fubftance. It is called in Latin •ventrkuliu, which is as much as to fay a little Belly,- and is placed or ièated juft under the MidrifF beween the Liver and the Spleen, almoft in the very middle of the Body, inclining a little towards the left Side that it might ballance the Body againft the Liver, which is much bigger and heavier than the Spleen. But before we enter upon the Stomach it is convenient firfl: to defcribe the Gum.
the Gullet which is an Appendage to it, and ferves as a Tunnel to convey the Food out of the Mouth into it, though the greatefl: part of it be con- tained in the Neck and Breait. It is art organical or diilimilar Part, hollow and round, beginning at i" engine
the root of the Tongue, behind the head of the Windpipe, and pafleth and de^enu down from thence direétly between the Windpipe and the Joints of the Neck and of the Cheft, about the fifth or fixth Joint of which latter it turneth a little to the right fide, to give way to the trunk of the great Artery, but about the ninth Joint it turns toward the left again and climbs upon the great Artery, and palling through the Midriff at an hole proper to it felf it is inferted into the Stomach toward its left fide, as you may fee in the following Figure. It confifts of three Membranes or Skins. The outermofi is common, its fiance.
which it hath from the F leur a or from the ligaments of the Joints of the Neck and Breaft on which it refleth : This invefteth the two proper. The middle or firft proper one is thick andflefhy, confiding of two. ranks of fleihy
|
||||||
|
11$ The Anatomy of an Horfe.
flelhy Fibres, obliquely or flopingly afcending and defcending, (o that
they crofs one another like an X. The innermoft or fecond proper is membranous, and hath onely ftreight Fibres. its Vefcls. It has Feins in the Neck from the Jugulars, in the Bread from the Vein
without a fellow ; and 'whereat is joined to the Stomach, from the coro- nary branch of the Porta. Arteries in the Neck it has from the Carotides, in the Breaft from the Intercoftals ; and where it joins to the Stomach, from the coeliack coronary branch. It hath Nerves from that pair that is commonly called the fixth. its Kernels. ft has two notable Glands or Kernels at its beginning in the Throat,
called Almonds from their lhape, which feparate a kind of flegmatiek hu- mour to keep the infide of the Gullet moiìt and glib, that the Food may eafilier defcend dow n by it. its vfe. Its ufe is, to convey Meat after it is chewed in the Mouth, as likewife
Drink, down into the Stomach, there to be turned into chyle.
The stomach. Having done with the Gullet, we now return to the Stomach.
its figure, Its figure is round and fomewhat long, refembling a Bag-pipe ; though
on the left fide and at the bottom it is bunching and more capacious than on the right fide ; for there it is by little and little narrowed that it might give place to the Liver. And magni- Its magnitude is divers according to the largenefs of the Horfe, or ac-
titde. cording to the quantity of Meat or Drink ( be it little or much ) that is
in it; for it contracteth or diftendeth it felf as there is occafion. As for example, if there be a great quantity of Meat and Drink let into it, it doth extend it felf to- that largenefs as to contain it; and as that Meat is by little and little ^concofted, and then let forth through the lower Ori- fice into the finali Guts to be there fuckt up by the milky Veins, the Sto- mach doth accordingly^by little-and little contract or draw it felf up fo clofe to that which remains, that it embraceth it on all fides, fo that there is never any cavity or hollownefs to fpeak of to be found in the Stomach ; whence we fee in Tripes, that the infide is by fuch contracting always rugged or in wrinkles, whereas the outfide is fmooth and plain. Onely this we may note as to its bignefs, that in confederation of the bignefs of an Horfes Body or the largenefs of his Guts, it is far lefs in him than in moft Animals. its orifices. The Stomach hath two Or if ces, a left and upper, which is to receive
in Meat ; and a right which is the lower, to let it out after concocTrion. The firft being the uppermofl I will firft fpeak of, which is much wider and larger than the other, becaufe it admits the Meat, many times not half chewed, into the Stomach ( and for that caufe is much thicker and alfa ftronger than the other ) whereas all is reduced into a fluid fubftance, before it pafs out at the other. The upper ' This Orifice being a continuation of the Gullet is called the mouth of
fa of the"' t'ie Stomach, and hath an exquifite fenfe of feeling becaufe of the Nerves
stomach, which encompafs it, and by which it the fooner perceives the emptinefs
and want of Meat, and therefore ftirs up the Horfe to feek Food to fatjsfy his want. It is near the middle of the Stomach, and not fo near the left fide of it as in Men. its vfti' It is furnilhed with flelhy and circular Fibres, that it may naturally
Ihut up and ftraiten it felf after the Meat is received in, and alfo may in- tercept or hinder the Vapours from coming forth, which would by their afcent up to the Brain be very injurious, by breeding difeafes and evil diftempers
|
||||
|
Book! Of the Lowefl Belly or Paunch, ij
diftempers in the Head ; which Vapours would be alfo wanted in the
Stomach to further concocFion : for as it is an ufual cuftom when Meat is over the fire for the Pot-lid to be put on to keep the Vapours or Reek from coming forth ; fo likewife it is requifite in this cafe that the Va- pours of the Stomach ihould be kept in, that Conco&ion ihould be thereby furthered, or the Food be fooner digefted, the Vapours a/lifting thereunto. The lower and right Orifice is called pylorus, which is to fay, the Por- fbé tower
ter, from its office, which is to open and ihut as occafion ferves ; to open, -j/^,*" when the chyle is let forth and fent into the Gut duodenum, and then to contrae! or draw it felt clofe up again, that nothing may pafs through it which is not fully concodled. Which contraction is performed by tranf- verfe or overthwart Fibres, with which it is plentifully furnithed for that purpofe ; as alfo a thick and compaét circle doth encompafs it round, which circle is in fhape like the fphincler Mufcle of the Fundament. By thefe Fibres and this Circle the action of the Porter, or lower Orifice, is performed, that is to fay, it is either opened or fhut, widened or ftraitned as there is occafion, as I have faid before. And thefe are the offices of the Orifices of the Stomach. Now I proceed to the compofition of it, which is of three Membranes the compofi-
or Skins, the firft or outmoft of which it hath from the Peritoneum, or *'m °fthe Rim of the Belly. The fecond and middlemoft is more flefhy than' the for- tmM ' mer, confiding of flelhy Fibres, which do mightily ilrengthen the Sto- mach and by their heat do further concodtion. The third and inmoft is nervous, into which all the Veflèls do terminate or end. This Coat or Skin is continued with the Gullet up to the Mouth, that the Mouth ihould not admit or receive in any thing that is offênfive to the Stomach. The Stomach is furnifhed with Veffels of all forts. Veins it hathjfr/t its veffett.
from the Splenick branch, as i. The <vas Ireve, or fhort Van, which is »■ Veinu inferted into the bottom of the Stomach, whence afterwards it creeps up between the Coats towards the upper Orifice, but is obliterated before it comes quite to it. z. The two Gaftrick Veins ( the greater and lefs ) which creep along the bottom of the Stomach, and in their courfe fpread many branches into it ; but the largeft branch of the greater of thefe two is that which is called the Crown-vein, that encompafïès the upper Ori- fice of the Stomach. 3. A Vein that is common to the left fide of the Stomach and the Caul. Secondly, it hath another common to its right fide and the Caul, from the Mefenterick branch. And lajlly, its lower or right Orifice has a fmall Vein from the trunk of the Torta it felf, which is called pylorica or Porter vein. Now before the circulation of the bloud was found out, it was believed that all thefe Veins brought bloud to the Stomach for its nourifhment : but fince that was difcovered by Dr. Har- vey, every one knows that they carry nothing to the Stomach, but bring back from it fo much of the Arterial bloud as is not fpent upon its nou- rishment. But befides the bloud fome learned Men have entertained an opinion that they fuck out of the Stomach a thinner and more fpirituous part of the chyle, which pafìès along with the bloud to the Heart by a far fhorter pafìàge than if it defcended into the Guts and entred into the milky Veins, &c (as fhall afterwards be fullier declared. ) And this they think it reafonable to fuppofe, becaufe of the fudden and quick refrefh- ment that Creatures receive from Cordial Drinks, and the like. I flnll not
|
||||
|
The Anatomy of a7i Horfe.
not pretend to decide the controverse betwixt thofe that affirm this, and
others that deny it, but do think this opinion to be very probable, becaufe of the very fpeedy revival of Horfes ( that I have obferved ) which being ready to faint away, have fuddenly grown brisk upon the giving them fome comfortable draught : unlefs we fhould think with fome, that the Nerves of the Stomach do imbibe fome fpirituous parts of fuch potions, and fo the refrefhment fhould come that way. The Stomachal Arteries are twigs from the Cceliacal branch of the
Arteria magna or great Arterie, and thefe do accompany the Veins in all their courfe, and beftow iiourifhment and vital heat upon it. For the Stomach is not nouriflied with the Chyle, any more than any other part, but with arterial bloud which by thefe Arteries is brought from the Heart. It hath two notable Nerves from the fixth pair (reckoned by Dr. Willis
to be the eighth) propagated from thofe branches which make the recur- rent Nerves. Thefe do encompafs the upper Orifice, and then are car- ried, in oblique or ilanting lines, crofs one another over moft part of it; the right branch compafTing the foremoft and left part, and the left branch comparing the hindermoft and right part thereof! The Stomach has feveral Attions, as firft Hunger and Thirft, which
are the fenfe that it has of the want of Meat and Dririk, aiid ah Appetite that is excited in it for the obtaining of them. Secondly, it has an action of retention^ whereby it contracts it felf clofe about the Food that is ta- ken in, and detains it fo long till it is throughly concocted of turned into a thin juice called Chyle. Thirdly, it has a motion that is called periftal- tick, fuch as the Guts alfo have, refembling the motion of a Worm, whereby its parts contracting themfelves fuecefiively from above down- wards, thruft out the chyle into the Guts gently and by degrees. But the chief and moft considerable action of the Stomach, is, fourthly, Chy- iification, or turning the aliment into a whitifh liquor commonly known by the name of Chyle, which being expelled out of the Stomach into the Guts, is, the thinner part of it, fuckt up by a fort of Vefïêls called milky Veins, ( io called from that colour which this liquor gives them } that are inferted every where into the Guts, and which carry it towards the Heart, by thofe ways that hereafter ihall be defcribed : but the thicker and more dreggy part is driven along the Guts and eaft out at the Funda- ment as excrement. Now there are feveral things that concur to this lafl and principal
action of the Stomach, viz. Concoction. As firft, the very numerous Arteries that are difperfed through it which much fofter and encreafe its heat, which though it be not the main inftrument of concoction, yet much furthers it. And this heat is alfo encreafed by the Liver which co- vers the upper and fore-part of its right fide, as allò by the Caul which by its two Membranes invefts its bottom. But fecondly, that to which concoction is mainly owing is a certain ferment in the Stomach, which is compounded partly of the flaver with which the Horfes moutli always abounds for the moiftening and foftning of his Meat while he chews it, and part of which is continually fwallow'd down into his Stomach toge- ther with the Food ; and partly of an acid or fharp and fait liquor bred in the Stomach, as is moft likely, of fait and acid fteams evaporating out of the ftomachal Arteries, and condenfed in it into this juice : And this liquor is that which diflòlves and melts as it were the folid Meats that are fwallowed
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch.
fwallowed (fomething like as Aquafortis dinolves Steel) and reduces the
whole mafs into fluid fubftance, which then pafïès down into the Guts, as aboveiaid. This acid Juice was formerly thought to come from the Spleen by a Vein called the /hort Veffel ; but later Anatomifts have dif- covered from the circulation of the Bloud, that that Vein brings nothing from the Spleen to the Stomach, but contrari wife carries the Bloud, that is fuperfluous to the nouriihment of the Stomach, from it into the fple- nick Vein, by which it goes to the Liver, and from thence to the Heart in its circulation. So that no fuch original or fpring of this ferment hi to be imagined. The Fourth Table expreflèth the fecond or middle, and the tonermoft
Coats of the Stomach. Fig. I. Sheweth the Stomach freed from its outmoft nervous Coat, that
the outer or convex furface of the middle Coat may appear with its flefhy Fibres. ÀA The Gullet.
B The Mouth or upper Orifice of the Stomach.
C Its lower Orifice called Pylorus.
D A portion of the fmall Gut.
EEE The circular Fibres encompaffihg the Stomach depthways.
FFF The top or upper part of.the Stomach, where the/e Fibres arife.
GG The circular flefhy Fibres that encompafs the upper Orifice or Mouth óf
the Stomach, which contratling them/elves fhut or pur/e it up at
occafion femes.
H The Gaüpaffage inferted into the fmall Gut. I The Pancreatici duit inferted into the fmall Gut. Fig. II. Sheweth the Stomach turned infide out, that its woolly cruft
with its wrinkles and folds may appear. AA The left Orifice or Mouth of the Stomach.
B The right or lower Orifice, to which the fmaU Gut is knit.
CC The top or fummity of the Stomach between its two Orifices.
EEEE The fides, ends and bottom of the infide of the Stomach, with its
woolly cruft and wrinkles or folds.
E A portion of the fmall Gut. Fig. III. Reprefents a piece of the inmoft nervous Coat, wherein the
woolly cruft being taken off, the inner or concave furface with a ve- ry thick ramification of Veflêls doth appear. .
Fig. IV. Shews a piece of the woolly cruft, which looks like a fourth
Co-it, wherein its outer furface, whereby it flicks to the nervous Coat, appears very full of glands and the mouths of Veflels. |
|||||||
|
F,
|
|||||||
|
CHAR
|
|||||||
|
2o Thé Anatomy of an Horfe.
C H A P. X.
Of the Guts in general.
The Guu. ^"i"" HE Guts are called in Latin Int eft ina, becaufe they are placed in
lh"l flmL * r^ie mmo^- Part °^tne Body, as you fee them placed in the Third Length.™ Figure, which fliews their natural pofition or fituation, they taking up the moft part of the cavity or hollownefs of the Lower Belly. They are oblong, round, hollow Bodies, in number fix, and are bigger or leflèr as is the bignels of the Horfe. They are the Instruments of diftribution of the Chyle and expulfion of the Ordure, being continued with the Pylo- rus or Porter of the Stomach and reaching to the Fundament. They are in length about thirty fix yards, a little under or over according to the largenefs of the Horfe ; wherefore they are neceflàrily girded and wound into manifold convolutions or folds, that the cavity of the Lower Belly- might be capable of containing them, which otherwife it could not do. How kn» «. They are gathered up and entwifted in the folds of the Mefentery, by gether. which coming between they are alfo knit to the Back : all which is to keep them from falling out of their places or rolling upon one another, which would have often hapned> had not Nature fo well provided for the contrary, efpeciallyin violent exercife, as hunting, running, leaping and the like ; and if it had hapned, the weight of the one lying upon the other would have obftru&ed the paflage of the Excrements, and fo caus'd ex- ceffive pains, as gripings, trainings to dung, and the like, and upon the continuance of fuch ftoppage, death it felK The Guts are on the outfide moft times fat, but on the infide they are
Covered with a flimy or fnotty fubftance, for the more free and glib palìàge of the Dung. rheh coats. They have three Coats, like as the Stomach hath. The outermofl or common one is nervous, (bringing mediately from the Rim of the Belly, but immediately from the Membranes of the Mefentery ; faving that of the beginning of the firft Gut, and of that part of the Colon which run- neth under the Stomach, where it immediately proceedeth from the Caul adhering to thofe Parts. The middle is thicker and flelhy, having two ranks of Fibres, the outer of them ftreight, and the inner tranfverfe or overthw'art. The innermofl is alfo nervous like the outmoft, but on its in- fide it is crufted over with a kind of fpongy fubftance, that ferves as a ftrainer for the Chyle to pafs through out of the Guts into the milky Veins. This Coat has all forts of Fibres, and is very wrinkled, to pre- vent the .too quick gliding away of the Chyle. The Fibres of this and the middle Coat ferve to perform the periftaltick or worm-like motion of the Guts, by which whatfoever is contained in them is gently driven along downwards towards the Fundament. VeffeU. The Guts have all forts of Veflèls. As i. Feins. Thefe they have v V"Sfi ^r0fn fevml branches of the Porta, but the moft come from that branch
BhvJtveint. of it that is called the Mefenterick. The ufe of which "Veins was by the Ancients thought to be, both to carry Bloud to them from the Liver for their nouriftiment, and to bring back from them the Chyle to the Liver, there
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Lovefi Belly or Paunch. 21
there to be turned into bloud. But as to the firft, the circulation of
the Bloud makes it evident, that they carry no bloud to the Guts, but all that is contained in them, is received from the Arteries that are in- ferted into the Inteftins, and returns by them to the Liver, through which it paffes into the Vein called Cava, and by it afcends to the Heart. And as to the latter ufe afhgned to thefe Veins, namely the bringing of Chyle from the Guts to the Liver, there was another fort of Veffels found out by one Afellius about threefcore years agoe, that per- form this office, called by him (from their colour ) milky Feins. Qut SemJij, neither do thefe conveigh the Chyle to the Liver, as the firft Inventor of""'" *mt them thought, but running from the circumference of the Mefentery they unite and difcharge themfelves into one common receptacle near its centre at the Back bone, from whence the Chyle paffes up along the fide of the Back-bone as high as the Collar-bone by a proper pipe, where it is emptied into the fubclavian Vein, in which being mixed with the Bloud it glides along with it immediately into the Heart. I fay then the ufe of the Bloud-veins of the Guts, is onely to receive fo much of the Arterial bloud as is fuperfluous from their nourifhrnent. A fecond fort of VefTel difperfed through the Guts are the Arteries, 2. Arteria.
which fpring partly from the Coeliack branch, and partly from the Me- fenterick. Thefe afford both Vital heat and nourilhment to the Guts, and befides upon adminiftring a Drench to fcour your Horfe, they dif- charge the impurities and bad humours flowing in the mafs of bloud, in- to the Guts, to be thrown out in the draught. 3. Their Nerves are from that pair that has commonly been called?. Nerve*.
the fixth, but according to Dr. Willis's diftinttion is now generally re- puted for the ninth pair, and otherwife called the fntercoftal, becaufe as it defcends down the Cheft, it fends out a fmall twig between every Rib. Thefe contribute to the Guts their fenfe of feeling, and furniih their Fibres with animal Spirits, whereby they are enabled to perform their worm like motion. As for the milky Veins, we have mention'd them before, and fhall
treat further of them in the Chapter of the Mefentery. |
|||||||
|
CHAP. XL
Of the Guts in -particular.
NOW though the Guts be one continued Body from the lower Ori- The Guts are
fice of the Stomach to the Fundament, yet they are wont to be Z™mkr diftinguiflied into feveral ; In Men they are divided into fix, three fmall, and three thick : but in a Horfe we cannot fo well follow this divifion, there being not any difference in the fmall Guts fo confiderable as to ground a diftin&ion upon. However, becaufe the fecond of the thick Guts feems to have three partitions, we fhall make three of it, and fo will they anfwer to the number in Men, and be reckoned fix. |
|||||||
|
E % The
|
|||||||
|
22 The Anatomy of an Hor f e.
i. The faal! The firft we fhall diftinguifh onely by the name of the fmall Gut. This is
Gut. ' twenty fix or twenty feven yards in length, fomething narrower at a foot and half diftance from the Stomach than towards its ending, but through the whole it is wider than in an Oxe, being about two inches or two and an half over. Prefently at its beginning it bends under the Stomach towards the Back-bone, ftreight along which it defcends a pretty way, being an- nexed firmly to it by a ftrong Membrane ( that feems to be borrow'd of the Caul here knit to it) which is all the eftabliihment it has. But by and by it leaves this hold, and beginning to wind about, is received into the folds of the Mefentery, whereby it is admirably kept from twilling and entanglement. Now there are far more of the milky Veins inferted into this Gut than into all that follow ; and befides thofe Veilèls which are common to it with the thick Guts, namely Veins, Arteries and Nerves. it has two other Veflkls inferted into it, one from the Liver and another from the Sweet-bread. By the firft is yellow Choler, and by the latter a peculiar Juice from the Sweet-bread ( called the pancreatici: Juice) dif- * charged into it. Thefe two Liquors flowing into it from the aforefaid Bowels about a foot below the Stomach, within an inch or two one of another, make a notable ferment in it, which mixing with the Chyle that is palling down this way, caufes it alfo to ferment, whereby it comes to work it felf fomething clearer, as I may fay, even as Ale or Beer in a Barrel does. For by this fermentation the impurer and more earthy or dreggy part of the Chyle, is feparated and precipitated as it were from the more pure and fpirituous, whereby this latter part is made capable of being received in at the fmall mouths of the milky Veins that gape in abun- dance into this Gut, whilft the thicker and excrementitious part is thruft along the Guts by their worm-like motion, and makes the Dung. This Gut tor about two hands breadth at its beginning from the Pylorus is wi- der, and for the like fpace at its end before it is joined to the following, is a little narrower, than in its other parts, a. the Ca> Having done with the fmall Gut, we next come to the thick ones, in cum or blind number five, of which the firft is called Ctecum or the blind Gut, becaufe it has but one pafiage for the Excrements both into and out of it, which come into it out of the fmall Gut, and go out of it into the next thick Gut. It is not round in fhape like the fmall Gut, but as it were four- fquare, which figure it comes to have from four Ligaments that run alono- it, one on each fide, which contain it in that fhape ; and thefe Ligaments being fhorter than its Coats, make them bag out in many Cells as the Colon does in other Creatures. It is almoft a yard long, and unequal 'm breadth : for though at its mouth, where it joyns to the fmall Gut and the Colon, it be near a quarter of a yard over, yet towards its clofe end it grows fo by degrees narrower, that it is not above three inches. This Gut is very inconfiderabie for its bignefs in mòli: Creatures, particularly in Man, in whom it is not ordinarily above four inches long, and hardly fo thick as ones little Finger : onely in a Rabbit if bears much the fame proportion with the reft of the Guts, as it does in an Horfe. In fuch Creatures as have it fo very fmall, its ufe is very obfcure ; but in an Horfe where it is fo very large, its ufe is apparent to be, to flay the too quick paffàge of the Excrements by receiving them into it felf as it were into an Inn, whereas if they kept directly the ftreight Road of the reft of the Guts without turning in here, they would come too foon to their journeys end, namely the Fundament : I mean the Horfe would be continually a-fcouring,
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Betty or Paunch. 23
a-fcouring, and fo fall from his flefh and languidi, by reafon that the mil-
ky Veins would not have time to fuck up all the Chyle out of the Guts to turn into his nourilhment ; befides that it would be troublefome to the Horfe, and oftenfive to his Rider to have him always a-dunging. Its con- nexion to the fmall Gut and Colon you may better conceive of by the fol- lowing Figure, in which it is well exprefìèd, than by my defcription of it in words. That which is the fecond thick Gut and in Man- is called the Colon, Three ohm.
feems in an Horfe to be divided into three, to which I mall not take up- on me to aftign diftincì: names, but onely call them three Colons. The firfl of them is about a yard and a half in length, and for the moft part of it a quarter of a yard over. The fecond is as wide as the firfl:, but onely about a yard in length. Thefe two are divided one from the other by a narrow neck about half a yard long, and four inches over. Thefirjl of thefe two wide Colons, is that which in its upper part joyns with the blind Gut above defcribed, where it has a Valve, confifting of a loofe Membrane or Skin that hangs round its mouth, which permits any thing to come into the Colon out of the Cacum or out of the fmall Gut, but when any thing would pafs out of that into thefe, then the edges of this loofe Skin flap clofe one againft another and hinder it, whereby Nature has prevented the return of the Excrements back out of the Colon into the fmall Gut. And the lower end of the latter of thefe two wide Colons joins to the third, which is very narrow in companion of them, but yet is more than twice as long as both of them, namely about fix yards. Now all thefe three Colons are contracted into Cells by two Ligaments, one of which runs along the upper part, and the other on the lower fide of them : and befides thefe two which are common to them all, the lar- ger ones have fomewhere other two that run along their fides, but efpe- cially fo has the Neck that divides them whereby it is made fourfquare like the blind Gut. The reafon why thefe Colons ( as well as they are in other Creatures, and the Caecum alfo in this) are contra&cd into Cells, is for the flower partake of the Fv<r«»nents, that what of the Chyle was not drunk in by the milky Veins of the fmall Gut, might be leifurely fuckt up by thofe that are inferted into thefe thick ones ; for though we call their Contents Excrements, yet that is onely becaufe the much greater part is fo, for all the Chyle is not clear imbibed from them till they come towards the end of the laft Colon, though the milky Veins are not a tenth part fo numerous in thefe as in the fmall Gut. To the lower end of the fmall Colon is joined the laft Gut called Retlum 6.YheJfrekto
or theflreight Gut, becaufe it runs {freight along without any windings. Gut' It is alfo called the Arfe-gut, becaufe it reacheth to the Fundament. The Coats of this Gut, efpecially the middle, are much thicker than any of the other, and the whole feems fiefhy and mufcular. It is but about half a yard long, and betwixt three and four inches over. This is not gathe- red in the foldings of the Mefentery, but inftead of that, is from its be- ginning at the lower end of the Loins, to its ending at the Arfe-hole, laft tied by a Membrane to the Back and Rump-bones, which keep it from falling out upon {training to dung. At its lower end at the Arfe- hole it has a round Mufcle that encompaftes it, called the fphinller Mufcle, whereby it is purfed up fo, that nothing can pafs out, except when the Beaft loofens it of his own accord when he goes to dung, and then at the fame time he fqueezes the Guts by help of the Mufcles that environ his Paunch,
|
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
Paunch, which we defcribed above in chap. 6. and fo forces the Dung to
iflue out at the Fundament. And thus we have finifhed the Hiftory of the Guts, not needing to add
any thing of the ufe of them, becaufe their ufe is all along interwoven in their defcription, and therefore we fliall pafs on to the other parts. The Fifth Table reprefenteth the Gullet, Stomach and Guts taken
out of the Body. A The Gullet.
B The upper Orifice of the Stomach.
CC The two external Nerves of the fixth pair ( otherwife reckon d for
the eighth ) difperfed through the upper part of the Stomach.
DDD Thethree different Coats of the Gullet, a little turned down, to fhew them the plainer.
E The lower Orifice of the Stomach catted the Pylorus. F The outermofl Coat of the Stomach turned back. G The entrance of the porus bilarius or Choler-paffage into the beginning of the [mall Gut.
H The entrance of the pancreatici ddl or paffage of the Sweet-bread into the fame Gut.
IIIIIIII The fmall Gut. K The Inteftinum cascum or blind Gut. LL The firfl Colon. M The fmall neck that divides the firfl Colon from the fecond.
NN The fecond ór middle Colon. OO One of the Ligaments that contraèìs the blind Gut and Colons into Cells.
PP The third and lofi Colon, far [matter than the two formert but longer.
Q^The Inteftinum redtum or Arfe-gut. R The two Mufcles called levatoi cs Ani, or openers of the Fundament.
S The [phinller Mufcle that contralis or purfes up the Arfe-hole. T The middle Coat of the Stomach through which the two branches of Nerves are difperfed.
U The third or inmqfl Coat of the Stomach. XX The branchings of the Bloud-veffels, as they appear on the outfide of the Stomach.
YY The [ever al Gaftrick Veffels infer ted into the bottom of the Stomach. |
|||||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||||
|
Book I. Of the howeji BeUy or Pamela 25
CHAP. XII.
Of the Mefentery.
TH E Mefenter'mm or Mefentery is fo called from its being placed in The Mcfen-
the middle of the Guts, which it embraces round, gathering them ™lJ%hy ^ together in form of a Globe, but is it felf gathered into folds. This Me- fentery is of a circular figure, compofedof a double Coat, between which do run many Vedels and thofe of all forts, and betwixt which alfo there is a collection of much fat. Dr. Wharton fays that in Man there is a third Membrane betwixt the two commonly known, in which are feated the Glands or Kernels, and through which the Veflëls run. If fo, 'tis likely there is the fame in an Horfes Mefentery, which abounds with Glands. 'Tis a little above a quarter of a yard broad from its centre to its circumference. Now its centre or rife is at the firil and third Rack-bone of the Loins, its rife.
where membranous Fibres are produced from the Rim of the Belly, and fpread into the two inverting Coats or Skins of the Mefentery. The fat with which thefe Membranes are ftuft, is collected in the its Fat.
fame manner as that of the Caul above-defcribed in chap. 8. namely the oily part of the Bloud fweating out of the Arteries that run in abundance between thefe Membranes,- is ftopt by them, (they being more compact and clofe than the Coats of the Arteries) and by their refpeftive coldnefs is congealed into fat. There are almoft innumerable Veilêls running through it, but fuch as '» reffeü.
are rather fuftained and conduced by it, than for its own ufe. The firft fort are the Feins, to which it gives the denomination of Me- «• V""''
faraick. Thefe are all branches of the Torta, and their office is to receive fo much of the Arterial bloud as is not fpent on the nourishment of the Guts and Mefentery, and to convey it to the Liver, and from thence to the Heart. Before the milky Veins were found out, it was believed they brought the Chyle to the Liver ; but that opinion is now out of doors, as we have more fully fhevvn before in the tenth Chapter. Its Arteries alfo from its name are called Mefarakk or Mefenterkk ; 2. Arteria.
thefe run in great numbers through it to the Guts, to which what office they perform was likewife declar'd above, chap. 10. And befides theufes there afcribed to them, they continually fupply new oily Vapours for the maintenance of the fat of the Mefentery. Its Nerves are very numerous, and fpring from that pair which is now ?.. Nervesi
{ from Dr. Willis) commonly called the Intercoflal, and reckoned for the ninth pair, but was formerly reputed the fixth. All the vena lattea or milky Feins run through it from the Guts towards 4. Milfy
its centre. Thefe are very flender and almoft tranfparent Veffels, having Veins- but one fmgle Coat, and gaping with their mouths in the inmoft Coat of the Guts do there fuck up the Chyle, and take the neareft courfe thence to thofe Glands or Kernels of the Mefentery that are next to them, fe- veral fmaller in their paflàge growing into one greater. From the feveral fmaller Glands they proceed to the greateft that is placed at the Back at the centre of the Mefentery, and from thence to the common receptacle that
|
||||
|
3,6 The Anatomy of an Morfei
that is feated betwixt the Kidneys. What courfe it takes from thence
the Reader may fee in the already twice mentioned tenth Chapter. §. L)>n}ke- Befides all thefe forts of Vefïèls there was a fifth fort found out by Tho*
dulis' mas Bartholin ( a Dane) feme thirty years ago, which indeed are to be
found in moll parts of the Body, but mod abound in the Mefentery, and are called Lymphedutts, as much as to fay, Water-paflages. Their Coat is fingle as that of the milky Veins, but more tranfparent; and the lymf ha or water that is contained in them, is very clear. This Liquor differs from the ferum or wheyifh watery part of the Bloud, which one may dif- cover by this Experiment ; If you take a little of this Liquor into a Spoon, it will foon thicken into a gelly of its own accord, which the ferum of the Bloud will not do unlefs you heat it over the fire. It is fuppofed to be made of thin moift Vapours of the Bloud, which being condenfed into water, are imbibed by thefe Vefïèls. All thofe that run through the Me- fentery difcharge their water into the common receptacle of the Chyle above-mentioned, (o that it paflès together with the Chyle up the paflàge that afcends by the Back towards the Shoulders, and there mixes with the Bloud in the fubclavian Vein. hs ounds. In the middle Membrane of the Mefentery (firft found out by DocTror
Wharton as abovefaid ) there are a great many Glands or Kernels, into which the milky Veins as they pafs through the Mefentery are inferted, and then rife out of them again, continuing their courfe to the one great Gland at its centre, in which they all meet together, and from it hold on their way to the common receptacle as was above-declared. By thefe Glands the faid Veins are fupported and ftrengthened in their paffage. its vfe. Now the ufe of the Mefentery is to" be as it were a tie or band to the
Guts to bind or gather them together, and to fallen them to the Back,
that their great weight do not caufe them in violent motion either to break or twill or roll confufedly one over the other, whereby their gen- tle worm-like motion would be hindred, if not perverted or abolilhed. And befides by its Membranes and Glands it does guard and fultain the feveral Veflels whofe way lies through it. |
|||||
|
CHAP. XIII.
Of the Pancreas or Sweet-bread. TH E Sweet-bread is an unfhapely body, of a glandulous yet fleuV
like fubftance, from whence it hath its name Pancreas which ™>locauea'ügmüe$aUfleJb. its fixation, in difïècïion it is at the end of the Liver and bottom of the Stomach ;
but while the Horfe is living, it is fituated on the backfide of the bottom of the Stomach, and lies crofs the Belly lengthways as that does. its fubftme. Its proper flefh is white and foft, but the little Kernels with which it is plentifully flored, are of a more reddifh colour. It is covered with a fingle Membrane which it has from the Rim of the Belly, as all the Bowels of the Lower Belly have, of which it is almofl the leali. It
|
|||||
|
Book L Of the Loweft, Belly ör Taühck 27
It has Veins from that branch of the Porta that runs to the Spleen, jtJ ye0it
and is called the Splenick. Its Arteries fpring from the Cceliacal ; and its tferves from the Intercoftal or ninth pain This Bowel for its bignefs has very many of thofè Lymphedu&s that we defcribed in the foregoing Chapter running through the Mefentery. Befides thefe Veflels which are common tö it with other parts, it has a tts propet
pipe or paflàge peculiar to it felf, which was firft found out at Padua in f'***'' an humane Body about forty years ago. This paflàge is membranous, and though it be but one in its going out, yet within the Sweet bread it is divided fìrft into two, and thole two into innumerable fmall branches which are difperfed all over its Body, but their extremities terminate in the abovefaid reddifh Kernels with which the Sweet-bread abounds. Before this paflàge was found out, fome thought the ufe of the Sweet- its vfa
bread to be only to ferve as a Cufliion ( being very foft ) for the Stomach to bolfler upon, and to fufrain the Veflels that run through it ; and others, that it fent a ferment to the Stomach to affili concoction. As to this latter ufe it mud needs be onely imaginary, feeing there is no paflàge from it to the Stomach. And as to the former, though it doe thofe offi- ces mentioned, yet from its proper paflàge ( which opens into the be- ginning of the fmall Gut very near the fame place where the Gall-paflàge enters ; it gives fufpicion that it has a further ufe. Now fome have been fo curious as to open Dogs alive, and cutting off this paflàge where it is inferred into the Gut, to receive its end into a narrow-mouth'd Veflèl, ( you may fee the manner of it in Bart hoi. Anat. /. 1. e. 13.) into which Veflèl in a iew hours time there has a Spoonfull of Juice deftilled out of it. And this Juice, to diftinguifh it from all other Liquors in the Bo- dy, they call the Pancreatkk juice, from the name Pancreas whereby the Pancrea» the Sweetbread is otherwife called. So that it feems there is a pecu-"^^"'"' liar Liquor feparated from the Arteries into this paflàge in the little Kernels or Glands above-fpoken of, which thofe that have tafted it, fay, is of a faltifh and fomewhat fowrifh tafle. Now this Juice palling by its Pipe into the beginning of the fmall Gut, meets there with the Gall, with which it ferments, and caufes fome fermentation in the Chyle as it defcends that way, whereby its purer parts are feparated from the more impure and earthy, as was difcourfed more fully in the eleventh Chapter, when we were defcribing the fmall Gut, ( to which the Reader may pleafe to turn back. ) As for the figure of the Sweet-bread, you have it exprefl: in the next
Table but one, namely in that wherein the Spleen is alfo defcribed. |
|||||
|
F CHA &
|
|||||
|
2g The Anatomy of an Horfe.
CHAR XIV.
Of the Liver.
|
|||||||||||
|
H
|
AVING now done with the Parts that minifter to the firft con-
coction, namely Chylification, we proceed to thofe other that in |
||||||||||
|
fome meafure, fome more fome lefs, affili Sanguification, of which the
Liver was efleemed by the Ancients the principal, nay almofl the onely inftrument. Which errour of theirs was founded on this miftake in Ana- tomy, That having not then found out the milky Veins which we have before defcribed, they thought that the Chyle was received out of the Guts by the Mefaraick Veins, which being branches of the Torta, all run to the Liver ; And the Cava or large hollow Veia that arifes out of the Liver, and is the trunk whence all the branches of Veins in the whole Body fpring, containing nothing in it but bloud, it neceflarily follow'd that if the Chyle came to the Liver, it mull by it be turned into bloud before it departed from it again. Yea fo deep was this Opinion of the Liver's making bloud fixed in Mens Brains, that for fome while after the milky Veins were found out, they would needs have them to convey the Chyle to the Liver, though they were forced to a thoufand fhifts to apo- logize for their non-appearance between the great Gland of the Mefen- t tery, (whither they might be eafily traced) and the Liver. But this prejudice was foon overcome when about thirty years ago the common Receptacle ( defcribed before in the tenth a*nd twelfth Chapters ) was found out, and a new office was invented for the Liver, which yet may in fome fort be faid to aflift Sanguification : and what this office is, fhall be fhewn by and by in this and the next Chapters. its fdftance, The fuiïftance of it is like concrete or congealed Bloud, for which caufe fimathn and -it ^ called Parenchyma, which is to fay an affufion or fhedding forth of *guTe' bloud. It is one in number, and fituated in the Lower Belly in the upper part thereof on the right fide under the Ihort Ribs, near to the Diaphrag- ma or Midriff] in its upper fide, and its lower lies upon the right and forefide of the Stomach. It is divided into feveral Lobes or Flaps, in Horfes, otherwife than in Men, in whom it is one continued body. Thefe Lobes do cover the Stomach, grafping of it (as it were) as one fhould grafp any thing with their hand by fpreading their fingers about it. This covering the Stomach ftands in great need of, for thereby is the heat thereof much cherifhed for the furthering concoftion. As for its fbape, you cannot fo well conceive it by any defcription, as by the figure of it annexed at the end of this Chapter, which you may pleafe to take a view of. its Liga- It is tied in its place by three Ligaments : the ftrongeft of which is 3/«?i *at whicn 1S ca^ec* tisfufpenfory Ligament. This fprings from the Peri- Mmbrm. tonaum where it is fpread over the under fide of the Midriff It is very ftrong and membranous, and arifing from the Midriff fomewhat towards its right fide, it is inferted into the upper or bunching fide of the Liver, into which it enters a little way; but in its entrance it lofes one of its Membranes, which dilating or fpreading it felf makes the skin that en- wraps |
|||||||||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowe ft Belly or Paurizh. 29
wraps the whole Liver ; for the Liver is onely covered with one thin skin
which it has from this Ligament. There is zjecond Ligament which feems to fpring from this skin of the Liver, and is inferted into the iharp- pointed Griftle at the bottom of the Breafb-bone. By thefe two is the Liver kept from falling lower down into the Belly, or from Hipping out of its place fideways. The third Ligament is not one originally, but when the Foal is in the Womb it fupphes the place of a Vein, running from the Navel to the lower or hollow fide of the Liver, and by it is nourilhment brought from the Dam to the Foal. But as foon as it is foaled, and it begins to take its nourilhment by the mouth onely, and not any longer at all this way, this Vein dries and cloies up, and fo degenerates into a Ligament, whereby the Liver is kept from afcending or bearing up againft the Midriff as it might have done in an Horfes leaping or the like. This is juft oppofite to the Sufpenfory one, entring in at the lower fide over againit where that does on the upper. It hath two forts of Veins. Th& firft are the roots of the Vena cava or vans.
large hollow Vein, which fpreading themfelvcs through all its parts, do receive into them the bloud that is brought into the Liver by the Torta ; which having done, the fmaller roots two or three of them grow into one, and this one uniting with two or three of the like kind into another larger root, they do at laft all of them meet in one trunk and make the hollow Vein, which ifluing out of the upper part of the Liver prefently enters the Midriff and fo afcends up to the Heart. The fecond fort of Vein is the Porta, all whofe branches coming from the Guts, Spleen, Stomach, &c. and uniting into one trunk enter the Liver on its lower or hollow fide, into which it is no fooner entred, but prefently it difperfes it felf into innumerable branches through all the Lobes of the Liver, af- fording nourilhment unto it, in that regard fupplying the place of art Ar- tery, which it refembles the more, becaufe within the Liver it has two Coats, the outer whereof it receives from that skin that cloaths the Liver, in its entrance into it. Now fo much of tne bloud that is imported by the Porta, as is not (pent on the nourilhment of the Liver, is drunk in by the roots of the hollow Vein before-mentioned, and returned to the Heart. This Vein is called Porta or Vena portee, the Gate vein, from two bunchings out, of the Liver, ( called gates by Hippocrates) between which it enters it. Yet is not the Liver, at leaft all the parts of it, onely nouriflied by Arteria.
the bloud that is brought in by the Porta ; for there is a branch which comes from the Cceliack Artery that afcends to its hollow fide juft by the Porta, which fends forth twigs all over its Coat, as likewife through the Coats of the Porta and the Choler-Veflels : but whether any of them en- ter into its parenchyma or fubftance, is not difcovered. Thefe twigs of Arteries bring vital heat and nourilhment to thofe parts through which they run. Its Nerves fpring from the Intercoftal pair, viz. partly from the ftoma- Nerves.
chick and partly from the mefenterick branch thereof. Thefe onely are communicated to thofe parts to which the Arteries are difperfed, fo that the fubftance of the Liver has very little fenfe. We ihew'd before how that for fome while after the milky Veins were L^mpbedmis.
found out, they were believ'd to convey the Chyle to the Liver : and all the colour for this Opinion was a few fmall clear, limpid and almoft tranfparent Veffèls, that run between the Mefentery and it. But as on F -L the
|
||||
|
2o The Anatomy of an Horfe.
the one hand they are too few in number for that office (efpecially being fo
flender) being fcarce one for ten of the milky Veins in the Mefentery : fo on the other, they are neither of the fame colour (as being much clearer) nor does the Liquor they contain come from the Mefentery to the Liver, but runs from this to that, as has been obferved in Live-diflè&ions, in which having been tied they have fwelled on that fide of the Ligature toward the Liver, and grown empty toward the Mefentery. They are indeed then truly Lympheddts, which carry that water that is feparated from the bloud in the Liver, towards the Mefentery, and from it to the com- mon receptacle of the Chyle with which it mixes. Befides thefe Vefièls there are the numerous branches of the Gall-paf-
fage, of which we fhall treat more fully in the next Chapter. And ihall fay no more here, but onely how one may diftinguifh betwixt the bran- ches of the Cava, Porta and thefe of the Gall-paflàge, fo as to know which are which. Thofe of the Cava are clad but with one Coat, are white, thin and of a large cavity. Thofe of the Porta have a double Coat, and fo are thicker and ftronger, and yet not fo wide as thofe of the Cava. Laftly, the branches of the Gall-paflàge are of a duskifli yellow, have a x thicker Coat than either the Cava or Porta, and yet have the narroweft channel. Thefe are included in a common cafe with thofe of the Porta, which makes their outer Coat. hs v\t. Having in the beginning of this Chapter detected the errour of the Ancients in afcribing Sanguification to the Liver in fo eminent and large
a fenfe ; we muft however confefs that it does fomething towards the pu- rifying of the Bloud, and that is, by feparating the Choler from it, as fliall be fullier fhewn in the next Chapter. In it alfo is a pretty quantity of ferous or wheyilh humour filtrated or drained from the Bloud, which is fent by the Lymphedu&s to the common receptacle of the Chyle as aforefaid. In the third and laft place it furthers the concoftion of the Stomach by its kind and cherifhing heat. The Sixth Table fheweth the Liver intire, and allò its Venels freed
from the Parenchyma. Fig. I. Expreflês the Liver taken out of the Body, and placed with its
hollow fide uppermoft. AAA A The hollow fide of the Liver e loathed'with its Coat.
B The Vena porta; or Gate-vein, and its egrefs out of the hollow fide of
the Liver.
C The Trunk of Vena cava or hollow Vein alfo coming out of the Liver. D The Gall or Choler-pajfage cut off clofe to the Liver. E An Artery which is branched to the Liver from the ramus Cceliacus. F A Nerve of the fixth pair (as commonly reckoned) alfo branching to the Liver.
GG The Edges of the Liver turned down and hanging over the hollow fide of it.
HHHH The four Lobes or Scollops of the Liver. |
||||||
|
Fig. n.
|
||||||
|
-»
|
||||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweji Belly or Paunck 31
Fig. II. Reprefents the Vefiels of the Liver freed from the Parenchyma,
or flefhy fubftance thereof. AA A portion of Vena cava.
BB The Trunk of Vena porta: paffing forth of the Liver.
C The Gatl-pajfage cut off clofe by the Liver.
EEEE The Branches of Vena portas difperfed through the Liver.
FFFF The Branches of the hollow Vein likemfe distributed through the
Liver.
GGGG The mofi remarkable Anaflomofes or joinings together of the mouths of the Cava and Porta.
HH The Artery that is branched to the Liver from the Coeliack Artery. I The Extremities or ends of the Veins, which for their fmallnefi are cal- led Capillary, or hair-like. |
||||||
|
CHAP. XV.
Of the Porus Bilarius, or Gall-pafage. IT is difficult to give a fatisfaóìrory account why moft Creatures mould
have both a Gallbladder, for the collection of the Choler, and befides, a Gallpaffage ; and yet a Horfe and all whole-hoofed Beafts, as alfo Harts, Fallow deer and fome few others, fhould onely have the paffage without the Bladder. It would be worth the while for our Virtuofi to invent a probable reafon of it, but for my own pare I dare not pretend to be fo fa- gacious. But much have thofe been miftaken that not finding any Blad- der of Gall, have affirmed that an Horfe hath no gall at all. And this, Dr. Brown reckons up amongfl: vulgar Errors. Now the trunk of this Gallpaffage enters the Liver very near the fame f» branthint
place with the Porta, together with which it is enwrapped in one com- J," ƒ'^'«n- mon Cover, which they both borrow from that skin wherewith the Li- dency wkh- Ver is cloathed. I mean they begin to be fo inverted juft at their en- ouC 'f' trance into the Liver, for before they have but each one fingle Coat. Its branches run along with thofe of the Porta through all parts of the Liver, and it has the fame Artery and Nerve running through its Mem- brane. All thefe branches uniting into one trunk, it paries the direéteft way to the fmall Gut, into which it is inferted about a foot from the lower Orifice of the Stomach, where it difcharges it felf of the Choler. Having defcribed the Vedel, there remain two things to be enquired choler bo»
into, firjt how the Choler isfeparated in the Liver, anàfecondly of what^^ ufe it is. As to the firft, we mud confider that there can be no fuch fepara- Bhud, and tion as this, without fome fort of ferment to caufe it. There comes indeed '" &• nothing to the Liver but under the form of bloud, but however it will be of ufe to examine from what parts that bloud comes : And amongfl the reft we find that a confiderable quantity comes from the Spleen by the fplenick branch. Now every one that will tafte it may difcern that the bloud •
|
||||||
|
3 2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
bloud that comes out of the Spleen by this branch has a kind of a fowrifh
harm tafte to what the reft of the mafs of bloud has. This then mixing with the reft of the bloud and paffing with it through the narrow Vtikis in the Liver, caufes it there to ferment (as a fmall piece of fowr Dough will I know not how much that is not leavened) and in that fermentation this yellow Choler is feparated from the Bloud, much in the fame man- ner as Yeft from Beer in a Barrel, ( which it partly refembles in colour. ) And this fermentation is affifted by the proper nature and faculty of the Liver given by Nature to it ; who hath alfo framed this liquor of Particles fo differing from thofe of the Bloud, that though the Bloud pafs out of the Torta into the Cava, yet the Choler ftays behind and is received by the fmall mouths of the Choler paiTage. Some affirm this feparation is performed by the help of fome Glands or little Kernels into which the ends of the feveral VeflèJs are inferted, but I have not been able to difcern them The ufe of the Gall is, Together with the Juice that is fent from the Sweet- bread, to make a ferment in the firft Gut for the ufes that are fully enough, delivered in the eleventh Chapter : to which we fhall onely add, that it ferves by its acrimony to exftimulate the Guts to expell the Excrements contained in them. And feeing there is no bag or repofitory to ftore it up in, it pafies continually to the Guts, whereby Horfes come to dung of- tener than moil other Creatures : which as Dr. Brown notes, " was pru- " dently contrived by Providence in this Animal, confidering his plen- " tifull feeding, the largenefs of his Guts, and their various circumvolu- " tion. For, fays he, Choler is the natural Glyfter, or one excretion " whereby Nature excludes another, &c. |
|||||
|
C H A P. XVI.
Of the Spleen or Milt.
rhe fubflance 'T""*HE Spleen or Milt is of a fqft, fpongious fubftance, like thick
of the spi™. j_ b]ack and congeaied Bloud, from which it is faid to be generated • though fome that of late have examined it more curioufly with Magni- fying Glafïès, declare the greateft part of its fubftance, befides the Bloud- veifels, to confili: of abundance of little Kernels inclofed in skinny Cells like Honey-combs, which in their own nature are of a white colour, and will appear fuch when the Bloud is wafht from them. For my own part I queftion whether there be any fuch Kernels in it, or if there be, they muft be far different from thofe of any other part, and be of a much loofer fubftance, feeing I have onely in River-water (after I had taken off the mvefting skin) walht off the parenchyma fo clearly from the VeneJs that there has feem'd to be nothing elfe remaining, "a figure of which Veflèls fo cleared of the parenchyma by wafliing, you have in the follow- ing Table. its (ituaiion Ixsfituation is under the Ihort Ribs on the left fide over againft the Li Tei""' T' .between the Stomach and the fhort or baftard Ribs It cleavetb ott times to the Midriffby a skin or coat, which it hath from the Rim 0f the BelJy. It is alfo faftned by a skin to the Stomach. It is
|
|||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowefl Belly or Paunch. 33
It is of a triangular Jhape, yet long, and fomething fharp-pointed, as/f, F}£urf.
you may fee in the Figure. Its Colour is ( in a found Horfe) reddifh, inclining fomewhat to black ; its colour.
but in an unfound Horfe it is more inclining to black, or of a leaden or afhey colour : yet moft times in an unfound Horfe it is of the colour of the Humour which offends. There are feveral Creatures that naturally have no Spleen, as all in~whf£erc™
fe&s ; and therefore that Proverb is not literally true, That even a Fly ihTwïthwt bas a Spleen ; Such alfo as have no Pifs-bladder, want the Milt, as the »• Chameleon, and many fuch like : But now it is a great queftion, whe- ther fuch Creatures as by Nature have Spleens, can have them taken out, and yet live. It is true indeed that other Parts that feem to be as consi- derable, have been taken even out of Humane Bodies, and yet the Parties have lived : So I have read of fome Women that upon incurable diftem- pers in the Part, have had their Womb cut out, and yet have liv'd in to- lerable health afterwards (Barthol. Epift. ) And it is a common thing to geld any fort of Creature, though there be considerably large Vefibls that run to the Stones. But it is to be confefs'd that thefe parts inftanc'd in, feem to be wholly framed for the propagation of the feveral kinds of li- ving Creatures, and not for the neceffary fervice of the Individual that has them. And therefore when they are taken away, though the end for which they were created, to wit generation, be fruftrated by the lofs of them; yet may the Creature it: felf that lofes them, live well enough without them. But now as for the Spleen, it does not at all ferve for procreation, but is of ufe onely to that Body that has it. ( What its ufe is, we ihall fhew towards the latter end of this Chapter. ) Yet fe- veral have boafted that they have taken it out of Dogs and Cats, and that they have lived in pretty good plight a confiderable while after. The operation muft needs be fomewhat difficult,feeing the Spleen is feated on the infide of the fhort Ribs, nearer the Back than the Breaft : nor can I believe that a Horfe could live any while if it were taken out of him ; but leaft of all could Man, in whom it is larger than in any other Crea- ture, as Bartholin affirms. For the Veffèls that are inferted into it are fo many and large, that it would feem impoffible to ftanch the Bloud ; befldes the neceflàry ufe that it feems to be of to the Body, of which by and by. The skin that it is covered with, is thicker than that of the Liver, both t» Mem-
becaufe of the loofe and foft fubftance of the Spleen that required a {Iron- brtme' ger covering to defend it ; and alio that it might the better fuftain the itrong beatings of its Arteries that are pretty large and many. This skin it has from the Teritonceum or Rim of the Belly, to which it is common- ly knit, as alfo to the left Kidney and the Midriff and on its infide to the Caul. Some late Anatomifts have affirmed it to be clad with two Goats, the outer that which we have mentioned, and the inner arifing from the Veflèls that enter the Spleen. All the Veins that it has, are from that branch of the Torta that is cal- Vejjèh.
led the Splenick branch. For the Torta as foon as it comes out of the '* Vehs' lower or hollow fide of the Liver, fends one notable Branch to the Spleen, which raffing crofs the Body from the right to the left fide under the Li- ver and Stomach, enters the Spleen and difperfes it felf into innumerable Twigs all over it. A Twig of the fplenick Artery opens into this Vein a little before it enters the Spleen : And from the lower end of the Spleen there
|
||||
|
54 The Anatomy of an Hor (e.
there go two or three Vedels to the Stomach, which are called Vafa brevia
or (hort Vedels. The ufe of the fplenick Vein is to bring from the Spleen all that arterial blood that is not fpenton its nourilbment ; and befides, that proper and peculiar juice that is made in the Spleen, of which pre- fently. e. Arteries. Its Arteries are three or four times more in number than the Veins, and all of them fpr ing from the left Cceliack branch that has the name of Splenick, from the Spleen, into which it is inferted. Hereby it receives Vital heat and nourilhment, and matter out of which to make its proper juice. Before this Artery enter the Spleen, it fends forth one twig that unites with and opens into the fplenick Vein, as was noted before. 5. Nerves. Its Nerves are but fmall yet pretty numerous. They fpring from a me- fenterick branch of the left Intercoftal Nerve, and are difperied principal- ly through the skin that covers it, though fome few enter its fubftance. 4. Lymphs- Laftly, it has feveral Lymphedutts, or Water-paflàges, which creep* dulls. jng aj| over its Coat, take their way along the Caul towards the com- mon receptacle of the Chyle, into which they empty the liquor contain- ed in them, asallthofethatarife from the feveral parts of the lower EeU ly do. What thefe Lympheducis are, and what that liquor is which they contain, I have lhown above in the 12 th Chapter, of the Me- fentery. its anion and There is no part of the Body concerning whofe ufe there has been «/*• greater diverfity of opinion. Some have made it the receptacle of black Choler (or of thick dreggy Bloud) feparated in the Liver and brought
hither by the fplenick branch. Others that thought this too ignoble and bafe an ufe for fo confiderable a part, efteem'd it to be as it were a fecond Liver : For as they believed that the thinner and more fpirituous part of the Chyle paflêd to the Liver ; lb, that a thicker and more dreggy part went to the Spleen, of which was made a blacker and more earthy fort of Bloud, partly for its own nourifhment, and partly for the nourifhment of the Stomach, Guts, Mefentery, &c. In anfwer to thefe two opinions it will be fufficient to fay, That the firfh is contrary to the circulation of the Bloud, nothing palling from the Liver to the Spleen, but contrarily from the Spleen to the Liver: and the latter, befides that it is contrary to the faid circulation, is repugnant alfo to the true motion of the Chyle, none of which either paflès to the Liver or Spleen, as we have more than once fhown already. A third opinion is, That of the bloud that the Ar- teries bring to it in great plenty, is made a certain acid or fowr Juice, which is fent by the vafa foevia or fhort Veins to the Stomach, into which being difcharged, it partly provokes appetite, and partly helps concoc- tion : And this Opinion has had a great many Abettors, whereas its fal- fity may be demonftrated by this, that if one open a Dog (or the like) alive, and tie thefe lhort Veins with a thred, they will fill and (well betwixt the Stomach and Ligature, but will grow empty on that fide toward the Spleen ; which is a plain evidence that the Bloud or whatever other Hu- mour that runs in thefe lhort Veins, flows from the Stomach and not to it. However we will grant that the Spleen does indeed make fuch a fowr Juice, of part of the Arterial bloud that is imported into it by the fple- nick Artery ; but then it paflès not from thence to the Stomach, but to the Liver by the fplenick branch of the Porta .• for if one tie the faid branches was faid above of the Jhort veins, it will fill towards the Spleen and grow empty towards the Liver., And the ufe of this Juice feems to be
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch.
be this, viz. That mixing in the trunk of the Porta with all the Bloud
that is received by the branches thereof out of the feveral parts of the Lower Belly, efpecially from the Guts, it enters with it into the Liver, where it caufes the Bloud to ferment, whereby the Choler is feparated from it, for the ufes mentioned in the foregoing Chapter, where we have treated more at large of this feparation. Another afe of the Spleen is, by its warmth to cherifh the left fide of
the Stomach, as the Liver does the right, to further thé concoction thereof. And this it may be conceived to doe in a very confiderabJe de- gree ; for feeing it has fo very many Arteries, it muft needs be very warm. There are many more Opinions concerning the ufe of the Spleen than
thefe I have mentioned : but as it would be tedious to recite them, fo it would be but needlefi to refute them, the new Doctrines of the circula- tion of the Bloud and the motion of the Chyle being improveable to a general confutation of them. Table VII. Expreflèth the Spleen intire with the VelTèls going in and
out, and the fame Veflêls alone freed from their parenchyma ; as alfo the Sweet-bread intire with its Veffels. Fig. I Reprefenteth the Spleen intire, with the Veflêls going in and out.
A Shews the body of the Spleen on the concave or hollow fide which re-
ceives the Veffels: B The fplenick Fein.
C The fplenick Artery.
D Its Nerves proceeding from a Mefenterick branch of the left Intercoftal
Nerve. Fig. II. Reprefenteth the Veflêls of the Spleen devefled of their paren-
chyma. A Shews the Arteria Cceliaca, cut clofe off at the great Artery.
B Its ramus dexter fuperior, or right-hand upper branch, producing thé
gaftrica dextra, or right-hand Stomach artery : it makes alfo the cyfticaz gemella; that go to the Liver and Gallpaffage. C Its ramus dexter inferior, or right-hand lower branch, which goes to
the Mefentery and Guts. D Its ramus finiuer, or left-hand branch, called Arteria Splenica or fple-
nick Artery, which brings the bloud to the Spleen. E The Nerves of the Spleen coming from a mejenterick branch of the left
Intercoftal Nerve. F The fplenick branch of Vena ports cut off clofe by its trunk.
G The fplenick Vein cut open to fhew its Valves, which permit the Bloud
to paft from the Spleen to the Liver, but hinder any Bloud from re- turning from the Liver to the Spleen. HH The Diftribution of the Nerves through the fubftance óf the Spleen,
accompanying the Veins and Arteries. TI &c. Several (feeming) Anaflomofes or inofculations of the Veins and
Arteries. KKK Veffels going from the lower end of the Spleen to the Stomach, called
Vafa brevia, or fhort Veffels. G ' LL@V*
|
||||
|
n£ The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
LL &c. The capillary branches of Feins, Arteries and Nerves difperfed
through the whole fubftance of the Spleen. Fig. III. Reprefenteth the Pancreas or Sweet bread freed from its Mem-
brane and part of its fubftance, the better to fliew the courfe of the Veilèls in it, which come to it from the fplenick Vein and Artery. It reprefenteth alfo the new Wirtfungian paflage, fo celled from the late Inventer of it. A Shews the body of the Pancreas differed.
B The new pajfage called ductus Wirtfungianus or pancreatica.
C The Orifice of the f aid pajfage where it opens into the beginning of the
fmall Gut.
D The Artery of the Sweet-bread difperfed through its fubftance. E The Vein of the Sweet-bread difperfed like wife through its fubftance. F Its Nerves, being a branch of the Intercoftal pair. |
||||||||||||||||||
|
CHAP. XVII.
Of the Kidneys, and Deputy-kidneys.
TH E Kidneys are otherwife called Reins from their Latine name
Renes, /which is derived from a Greek word which fignifieth to flow, becaufe the watery or wheyifli part of the Bloud doth continually flow through them, and maketh the Urine. |
||||||||||||||||||
|
their name.
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
Kumber, fi-
|
They are in number two, that when one is ftopt with a ftone or gra-
|
|||||||||||||||||
|
tmtion.and vel, or hurt by any accident, the Urine might be feparated in the other,
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
connexton.
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
or otherwue the Beait would die. They are J eatea in the Loins behind
the Stomach and Guts, the right under the Liver and the left under the Spleen, on each fide of the hollow Vein and great Artery, oppofite to one another. They reft upon the Mufeles of the Loins, and are in- cluded betwixt the Membranesof the Peritoneum which keeps them firm in their place. They are knit to the hollow Vein and great Artery by the Emulgent Veflèls, and to the Bladder by the Ureters which we mail de- scribe in the next Chapter. They are feldom like to one another 'mjhape ; for the Right is in figure
like a Heart, but fomething flatter; whereas the left is like that of a Man, viz. of the fhape of a Kidney-bean, as you may fee them repre- sented in the following Figure. They are covered with two Membranes, an inner which is proper, and
an outer which is common. The inner Skin feems to fpring from the outer Coat of thofe Veilèls that enter into them : this cleaves fo clofe to them, that it can hardly be feparated, being very thin, and having fmall threds of Nerves running along it from a twig of the Intercoftal Nerve. The outer which is common, is borrowed from the Rim of the Belly, and is wrapped fomewhat loofely about the Kidney. This Skin is bedaubed with fat, and is therefore called the fatty Coat ; and into it are inferted an Ar- tery |
||||||||||||||||||
|
Figure,
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
Membranes.
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowe ft Belly or Paunch. 37
tery and Vein, which have alfo the title of fatty, and fpring from the
great Artery and hollow Vein. As to their fubftance, it has been always till oflate held to be hard -Subftanct.
and compact flefh ; and indeed it handles pretty firm' to the touch, and feems to be flelhy to the bare eye. But feeing there is no reparation made of any thing from the Bloud in other Parts, but by the help -óf Glands or Kernels; (for fo is the Slaver feparated in the Mouth, the Gho- ler in the Liver; bad Humours in the Guts upon taking a purge, &c.) I fay, for that caufe it is reafonable to give credit to thofe curious Ana- tomies that by their Magnifying Glaffès or Microfcopes have difcovered the fubftance of the Kidneys to be for the greateft part made up of fucli Glands, by means of which the Urine is feparated from the Bloud, in fuch manner as we mail lhew by and b)r. Their Arteries and Veins are called Emulgents, becaufe they do as it VeffeU, viz.
were milk out the Urine from the mafs of Bloud. Each Kidney lias for E™!ntu<m& the moft part but one Artery and one Vein ; yet fometimes two or wore veins. of a fort. But whether the Trunk be one or more, each as it enters the Kidneys is branched into feveral, and thofe into more fucceffively, till they become as fmall as hairs. The Emulgent Arteries fpring from the Trunk of the great Artery, and the Veins from the hollow Vein : Both thefe as they enter the Kidney, are devefted of their outer Coat, which makes the proper Coat of the Kidneys, as was obferved above : but in- ftead of that lofs they are inverted in one common Cafe with the bran- ches of the Ureter, even as we fhewed in the fifteenth Chapter that the branches of the Gall-pafTàge in the Liver are included in one common Coat or Cafe with thofe of the Porta. The Arteries bring bloud for their nourifhment, and moreover the watery humour that is feparated in them and makes the Urine. By the Veins the bloud circulates back again to the hollow Vein or Cava, and by it afcends up to the Heart. Befides the innumerable little Kernels which we have /hewn the fub-
ftance of the Kidney to confift of, there are about ten of a more confide- rable bignefs in the middle ur centre of it, placed at the entrance into the pelvis or Baton, which are in Latin called Caruncula Papillares, in En- Me Papatar* gliih Papillary Caruncles, and by tome they are called Teat-like Pr.oduc-Camekf' tions, both which names they have from the Jikenefs they have to the Teats or Nipples of Women. They are fomething harder than the reft of the fubftance of the Kidney, and alfo of a fainter colour. They are in bignefs as large as a fmall Horfe-bean. They have each feveral fmall holes or pores, through which the Urine deftillsout of the flender Uri nary Pipes in the body of the Kidneys, into the cavity of the pelvis. Now this pelvis or Baton is a membranous cell or cavity in the mid-rhe Pelv,s er
die of the Kidney, and is nothing elfe but the head of. the Vreter widened. B^on' There run cut of it feveral large pipes to the aforefaid Teat-like Kernels, (one pipe to each Kernel) by which the Urine drils into this cavity, and out of it into the Vreter. The attion of the Kidneys, is to feparate.the wheyifh Humour from Their Affiori.
the Bloud, which they do in this manner and order. We find that an Horfe can no more live without drink than meat : Now the drink ferves not onely to cool the Body, but much more is it of ufe to make the Chyle thin, that it may be able to pafs rhrough the narrow ways of the milky Veins ; fo that the water which the Horfe drinks, paflês along with the more oily Chyle into rhe mafs of Bloud, whither having con- G % ' du&ed
|
||||
|
£§ The Anatomy of an Horfe.
du&ed it, the water is now of no more ufe, and therefore the Emulgent
Arteries above-defcribed conveigh it to the Kidneys together with the Bloud, to cafl it out : But the Bloud, being of a thicker body than the water, cannot enter through thofe narrow paflages which the other de- ftils through, and therefore what is more than ferves for their nourifh- ment, returns back from the Kidneys by the Emulgent Veins into the Cava, and fo returns to the Heart again in its circulation. But the wa- tery or whey ilh part running out of the larger into the fmaller branches of the Emulgent Arteries fucceffively, and the faid branches fo often divi- ding themfelves till at laft they become as fmall as an hair and end in the little Kernels towards the outfide of the Kidneys, this watery Humour is milked as it were through thefe Kernels into fmall urinary pipes, as flender almofl as Fibres, by which it driJls along to the Papillary Carun- cles, and is again drained through them into the Bafon, from whence it glides down the Ureters into the Bladder, where when it becomes trou- blefome either by its quantity or lharpnefs, &c. it provokes the Horfe to fiale, and is called Urine. But feeing the Pifs is not of the fame colour with the water that was drunk, but generally a great deal yellower, it is likely it gains that colour from a little quantity of Choler mixed with it .* And as the Choler either retains it natural colour, to wit yellow, or iff preternaturally of fome other, as black, greenifh, &c. the Urine will be tinttured accordingly ; as any Man may obferve in Horfes that are di- ftempered. So that in Horfes as well as in Men, one may many times gain fome knowledge of the Diflemper from the Urine. Vepty-kid- Over the Kidneys a little more outward, and about an inch from
«me/jta!* tnem> there fland two Kernels, which are known by feveral Names, thn, 'bignefs from the feveral ufes that Authors have afcribed to them. Some call them and fl>a{e. Deputy-kidneys, becaufe of fome refemblance they have to the true ones in their frame, and becaufe they have been thought to affifl them in fepa- rating the Urine. Bartholine calls them Black-choler Cafes, from an Opi- nion that they receive black Choler from the Spleen. Others have impos'd other Names on them, which we fhall not recite. It is not long fince they were firft found out. They are in an Horfe about as big as a Gar- den-bean, and of that jhape as they are reprefented in the Figure. They are covered with a fingle thin skin, which commonly flicks to the tatty skin that invefls the Kidneys. They have a fmall cavity in them. their Veffels. Their Feins and Arteries generally come from the Emulgent s> but fometimes immediately from the great Artery and hollow Vein. The Arteries bring them bloud for nourrfhment, from which what remains, returns back by the Veins, as alfo does that Humour whatever it be that is concocted and feparated in them, for there is no other veflel to do it. They have indeed fome Lymphedutls, but thofe are common to them with other parts, and have no peculiar ufe here. Their Nerves fpring from that branch of the Intercoflal pair that goes to the Stomach, to the Spleen, and to the inner or proper skin that cloaths the Kidneys. their V[e. In their Cavity there is commonly found a blackiih Humour, which is made of part of the Arterial bloud that flows to them ; but of what na- ture or ufe this Humour fhould be, is very uncertain. It has no way to go out of the Cavity but by the Veins, which depofite what is con- tained in them into the Emulgent Veins, or into the Cava, and fo # mufl needs pafs with the Venal bloud to the Heart. If there could be |
||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch, g£
found out any way whereby it could probably pafs to the Kidneys, then
Bartholines Opinion, that they make a ferment for the ufe of the Reins, for the better feparating of the wheyilh Humour from the Bloud, were very plaufible ; but till then, one mud fufpend their belief of it. As for mine own part, feeing fo many learned Anatomifts as have treated of them, are at a lofs in difcovering their true ufe, I will not be afhamed to, coniefs my own ignorance and unfatisfiednefs therein alfo. |
|||||||
|
CHAP. XVIII.
Of the Vreters or Paffages of Vrine.
TH E Vreters or Urine-pipes or Chanels are in number two, feated the Vreten.
on each fide of the hollow Vein and great Artery, at fome diftance from them. Their head or beginning is the Bafon of the Kidneys, at whofe hollow fide they come forth, and run in a crooked line like an ƒ down to the Bladder, into Whofe back and lower part they are inferted hot far from the Sphinfter, running for an inch between its two proper Coats, to prevent the return of the Urine back this way. For when the Blad- der is fqueezed, its Coats clap clofe together, and fo ihut up the mouths of the Ureters. They are in fdjlance much like a Vein, onely whiter and thicker, Their fib-
and more nervous. They are commonly held to confift of two Coats, #g» <""1 an inner which is proper, and an outer which is borrowed from the Rim of the Belly. They have fmall Veins and Arteries from the neighbouring Veilèls, and flips of Nerves in a confiderable number from the Intereoftals, whence proceeds that intolerable fenfe of pain when a ftone fticks ih
them.
Ihey are indifferent large, having a hollownefs through them which their cavh)
is fo wide, that they will admit of a large flraw in a dead Horfe, and4m'M'e' therefore may be conceived in a living Horfe to be much wider. Through thefe paffages or hollowneflès, the Urine doth pafs from the Kidneys to the Bladder, and that is their fole and true ufe. |
|||||||
|
CHAR
|
|||||||
|
aö the Anatomy of à?i -Hor-je.
|
||||||
|
CHAR XIX.
jifjm
Of the Fifs-bladder, or B/adder of Vrine. the fituatm 'Tp H E Bladder of Urine is feated at the bottom of the Belly, in that
"fthtiS- -*- hollownefstnat is formed of the Os facrum, Hips and the Os pubis,
%r\e * ' between the Coats of the Rim of the Belly ; and is oïzfubftance partly
membranous, for flrength, extenfion and contraction ; and partly fjefhy,
for motion ; for by its 'flefhy Fibres are its Membranes contracted : and
thefe flefhy Fibres are wholly feated in its middle Coat, which is truly
mufcular, as fhail be fhewed by and by,
its Figure. It is of a round globous j^k/t, in fhape like a Pear, having within it
a large cavity or hollownefs, wherein to contain the Urine.
Membranes. It is compofed of a treble Coat òr Skin. The firft and outwardmoft of which it hath derived to it from the Rim of the Belly, which Skin is very flrongand clofe. The innermoft is thin, white and bright, of an exquifite fenfe, and is interwoven with all forts of Fibres, that it may the better bear enlarging and drawing up together, as need requireth. Within I have often found it covered with a mucous cruft, which I take to be an Excrement of the third concoftion of the Bladder, and to ferve to defend it from being too much grated upon by the acrimony of the Urine. The middle betwixt thefe two, is as thick or thicker than them both, and is fluff with flefhy Fibres, even as the fame Coat of the Stomach and Womb are. Its Fibres run lengthways of the Bladder, and by contracting of themfelves fqueeze out the Urine, forcing open the fphmdter Mufcle that encompafièth the neck of the Bladder. in perfora- ft hath three perforations or holes, two on the hinder part a little be- tions. low the neck to let in the Urine from the Ureters, and one in the neck to let the Urine out.
its tarts and The parts of the Bladder are two, its bottom and its neck. The bottom connexion, is its wider, more capacious part, and its neck, its narrower and more con- tracted. The bottom is fail tied by a Membrane to the Intejiinum rettum or Arfe-gut, and to the Aorta ( a little before its divifion ) by the Umbi- lical Arteries, fo that no violent motion can caufe it to fall down upon its neck, which if it fhould happen, would hinder the outgate of the Urine. The neck is narrower but longer in Hor fes than in Mares, and in both it is flefhy, being incompaflêd with a fphin&er Mufcle, which is woven with very many Fibres, fome of which are ftreight, and fome overthwart, thefe laft lying under the former.JNow this fphin&er Mufcle feems to be nothing elfe but the middle Coat of the Bladder made thicker here than in any other part, by the acceflion of the circular or overthwart Fibres. And its ufe is to purfe up the neck of the Bladder fo, as no Urine can pafs out, till by its quantity or fliarpnefs it becomes fo troublefome to the Beaft, as provokes him to force open the Sphinfter by contracting the Mufcles of the Paunch, and the mufcular Coat of the Bladder. If this Sphin- cter happen to be overcooled, &c. the Horfe lofeth its ufe, and fo for want of it his Water drops from him as faft as it comes into the Bladder. |
||||||
|
Its
|
||||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweji Belly or Paunch. 41
Its Veins and Arteries proceed from the hypogaftrick branches of the Iu Ve^elu
hollow Vein and great Artery, and are implanted into its neck, on which, part of them is fpent, and the remainder funs through the bot- tom. Its Nerves come partly from the Intercoltals and partly from the Marrow of that Bone ot the Back that is called Osfacrum, that is next to the Crupper. The ufe of the Bladder is to receive the Urine from the Kidneys by the tu vft.
Ureters, and to contain it, like a Chamber-pot, till it is fo full as to be- come troublefome and uneafy to the Beali ; lor as foon as it becomes fo, by the help of the Mufcles of the Belly and the middle mufcular Coat of the Bladder it is preiled out of it by piflìng. |
||||||
|
CHAP. XX.
Of the Tara and Sheath,
BÈcaufe the "Card of fton'd Horfes befides its principal ufe which is to
copulate with the Mare, has alfo an inferiour ufe, 'viz. to difcharge the Urine out of the Bladder ; and becaufe this latter is the fole üfe ot it in Geldings, we will here treat of it next to the Bladder, in refpeft to the office it performs to it, and not defer it, as many Anatomifts of Hu- mane Bodies do, till we have difcourfed of the parts that prepare, make and retain the Seed, to which it alfo minifters. The Yard of an Horfe lies hid for the moft part within the Sheath, The pans «ƒ
from which, when it is drawn, it borrows its covering, confuting of thethe tard- Scarf skin and true Skin, and the carnous Membrane, which are common to it with other parts of the Body : Its Glans has a proper Membrane that inverts it, as the Clans of a Mans Yard has ; and the whole confifts of two Nervous bodies (which make up thegreateft part of its bulk) a Partition-skin that goes betwixt them, the Vrethra or Pifs-pipe, the Glans, four Mufcles and the Veflêls ; of which in order. The two Nervous hodies are encompaflèd with a thick, firm and white tu Nervous
skin, but their inner fubftance is very fpongy and flaggy unlefs diftendedbodks' and filled with bloud and fpirit, confiding for the greateft part of nothing but Veiïèls, to wit, Veins, Arteries and Nervous threads, which are wonderfully interwoven one with another. They arife from the lower part of the Share-bone at a fmall diftance one from the other, giving the Pifs-pipe room to go betwixt them, but in a little while they meet toge- ther, and fo are extended one by the fide of the other the whole length of the Yard to the Glans, onely a thin skin coming betwixt them. At their rife they refemble the letter Y. The Pifi-pipe is feated betwixt thefe, or rather below them, and is of The pifs-pipe
a fubftance much like them. On its infide it is membranous and very fenfible. It is continued from the neck of the Bladder, and is much of an equal width through its whole length. At its beginning where it is joined to the neck of the Bladder it has a membranous valve, that per- mits the Urine to come out, but hinders the Seed or any thing fquirted into
|
||||||
|
. 2 The Anatomy of an Hor (e.
into the Pifs-pipe to go in, unlefs it be forced open with a Probe or Ca-
theter, or the like. TfjeGlm. Before the ends of the Nervous bodies there is prefixed the Glans,
which is diftinguifhable from the reft of the Yard by a round circle like a Crown going between them. This is of a more exquifite fenfe than the Nervous bodies, but of not much an unlike fubftance, though fome fay it is glandulous. When the Yard is drawn, it has no other covering, but one proper thin coat. the Mufcles. The Yard has two Mufcles on each fide at its root : The foil: pair are
ihort and thick, fpr inging from the knob of the Hip-bone, and are inferted into the Nervous bodies near their beginning : they are called Erellors, becaufe they help the Yard to ftand. The fecond are longer and fmaller, arifing from the fphin&er Mufcle of the Arfe hole, and paffing along the fides of the Pifs-pipe end about the middle of it, ferving to open or widen it for the freer paflage of the Seed and Urine, and are therefore called Dilaters. ne Vereis. Its Veins and Arteries fpring from the Hypogaflricks, and enter it at
the meeting of the Nervous bodies. Its Nerves come from the loweft Vertebral. in vfe. The principal and primary ufe of the Yard is for copulation, to con-
vey the Seed into the Womb of the Female : but the fecondary, and to
fuch Creatures as are gelt, the onely ufe of it, is to ferve as a Tap to the Bladder, to let out the Urine when it becomes troublefome ; in which office the Vrethra ór Pifs-pipe is chiefly concerned. ne sheath. Except when the Yard is diftended with bloud and Spirits, (which is
called its eredtion or ftanding) it lies hid in its Repofitory, the SheatM of which little need to be faid, feeing it is onely a duplicature of the common coverings of the Body, and confifts onely of the fcarf and true Skin, and the flefhy Membrane, which is here but thin. It feems to an- fwer to the prepuce or Fore-skin in Men : for as that in fome Men, when the Yard is eredi:, turns back towards the root of the Penis and leaves the Glans wholly bare ; fo when a Horfe's Yard is drawn out to the full length, the Sheath is alfo drawn out or unfolded, and appears to be knit to the Yard a little behind the Glans, even as the prepuce is to a Man's Te* nis at the fame place. I fhall not need therefore to fpeak any more of it. Table VIII. Sheweth the defcending Trunks of the hollow Vein and
great Artery, the Emulgents, Kidneys, Deputy-kidneys, Ureters, Bladder, Yard, preparing Veflèls, Stones, deferent Veflèls, Seed- bladders and Proftates. A Sheweth the defcending Trunk of the hollow Vein.
B The defcending Trunk of the great Artery.
CC The emulgent Veins arifing out of the hollow Vein.
DD The emulgent Arteries fpr inging out of the great Artery.
EE The Kidneys.
FF The Deputf kidneys, otherwife called the Hack Choler Boxes.
GGGG The Vreters.
H The Bladder.
I The Bladder cut open that its infide may appear.
K The neck of the Bladder where it opens into the Tifi-pipe of the Tard.
kk The Ligaments of the Bladder.
h Tht
|
||||
|
Book I. Of thè Lowe ft Belly or Paünch. 43
L The Nervous bodies of the Tar J divided from its hack down to the
Pifi-pipe.
M The Urethra or Pifi-pipe. m The end or thickeft part of the Tard, called its Glans.
NNNN The Seed-preparing Feins. , OO The Seed-preparing Arteries.
PP The Pyramidal bodies, otherwife called Corpora varicofà, or Pam piniformia.
QjThe right Tefticle with its inmofi Coat on. R The left Tefticle divefted of all its Coats. S The Epididymis or paraftata of the left Tefticle. TT The deferent Vefj'els. UU The Seed-bladders. XX The Proftates. |
||||||
|
CHAP. XXI.
Of the Parts miniftring to Generation in Horfes, and Firft
of the Preparing, Spermatic\or Seed-vejfels. HAVING fhewed the Parts appointed for and fubfervient to Chyli-
fkation, and in fome meafure to Nutrition and Sanguification, I come in the next place to fpeak to thofe ferving for Generation. And as the former, all except the Yard treated of in the Jaft Chapter, are com- mon to and alike in both Male and Female ; fo thefe latter differing cort- fiderably in the different Sexes, we rauft treat of them apart : and fhaJl begin with the Generative Parts of an Horfe, and afterwards treat of thofe of a Mare. The firft in order are the preparing or fpermatick Veflèls, Arteries and The preparine,
Feins. The Arteries carry bloud and vital fpirit to the Stones to make Ve^h'
Seed of, and the Veins bring back from thence fo much of the bloud as re- mains luperfluous or unfit for that purpofe. The Arteries fpring out of the descending Trunk of the great Artery, almofl two hands breadth be- low the Emulgents, one on each fide : and the Veins out of the like Trunk of the hollow Vein, two on each fide, a pretty deal higher up than the Arteries, as you may obferve in the foregoing Figure. The left of thefe Veins in Humane Bodies commonly fprings from the left Emul- gcnt Vein, (and is but one) the reafon whereof' Anaromifts give to be, left, if it fhould have fprung from the Cava, and thereby been neceffita- ted to have marched over the great Artery, the return of the bloud from the Stones by it mould have been hindred by the continual beating of the Artery. But feeing Nature has not here made the like caution, where there was as great need of it, I cannot tell whether that be any fatisfafto- ry reafon. Now thefe Arteries and Veins do at a little dilfance from their beginning meet with one another on their refpeclive fides, to wit the right Artery with the right Veins, and the left with the left, and at their meeting they acquire one common covering from the Rim of the belly, between whole two Membranes they defcend down the Loins, H running
|
||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe,
running over the Ureters, as the figure fhews. As they defcend, they
beftow little twigs upon the Rim of the Belly, and the Veins do divide themfelves into feveral, and by and by unite again ; but the Arteries pafs along a great way by one Pipe onely, though varioufly twilled and in- terwoven with the Veins, with which yet they do no where inofculate, or unite into one body, as was generally affirmed they did before the circulation of the bloud was found out. For till then it was, believed, that the Veins carried bloud to the Stones, and the Arteries vital Spirits, and that the Arteries opened into the Veins, and contrarily the Veins into the Arteries, for the mixing the bloud and vital fpirits together, and thereby preparing matter for the Stones to make Seed of. But fince the circulation of the bloud was fully understood, and it became certain that bloud and fpirit flowed to the Stones by the Arteries onely ; upon a ftrict enquiry after thefe inofculations, they were no where to be found, nor is there any thing like them, faving that both Veins and Arteries pafs along in one common Cover, which it is likely gave occafion to the mi- flake. When thefe Veflèls are arrived within little lefs than a quarter of a yard of the Stones, the Arteries then begin to branch themfelves into feveral, but the Veins into far more. And both of them pafs out of the Belly by the hole of the procefs of the Rim into the Cod. The fpace be- . j twixt where thefe VefTels begin fo much to divide themfelves, and the Stones, is called the Pyramidal body, becaufe from the Stones upwards, it grows fmaller and fmaller like a Pyramid, as is reprefented in the Fi- gure. It is alfo called Corpus varicofitm, becaufe the Veflels fo divided make a thicker body ; and laftly plexus pampiniform'!*, the tendril-like plexus or interweaving, becaufe the Veins and Arteries twine and clafp about one another like the tendrils of Vines. Both of thefe VefTels en- ter the Stones by feveral branches, but the Veins by a far greater num- ber than the Arteries, which was neceflary, for that the bloud flows ve- ry quick to the Stones by the Arteries, but returns but flowly back again by the Veins, and therefore it was convenient it fhould have more con- ducts or chanels to run in. The ufe of thefe Preparing Veflels may be fufficiently learned by what
We have already difcourfed of them, by which it is alfo clear that the name of Preparers belongs onely properly to the Arteries that carry bloud and fpirits to the Stones to nourifh them and to make Seed of, and not at all to the Veins, which onely bring back that bloud that i^ not converted to thofe ufes. As for the Nerves and Lymphedutts that run with the aforefaid Veflels
to the Teflicles, becaufe the Teflicles are the parts for which they are defigned, and they are onely in their paflàge thither while they accom- pany thefe Veins and Arteries, we fliall fay nothing further of them here, but (hall fhew their origine and ufe in the following Chapter. |
|||||
|
CHAP
|
|||||
|
Book L Of the Lowejl Belly or Paunch 45
|
|||||
|
CHAP. XXII.
Of the Tefticles or Stones, a?id the Parafiate or Attenders. TH E Tefticles or Stones are called in Latin Tefles, which otherwife Tbek mme.
fìgnifies Witneilês, becaufe they witnefs the ftrength and courage of the Creature ; or perhaps rather, as fome think, becaufe no Man a- mongft the Romans was admitted to be a Witnefs that had loft his Stones. They are always according to Nature two, and therefore the Greeks call them by a word that fignifies twins. They are of an oval figure, but fomewhat flattifh : and their fubfi'ance Their fiape
has been formerly held to be glandulous, as if they were oneJy two great "ndf^bftance. Kernels, not differing from other Kernels in other parts of the Body la- ving in bignefs and ufe. But later Anatomifts have difcovered them to be of no fuch folid fubflance as Glands are, but wholly to confili of Veflêls that twift and twine this way and that way, and are kept in their order clofe to one another by the inmoft Skin that cloaths the Stones- When they are cut in two, they appear net red, but of that colour the Seed is of, becaufe the bloud as foon as it enters them, begins to lofe its colour and nature, and to be turned into Seed. And feeing I could never ob- ferve any bloud in the Stones, it is likely that the Veins reach no further than their Coats, feeing the Seed is not received into the Veins, but into peculiar Veflêls called Deferent or back-carrying, of which in the next Chapter. I fay, I believe the Veins onely run through the Coats of the Stones, and have the fuperfluous bloud tranfmitted into them from the Arteries, before ever they enter into the body of the Stones : And then thofe Veflèls that the Tefticles confift of, will onely be Arteries, run out into very fine and almoft innumerable threads, for the elaborating of the Seed. If this notion of mine be true, then I may fay that both Veins and Ar- Their Vefftis.
teries run through all the Coats wherewith the Tefticles are inverted, but that they themfelves have no Bloud-vefìèls but Arteries. And whether they have any other fort of Veflèl, is uncertain. 'Tis true there are both Nerves and Lymphedulls that come towards the Stones, as I ob- ferved in the foregoing Chapter ; but I queftion whether they reach any farther than their Coats any more than the Veins. As for the Nerves, they fpring from a Vertebral pair according to fome, from the Intercoftal fay others, and a third fort think from both. Bat be their original where it will, I think they are moftly if not altogether fpent upon the fufpending Mufcles by which the Tefticles are fuftained, and upon the Coats io of- ten mentioned. So far am I from thinking with fome, that thefe Nerves contribute the greateft or any confiderable fhare of matter for the making of the Seed. The Lymphedulls fpripg manifestly from amongft the Coats of the Stones, and afcend up into the Belly by the fame hole, by which the preparing Veflèls came down, running fo far till they reach and empty themfelves into the common Receptacle of the Chyle, defcribed above chap. 10. and iz- The Tefticles being fenfible, tender and noble parts, are defended from Their com.
the external cold or other Injuries by feveral Coats, of which fome are H z common
|
|||||
|
4^ The Anatomy of an Morfei
common to them with other parts of the Body, and fome proper to
themfelves onely. The common incompafs both the Stones within one cavity, as in a Bag, and makethat which we call the Cod. And thefe are two. The outer of them is the Skin with its Scarf-skin, and the in- ner the fleihy Membrane. The outer is not divided as it is in Man, by a line that runs along the middle of it lengthways. The inner, as it flicks pretty clofe to this on one fide; fo to the next proper one fome- what loofely, by many membranous Fibres, on the other or inner fide. The proper are alfo two, though by fome they are reckoned to be three. The outmoft is called Vaginalis, or the Sheath-like Coat, be.caufe the Stone is included in it as in a Sheath. ', This is thick and ftrong ; fmooth on the infide, but rough on the outfide, by reafon of many Fibres or Threads by which it is knit to the inner of the common Coats. If is full of Veins, and is a production of'the Rim of the Belly : for as the prepa^ ring Vefìèls defeend over the Share-bone into the Cod, the Rim makes a Cafe for them for their defence and fecurity, and reaches with them down to the Stone, encompaffing it as well as them. Into this Coat is the Mufcle inferted that fufpends the Stone, ( which we fhall defcribe pre- fently. ) Some make two Coats of this, the outmoft of which retains ' the flame oijheath-like above-mentioned ; and the" inner they call the red Coat, from its colour; but indeed this latter is nothing elfe.but the fore-, faid Mufcle fpreading it felf broad and thin on the Sheath-like Coat. The laft and inmofi, which immediately cloaths the Stone, (being the fecond proper one) is called the nervous, and other wife the white, Membrane, being thick and ftrong, and of a whitifh colour. It feems to arife from the outer Coat of the preparing Vefìèls, and is rough on its infide next the Stone, but fmooth and flippery on its outfide. Theh Muf. Each Stone is fufpended or hangs by a Mufcle called Cremafler^ or the ik'- fufpender. Thefe Mufcles arife from the Ligament of the Share-bone, and defcending by the procefs of the Rim of the Belly ( before fpoken of)
are inferted into the Sheath-like Coat, which they Itrengthen, the better to fuftain the weight of the Stones ; and in the aft of Copulation are faid to pull up the Stones, and thereby to fhortenj:he ways the Seed has to pafs. Paraflau. On the top or back as it were of each Stone there lies a longifh, whi- tifh and fomewhat round body, diftinguifhable very eafily from them, though not of much an unlike fubilance ; onely they are not fo firm and compact as the Stones are. They are named Parafiate or Attendersi becaufe they wait as it wrere on the Stones ; and alfo Epididymides', be- caufe they are placed upon the didymi or Twins, by which name the Stones are otherwife called. They confili ( as tine Stones do ) wholly of Vefìèls running this way and that way, all which are united into one Thread or Chord, which is continued into the deferent Vefìèl, of which in the next Chapter. The ufe of the From what has been already difcourfed of thefe Parts, tlieir ufe appears smet and to be, to make and elaborate the Seed, for the propagation or the kind. Para ara. ^^ ^ jyjatter out 0f which the Seed is made, feems to be onely the Arterial bloud, unlefs one mould admit fome Animal fpirits conveyed hi- ther by the Nerves arid mixed therewith. But feeing any inoicuiations of the Nerves with the Arteries is a thing not yet difcovered either irt thefe or any other parts, I incline to believe that the Nerves onely con- tribute fenfe to thefe parts, that the Animal may have the greater pleafure. in
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowe ft Belly or Paunch. 47
in Copulation. A fecondary ufe or rather effect of the Stones, is to caufe
courage and generofity in the Horië ; for we obferve that our Ston'd Horfes are generally much higher-fpirited than Geldings. |
||||||
|
CHAP. XXIII.
'Of the Deferent or Ejaculatory Ve f e Is, the Seed-bladders
and the Projtates. HAVING done with rhofe Parts that prepare and elaborate the Seed,
we come next to thole that are the Store-houies or Repositories of it, from whence it is ejefted in Copulation. And of thefe the firft are the deferent or back-carrying veflels, otherwife called Ejaculatory or fquirting, becaufe in thofe Animals that have no Seed-bladders to ilore up the Seed in ( fuch as Dogs and the like) it does immediately fquirt through thefe VelTels from the Stones in Copulation : though in others that have Seed-bladders ( as Horfes have ) it is continually à-palTìng by thefe Veflels from the Stones to the Bladders by little and little as it is prepared. Thefe deferent Veffels are two, one on each fide ; they begin at the Deferent Vef-
fmaller end of the parafi am (defcribed in the former chapter) and areiW/- indeed but a continuation of them. They are whitiih and pretty hard ; not hollow like a Vein, but more like a Nerve, for their cavity is hardly difcernable, unlefs the Seed-bladders befull of Seed, and fo it regurgitate as it were into thefe Veffels, as I have fometimcs obferved. As loon as they are arifen from the Parafiate, they afcend ftreight out of the Cod into the Belly by the lame proceJs of the Kim of the lieJJy by which the preparing Veffels defcended. Being entred the Belly, by and by they crofs over the Ureters from the outfide to the infide of them, and taking a little compafs they turn back again under the Bladder till they arrive almofl at its neck, ( towards which they grow wider than before) and there their fides open into the Seed-bladders, into which they dcitill the Seed ; notwithstanding tbemfelves Hill keep on their courfe as far as the Pifs pipe between the Proftates, but are grown much ifnallcr before they reach them. Thefe Veflels ferve as Conduit-pipes for the Seed to drill along from the Stones to the feminal Bladders ; and through their necks, that reach from the Bladders to the Pifs-pipe, does the Seed iiTue in the adì: of generation. The place where the Seed is flo'red up and preferved, is the Seed-Had- Secd-Uad-
ders. Dr. Wharton affirms that in an Horfe " they confili of two parts,ders- " of which one is a mere membranous or skinny Bladder, the other g|an " dulous. The Bladder, he fays, he has found fix inches long and near " three broad, although it was empty and not opened ; but it feem'd ca- " pable of being flretched out to a greater length and width, if' it had " been filled. If one opened t&3 bottom of this Bladder, and put a Probe " into it, the Probe paffed obliquely towards the Pifs-pipe, and entred " into it through the fame hole with the deferent Veffd of the fame fide. "The
|
||||||
|
a 8 The Anatomy of an Hor f e.
"The other part of thefe Bladders, which we called glandulous, was
"thicker, and broader on that fide which joy ned to the Pifs-pipe; and " where the deferent Veflels were inferted, without defcending towards " the bottom, it grew thinner and thinner like a wedge. The fubftance "of this glandule was not much unlike to that of the Stones, but of a " more clayie colour, and had holes within it To apparent that they would " admit an indifferent Probe : all which holes were united into one com- " mon duft, namely before they reach the Vrethra. For putting a Probe " into any one of the faid holes, it was driven eafily and without any lett " into that common paflàge. But the paflàge it felf did not quite pene- " trate the Pifs-pipe, but was covered with the thin and fpongie Mem- " brane of the Vrethra. Through this Membrane is the fpermatick Mat- " ter ftrained in Copulation. Thus far Dr. Wharton in his 30. chap, of the Glands. Now as for my felf, I could never obferve fo great a diffe- rence of one part of the feminal Bladders from another, as that one ïhould appear membranous and the other glandulous. And I would not imagine that fo skilfull an Anatomifl fhould miftake the Proftates for a part of the . faid Bladders, though thefe are the onely Parts that to me appear glandu- lous thereabouts. All the Seed-bladders that I have obferved have been much of a like fubftance, though perhaps a little thicker in one place than another : they are whitim and very ftrong, being within all full of little Cells like Pomegranates. They have no communication the one with the other ; for as their bottoms or thicker ends bunch out alittle on each fide of the Bladder (as you fee in the Figure ) fo their fmailer ends or mouths, that are neareft to one another; do each of them open apart into the deferent Veflèl of their refpedtive fide, by whofe neck they pour out their Seed in Copulation into the Pifs-pipe. The Seed comes into them out of the deferent Veflels, arid goes out of them again into the fame Veflels, at one and the fame paflàge or orifice. Dr. Wharton fays, that the feminal Matter contained in them differs much from that which is made in the Stones : whence he concludes that the Seed-bladders receive not the matter which they contain, from the Tefticles by the deferent VefTels, but do elaborate it in their own glandulous fubftance ; and he calls it Seed of a peculiar kind. For my own part I have not difcovered any difference, to fpeak of, betwixt this and that which I have fome- times feen in the deferent Veflels, when the Bladders have been very full- nor is it probable they can be of a different kind or nature, feeing there is that manifeft communication between the deferent VeHeh and the Bladders, that thefe latter feem to contain or receive nothing, but what the former bring into them. Nor do I think that any Part does elabo- rate any Liquor that can with any propriety be called Seed, except the Tefticles contained in the Cod, whofe fole office and prerogative it is to make it. Their «[e. The ufe of thefe Bladders (as hath been faid) is to receive the Seed
from the deferent Veffels, and to referve it untili the time of Copulation. Now the Seed may (to fatisfy the curiofity of the Ingenious Anatomifl) be plainly feen, if you take the Bladders in your hand and fqueeze them with your finger ; for by fuch fqueezing you mail force the feminal Mat- ter into the Pipe of the Yard, where you may by diflè&ing the Yard or opening that Pipe plainly fee it. Or if you think it too much to take that pains, you may by diflè&ing the Bladders themfelves fee it; but then you lofe the fight of one of the curious contrivances of Nature, which
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch. 45»
which is a little Caruncle or Kernel that is placed at the mouth of the
hole where the Seed diftills into the Yard, which Caruncle is by Nature placed there, to prevent the iffuing forth of the Seed when there was no need tor it ; for the continual gleeting of it, which would have happened but for this Caruncle, would be extremely prejudicial to the Creature. This Caruncle in Men being impaired or injured by the Venereal Diftem- per, or by their overtraining themfelves in the aft of Copulation, is ge- nerally by Phyficians believed to be the caufe of the running of the Reins. And this Difeafe Horfes are not exempted from, although it doth not happen to them oh the like occafions as to men it doth; for this Difeafe, which in Horfes we call the mattering of the Yard, happens to'them upon their catching fuddain colds alter hard riding: Likewife over-hard riding it felf will bring it ; and very often it is caufed by weak- nefs occafioned by great poverty and the like. In the next place we come to the Projlates, which are fo called fromïfo fro-
their ft and ing hef or e the Seed-bladders. They are Glandulous bodies, ^""^„r, almoft of the fame nature and fubftance as other Glandules of the Body, bignefs and They are fituated at the root of the Yard above the fphinfter Mufcle off- rile Bladder, being in number two, on each fide of the neck of the Blad- der one ; their quantity about the bignefs of a fmall Burgamy Pear. They are of an oval figure, onely fomewhat flat, and are covered with a very thick Coat to hinder the oily fubftance with which they are well ftored, from iffuing forth. They have Veins, Arteries, Nerves and Lymphedufts; and befides,7fc«- Veffeis
many Pores that open into the Vrethra. In moll Creatures, efpecially and ?mu the leflèr fort, thefe Pores are fcarcely difcernible in an healthfull fiate, but in an Horfe they are very plain, and open into the upper part of the Pifs-pipe about an inch diftance from the infertion of the deferent Vefìèls into the fame. Dr. Wharton has told twelve fuch little holes, before each of which as they open into the Pifs-pipe, is placed a little Gland, about the bignefs of a grain of Muftard feed, which ferve to hinder the entrance of the Urine into thefe holes, as it runs by them out of the Bladder. The nature and ufe of the Liquor that is contained in thefe Proflates, Their ufe,
and that iffues out of them into the Pifs-pipe, is fomewhat difficult to de- termine. Some take them to be a kind of Tefticles, and think that they make a fort of Seed, which though it be not of fo noble a nature as that which is made in the Tefticles contained in the Cod, yet is as neceilàry for generation : feeing fuch Men as are cut for the Stone become incapa- ble of generation, if the Stone be fo big and ragged as much to tear the Proflates in pulling of it out. But it is likely, fuch barrennefs happens not fo much from the tearing of thefe, as that the ends of the deferent Veffëls are torn likewife, or it may be the Seed bladders alfo : and fo when the Wound is healed up again, the fides of thefe Veffëls grow toge- ther, fo that they can neither contain nor convey into the Pifs pipe any Seed. It is probable therefore that this oily clammy Humour that the Proflates difcharge into the Pifs-pipe, is of a nature far different from that of Seed, even as themfelves are bodies of a far other nature than tltfe Stones are. For, as was fhewn above, the Stones are wholly vafcular, that is, confili wholly of VefTels; whereas thefe are glandulous, or ker- nelly. So that I believe this Humour ferves onely to make the Vrethra fupple and flippery, and to defend it from the acrimony or fharpnefs of the Urine. And
|
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfa
And thus we have done with all the Parts that make or retain the Secai
as for the Yard, which fome treat of in this place, becaufe it ferves for injecting the Seed into the Womb; we defcribed the Parts thereof above chap^xo. next to thé Bladder, becaufe it ferves as well for making water as for Copulation, and thither the Reader may pleafe to turn back. |
||||||
|
CHAP. XXIV.
Of the Parts minijiring to Generation in Mares, and Firft
of the Preparing Vejfels, fo called. IT was Galen's opinion, and from his authority, of many others, that
the Parts ferving for generation in the Female differed not from thofe of the Male faving in fituation ; the Male's Genitals being without the Body, and the Females within. And this diverfity of fituation they at- tributed to defedi: of heat in the Female, fo that the Genitals could not be thruft out of the Body as in the Male they are. But the truth is, they differ not onely in fituation, but in number, bignefs, figure, office and ufe, as will be apparent as well from the defcription of them, as from their reprefentation in the Figures. Preparing The firft in order are the preparing Veflels, Arteries and Veins. In
vejfels. thefe it was till of late believed that the bloud was prepared for the Stones
the readilier to be turned by them into Seed. But as when we treated above of the preparing Vedels of the Horfe, we fhewed that the Veins could not properly be called preparing Veflêls, becaufe they carry no- thing to the Stones, but bring bloud back again from them : fo in Mares we cannot allow the name of preparers or fpermatkk to be proper even to the Arteries themfelves, feeing neither Mares nor any other Females- have any true Seed. For their Stones are but improperly fo called, be- ing more truly Ovaries or Egg beds, as we ihall lhew by and by in the next Chapter. However we fhall retain the old name for diftinction's fake, and ftill call both Veins and Arteries preparing Vejfels. t. Arteries. The preparing Arteries of the Horfe we fliewed to be onely two, one on
each fide ; but in the Mare there are feveral, three or more on each fide. All of them arife out of the great Artery, below the Emulgents, fome higher, fome lower. They pafs down along with the Veins of their relpecirive fides, with which they are very much interwoven, but no where open one into the other. Some branches of them go to the Te fticles, fome to the Horns of the Womb, and fome to its Sheath, 2. Vem. The preparing Veins in the Horfe were two of each fide, though the
Arteries were but one ; yet in the Mare where the Arteries are leverai, the Veins are but one of each fide. The reafon whereof feems to be, That the Arteries in the Mare being not fo much intended for the nou- rifhment of her Genitals as of the Foal contained in her Womb, it was requifite there fliould be feveral VefTels for the bringing the greater plenty oi nourijbing juice for it; all or the greateft part of which being received by the Foal, there was not need of the like number of Veins to carry back
|
||||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowefi Belly or Paunch. 5; i
back the bloud that came along with it, that being very ineqnfiderable
for its quantity to what was imported by the Arteries. But now all the bloud brought by the preparing Arteries of the Horfe, ferving for no other ufe but for the nourithment of the Genitals, and for the making of Seed : As a lefs quantity of bloud will fuffice for thefe two ufes, and fo there is no need of a plurality of Arteries ; fo the bloud that is brought to the Genitals, is but a very fmall part of it fpent in performing thefe two offices, and therefore more Veins were neceflàry to carry the furpln- fage back again, feeing the motion of the bloud in the Arteries is far quicker than of that in the Veins. Thefe two preparing Veins then arife out of the Cava a little below the Emulgents, and neither of them from the Emulgent it felf, any more than in the Horfe, though in Men and Women the Left generally fprings from the left Emulgent. They join in like manner with the Arteries as we fhewed above that they did in Horfes, and go to all thofe parts of the Genitals to which we juli now ihewed that the Arteries run. When the Mare is not with Foal, the Arteries bring onely bloud for Their ufe,
the nourifliment of the feveral Parts into which they are inferted : but when fhe is with Foal, they bring befides the bloud a nutritious juice, ( which is Chyle, impregnated with fpirit, but not as yet perfectly chan- ged into bloud) for its growth and nourifhment, as we lhall fhew more af- terwards when we come to fpeak how the Foal is nourhhed in the Womb. And whether fhe be with Foal or not, the Veins ferve to carry back to the Cava and fo to the Heart, the bloud that is fuperfluous. |
|||||||
|
CHAP. XXV.
Òf the Tejticles or Stones in Mares, otherwife called Ova-
ries 5 and of the Trumpets of the Womb. THE Te flicks in Mares do not agree in their defcription with thofe Tht Tefticles]
of Horfes in any one particular thing, nor fhould I call them by that name, if the general miftake of fo many Ages ( in thinking the Fe- male's Stones to have the fame office with thofe of the Male ) had not made it neceflàry to retain that appellation, if I would be understood by vulgar Readers of what part I am treating. For it has been an old Opi- nion, that the Male and Female's Seed being mixed in the Womb, doth make the Conception ; and there are many that will not yet be beaten out of it. Whereas the Female hath no Seed at all, but their Tefticles ( fo called ) are as it were knots of Eggs, which being impregnated by the Male's Seed, one or more at a time, do each make a Conception. But of this more by and by. The Mare's Tefticles differ from the Horfes in thefe Particulars.
Firft, The Horfes Stones hang without the Body in the Cod, but the Meirpt***
Mare's lie within the cavity of the Belly, a little diftance from the horns «*"• of the Womb, to which they are knit by a ftrong Ligament |
|||||||
|
I Secondly,
|
|||||||
|
<- 2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Bignefs, and Secondly, The Mare's Tefticles are hardly half as big as the Horfe's,
figure. nor are they of the fame fhape, but more flat and thin, having no Para- fiata upon them. And befides, they are fomewhat uneven in their fur- ia ce, whereas thofe of an Horfe are fmooth. coat. Thirdly, The Horfes Tefticles are covered with four Coats, two com- mon, and two proper ; but the Mare's are clad onely with one for about
one half of them, and the other half with two ; the outer of which they have immediately from the preparing Veflèls that enter into them, but mediately from the Rim of the Belly. subftance, Fourthly and laftly, They differ very much from one another in their and ufe. fubftance and ufe. For we (hewed above in chap. ^^. that the Horfe's Stones did wholly confift of Seed-veflels turn'd and roli'd this way and that way : but the Mare's confili principally of numerous Membranes and fmall fibres loofely united to one another ; amongft which there are fe- veral little Bladders, about as big as a Peafe, fome bigger, fome lefs, that are full ot a very clear and thin liquor. Thofe that were of opinion r the Females made Seed as well as the Males, thought that thefe P' that are chiefly in the furface of the Tefticle, anfwered to the SeecT-t ders in the Male, and that the humour contained in them was true And whereas it might be objefted that it is far more clear and watery than the Male's Seed, they thought itfufficient to anfwer, that that was from the colder and moiiter nature of the Female, that could not con- coct it to that confiftency as the Male's is of. But the truth is, it is not ' Seed ; and if it were, there is no way whereby it could poffibly arrive at the Womb. For that which was reputed to be the deferent VeiTel, ap- pears to be nothing elfe but a lhort and broad Ligament for fixing the Te- fticle in its place ; for it has no cavity at all, but is of a folid, firm and clofe fubftance. Thefe Bladders therefore mull be concluded to be Eggs, anfwering to thofe of Fowl and other Creatures : which will be the more manifeft if you boil them, for then, as thofe that have tried it do affirm, they will have the fame colour, tailc and confiftency with the whites of Hens-eggs. Whence thefe Tefticles may more properly be called Ovaries or Egg-beds, Jwhofe Eggs are nourifhed by the Bloud-veflèls defcribed in the foregoing Chapter; and when upon Copulation one (or more) of them is made fruitlull by the Male's Seed, it feparates from the reft, and being received by the mouth of the Trumpet of the Womb, it defcends by it into the Horn, and fo to the bottom of the Womb, and there be- comes a Conception. And whereas it has been thought a ftrong argu- ment for the Female's having true Seed, and that thefe Tefticles made it, in that when they are cut out of the Body in Bitches, Hogs, or any other Creature, fuch Creatures are always barren afterwards ; this new Opi- nion ihews that there is no ftrength or certainty at all in that argument. For granting, what is moft certainly true, that Females that are gelt or fpay'd, have never any Young after ; yet it does not at all follow, that L therefore their Stones make and conferve Seed ; but onely that they con- tain fomething that is abfolutely neceflary for generation and conception :
but whether that be Seed or fomewhat elfe, is indifferent. And there- fore that Argument will be as ftrong for the Opinion that the Tefticles are Ovaries, feeing without the Eggs it is fo far from poffible that there ihould be a conception, that they are the very conception it fèlf. Of the Bloud-vejfels that run through the Tefticles we treated in the
foregoing Chapter under the name of Preparing Veflèls : As for their Nerves,
|
|||
|
Book! Of'the Lowe ft Belly or Pàuikk 53
Nerves, they fpring from the Intercoflal pair, and from the Nerves of
Osfacrum. Bartholin affirms that they have alfo Lymphedulls. There hath not been greater difpute about the matter of the Concep- tbeimmpeu
tion, than by what way any thing could go to the Womb or its Horns "^the Wmb- from the TefticJes to make it. Some have pretended to the difcoVery of Vefïêls or Pipes for conveyance thereof, which others altogether as skil- ful! Anatomifts could find no footfteps of. At laft Fatlopius atfigned this office to two Duels, which from their fhape he called Tuba or Trum- pets; and from him (as being the firft Inventer of them, or at lcaft the nrfl that afcribed this ufe to them ) they are commonly known by the name of the Fallopian Trumpets. He fays, " they are nervous and white, " arifing from the Horns of the Womb, where they are very flender, but " at a fmall diftancefrom it they grow wider, bending this way and that " way, till near their end, where ceafing their winding they grow pretty " large, and feem fomewhat carnous. ] Their ends next the Tefficles ate torn and jagged, and lie loofe, being freed from the Membrane that fu- ftains them the greateft part of their length. Their fubfiance feems rather membranous than nervous, ( as Fallopius Their f»b.
would have it. ) And they confift of two Membranes ; the inner is pro- Pf*6** c^' pagated from the inmoft Tunicle of the Womb, and the outer from the length, outmoft of the fame. Where they are wideft they will admit ones little finger, but towards the Horn of the Womb, they are not fo thick as an ordinary ftraw, but yet are pervious ; and where they open into the in- fide of the Horn, their Orifice looks like a little Teat. As to their length, it is fomething difficult to determine it exactly, becaufe they run fo to and again in their courfe ; but I believe they are Very near a quarter of a yard long. Their ufe is, both to ferve as two Funnels whereby fome fubtile particles 7ieir «ft-
or fleams may iflue from the Seed, that is injected by the Male into the Womb, to the Tefticles of the Female for the fecundating or making fruit- full the Eggs thcicof, one or more, according to the différent fpecies of living Creatures ; ( but it is very rare, that there is above one fo impreg- nated in a Mare, feeing it is fo feldom that any brings forth twins : ) and alfo when the Egg is fecundated by this means, and growing ripe as it were, drops off or feparates from the Tefticle, it is received by the jag- ged mouth of the Trumpet, along which it paflès till it arrive in the Horn of the Womb, into which (as was faid above) the Trumpet is in- ferted ; and on this confideration the old name of deferent Fejjels may Hill be granted them, from their condufting the Eggs from the Tefticle to the Womb. Now feeing the wide ends of the Trumpets that firfl re- ceive the Eggs lie loofe, and are not fattened to the Tefticle, it is probable that in Copulation thefe become turgid as well as all the other parts of the Genital, and with their jagged mouths clafp hold upon the Tefles (as a Lamprey's mouth faftens upon a ftone ) and fo convey to them a feminal air, and afterwards receive from them a fecundated Egg. |
|||||
|
1 * Chap.
|
|||||
|
t* a v The Anatomy of an Horfe.
|
||||||||||||
|
CHAP. XXVI.
Of the Womb and its Horns,
|
||||||||||||
|
The Jhape ' ■"* H E Womb of a Mare is lhaped much like the Greek Letter T, in
"hffi'l °* A which the fingle flroak that is ftreight, anfwers to the vagina or
Sheath, which receives the Horfe's Yard in Copulation, and the two crooked ftroaks that turn one the one way, and the other the other, are called Horns, becaufe they in fome fort referable them ; and that part of the Sheath where the Horns begin to feparate, being fomewhat wider than the reft, is the fundus or bottom of the Womb, where the Foal lies. For though in Dogs, Rabbets, &c. that have many young ones at one time, their burthen is contained wholly in the Horns of the Womb> as well as the Conception is firft made there ; yet in a Mare that common- ly brings forth but one at a time, it is otherwife ; for there is little or no- thing that belongs to the Foal, contained in them, except fome part of the Skins wherein the Foal is covered while it is in the Womb. lts /matton. The Womb is feated in the loweft part of the Lower Belly, in that wide
Cavity that is formed out of and invironed with the Hip-bones, the Share bone, and the os facrum. It is placed betwixt the Pifs-bladder and the Arfe-gut, and is firmly tied in its place by two pair of Ligaments. Lkaments. The fìril; pair arife from the Rim of the Belly, being ihorter by much
than the other, but broader, being for their lhape refembled to Bat's wings. They are of a membranous, loofe and foft fubftance, and are inferred into the Horns of the Womb, taking hold alfo of the Tefticles, and tying them both fall to the Hip-bones, from whence they fpring. The fecond pair of Ligaments fpring from the bottom of the Womb,
and are called the round or worm-like Ligaments. They afcend on each fide between the two Coats of the Rim of the Belly, towards the Share- bone, over which they pafs flaritingly, and then parting into many jags, as it were, they end near the clitoris. This alfo ferves to làften the Womb the more firmly in its place. Subftance. It is of a nervous or rather membranous fubftance, more compact and
clofe in Mares that are not with Foal, but more fpongie in fuch as are. It confifts of two Membranes, and a certain flefhy or fibrous parenchy- ma or fubftance between, unlefs one will make this a third Membrane. The outmoft Membrane is borrowed from the Rim of the Belly, and therefore is truly double as that is, though we reckon it but for one. This is very ftrong. The inmoft is not fo ftrong nor firm as it, but feems to be fomewhat pprpus. The middle fubftance betwixt thefe two is that which makes up the greateft part of its thicknefs at all times, but parti- cularly when the Mare is with Foal, it imbibes fo much of the nutritious Juice that flows plentifully hither at tnat time, that it is ftuft up to ai- moli an inch thicknefs. Veffels. Its Arteries are branches partly of the Preparing Arteries and partly
|
||||||||||||
|
■
|
||||||||||||
|
. Arteries. 0f the hypogaftrick. Thefe dojnpfculate or communicate by open mouths
one with another, but not fo with the Veins. They run along the Womb bending and winding, and not in a ftreight courfe, left they fhould be broken
|
||||||||||||
|
I
|
||||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowe ft Belly or Paunch. 55
broken when the Womb is extended to that vafl bulk as it is when the
Mare is with Foal. Its Feins fpring alfo from the preparing and hypogaflrick Veins, but a- Veins.
are much fewer in number than the Arteries. For Nature having formed thefe Parts not fo much for the benefit of the Individual, as for propaga- ting the Kind ; and the Foal while it is in the Womb receiving no nou- rifhment but what is brought to it by the Arteries, it was nece/Iàry that they fhould be large and numerous for conveying the greater plenty of it : but feeing the greater! part of that which is brought by the Arteries is fpent in the nourifhment of the Young and the Parts in which it is con- tained, a fewer number of Veins are fufficient to convey back again what is not fo fpent. The Veins do inofculate with one another like as" the Arteries did. It has Nerves from the Intercoftal pair, and from the Nerves of os z. Nerves.
facrum. Some have alfo obferved many Lymphedulh creeping along its furface, 4- ijmphe-
which one after another meeting into one, empty themfelves into the Mh' common receptacle of the Chyle and Lympha ; and thefe Ljmphedutts fome have miflaken for Milky-veins. Thus much of the Womb properly fo called : and what we have faid its Horns.
hereof, may be all applied to its Horns likewife as to their fubjlance and veffè/s. As for their figure, you may view it in the following Cut. Thefo Horns are lefs in Mares than in any other Creature that has them, in proportion to the bignefs of their Bodies. From their firfl rife from the Womb to their end, they grow by degrees narrower and narrower, and about their middle are the Trumpets of the Womb inferted into them. They have a worm-like or fucceffive motion as the Guts have, by which the Egg being received from the Trumpet is driven gently along till it come to the bottom of the Womb in Mares, and there becomes a Con- ception : but in fuch Creatures as bring forth many Young at one time, the Conceptions flay in tiie i-rorns till they are come to maturity, and never defcend into the bottom of the Womb till they are about to be excluded. By what has been faid, it appears, that the ufe of the Womb is to re- its »ƒ"«
ceive the Seed of the Male, from which Seed a certain air or fpirit fleams through the Trumpets to the Tefticles, where impregnating one or more Eggs, thofe that are fo impregnated, are conveyed by the Trumpets in- to the Horns, and by thelè into the bottom of the Womb, where they become Conceptions, and flay (according to Nature) fo long till all their Parts are fmifhed, and they are become perfecl: Animals of their proper kind ; and then the Womb being irritated by the motion and bignefs of the Young, does by the help of the Mufcles of the Belly, and the affi- f lance of the Midriff exclude it. But having defìgned a particular di£ courfe of the generation of Animals to be annexed to this Treatife, we fhall purfue it no further here. |
||||||
|
CHAP.
|
||||||
|
5 tf The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
|
|||||
|
CHAP. XXVII.
Of the Vagina or Sheath of the Womb, the Caruncles calta
myrtiformes, ( of the jbape of Myrtle-berries ) the Cli- toris and the external Privity. *
Vie Vagina ¥ 7t 7 £ fliall not need to enter upon the defcription of the Veflêls run-
w sheatb. \\ ning through the Sheath of the Womb, they being wholly the fame that are difperfed through the Womb it felf, and therefore the Rea- der may have recourfe to the former Chapter for them : nor is it neceflà- ry to fpeak much of its fubftance, that being alfo much like to that of the Womb, though not fo thick and ftrong, but more foft, nervous and fpongie. It is near half a yard long, being much of an equal width from one end to the other, but very uneven and wrinkled in its inner furface. In- to its lower fide (or that fide next the Belly ) a very little diftance from, the external Privity, is the neck of the Bladder inferted ; oppofite to which in its upper fide it is ftrongly knit to the Sphin&er Mufcle of the Arfe-gut. There is no fuch neck to diftinguiih or feparate the Sheath from the bottom of the Womb, as Anatomifts fay there is in Women : but the Sheath it felf feems to be widened into what I call the bottom of the Womb. the myrti- Whether there be any fuch Membrane that goes crofs the Vagina in fvtmcam- ]y[ares ^^ j^g never feCQ cover>d, as Anatomifts fay there is in Maids, I never made any carefull examination, but believe there is none. But as for tholê Caruncles or little kernelly knobs that are called myrtiformes, from their refembling the Berries of the Myrtle in fliape, they are to be found : yea they may be feen without diflc&inn, if one look near the Privity of a Mare when fhe is luftmll and defires the Horfe ; for as fhe opens the Orifice of the Vagina, one may difcern thefe Caruncles to ftrut out. They are faid to be four in number, the largeft of which Hands juft at the mouth of the Water-paflàge, which it helps, partly, to clofe up. Their ufe feems to be, by their roughnefs and unevennefs to caufe the greater pleafure to the Horfe in Copulation. The clitoris. On the fame fide of the Vagina with the Bladder is placed a long fpon- gie body called Clitoris, but lies a great deal farther within the Vagina than it is faid to doe in Women. For, that end of it which is next to the ^ outward Privity is feven or eight fingers breadth from it, whereas in Wo- men it is defcribed to be within an inch. Thofe that would make the generative Parts of the Male and Female exa&Jy to refemble one the other, fay that this body in the Female, anfwers to the Yard in the Male. And indeed it is of not an unlike fubftance, but is not the twentieth part fo big. It is foft and fpongie, but it is likeiy when the Mare is luftfull and defires the Horfe, it plumps up and fuflërs a fort of erection, being the principal feat of pleafure in the Mare. It has two pair of Mufcles be- longing to it, as well as the Yard of the Horfe. One pair is round, and fprings from the Hip bones : The other from the Sphincter of the Arfe- gut. Its Veins and Arteries fpring from thofe that are called Pudenda (or belonging to the Privity) and its Serves, (which are pretty large, to
|
|||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Pau?ich- 57
to make it the more fenfibie) arife from the fame origine with thofè that
are difperfed through the Sheath and Womb. As to the outward Privity, the Labia or Lips are the firft things tmtTbe marnai
oiler themfelves. Befides the common Coverings, to wit the Skin and £™££ ilelhy Membrane, they are ltuft with a little fpongy Fat. They ferve to The Nymphs. cover the outer orifice of the Sheath for comelinefs lake, and to delend it from the cold, and Infects, or other injuries. The clofing of thefe two makes that which is called the fijfure or chink. If one draw the Lips a little afide, then appear the Nymphs, fo called becaufe they Hand next to the Urine as it fpouts out from the Bladder, and hinder it from wetting the Lips. They are two, on each fide one, juft within the Lips, begin- ning at the jointing or middle of the Share bone, at the lower iide of the Privity, from whence they afcend clofe by each other to a little above half the breadth of the orifice of the Sheath, and end each in a. blunt cor- ner. Their fubfiance is partly flefhy and partly membranous ; they are foft and fpongie and of a red colour, having the fame Vefiels with the Clitoris. Befides their ufe to keep off the Pifs from wetting the Lips, they ferve, as well as the Lips, for clofing up and covering the mouth of the Vagina, at leali; fo much of it as they reach unto. And now we have done with all the Parts belonging to Generation,
both in Male and Female. Table IX. Reprefenteth the Cava and Aorta, the Kidneys, &c. and
all the Generative parts of a Mare. 'A Sheivetb the hollow Vein,
B The great Artery.
CC The Emulgent Veins.
DD The Emulgent Arteries.
E E The Kidneys.
FF The Deputy-kidneys.
GG The Vreters cut off.
HHH &c. The Spermatici Veins.
II The Spermatici: Arteries.
ii The Hypogajlrick Veins.
ü The Hypogajlrick Arteries.
KK The Tejiicles.
LL The Trumpets of the Womh.
II Their jagged Orifices.
MM The broad Ligament that fuftains them, and alfo connects the Tejli-
cles to the Horns, and both to the Hip-bones.
NN The Horns of the Wowb. OO The bottom of the Womb where the Foal lies. PP The Sheath of the Womb. QQThe Sheath cut open that the q Clitoris may appear,
R The Bladder of Zirine turned afide. S Its infertion into the Sheath near its Orifice. TT The outward Orifice of the Sheath. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
|
|||||
|
CHAP. XXVIII.
How the Foal is nourifhed in the Womb 5 of the Membranes
wherein it is wrapt, and the Liquors contained in them j and lajlly of the Navel-firing. HAVING defcribed all the Parts in Mares that do any ways ferve for
generation, and ftiewn their feveral ufes, I fhould put an end to this Firft Book, but that it may be convenient to fpeak fomewhat of the Young contained in the Womb, for the conceiving and generating of which all thefe Parts were formed. But this I lhall not do largely in this place, but onely fummarily and in ihort, referring the Reader for his fuller information arid fatisfa&ion to the Treatife of the generation of Ani- mals annexed to the latter end of this Volume ; where by obferving in what order and by what degrees the conceptions in other Creatures ar- rive to perfedt Animals òf their kind, he may by the rule of proportion conceive how they proceed in Mares alfo. m*> the Now before we come to fpeak of the Membranes that inveli ths Toung k mu- Foa]} &c which will be the fubject of this Chapter, it will be neceflary "' ' ' to premife fomething concerning the ways or Veilels by which nourifh- ment is conveyed to it, whereby it grows from no bigger than a Bee to fo vail a bulk. The firft opt- It is not long ago till when it was the general opinion, that the Young nhn. was nourifhed by the Dam's Bloud ; namely, that the hypogaftrick and fome of the fpermatick Veflèls of the Dam did inofculate with or open
into the branches of the umbilical or Navel-veflèls of the Young, and fo the bloud run from one to the other in a ready courfe. And this Opinion' had fo far prevailed, and was taken for fo certain a truth, that after the Young was excluded out of the Womb, and mud needs receive its nóu- ridimene by the mouth, they believed that it was nourifhed by Bloud ftill : For they thought that Milk was firft Bloud, onely it changed its colour, and its tafte partly, in the white Kernels of the Dugs. This was a ftrange fancy, that Nature fhould thus doe and undoe, firft turn Chyle into Bloud, and then turn that Bloud again into a Liquor refembling Chyle, and in truth differing very little trom it. But this by the way. Ï fay, the Dam's Veflèls were fuppofed to inofculate with the Navel-vef- fels of the Young ; whereby Bloud was carried to it for its nourifhment : but they never troubled their heads about making it out how the Young fhould be nourifhed before it had ever a Navel-veffèl, or before ever the Conception adhered to any part of the Womb. Now the Embryo or firft draught ( as I may call it ) of the Young is formed in all Creatures before the Navel-veflèls, and it is grown to a pretty bulk before they are fo well perfected as to be capable of receiving any Liquor into them. And when they are perfectly formed, and can perform their office, whatever it be ; in fome Creatures, as particularly in a Sow, they never reach further than the Chorion or outmoft Membrane wherein the Pig is included, and therefore have no contaci: or communication with thofe of the Sow, whofe Veins and Arteries reach no further than the inmoft Membrane of • the
|
|||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowefl Belly or Paimch. 5P
the Womb. And in the Creature we have now under confideration,
namely a Mare, it is near fix months before the Chorion adhere to the in- moft Membrane of the Womb, ( which how it does, we mall ihew by and by. ) Now thefe obfervations plainly demonflrate that the Young cannot be nouriihed by the Bloud of the Dam, feeing there is no way whereby the Bloud can be conveyed to it, in any Creature for a confi- derable time, and in fome Creatures, at all. Others fufficiently difcovering the errours of this Opinion, and incli- The fecond
ning to believe that the Young in the Womb was nouriihed with the °tvmn- fame Liquor while it was there, as it is after it comes into the World, namely Chyle a little refined, and not finding any other convenient ways (as they thought) whereby the Chyle could be conveyed to the Womb, have fancied that they have found Lacteal or Milky veflêls going thither direcTrly either from the great Kernel at the centre of the Mefentery, or from the common receptacle of the Chyle it felf : but others that favour not this Opinion, fuppofe thofe Veflêls that thefe have fancied to be Lac- teals, to be onely Lymphedufrs, conveying the Lympha or fuperfluous Water from the Womb to the common Receptacle, whither the Lympha. of all the other Parts contained in the Lower Belly is by the fame Veiïèls likewife difcharged. So that though this Opinion be very plaufible for its inventing fo ready a way for the Chyles coming to the Womb ; yet it is very probable that thefe fuppofed Milky-veins are nothing but Lym- pheducls, and then the whole Suppofition falls to the ground. But yet though this fecond Opinion be miftaken in the Veflêls thzt The third mì
bring the Liquor to the Womb whereby the Young is nouriflied, yet it imftop'»"*- feems to have hit right on the Liquor it felf. For as it cannot be Bloud for the reafons I have before given, fo there is no other Liquor in the Body but Chyle, that is capable of being turned into nourifhment. For though they call that Juice, by which Bodies come to maturity are nouriihed, (andalfothe Young in the Womb) nutritious Juice, yet that name onuly denotes irs etffct, and does not fuppofe that a Liquor quite diftinct in nature from Bloud or Chyle is underftood by that denomina- tion : but it does indeed partake of the nature both of the Bloud and Chyle; for it is Chyle a little exalted or impregnated with the fpirit and life of the Bloud. Now this Juice arrives at the Womb by thefe ways. Firft the Chyle afcending from the common Receptacle by the tho- racick Duel to the right Ventricle of the Heart, it is fent out from thence together with the Bloud into the Lungs, from whence they both return to the left ventricle of the Heart, out of which they are ejecied into the Aorta or great Artery, by which means the Chyle runs con- founded with the Bloud into all the Parts of the Body ; but when the Dam is with Young we may conceive that a greater quantity of it may tend towards the Womb than to other parts : even as it is probable that more wheyifh or watery Humour accompanies that Bloud that flows by the Emulgent Arteries to the Kidneys, than that which flows to other Parts, becaufe Nature has appointed the Kidneys for the feparating of it from the Bloud. I fay it is alfo likely that more Chyle defcends to thé Womb by the fpermatick and hypogaftrick Arteries than to any other part, becaufe a great quantity of it is to be feparated from the Bloud here for1 the nourifliment of the Young. Now thefe Arteries, as all others in the Body, do divide themfelves fo often, till they end in very fmall capillary or hair-like threads, which terminate in the inmoft Membrane of the K Womb
|
||||
|
$0 The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
Table X. Shews the Fwtus or Young lying covered in the Wombï
the Stomach, Guts, &c. being removed. AA &c. The body of the Matrix.
BB The Horn of the Womb on the left fide.
DDD The Liver.
È The Bladder.
FFThe Ligamenti of the Bladder.
OG The Vreters.
HH The /Hack Veffels.
II The Hypogaftrick Veffels.
MM The Share-lone cut afunder.
N The Privity or Vulva.
O The Dock.
PP The Midriff.
QjThe neck of the Bladder joined with the /heath of the Matrix.
SS The Veffels ca/Jedp\xdendx,difperfedinto and about the Lips ofthePrivity.
Womb. But all the branches of thefe Arteries about the Womb are much
larger when the Female is with Young than at other times, which is ari argument that nourifhment is indeed brought by them. The greater!: difficulty is, how it can be difcharged out of the Arteries into the Womb, and no Bloud go along with it. To folve this difficulty we muff confi- der, that the Particles of feveral Liquors are of different figures, as fup- pofe fome round, fome corner'd, &c. Now we know that if two bodies of the fame bulk be one round, and another fourfquare, the round will go through a hole which the fourfquare body will not, and on the con- trary the fourfquare body will pafs through a hole that the round will not ; accordingly as the hole is round or fourfquare. And this may be the reafon that the Chyle can pafs out of the fmall ends of the Arteries, and yet the Bloud cannot accompany it, but muff return back by the Veins. And befides the difference of figure, it is probable the Particles of that Chyle that ouzes into the Womb, are of much fmaller bulk than thofe of the Bloud, feeing it is a much thinner and watery body ; and therefore may as eafily be feparated from the Bloud into the Womb, as the Urine is by the Kidneys into the Ureters. And to further and affiffc this feparation fome do believe there is a certain fermentation in the Womb, even as there is in other Parts of the Bódy, where other Juices are feparated from the Bloud, as Choler in the Liver, and according to fome, Urine in the Kidneys. But be the feparation by what means it will j that there is fuch a thing is moft certain, and how the Young comes to partake of it for its nourifhment we fljall next (hew. The Mem- While it was believed that a Conception was made of the Male and Fe- branes that maie's Seed mixed together, it was fomewhat difficult to imagine how fuch mJp'hk' a fluid fubftance fhould fo fpeedily acquire focompatì:Membranes to in- clude it, as we fee it has in a few days. But now that it is believed that a Conception is nothing elfe but an Egg dropt off from the Tefticle and received into the Womb, that difficulty vanifhes, for thofe Membranes do originally inveli the Egg, even as we fee the like Membranes lie under the ihelk of the Eggs of Fowls, and encompaffing the whole. Thefe Membranes are at the firfl but two, called Amnios and Chorion; but after a while there is a third commonly called Allantoides, or the Pudding-like Membrane. That
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowejl Belly or Paunch. ét
That Membrane or Skin that immediately infolds the Young is called The Amnios.
Amnios. It is very thin, fmooth and clear, and in it is contained that Liquor out of which the Young is firft formed, and by which it is after- wards nourifhed. That Liquor out of which the Young is formed, is originally in it, even while the Conception is under the form of an Egg : but that by which the Young is nouriihëd and its Parts increafed, fweats into this Membrane immediately out of the Chorion or outmoft Mem- brane for the firft months, till the Navel-ftrihg is perfe&ed, and that there grows a new Membrane betwixt thefe two, that contains a peculiar fort of Liquor, as we fhall lhew by and by. But the Juice that is in the Amnios from firft to laft ( except that out of which the Embryo is formed) is Chyle, which at firft fweats into it out of the Chorion, and afterwards is conveyed into it by the umbilical Arteries of the Young, who firft re- ceived it by its umbilical Veins. For thefe Arteries fend many branches into the Amnios, which difcharge themfelves into it, even as the hypo- gaftrick and fpermatick Arteries do into the Womb. Now this Liquor that is thus collected in this inmoft Membrane, does at firft nourifh the Embryo or firft rudiments of the Young by appofition, that is, thofe ru- diments do attraft to themfelves fuch particles of the Liquor as are fuita- ble for them, and thereby their bulk comes to be encreafed by degrees : but as foon as the Young has its Mouth and Stomach perfe&ed, it then fucks it up and drinks it in by its Mouth, and it paries by the fame ways to the Heart as it does after the birth. The fecond Membrane, that is originally in the Egg, and that invefts ito chorion*
the Young from firft to laft, is called the Chorion. This is fomewhat thicker than the Amnios ; it is fmooth on its infide, but rough and une- qual on its outfide. This Membrane drinks up that nutritious Juke that is emptied into the Womb from the hypogaftrick and fpermatick Arte- ries, which Juice is again filtred as it were out of it into the Amnios for the nourilhment of the Young. For the Liquor contained in this Mem- brane is altogether the fame with that of the Amnios. Now this Mem- brane for feveral months ( five or fix) adheres not to the Womb in any part, but the Young that is clad with it, lies as loofe in the Womb, as a Bladder in a Foot-hall that is not at all tied to the leather. ( Thus I fay it is in a Mare, though in moft other Creatures this Membrane begin much fooner to be faften'd to the Womb. ) But at length firft of all there begin to grow in the furface of it certain reddifh fpecks or caruncles no bigger than a Vetch, and at the fame time the Membrane grows thicker, and there appear innumerable Vefiels in it. And thefe Caruncles as they become more in number, fo they grow broader in dimenfion, in- fomuch as at laft they are fpread all over the Chorion, fo that on its out- fide it feems to have loft the nature of a Membrane, and to have become a placenta or Womb-cake.At the fame time that thefe Caruncles grow thus on this Membrane, the Navel-ftring penetrating the Amnios is inferred into it, and thofe numerous Vefiels that are feen in the Chorion, are onely branches of the Navel-arteries and Veins difperfed through it. And now the Chorion by means of the Caruncles that grow upon it, adheres to tile inner Mem- brane of the Womb, from whence the Navel-veins imbibe nutritious Juice and carry it to the Young for its fuftenance, (as fliall be further fliewed prefently, when we come tofpeakoftheNavef-ftring.) But the Caruncles do not flick fo faft to the Womb, but that they may be fepa- rated without tearing, much Iefs are there any Anaftomofes or Inofcula- K z tions
|
||||
|
£2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
tions of the Vefïèls that run through the Chorion with the hypogaflrick
or fpermatick Vefïèls of the Dam, as the Ancients believed. Nor is there in a Mare any of thofe Glandules that are commonly called Cotyledons or Sawcers, flicking to the inner Membrane of the Womb, into which the Caruncles of the Chorion are inferted, like an Acorn into its cup, fuch as are in Sheep and Goats : but the fo often mentioned Caruncles flick im- mediately to the Membrane it felf, and feem to ferve as Sponges to imbibe the nutritious Juice that plentifully bedews it ; which having done, the faid Juice is fuckt up by the mouths of the Navel-vein, as was laid before. Part of this Membrane does on each fide bag out into the Horns of the Womb. Allantoides. As foon as the Navel-firing has penetrated the Amnios, there begins to appear a third Membrane betwixt thefe two already defcribed, which contains a Liquor wholly different from what fwims in them ; for that we have fhewn to be Chyle, but this is the Vrine of the Young, which, while the Young is in the Womb, is not emptied out of the Bladder the common way, but there is a Pipe called ZJrachus that pafïês from the bottom of the Bladder out at its Navel, and empties the Urine into this Membrane, in which it is colle&ed to the quantity of many quarts. This Membrane is called Allantoides or Pudding-like, becaufe in many Crea- tures, as Cows, Sheep, &c. it is of that fhape, and feems to be onely the Vrachus a little widened. But it is of another figure in Mares ( as it is aifo in Women ) and is of the fame dimenfion with the other two already defcribed, incompaffing the whole Young. It is more denfe than they, and may be eafily diflinguiflied from them by this, that they are full of Vefïèls, but this has not one, that one can difcern. Although this Membrane appear not till the time aforefaid, yet 'tis like it was originally in the Egg ; and at its appearance the Chorion becomes empty, becauie there is now no longer pafìàge of any thing out of the Chorion into the Amnios, by reafon of this Membrane and its Liquor interpofing. Whence , the Chorion claps pretty clofe to the Allantoides, fo that they cannot be eafily feparated. In the Liquor contained in the Allantoides there fwim feveral gobbets that look like as if they were flefhy, but being pulled to pieces they appear skinny. They are fuppofed to be concretions of forne part of the nutritious Juice that may come along with the Urine into this Membrane, wherein by its long flay it curdles into thefe kind of bodies. But there is one more notable one, that is faid to grow on the Forehead of the Colt, of the fhape of a Tongue, and is called hippomanes, which, Tradition fays, the Mare is wont to eat as foon as fhe has foal'd ; wrhich if fhe do not, fhe will never care for her Foal. This they were wont to dry and powder, and to put into drink for a Love-potion, as if there were fome witchery in it. But fuch things I can fay nothing to, having never experimented them. This Membrane flicking pretty clofe to the Chorion, bags out on each fide into the Horns of the Womb as well as it. The Liquor contained in it, is Urine, as was faid above, which daily in- creafes in quantity, being imported into it by the Vrachus from the Blad- der of the Foal. |
|||||
|
Table
|
|||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft. Belly or Paunch, 6%
Table XL Shews the Belly of the Foetus opened, the better to ihew
the Umbilical Vefiels ; as alfo two of the Membranes laid open, in which the Fuetus is included in the Womb, with the Veins and Ar- teries branching into them. AA The Liver.
B the Sternum or Breaftbone.
CCC The Gut Colon.
D The Bladder of Vrine.
E The Urachus cut offjhort, becmfe the Allantoides, into which it is iti-
ferted, is not exprejjed. FF The Vmbilical Fein.
GG The TJmbilkal Arteries.
HHH &c. The Membrane Amnios.
II &c. The Membrane called Chorion, with the brant hes of the 7/mbilkal
Veins and Arteries difperfed through it. MM &c. The like branches running through the Amnios.
S The Caruncle called Hippomanes, which is f aid to grow on the Foal's
Forehead, but is indeed found in the middle Membrane called Al- lantoides. Laftly, We are come to the Vefiels that make up the Navel-firing, and The Kavd.
thofe are four, one Vein, two Arteries, and the Vrachus. Thefe are all ve^el'- infolded in a common Coat, and are wreathed one about another like a Rope. The greateft part of its length is contained in the Amnios, the reft in the Allantoides ; lor as foon as it has penetrated that, it is immedi- ately and dire&Jy implanted into the Chorion. The Vein is as big as both the Arteries, and arifes out of the hollow or one Vein.
lower fide of the Liver of the Young, and coming out fingJe with the reft at the Wawl, is immediately divided into two, which as they pais through the Amnios, fend fome twigs to it, and from thence continue their march through the Allantoides to the Chorion, in which and the Ca- runcles that grow upon it they terminate, being divided into innumerable branches. Its ufe is to imbibe the nutritious Juice and alfo the Bloud that is fuperfluous to the nourilhing of thefe Parts, and to convey them to the Young. The Arteries being two, do arife on each fide from the inner Iliacal Two Artt-
Branches of the great Artery, ( as is commonly held, but I have always "**■ obferved them to fpring from the Aorta it felf before the divifion ) and af- cending by the fides of the Bladder, they meet the Vein at the Navel, and there begin to be wreathed with it. Their march and infertions are the fame with thofe of the Vein, onely they fend more twigs into the Am- nios than the Vein doth. Their ufe is to carry vital heat and nourishment to the Parts that include the Young, to wit to the Amnios, Chorion and its Caruncles : and befides, its branches that are difperfed through the Amnios do diftill into it fome of that nutritious Juice which could not be turned into Bloud by once circulating through the Heart of the Young. Which Juice being collected in the cavity of the Amnios, is drunk in by the Young at its mouth, and (o paiïès the fame ways as it does after the birth. |
|||||
|
The
|
|||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
The fourth Veflêl included in the Navel-rope is called Vrachus, from
its office of conveying the Urine. It fprings from the bottom of the Bladder, and palling out of the Navel with the Vein and Arteries, as foon as it has pierced the Amnios it opens it felf with a full mouth into the ca- vity of the Allantoides, ferving as a Pipe to rack the Urine as it were out of the Bladder of the Young into this Membrane. For though the Young void no Excrements at the Fundament, while it is in the Womb, nor has i.ny Repofitory or Storehoufe for them faving its own Guts, (amongft wriich the Gut Caecum feems fitteli for that office : ) yet feeing it is nou- rilhed altogether w.tjh Liquor that has a good quantity of wheyifh hu- mour mixed with it /' Its better conveyance through thofe narrow ways by which it is tQ pafs, I fay for this reafon it is neceilàry there lliould be fome particular Repofitory for it, feeing it cannot return to the Darri again, and the Bladder of the Young is not capable of containing a fitth ( may be a tenth ) part of it ; and this Repofitory is the Membrane Allan- toides, into which it is poured out of the Bladder by the Vrachus. Thefe four Veflèls after they come out of the Navel are included in one
common Coat, which confifts of a double Membrane, borrowed front the Rim of the Belly the inner of them, and the outer from the flefhy Membrane or Pannicle defcribed above chap, ^ After the birth of the Foal, thefe Veflèls lofing their original ufe, the two Arteries ferve for Li- gaments to keep the Bladder in its place, and the Vein performs the fame office to the Liver ; but the Vrachus quite difappears. And thus much of the Membranes and Navel-vefTèls, that are included
in the Womb when the Mare is with Foal; and which at the Foaling make the After-birth or Cleaning as we call it : We might in this place further fhew, what Parts of the Foal are firfl formed, and which fooneft perfected; alfo in what particulars a Foal in the Womb differs from it felf when foaled ; and laflly we might have been more full in fliewing how it is nourifhed in the Womb : but the difcourfing of thefe things we purpofely wave in this place, and refer the Reader to the Dif- courfe of the generation of Animals annexed to this Treatife of Anatomy, wherein we will endeavour to fatisfy his curiofity to the uttermoft. Table XII. Shews the Foal taken out of the Matrix, both wrapt in
the Membranes with which it was covered, and alfo quite cleared of them; and laftly, the faid Membranes cut open, the Foal as yet remaining in them. Fig. I. Shews the Fcetus taken out of the Matrix, remaining in the |
fame pofture as in the Womb, and wrapt in its Membranes. AA the Membranes.
CC the hinder Legs of the Foal.
Fig. II. Shews the Fetus cleared of the Membranes, but continuing in
the fame pofture. BBB The Body of the Foal.
SS The common covering of the Vmbilical Veffels turned bach, that the
four Veffels contained in it may appear.
TT the Vmbilical Arteries. U The
|
||||
|
Book I. Of the Lowefi Belly or Paunch.
U The Vmhilical Vein.
X The Urachus. Fig. III. Shews the Foal, and two of its Membranes, as reprefented by
Dr. Walt. Needham. A The Foal lying within the Membranes.
B The Navel-rope whofe produttion E pajfes through the cavity of the uri-
nary Membrane toward the Chorion. CCC The Amnios. DDDD The place of the Chorion ivhich naturally grows to the urinary
Membrane, but is here removed, that the Fcetus may appear through the Amnios and urinary Membrane. E The production of the Rope which at this place is divided into two, and fo is cut off with the Chorion.
F The place in the Navel-rope, where the exit of the Urachus is defigrid, between two blots. Which Urachus is not indeed a part of the Membrane GG or Vrinary, but of CC or Amnios, and feems a du- plicature of it turned back even to the Bladder. GGG The urinary Membrane, (which here is not Allantoides, or of the fhape of a Pudding ) invefting the whole Fcetus as well as the Amnios ; which is common to it with a Man, Dog, Cat, Coney, and perhaps others that have Womb-cakes ; although they differ from one another in f ever al circumjlances. HH The progrefs of this Membrane as alfo of the Chorion into the Horns of the Womb. Whereas all the whole Fcetus befides, &c. lies in the bottom of the Womb, as a Child does in a Woman s. aaaa The Bloud-vejjels difperfed from the Rope into the Amnios, which the urinary Membrane wants wholly ; for the reft of the Rope is all fpent on the Chorion, and is cut off with it. |
||||||
|
CHAP.
|
||||||
|
.>
|
||||||
|
The Anatoviy of an Horfe.
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
66
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
C H A P. XXIX.
Of the Vàder.
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
THOUGH the Udder be an external Part of the Lower Belly,
yet we have deferr'd the defcription of it till this place, becaufe of the dependance that it has upon the Womb, and its office of yielding the fame nourifhment to the Foal when it is excluded out of the Womb, as it was nouriih'd by while it remain'd in it. It is feated at the bottom of the Paunch upon the lower ends of the
ftreight Mufcles ; very fmall, if compar'd to the bignefs of a Mare's Bo- dy, and to its bulk in many other Creatures. When the Mare gives no fuck, it almoft difappears. It eonfifls of the common coverings, Fat, a multitude of Vefiels, Glands
or Kernels, and Pipes to convey the Milk to the Paps that is feparated from the Vefiels in the Glands. Now though when the Mare gives fuck it feems to be but one roundifh
body, like a Bread with two Nipples, yet it truly eonfifls of two bodies, one being joined to the other onely by contiguity, for they have each their proper Vefiels, Pipes and Pap ; and do indeed appear to the eye to be diftincT; when the Mare is neither with Foal nor fuckles one. The greateft part of its bulk eonfifls of Glands, which are many in
number, though they be fo united to one another as to appear one con- tinued body to an unwary obferver, which they come to do from that Fat that fills up the fpaces between them, and is much of the fame colour with the Glands. There is one Gland greater than the reft feated at the root of each Pap. By means of thefe Glands it is that the Milk is fepa- rated from the Bloud, as fliall be further fhewn by and by. The Paps are round in fhape and of a fpongie fubflance, cloathed with
a thinner Skin than the reft of the Udder. At their head or end they have many little holes through which the Milk ifiues when the Foal fucks. The Udder has all forts of Fefels, Veins, Arteries, Nerves and Lym-
phedu&s ; and befides thefe it has peculiar Pipes for containing and con- veying the Milk. The Feins and Arteries are branches of the Hypoga- flricks, which proceed from the internal Iliack branches of the Cava and Aorta: 'tis likely there come fome twigs to it alfo from the external branches, which are called the Epigaflrick VefTels. Its Serves I have not examin'd, but 'tis very probable they are the fame with thofe difper- fed into the Matrix and Sheath, which are twigs of the Intercoflal pair and of fome of the Os facrum. Its Lymphedutts are pretty numerous, and tend, as all thofe of the Lower Belly do, to the common Receptacle of the Chyle at the centre of the Mefentery. It has alfo a peculiar fort of Vefiels, which may be called Milk-pipes,
being the Repositories or Store-houfes of the Milk. At the root of each Pap they are but one on each fide, but a great many fmaller ones coming from every part of the Udder difcharge themfelves into this one, when the Pap is fuckt by the Foal. But the Pipes belonging to one Pap have no communication with thofe that belong to the other, but in refpedi of thefe
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
Its fubjiance
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
Kimber:
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
its Glandi'.
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
ne Pap.
|
||||||||||||||||||||
|
The Vefiels
belonging to the Vdder. |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
the mil\-
fipes. |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
Book I. Of the Loweft Belly or Paunch. ëj
thefe VelTels the two fides of the Udder are as diftind Parts, as the Breafts
of a Woman are diftincT: one from another, as was noted before. Thefe Pipes have been miftaken by fome to be true Milky-veins, as if fome of the Milky-veins of the Mefentery reached hither. But feeing there are no footfteps of them in the track betwixt the Mefentery and Udder, we niay well deny them to be found in the Udder it felf. The ufe of the Udder is to prepare and feparaté the Milk for the nou- the ufe of tU
rifhment of the Foal, which it does in this manner. The Chyle of the vdder' Mare being mixed with her Bloud in the Heart, flows from thence along with it by the Arteries into all Parts of the Body in the circulation, but molt plentifully ( 'tis probable ) towards the Udder, even as it does to the Womb while the Mare is with Foal. The Arteries that convey it immediately to the Udder are the hypogaftrick Branches, which termi- nating in its Glands do fquirt or ftrain the Chyle through them into the Milk-pipes. And as for the Bloud that was mixed with the Chyle in the Arteries, that being of a thicker body, or confiding of Particles of ano- ther form, cannot enter the narrow pores of the Glands, and therefore is received by the fmall mouths of the Veins that are Iikewife infer- red into them. So that it appears to be an erroneous Opinion, That Milk is made of Bloud, if we fpeak of Bloud properly fo called ; yet feeing the Chyle, when it is confufedly jumbled with the Bloud in the Arteries, is not eafily diftinguifhable from it, but the whole Mals teems to be homogeneal or of the fame nature, in a large and lefs proper fenfe we may affirm it to be fo made. After that the Chyle is thus feparated by the Glands, it drills along the Milk-pipes, out of the fmaller into the larger, in which it is referved for the ufe of the Foal |
||||||
|
The End of the Firfi Book*
|
||||||
|
t THE
|
||||||
|
.:!•.'.■■ é}^
|
|||||
|
■
J
|
|||||
|
(e?)
|
|||||||||
|
THE
ANATOMY
O F A N
HORSE.
|
|||||||||
|
BOOK II.
Of the Middle Venter, or Cheft.
|
|||||||||
|
CHAP. I.
Of the invejiing and circumfcribing Tarts of the Cbe/i.
HAV ING finiihed the Firfl Book, wherein I have abfoked or
explained all the Maturai Parts contained within the Lower Venter, as well nutritive as generative, and annexed a Dif- courfe of the Foal in the Matrix or Womb ; order of direc- tion requires that in the next place I come to treat of the Middle Venter, the Thorax or Cheft, and the Vital Parts contained therein. Where, in this one Hep higher that I have climbed, I am methinks
much delighted to fee, how Nature in this place difports her felf, having as in a curious Cabinet lockt up, as it were, her moll exquifite pieces of Workmanihip, the Vital Inftruments, by whofe motion the life of the Creature is continued. Which motion is performed by fo juft a counter- poife, as no art of Man could ever with all their contrivances be able in the leaft to imitate. Nay Arifiotle, that wife Philofopher, who was in his time thought to be the neareft of counfel to Nature, was not able L a (notwith-
|
|||||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
( notwithftanding his incomparable fagacity ) to find out the true caufe
of the Vital motion, any more than he was, to find out the reciprocal Ebbing and Flowing of the Sea. The Place wherein thefe Inflruments are contained, is called the tho-
rax or Cheli, which is compofed of or environed with thefe Parts fol- lowing. Firif. it is bounded or circumfcribed, above, by the Colier-bones, and
below by the Diaphragm or Midriff; on the fore-part by the Breaft-bone, and on the hinder part by the Spondyls or Back-bones ; and on the two fides by the true and baftard Ribs and Intercoftal Mufcles. All which Parts are framed and compofed by Nature for the benefit of the Crea- ture, as well for the defence of the contained Parts from external Inju- ries, as for the ufe of Refpiration or breathing : both which are very needfull ; for without them the Creature cannot be preferved. Now that it might ferve for thefe ends, it was neceflàry it fhould confifl of fun- dry Parts ; for fhould it have been made all bony, it could not have been contracted and dilated as occafion ferved, whereby the Lungs could not have had the liberty to play as now they have : And if it had been wholly ileihy, then would not the contained Parts have been fufficiently fenced. It is therefore made partly bony, partly griftly, and partly flefhy, that it might the better perform both the offices aforefaid. In the next place I come to fpeak particularly to the Invefting Parts
of the Chef!:, fome of which are Common, and others Proper. The Common invefting or containing Parts are the fame as the Lower
Belly hath, namely the Scarf-skin, the true Skin, the flefhy PannicJe, the Fat, and the common Membrane of the Mufcles. Of all which ha- ving difcourfed at large in the Firft Book, we ihall fay nothing of them here. The Vroper containing Parts of the Cheft are the Mufcles, the Bones,
the ? leur a or Membrane that cloaths its infide, the Midriff and the Medi- aftinum, which is the Skin that goes acrofs from the Breaft to the Back, and parts the Lungs, called by fome, the Partition-wall. |
||||||||||||||||||
|
7°
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
By what
parts the Thorax is bounded.
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
Its common
invefting
Parts.
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
Its proper
containing Parts. |
||||||||||||||||||
|
Its contained
Parts. |
The contained or invefied Parts, are the Heart with the Heart-bag
|
|||||||||||||||||
|
called the Pericardium, and by fome the Purfe of the Heart, the Lungs
and part of the Weazand or Wind-pipe, by Anatomifts called Afpera Ar- teria, or Rough-artery, and feveral Veflels, with the Trunks of Vena cava and Arteria magna, whofe afcending branches are underpropped by the Thymus, or Kernel in the Throat. |
||||||||||||||||||
|
CHAP.
|
||||||||||||||||||
|
Book IL Of the Middle Venter, or Chefi 71
|
||||||
|
CHAP. II.
Of the Mufcles of the Middle Venter or Cheft, called the
Intercoftal Mufcles. TH E R E are feveral pairs of Mufcles that lie upon the Cheft on the
outfide of the Ribs ; but becaufe one may eafily enough cut open the Cheft for examining the Parts contained in it, without defacing any part of thofe Mufcles, we fhall omit to fpeak of them in this place, re- ferring the Reader to the Book of the Mufcles ; and here onely defcribe the Intercoftal, which in laying open the Breaft, whiles one breaks the griftly ends of the Ribs, happen part of them to be defaced. Thefe Mufcles are called Intercoftal from their being placed letween the intercoftal ,
Rihs, and filling up the fpaces between them. Betwixt every two Ribs^f^" "ti there are placed two of thefe Mufcles, the one lying upon the other; ca e ' the uppermoft being called the External, and the undermoft the In- ternal one. The External one takes his rife from the lower part of the upper?**External.
Ribs, and ends in the upper part of the lower. The Internal takes his rife contrary to the former ; for it arifes or The internai,
takes its original from the upper part of the lower Rib, and ends in the lower part of the upper. Now it is to be underftood that thofe are called the upper Ribs that are
next to the Head, and thofe the lower, that are next to the Paunch. And as thefe Mufcles do diner as to their original and infertion, fo like-
wife in the courfe of their Fibres ; for although they be both furhifhed with oblique or flanting Fibres, yet they run contrary ways, croffing one the other, and making as it were a St. Andrews Crofs, or the letter X. Thefe Mufcles are in number fixty four, that is to fay on each fide ttelrmmben
thirty two, there being on each fide of the Horfe feventeen Ribs, and between every Rib two Mufcles, as I have before intimated. Now the allion of thefe Mufcles is to affift Refpiration by widening, their a8hn.
and contracting the Cheft. Firft the external ones ferve to raife the Ribs and draw them backward, whereby the Cavity of the Cheft is enlarged, and thereby free room made for the Air to enter into the Lungs in Infpi- ration, or taking in the breath. And on the contrary the internal pull in the Ribs by drawing them flanting downwards towards the Breaft-bone, Whereby the Cheft is ftraitned, and thereby the Air, wherewith the Lungs are puff'd up, expelled, which action is called Expiration, or breathing forth. But thefe Mufcles are not of themfelves alone fuiBcient for thefe actions, but they affift towards them, being aided by the other that lie upon the Cheft, by the Midriff] and by the Lungs themfelves. |
||||||
|
CHAP.
|
||||||
|
y2 The Anatomy of an Horje.
CHAP. III.
Of the Pleura, or Coat which invefts or lines the Ribs on
the Infide. THIS Coat or Skin called the Pleura, is the Skin which covereth
all the Ribs on the infide of the Cheft, being of the fame nature and ufe here, as the Peritoneum or Rim of the Belly is in the Lower Belly. It is alfo of the fame fubftance as the Rim of the Belly is, but much ftronger and thicker, though Riolanus affirmeth the contrary as to Men. It is as it were of a middle nature or temper, that is, neither too hard
nor too foft ; not too hard, left it ihould not reach and yield in the act of Refpiration, and fo hinder the motion of the Cneft ; neither too foft, left the motion of the Cheft ihould violate it : but it is rather hard than foft, the better to defend the Vital Parts. The original It is believed to take its original from the Coats of the Nerves of the of ri» pleura Spinai Marrow, which come out of the Back-bones (or vertehrce of the w Rib-skin. Bacj^ iflt0 ^ q^ and is therefore thought to be continued with the Coats of the Brain : wherefore it is obferved to be thicker upon the back part of the Cheft than any where elfe, where it flicks fo clofe to the Back- bones, that it can hardly be feparated. It is all over double, that the Intercoftal-vefiels might run without
danger between its Membranes, and by it be preferved from the hard- nefs of the Ribs, which would be apt tö violate or break them. The outward Skin of this Coat, namely that which is next to the Ca-
vity of the Cheft, is harder and thicker ; and the inward (which is faft- ned to the Ribs ) is fofter and thinner. Now between thefe two Skins is bred that mortal Difeafe (in Men) called the Pleurifie, by which the ne* ver to be forgotten Doftor Willis, ( for being in his time the honour of his Univerfity and Country ) was notwithstanding the great pains he took in the inquiry into and finding out remedies againft this Difeafe, (as his learned Works make appear, by which great benefit hath accrued to others) was, I fay, himfelf by the tyranny of it taken from amongft the Living. its Perfora- This Pleura is perforated in many places, for the Ingate and Outgate thns. of the Vefiels. For above, it letteth out the Jugular and Axillary Arteries and Veins, and below, through the Midriff, .the Trunks of the hollow
Vein and great Artery. Befides where it receiveth in the Nerves of the wandring pair, the Windpipe, and both letteth in and out the Gullet. its Veffds. Its proper Veffels are, Veins from the Vena fine pari, or Vein without a pair, and from the upper Intercoftal Vein. Its Arteries fpring alfo from the upper Intercoftals (as thofe from the Subclavian) which def- cend to about the feventh or eighth Rib : below which it receives twigs of Arteries from the back part of the defcending great Artery. It has as , many pairs of Nerves ( wanting one ) as there are Joints in the Back- bone the whole length of the Cheft : for betwixt each Joint there comes out a pair ; but then the uppermoft and loweft Joints being reckoned for |
||||
|
Boole II. Of the Middle Venter, or Che ft. 73
the two extremes, (and nota pair of Nerves for either extreme) there
mull be one pair of Nerves lefs than there are Joints. The Joints there- fore ( or vertebra J being feventeen, there mull onely fixteen pair of Nerves be reckoned to the Cheli. Now thefe Nerves as foon as ever they come out of the Joint, are immediately divided into the fore and hinder-branches. Of which the fore-branches ferve, the Intercoilal Muf- cles and the T leur a ; but the hinder are bellowed 611 the Mufcles that lie upon the Back. The ufe of it is much like that of the Rim of the Belly ; for (as hath/» ufe,
been faid ) as the Rim of the Belly is Hretched about all the Lower Belly, and furniiheth all the Bowels therein contained with Coats or Skins, (every Bowel with a particular Coat ) fo doth this Pleura the Bowels of the Mid- dle Venter .- for it is llretched about all the Cavity of the Cheli, and gi- veth a Coat to every particular Part therein contained, ( either medi- ately or immediately. ) It covers alfo the Intercoilal Mufcles, and makes the upper Membrane of the Midriff Next to the Cavity of the Cheli it is bedewed with a watery humour, that the Lungs which lie againfl it on their outlìde, may move the more glibly, and not be offended by its roughnefs. |
||||||
|
CHAP. 17.
Of the Midriff or Diaphragm.
THE Diaphragm (or Midriff) is fo called from ks office ofdïftin- ne Dia- ■
guifhing or ieparating,- becaufe it feparateth or diflinguifheth the jf 7Ì& ƒ ^ Bowels of the lower, from the Inftruments of Life and Refpiration in die middle Belly. It is a Mufcle, long and round, feated at, the lower part of the Cheli,
overthwart which it runs, Hoping a little lower towards the Paunch back' ward. It hath a figure and aclion different from all other Mufcles. It is as broad as the Cheli is wide : for its edges are knit to the lower
part of the Breall-bone, and all round on each fide to the Ribs, and to the iowell vertebral Joint of the Cheli. It is faid to arife from its two long and lleffiy Productions, which its rife.
ipringing from the vertebra of the Loins (to the mufcles whereof they are llrongly knit) do, as they go upwards, grow wider and wider, till they come to the Iowell vertebra of the Cheli, where they grow and unite together, andfo fpread themfelves into this Mufcle called the Mid- riff" Others, though they grant that thefe are part of its original, yet think that it does equally arife from its whole flelhy circumference, by which it adheres to the ends of the Iowell Ribs. And a third opinion is, that its original is from its centre or middle where its Nerve is inferted into it, from that common Maxim of Galens, That whereever the Nerve is inferted, there is the head of the Mufcle. But as that Maxim does not hold in all other Mufcles, fo this being a Mufcle of a peculiar ihape and ufe, it may well be excepted therefrom, efpecially feeing the centre of the Midriff is tendinous,
|
||||||
|
*. the Anatomy of an Horfe.
tendinous, which the origine of a Mufcle does not ufe to be, but onely
its end. lu mace. As for its fubfl ance, it is partly flefhy, partly nervous and partly mem- branous. For Membranes, becaufe it requireth great flrength ( it being in continual motion) it is furnifhed with two, and thofe very ftrong ones, the uppermoft of which it hath from the Pleura, and the lowermoit from the feritonceum or Rim of the Belly. To the uppermoft the lower part of the Mediaftinum is knit, (and of the Heart-bag in Men, but not in Horfes or other Brutes ) and fometimes the lower tips or ends of the two great Lobes of the Lungs. Its circumference is flefhy, and its middle or centre nervous, in which part a wound is mortal, but one in the flefhy fome- times admits of cure. its perfora- It hath in it feveral perforations or holes, fonìe of which are little, and t'ms. others bigger. The little ones are the pores, through which the Vapours are faid to afcend from the iower Parts into the Chefl ; but befides that fuch afcent of impure Vapours from the Guts, &c. into the Chefl, where the Vital Parts are feàted, would be very inconvenient and prejudicial, I think the Midriff is fo compatì: a body, and its Membranes fo clofe, that we may either deny any pores at all, or however that they admit not any fuch fleams. The larger holes ( being thofe that ought to be reckon'd alone for fuch ) are, firfl, that which is very near its middle or centre, but fomething towards the right fide, which gives pafïage for the Trunk of the hollow Vein afcending from the Liver. The fecond is on the left fide of the centre, being bigger than the former, and fomewhat back- warder ; and this ferves tor the letting forth of the Gullet and two Nerves which go to the Stomach. There is alfo a third hole more backwards by the vertebra, for the through-fare of the great Artery, and the Vein without a fellow, and for the Nerve which Do&or Willis diftinguifhes from the wandring or eighth pair, by the name of the Intercoftal. its Vejfels. The Midriff hath Fejfels of all forts ; for it hath Feins arifing from the Trunk of the hollow Vein, which are called Feme phreniae, and alfo fome twigs branching to it from the Vena adzpofa, or Fat-vein, fo caiied be- caufe it is moftly bellowed on the fat Membrane that invefts the Kidneys. It hath Arteries from the Trunk of the great Artery, called allò
fhrenkce. Its Nerves are in number two, proceeding from the fpinal Marrow at
the third or fourth jointing of the Rack-bones or vertebra of the Neck, from whence they defcend through the cavity of the Chefl, being in their courfe fuftained and flrengthened by the Mediaftinum, left by any violent motion they fhould be hurt. As foon as thefe Nerves reach the Midriff they enter it in its centre, and thence difperfe themfelves into its whole fubflance, terminating in it. But befides thefe fome have obferved fmall twigs to be fent into it from the Nerves of the eighth pair, as they defcend through it toward the Stomach. The feotrai Various are the Vfes that might be afcribed unto the Midriffrhe chief are f?dfjhe thefe that follow. Firft,It is the principal Mufcle that affifts the action of Re- , ! it affifts fpiration. Which adion whether it be animal and voluntary, or natural and Refphation. involuntary, has occafion'd great difputes. True it is, that it moves in breath- ing as well while we fleep, as when we are awake, fo that our Will, which in fleep is dormant as well as the Body, feems not to be neceflàry to its mo- tion: and yet we can hinder it from moving when we pleafe by holding in our breath. We may therefore call its motion, a mixt motion, to wit, partly voluntary
|
||||
|
Book II. Of the Middle Venter, or Ckeft. 71
voluntary (or rather fyontaneous, in Beads, becaufe they have not proper-
ly any Will ) and partly natural. Which motion is performed on this manner. In taking in ones breath it is ftretched out and becomes plain and ftif£ preffing down a little the Parts contained in the Lower Belly : but in letting out ones breath, it is relaxed and afcends fomewhat up in- to the Cheft, being partly driven up thither by the afcent of the Bowels of the Lower Belly, which in expiration is a little ftraitned by its Muf- cles, and therefore the Parts contained therein as they have lefs room breadthways, mull have more lengthways. Now we muft note, that onely one fort of motion agrees to one Mufcle, to wit, that of contrac- tion ; for that of reftitution or relaxation is owing to the oppofite Mufclé, as was fhewed at large in the Firft Book, chap. 6. The proper motion of the Midriff therefore is onely in Infpiration or taking in ones breath, when all its Fibres being contracted quite round, it is ftretched out plain, fomewhat like the Parchment upon a Drum's head.- but when it is relaxed and becomes flaggy in Expiration, that is onely a motion of reftitution, and is not owing to it felf, but to thofe Mufcles that con- ftringe or ftraiten the Cheft, which are that called facrolumbus, and the triangularis or three-corner'd one, which two lie on the outfide of the Ribs as (hall be (hewn in the Book of the Mufcles ; and laftly, the inter- nal Intercoftals, defcribed before in the fecond Chapter, to which fome of the Mufcles of the Lower Belly perhaps yield fome afliftance. Secondly, By its afcending and defcending, and fo occafioning the Sto- *. it, motion
mach, Guts, &c. to be always in a motion upwards and downwards, fi1?' [he djr it affifts them in driving forward the Liquors or whatever elfe contained {{ SJ/". in them, and fo helps the diftribution of the Chyle, which by the worm- like motion of the Guts alone could not fo well be fent through thofe innumerable fmall Veflèls through which it is to pafs. And this I take to be a confiderable ufe of it, though few Anatomifts have taken any no- tice of it. A third'ufe is to help forward the expulfion of the Excrements, and 3 tt helps a
affift the Mare in the time of her foaling. For in both thofe offices the exPel the e*- MidrhTby holding in the breath is kept on the tenters as it were and pref- "nZlrlfm fed down upon the Parts contained in the Lower Belly that are next it, *<><»'• and thofe do fucceffively bear hard upon others that are next them, whereby every Part contained therein is fomewhat ftraitned, and fo whatfoever is contained in any of them, be it the Dung, Urine or Foal, is fqueezed out and expelled. The laft ufe is what was mentioned at the beginning of this Chapter, 4- J? fines
namely, to diftinguifli the Lower Belly with its natural Parts, from the am'Ì*** Cheft and its vital Parts; left from the inferiour ignoble Parts noifom Va- from the pours fhould afcend up to the more noble, fuch as are thofe contained 'mcbeft' the Cheft. Table XIII. Reprefents the External proper Parts of the Cheft, as like-
wife the natural fituation of the Midriff A The Sternum.
B The Midriff.
C The hole ly which the hollow Vein afcends from the Liver towards
the Heart.
£> The hole wherely the Gullet paffeth through the Midriff. M E *fa
|
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
E The hole whereby the defcendent Trunk of the great Artery paffe s through
the Midriff.
FF The two Appendices or Produtlions of the Midriff. GG The Mufcles termed Pfoaz in their natural fituation. HH The Mufculi Quadrati or fquare Mufcles of the Loyns. II Thè Internal cavity of the Flank-bone. K The Mufcle called Serratus major Anti'cus in its proper place. L The fame Mufcle removed out of its place and turned back, the better to fhew the Serratus minor and other Tarts underneath it.
M The Serratus Anticu's minor or leffer for efide Saw-mufcle in its place. NNN Several of the External Intercoftal Mufcles. OOO The Cartilaginous or grift ly farts of the Ribs faftened to the iler-
num or Br e aft-hone. '- |
||||||
|
CH A P. V.
Of the Partition-membrane called Mediaftinum.
the Media- ' I '^HIS Membrane is called by the Latins Mediaftinum, from its of-
ftinum. »*ƒ J[ fice of partitioning or dividing, becaufe it divides the Cheft into f"caBe • two parts, Handing acrofs the middle of it. its rife and ' It is derived or hath its original from the Pleura or Rib-coat, of which
fubftance. we jlave a]reajy fpoken in the third Chapter. For the Pleura fpringing from the Back-bone, keeps its way on each fide of the cavity of the Chelt (cloathing the infide of the Ribs ) till it comes to the Breaft-bone, where the two Membranes join together, but do not unite into one. From the Breaft-bone thefe two Membranes hold a direci: courfe back again towards the Back-bone through the middle of the Cheft, but before they have gone an Inch, they begin to feparate again, and that fo far from one ano- ther by degrees, as to make a cavity wide enough for containing the Heart and the Heart-bag. But when they are arrived near the Back, they join together again. Note that the Mediaftinum being compofed of the doubling of the Pleura, muft confift of four Membranes when uni- ted, ( though onely of two where divided ) feeing the Pleura it felf con- fifts of two. It is wholly membranous, as is the Pleura of which it is for- med ; fmooth on the outfide towards the Lungs, but rough on its infide towards the Heart, by reafon that the Heart-bag adheres to it by fe- veral Fibres. its Veffeit. Between the duplicature of this Membrane there are many fmall Veffèls of all forts difperfed. For firft there are Veins branching to it from the Phre- nic a or Midriff-vein and from the folitary Vein or Vena fine pari; it has likewife one proper Vein of its own from the fubclavian branch, called af- ter its own name, Mediaftina. Secondly, its Arteries come from the Phre- nica or Midriff artery, which fpring out of the defcending Trunk of the great Artery. Thirdly, it hath Nerves from the Phrenick or Midriff twigs of thofe two branches of the eighth pair that defcend through it to the up- per orifice of the Stomach. Bartholin afcribes alfo Lymphedutts unto it. The
|
||||||
|
Book II. Of the Middle Venter, or Che ft. jf
The ufe of the Mediaftinum is fìrft, to divide the Cheli and Lungs into txj u^t_
two parts, that if any hurtfull Accident ihould happen to one of the fides, the other notwithflanding might be preferred. And this hath been ob- ferved by Anatomiils, who have found in diffè&ions the one fide or Lobe of the Lungs wailed and almoft dryed away in Phthifical and Confump- tive Perfons, and at the fame time the other hath been perfectly frefh and found. And it hath been likewife feen and obferved in wounds of the Cheft, that if therewith one Lobe of the Lungs ihould happen to be hurt fo much as to occafion the lofs of the ufe of that Lobe, yet the other by performing his part hath preferved life. The next ufe of the Mediafiinum is to permit the Heart in the Heart-
bag to hang dangling in a free poilure, that in its motion it might not ilrike againil the bony fides of the Cheft. Again, it ferves to fuilain and preferve the VeiTêls running through it,
and by its being knit to the Midriff preferves that alfo from being drawn too much downwards by the weight of the Bowels of the Lower Belly, efpecially by the Liver, whofe fufpenfory Ligament hangs by it. |
||||||
|
C HA P. VI.
Of the Thymus or great Kernel at the Throat 5 and of
the Purfe of the Heart called Pericardium, together with the water contained therein. TH E Thymus (named the Sweet-bread by fome) is a glandulous or what tht_
kernelïy body, foil and fpongie, placed in the upper part of the lhJmus "• Cheil near the hole of the Throat, lying upon the ends of the Clavicles or Collar-bones. It hath its name Thymus from the leaf of Time, which it very much
refembleth in ihape. Its ufe is to ferve as a Bouliler or Pillow for the Veins and Arteries to its ufe.
pafs over or lie upon, to keep them from the hardnefs of the Collar-bones, the iharpnefs of which would elfe be apt to break them or fret them afunder. Now the Veilèls which do crofs over this Thymus are the hollow Vein The Veffeh
and the great Artery, with the many divifions and branches of the fame, **ƒ* Wf' which are in number many, difperfed from thence into moil of the ex- °W '•' treme Parts of the forepart of the Body, as fome to the Shoulder-blades, and fo down the Fore-legs ; again, fome to the Neck and Head, namely the internal and external Jugular Veins, and the Carotid Arteries ; as alfo thofe branches which run all along the Belly, which are by us Farriers called the Liver-veins. This Kernel is bigger in Foals than it is in grown Horfes in proportion to their Bodies ; and in Calves it is pretty large, and is recko- ned for a dainty delicate bit. Next come we to treat of the Pericardium, or Purfe of the Heart, or what the Pe-
Heart-bag, for by thefe feveral nominations or names it goes. This is riwrdium ». M 2 that
|
||||||
|
y8 The Anatomy of dn Horfe.
that Coat or Skin which compafïèth the Heart, and in which the Heart
hangeth, it being for that purpoie made 'm figure like it. From whence It takes its original at the bafis or upper and broad end of the Heart, ViÌ"i "' fr°m t^le outer <~oats w^cn c°rapafs the Veiìèis that enter into the Heart,
origina. ^[^ coats fo fprjng fr0rn the Pleura. the fnbftatice Its fuhftance is thick and fomething hard, though not fo hard as to hurt
dkiPer'" t^le Lungs when it preilèth againft them, or they againft. it ; neither is it
car lum. too ^^ ^ ^ j^ou^ ^ fejf j-,e ilurt ^y tne nardnefs of the Ribs, which in
ftrong pulfations of the Heart it beats againft, the Mediaftinum oneiy
coming between : but being placed between two contraries, I mean, be- tween the foft Lungs and hard Bones, it ought to have its fubflance of a middle nature between both. On the outfide it is rough and fibrous, adhering in many places to the Mediaftinum ; but within, it is fmooth and llippery, that the Heart might move more freely in it. its Perfora- It is perforated in five places ; namely on the right fide by the afcen- tims. ding Trunk of the hollow Vein, which comes up from the Liver and en- ters the right Ventricle of the Heart; and by the Subclavian Vein which
defcends from the Channel-bones into the fame Ventricle ; and thirdly by the Pulmonary Artery which goes out of the right Ventricle into the Lungs. On its left fide it is perforated by the Pulmonary Vein which comes from the Lungs and enters the left Ventricle of the Heart; and laftly by the great Artery that pafles out of the faid Ventricle. its Vefjels. The Veins that it is furnifhed with, it receiveth at the lower part of it from the Phrenkk or Midriff-vein, and at the upper part from the Axil- laries ; but the Veflèls from each place are mighty fmall. There are no Arteries derived to it from any place, that are vifible •
and the reafon fuppofed is, becaufe it is fo near the Heart, that it is im- mediately fupplied from it with vital heat and fpirit. But feeing the Heart it felf is not without Arteries, though it be reckon'd the fountain of life, much lefs can any other part be fuppofed to be, and therefore neither this, ' though they are fo (lender as not to be difcernible. Thofe fmall Nerves it is furniihed with, are branched to it from the
left recurrent Nerves of the eighth or wandring pair. To thefe Veflèls Bartholin adds Lymphedutts, which ferve to drink up
part of the Liquor contained in the Heart-bag, to hinder its two great > encreafe. Its tfe. Next come we to the ufe of the Heart-bag, which is, to cover and preferve the Heart, and to contain a certain moifture or Humour in it
lor the ufes after-mentioned. Now concerning this Humour there are vari- ous difcourfes and different opinions of Authours, I mean, as to the foun- of the Water tain from whence it proceeds; for fome will have it, that it is fed by Li- 6Tpned m quors which we drink, of which opinion is the Learned Hippocrates, dium!riCar" whence in his Book de Corde he faith, that the Heart dwelleth in a Blad- der, becaufe of the refemblance the Humour in the Heart-bag hath to that in the bladder of Urine ; though at the fame time he denies this Wa ter or Humour to have any acrimony or brackifhnefs, as the Water con tained in the bladder of Urine hath. And to confirm this Opinion of his, that this Humour contained in
the Heart-bag doth proceed from Liquors taken in at the Mouth, he cites an Experiment to be tried on a Pigg, ( though I fuppofe any other Crea- ture may ferve as well ) which after it is kept faffing for fome time fhouki have given it to drink Water or Milk mingled with Vermillion, and afte! it
|
||||
|
Book IL Of the Middle Venter, or Cheft. j?
it hath drunk it, mould immediately be killed, and as foon after as pof-
fible have his Wind-pipe opened, and alfo all or mofl of its branches, in which, faith my Authour, you will find along all its infide, the colour of the Liquor which it drank, even to the extremities or ends of the fmalleft Pipes; out of which Pipes (faith he) part of it is diitiiled into the Heart-bag. I confefs this is no very probable Opinion, but I men- tion it for the great antiquity and fame of the Authour of it. But other Authours are of opinions contrary to this, fome faying that it
proceeds from a moifture, Haver or fpittle, which diftils out of the Ker- nels under the Tongue into the Weazand, and from thence into the Ar- teries and Heart, and fo into the Heart-bag. But this is as improbable as the former. A late Learned Authour thinks that it iilues out of certain Glands or
Kernels feated at the bafis of the Heart. And this is an Opinion that is fomewhat likely, though I think the next is to be preferr'd before it. Laftly, Others (amongft whom is Bartholin) conceive that it pro -see Barthc-
ceeds from moift Vapours and Exhalations forced out of the Humours of J£» lib-2- the Heart by the motion and heat thereof, which being ilopt by thec ' ' '' clofenefs of the Heart-bag, are by its refpe&ive coldnefs congealed into Water. The ufe of this Water or Humour is, in the firft place, to keep the The ufes of
Heart moift and cool ; for the Heart being a very hot Part, requires,be Wam' fomething of this nature to cool it, efpecially if that be true which fome report of the left Ventricle, that it hath been found in live Diflècìrions io hot, as almoft to fcald the Difìè&or's finger which he put into it. By this Humour the Heart alfo becometh more eafy in its motion, for
by it, it is as it were born or buoy'd up, fo that it fwimmeth in a man- ner, whereby the fenfe or feeling of the weight of it is taken away. Such a Humour as this before-fpoken of is alfo found in the cavity of of the m-
the Cheft, onely fomething of a more ruddy colour, looking like Water TiVtT"' and Bloud mingled together ; and this I have never found wanting, but cfoji. that there hath been fome either little or much; with which moifture the Parts of the Cheft are moiftened and cooled, even as the Heart is by the moifture contained in the Heart-bag. Table XIV.
Fig. I. Reprefents the Sternum or Breaft-bone cut of£ and lifted up or
turned back, under which are to be feen the Mediaftinum, Heart, Lungs and Midriff AA Shevo the inner furface or fuperficies of the Breaft-bone, and the
Griftles interwoven therein.
BB the Lungs in their natural fituation. CC A portion of the Midriff. DD The ends of the Ribs where the Breaft-bone ivas cut off.
E The glandulous body called the Sweet-bread or Thymus. F The fides of the Mediaftinum plucked off from the Breaft-bone. G The Heart in its natural fituation. H A portion of the Heart-bag. |
|||||
|
Fig. II.
|
|||||
|
/
§0 The Anatomy of an Hor f e.
Fig. II. Ileprefents the Diaphragm and its Proceflès.
A The left Nerve.
B The right Nerve. C The upper Coat or Skin of the Diaphragm.
D The naked fubflance of the Midriff, or the Diaphragm laid hare.
E A hole for the Gullet to pafi through. F A hole for the hollow Vein to pafi through. G The membranous or nervous part of the Midriff, being its centre. HHH The Proceffes or Appendices of the Midriff, betwixt which the Trunk of the great Artery doth defend. |
||||||
|
CHAP. VII.
Of the Heart. The Hemt a ^TT1 HERE is none can be fo ignorant of the Parts of the Body, as
principal J_ not to know that the Heart is one of the principal Parts thereof:
Faru for as it is the fountain of the Vital faculty and power, it ought to be fo
ftyled. It is alfo the place of natural heat, the root of the Arteries from
whence they all fpring. It is moreover the Authour of the Pulfe, and
the firfl Bowel living ( as I fhall more at large declare in the following
Chapter ) and the laft dying.
From whence It is called in Latine Cor, a cunendo from running, becaufe of its con-
it derives its tinual motion.
jts'/ituatkn. If *s onety one 'm number, fituated in the midft of the cavity of the
Cheft, as well for its fecurity, as for the equal ballancing of that part of the Body ; in which place it is incompafïèd by the Lobes of the Lungs. Yet notwithstanding the fituation of it in the middle part of the Cheli,
it is to be underflood that not the whole Heart but onely the bafis or root of it is dire&Jy in the middle ; for the point of it leans toward the let fide, by reafon of the fmallnefs of the compafs it hath to perform its mo- tion in ; for it would be apt to flrike againft the Midriff fliould it not be {o drawn to one fide, which would not onely hinder its own motion, but alfo indanger the violating of the Midriff and hinder its motion; for it alfo is known to have a perpetual motion as well as the Heart. Why the Puife And it is from the point of the Heart's inclining to the left fide, that tefifJe" Infàe motion of the Heart or its pulfe is fo plain to be felt on that fide : not the right, which not being equally to be felt on the right, many, who have not ta- ken the pains of looking or infpefting into Bodies to fee the contrary, do conclude, that the Heart is fituated altogether on the left fide, and that it is not the point alone which they feel beat, but the whole Heart. Another reafon there is why it mould incline to the left fide, namely,
becaufe the afcendent Trunk oiVena cava lieth on the right fide, f0 that were the point not drawn fomething to the other fide, it would be apt to
|
||||||
|
Book II Of the Middle Venter, or Cleft. 81
to he upon or firike againft that VefTel, and fo hinder the afcent of the
Blond which is brought from the Liver by that Vein to the Heart The Heart has a double motion, Contra&ion called its jyftole, and T}e.m^on
Relaxation called its diaflole. ( Though this latter may rather be deemed a ceafing from motion, than a motion.) While it is relaxed or becomes flaggy and loofe, it receives the Bloud into its Ventricles out of the hol- low Vein and Lung vein ; out of the former into its right Ventricle, and out of the latter into its left. And when it contracts it (elf, it expels or fquirts out the Bloud out of its Ventricles into the Lung-artery and great Artery ; out of the right Ventricle into the Lung artery, and out ot the teft into the great Artery. As to the pulfation or beating of the Heart, it is very difficult, if not fàjùfip'.
impoffibie to give any fatisfacTrory reafon of it. Some impute it to the^ràe tu!je' flowing in of the Animal Spirits by the Nerves ; others to the boiling and rarefaction of the Bloud in its Ventricles. 'Tis moft certain that the muf- cuiar Fibres of the Heart are the immediate inftruments of its motion, and that thefe receive their power to move, from the Animal Spirits conveyed by the Nerves : but what it is that puts thefe Fibres upon fuch a reciprocal motion of contraction and relaxation as the Heart obferves, is the greater! difficulty to determine. The greateft Anatomifts have con feft their ignorance in this point :' I (hall not therefore pretend to give & reafon of it, but admire the wifedom of the great Creator in framing fuch an Engine, fo necedàry for the conveying life, heat and nourifhment to all the Parts of the Body. Waving this then, I (hall proceed to the fur- ther defcription of the Heart. The f gure of the Heart is pyramidal or conick, that is, it is broad at The figure of
the bafis or bottom, and narrow at its fummity or top. On the fore fidetbe Hmu it is body or bunching, but on the hinder fide more flat. It is fometimes longer and fometimes fhorter, as thus : When in its motion it is con- tracted (at which time it pours out the Bloud ) then is k fhorter, but broader,- and again when it is dilated, at which time it receives in the Bloud, then is it longer and narrower. Its [uhftance is a (olid, thick and compact flem, that it might the bet- lis fubfiance.
ter indure the perpetuity of the motion, and with more force drive the Bloud into the extreme or fartheft Parts of the Body. It confifteth mod- ly of mufculary or flefhy Fibres, a few of which run ftreight and are out- mod, but the far greateft part run (lanting or rather fpiral-wife, efpeci- ally towards its point, refembling fomewhat the winding-rings of a Snail's (hell. It is tied by the mediation of the Heart-bag to the Mediafiinum and itsumexun.
by its own Vedels to feveral Parts of the Body. Its Parts are fome External and fome Internal. Thofe which be Ex- its External
tern al ox outward, are thePurfe, the Coat, and the Fat ; to which may Fartt- be added fome of its Vedels. As to the Pttrfe or Heart bag, we have treated of it in the foregoing
Chapter. As to the Veffek, fome of them encompafs the Heart, as the Coronary Vein and Arteries ; others reach into its Entrances and into the Ventricles, and thofe are the Afcendent and Defcendent Trunks of the hollow Vein and Great Artery, alfo the Pulmonary Vedels. Of the Coro- naries we (hall fpeak by and by in this Chapter ; but of the reft, in the next. It
|
||||
|
g2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
its coat I* hzth a Coat proper to it- felf, like the Coat of a Mufcle, for its grea-
ter firmnefs, which Coat flicks fo clofe to it, that it is hard to be fepa- rated or removed from it. It is the fame with the outer Coat of the Great Artery, as that Skin which cloaths the infide of its Ventricles is continued unto and conflitutes the inmoft Membrane of that Artery. its Fat. The Heart becaufe of its continual motion and great heat, is plentiful- ly ftored with Fat, to keep it from being over-dried, which Fat is moft
of it placed at thebafis or bottom of it ; For its point hanging in the Hu- mour contained in the Heart-bag is continually moiftned with that, So that it ftands not in need of being moiftned or cooled any other way. The dtffe. Yet thus much notice is to be taken, as to this Fat which grows to rence between the Heart, that it differs in confiftence from all or moft of the other Fat 'the FHean °f tne whole Body, as being much harder : for fhould the Heart, which and other is a very hot Part, have any fuch foft Fat near it, it would certainly melt Fat' it. And as the Fat which grows or flicks to the remoter Parts of the Body differs from this in nature, fo hath it alfo a name different from
this ; for the former is called pimele, which fignifies a kind of greafie Fat ; but the latter is called Adeps, which is to fay Tallow, and is in- deed as hard as Tallow, differing much from pimele or Greale. the External Next come we to the Vejfels of the Heart, and of thefe it is furnifhed VHem ^tl>e ™il^ a^ *°rts ' *°me °f wn*ch d° comPatè it round about at its bafis, like
a Garland, which are one Vein and two Arteries. One Vein. The Vein, from its encompafling or encircling it round, is called Co-
ronaria, or the Crown vein, which Vein arifes from the Trunk of the hollow Vein a little before its entrance into the right Earlet of the Heart. Small branches do fpring from this Coronary Vein, and are difperfed or fprinkled all down the furface or outfide of the Heart from the bafis to the point. Two Arte- Its Arteries are in number two, which are alfo called Coronaria or
ries. Crown arteries, from their encircling the Heart as the Vein does, where
like it they difperfe fmall branches about all the external furface of the
Heart, furnifhing it with arterial Bloud for its life and nourifhment. Their Valves. There is obferved at the original of each of thefe Arteries, as is likewife
in the Vein, a certain Valve which is to be feen if you dillecT: either Vef id, opening it a little before it paflêth out of the Heart-bag ; which Valve or Floud-gate in the Vein lets the Bloud into the Heart, but fuffers none to come out again that way ; and in the Artery it permits the Bloud to ilTue out of the Heart, but will let none return back out of it into the Heart. Ktrves. The Heart is alfo furnifhed with very many but very fmall Nerves,
fpringing from branches of the eighth pair, which branches are thofe
that are fent to the Heart-bag. They branch into and enter the Heart in three feveral places; firft,
one enters into the Heart it felf, another into the Earlets of the Heart, and a third into its Veflêls. Thus much of the Parts of the Heart which in fome regard may be
called External; in the next Chapter we fhalj proceed to thofe that are «lore Internal. |
|||||
|
Table
|
|||||
|
Book II. Of the Middle Venter, #r Che ft.
Table XV. Reprefenteth the Heart and Lungs in their natural pofture;,
but taken out of the Body. AA Shew the Heart in its ? roper place.
BB The federal Lobes of the Lungs.
CC The remaining part of the Pericardium òr Heart-lag, a portion of it
being cut off the better to /hew the Heart.
DD The Coronary Veffels. E The Arteria magna or Aorta going out of the Heart.
F Its defending Trunk. G Its afe ending Trunks. H The Vena cava defcendens, or the defending Trunk of the hollow Fein*
I The afcending Trunks of the fame. K A portion of the Afpera Arteria or Wind-pipe. L Its divifion or branching into the Lungs. |
||||||||
|
CHA P. VIII.
Of the Ventricle's, internal Ve f els, Valves and Ear lets of
the Heart. |
||||||||
|
WE will firft fpeak of the Ventricles or Sinus's of the Heart, be-
ing in number two, on each fide one, diftinguiihed or divided by a flelhy partition into a right and a left. The right (called the right Sinus or Ventricle, and by fome the Cave The tigin
or Chamber) is fomewhat bigger than the left, becaufe it Receives asVennick- well that Bloud which is fpent upon the nouriihment of the Lungs, through which the Bloud paffes from this Ventricle to the left, as that which a&ually is conveyed into the left, and from thence lent forth by the Arteries into all parts of the Body. But its larger capacity is onely in refpect of its width, for the left is rather longer than it, as reaching nearer the tip of the Heart. It is in figure not exactly round, but rather femicircular, or half-moon its figure.
fafhioned. The fubflance of its fides is not fo hard and thick as is that of the left, its fubftar.ee.
nor is the furface of its inner cavity fo uneven ; nor has it fo many and fo ftrong flefhy Fibres reaching this way and that way, as the left hath. For it was not neceflàry it mould be of fo ftrong a compofure as the left, feeing neither is the Bloud rarefied fo much in it, nor does it fend the Bloud out of it to any greater diftance than the Lungs, whereas the left pours it into the remoteft Parts of the Body, and therefore requires a ftronger conftitution to fquirt it out. The ufe of this Ventricle is firft to receive the Bloud out of the hollow Its *fe.
Vein returning from the circulation, as alfo the Chyle and Ljmpha min- gled with the Bloud, out of the axillar Vein, and then to attenuate, con- co& and infpirit them for the nouriihment of the Lungs, to which they N are
|
||||||||
|
§a The Anatomy òf an Horfe.
are carried under the form of Bloud by the Pulmonary Artery, otherwife
called the Arterial vein. But it is but a very fmail portion of the Bloud that is fpent upon the Lungs, the greateft part of it palling by the Pul- monary Vein to the left Ventricle, there to receive a greater per- fection. Why Fijh Now it is worth obfervation in this place, that fuch Creatures as live have but one jn the Water, as Filli in general, which have no Lungs, have but one Venmcle. Ventricle in their Heart. For the reafon why Animals that live upon the Land have two Ventricles, being, that the Bloud as it paìlès from one to the other, fhould be conveyed through the Lungs, there to be ventilated and cooled by the Air drawn in in infpiration ; and feeing Fifh live in a cold Element, viz. the Water, which encompailès their whole Body, that-, of it felf, is fufBcient to attemper the heat of the Bloud ; therefore as it is impoflible they fhould make any ufe of Lungs in the Wa- ter, fo there feems to be no need of them, nor confequently of two Ven- tricles in the Heart, which are neceflàry for Land-animals that have Lungs, and breathe in the free Air. How far WTater approaches to the nature of Air, or whether there be any truly airy particles contained in the pores of the Water ; and if there be, whether there be any way ima- ginable whereby they can infinuate themfelves into the Bloud and Hearts of Fifhes, are Points too nice and philofophical for me to intermeddle with. But feeing Filli can live fo brisk for very many years without refpiration ( at lead properly fo called, or that we can conceive of) one would fufpecT: that fome of our late Anatomifts attribute too much virtue to the Air that we breathe in, as if it were the All that continues the Vi- tal flame as they fpeak, and that the Vital heat and fpirit are no otherwife owing to the Heart, than as like an Engine it keeps the Bloud in motion, and diftributes it with the Spirits into all Parts of the Body by the Ar- teries. But this by the bye. m left Ven- Next come we to the left Ventricle, which in magnitude doth not trick. equal the former, it being much lefs, by reafon it is to contain a lefs jtshrgenefs. ^mntity 0f Bloud than the right Ventricle doth, part of that Bloud that comes out of the right, being fpent upon the nourifhment of the Lungs, before it reaches the left. us f g»re. This left Ventricle differs alfo in figure from the right : for as the right is obferved to be femicircular, the left is almoft round and longer, reach- ing almoft down to the point of the Heart, which the other doth not. its fides are Likewife the flefli or wall of the left is much thicker than that of the thicker, other, and that partly becaufe of the fmallnefs of the cavity, which the ' narrower it is, mufl needs leave the fides fo much the thicker. Onely the left fide of this Ventricle near the lower end or tip of the Heart, is thin- ner than any part of the fides of the right. and harder Alfo it is harder and more compact than the other, that the Vital Spi- llTrihf ^ rits m^nt not exnale or evaporate, and that its conftri&ion might be the ftronger, fo that the Bloud might with more force be thrown or pulii Out and vented into the fartheft parts of the Body. Its ufe. Into this Ventricle is the Bloud received out of the Lungs by the Pul- monary Vein ( otherwife called the veinous Artery. ) Which Bloud when
it is fquirted out of this Ventricle into the great Artery, differs very much in colour from that which iflues out of the right Ventricle into the Pul- monary Artery : for this latter is of a dark purple colour, but the former of a florid fcarlet. But moll think that this alteration of colour is not fo
|
||||
|
Book IL Of the Middle Venter, or Che ft. 8«*
fo much owing to any fupereminent virtue in this Ventricle above the
right, as to the particles of Air that infinuate themfelves into the Bloud in the Lungs whiles it paflès out of the Pulmonary Artery into the Pul- monary Vein ; for Dr. Lower affirmeth, that if in Live-diflècìions one open the Pulmonary Vein in its paflàge from the Lungs to the left Ven- tricle, the Bloud will appear to be of the fame fcariet colour as when it comes out of the faid Ventricle. Suppofing this to be fo (which I think we may do upon the teftimony of fo worthy and creditable an Authour) yet it cannot be denied but that the airy particles muft be more intimate- ly mixed with the Bloud by the great agitation it receives in the left Ven- tricle, fo that we may Itili confent to the Ancients, that Vital Spirits (in which, Air feems to be a main Ingredient) are perfected and rectified to their height ( as it were ) in it more than in the right. The ufe there- fore of the lelt Ventricle is to perfect the Vital Spirits, and to tranfmit them, together with the Bloud, by the Arteries over all the Body, for the prefervation of the Vital heat, and for the nourifhment of each Part. The infides of both the Ventricles are unequal or uneven and rugged, The infide*
being hollowed into many furrows diftinguiflied by flefhy Fibres, that the fkff Vtmt" Bloud which comes into the Heart might be the more agitated in them, and thereby more intimately mixed with the Chyle and Air that come along with it, the firft into the right Ventricle, and both into the kft. From thefe flefhy Fibres are nervous ones extended to the Valves, of which we fliall difcourfe by and by. They are more numerous and Itronger in the left Ventricle than in the right, becaufe a ftronger con- ftri&ion was neceflàry for the former than for the latter, feeing from the for- mer Bloud is fent to all Parts of the Body, but from the latter to no greater diftance than the Lungs, as was obferved before. Thefe Fibres, Furrows and Valves you may fee very well expreft in the following Figure. Thefe Ventricles are divided by a Wall called the feptum or partition, The feptum.
which is nothing elfe but the right wall of the left Ventricle ; wherefore its right fide is' bunched, but the left hollow. On its left "fide it is furrowed and unequal as the reft of the Ventricle is, but on the right it is well nigh fmooth. It is a very ancient opinion, that there are a great many large pores or holes in this feptum, whereby the thinnefl and moft fpirituous Its por». part of the Bloud paflès out of the right Ventricle into the left immedi- ately, without taking that circuit through the Lungs that the reft doth. They are faid to be wider on its right fide, and going flanting to grow narrower towards the left. There are many Modern as well as Ancient Vouchers of this opinion : amongft whom is Bartholin, who having enu- merated feveral Anatomifts that have affirmed to have feen them them- felves, fays that he himfelf has feen the feptum of a Hog s Heart fhntingly pervious in feveral places with great and manifeft pores, fo large as to ad- mit a pretty big Peafe, and lying open without a Probe, which being put into any one of them on the right fide paflèd to the left Ventricle, where a thin Membrane did hang before the mouth of the Pore like an Anaftomofis (as he calls it, I fuppofe he means a Valve) which hindred the putting in the Probe on that fide, and confequently muft have hindred the return of the Bloud out of the left Ventricle into the right when the Animal was living. And he thinks that the feptum is nourifhed by the Bloud that paflès through thefe Pores, feeing the Coronary Veins ( above- defcribed ) run onely through the furface or outfide of the Heart. And N x he
|
||||
|
S6 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
he will have not onely the more fpirituous part of the Bloud, but the
thinner part of thé Chyle alfo to pafs through them. It would be tedi- ous to recite all thofe Authours that he quotes to fecond him, as alfo his Apology for their often not-appearing in many dead Bodies, feeing there are many pafìàges befides thefe in Live creatures, that there are no foot- Heps of after they are dead : for as it feems not likely that the feptum fliould be nourifhed by bloud that paflès fo rapidly through thefe fuppo- fed holes ; fo by the carefulleft examination of other skillull Anatomifts there have been no fuch holes to be found, unlefs they were firft made by the Probe ; though indeed there are feveral pits that look as if they went through, which I believe to be onely framed for the greater agitation of the bloud in the Ventricle. The internal In the foregoing Chapter we defcribed thofe VefTèls that may be called Vejjeh of the external from their running chiefly on the outfide of the Heart, ( com- monly named the Coronary ) by which it is nourifhed : but there are another fort that may be termed internal, which are fuch as open into and out of its Ventricles or inward Sinus's, but yield no nourifhment to it. Thefe are four, the Vena cava, and pulmonary Artery ; the pulmo- nary Vein, and jgreat Artery. Vtna cava Of thefe, the Vena cava Or hollow Vein, and the Vena Arteriofa or Wvena Ar- pulmonary Artery do belong to the right Ventricle ; the hollow Vein fil- Sl" *** ^nS lt w^h venal k'oucl returning from all Parts of the Body, which it right Ventri, receives in when the Heart is relaxed, which fiate is called its diaflole ; ' and the pulmonary Artery carrying forth the faid bloud into the Lungs when the Heart is contracted, which fiate of the Heart is called its /y-
fiole. J Arteria ve- To the left Ventricle do alfo belong two Veflèls, namely, Arteria ve-
nofa ani mj~a or tne pulmonary Vein, and Aorta or the great Artery. The pulmo- Aorta m e ^^ ^.^ w-lt^n ^ fUDftance of the Lungs doth receive the bloud from the pulmonary Artery, and pours it into the left Ventricle, there to kin- dle and ventilate the vital flame, and to perfect the arterial bloud and fpi- rits. The great Artery is the trunk from which all other Arteries do branch, and through which the arterial bloud ( after it is in this Ventri- cle perfected as aforefaid) is difperfed or thrown into all the Parts of the Body, for the life and nourifhment thereof. thm Valves Now to each of thefe four Veflèls do belong Valves, for the better per- " the c^Bed f°rrnance °ftneir offices before fpoken of. And firft to the hollow Vein trkufpides. do belong three, which are of a triangular figure, and are from that fi- gure called treble-pointed Valves. They are placed at the bafis or bot- tom of the Heart at the entrance of the faid Vein into the Heart, and do look from without inward, that fo they may admit of the bloud's paf- fing through them into the Heart, but fufïër none to pafs out again that way. Three alfo to To the pulmonary Artery do alfo belong three Valves, which, con- Kriofanacfl/-" trary to fhe f°rmer> l°°k from within outward, and from the refem-
S'VmoV blance they have with the letter C, are called Sigma-kMoned, the de*. old Greek Sigma being of that fliape. Thefe Valves as the former are placed at the bafis of the Heart, and at the entrance or rather outlet of
the Ventricle. And their ufe is, to let the bloud, brought into this Ven- tricle by the hollow Vein, pafs again out of the faid Ventricle into the pulmonary Artery, to be carried by it into the Lungs ; but they will not admit of any bloud to return from the Lungs into ir. To
|
||||
|
Ëook It Ofthe'MiddleTenter, órCbefi. §7
To the pulmonary Vein do belong two Valves, which look ft ohi with- Tm t0 the
out inward, as the treble-pointed Valves do, and their ufe is to admit Arteria »e- of the bloud brought out of the Lungs by the pulmonary Vein, into the JJjSiiS?*' left Ventricle, but they will fuffèr none to pafs by that Vein back to the Lungs again. Thefe, from the refemblance they are faid to hate with à BHhop's Mitre, are called Mitre-lhaped Valves. To the Arteria magna or great Artery do alfo belong three Valves, three « the,
which go by the name of S'emilunary or Half-moon-falhioned Valves. fe2nw«f Their ufe is to hinder any bloud from returning into the left Ventricle out of the great Artery ; but they permit the Bloud to pafs by them out of the Heart into the faid Artery, from whence it is fent by its feveral bran- ches into all the Parts of the Body. Having fpoken to the Ventricles, Veflêls and Valves of the Heart, we the auricula
are in the next place come to treat of the two Appendices or Pföceffès0^^ Htmii which are placed at the bottom or bafis of it, and are called the Ears or Ear lets of the Heart, from fome refemblance in lhape which they have to the Ears of the Head. They are in number two, to each fide of the Heart one, anfwerable to the number of the Ventricles. Of thefe, the right is larger, but fofter ; the left leffèr, but harder. The right is larger, becaufe the orifice of the hollow Vein belonging to the right Ventricle, is much bigger and larger than the orifice of the pulmonary Vein belonging to the lett Ventricle. For it was not needfull that the Lung-vein fhould be fo large as the hollow Vein, feeing the bloud that it conducls to the left Ventricle is neither fo much as that which is brought by the cava to the right, and befides is thinner and more fpirituous being impregnated with Air in the Lungs, and therefore palling more quickly needs the narrower channel. The external part or furface of them, when full or extended, is fmoothTJw ƒ«>ƒ<«*.
and bunching ; but when empty, wrinkled. Their fubjiance is peculiar,, fuch as is to be found in no other part, Their f«6-
thin and foft that they might be the eafilier contracted, and yet nervous #**'• and ftrong, that they might endure that continual motion to which they are deftin'd. Of the two, the left is the more compaft, thick and flelhy. On their infide they have Fibres running from their bafis where they are joined to the Heart, towards their top where the Veins enter them, (füch as the Ventricles of the Heart themfelves have ) by help whereof they contract themfelves in their fyftole, and fqueeze the bloud contained in them, into the Ventricles. Thefe Ears or Earlets have (as the Heart it felf hath) two motions, their motMé
firft the fyfiole or contraftive, next the àiafiole or dilative motion. There is alfo betwixt thefe two motions (both in the Ears and Heart) a reft or paufe, eafy to be difcerned in fick Horfes, of Horfés ready to die, but not fo eafy to be either difcerned or felt in a found or healthfull Horfe ; for in fuch, the motions are performed fo fwiftly, that there feems to be an immediate paflàge from one to the other, without any intermiflion or refting between. This paufe or reft between the two motions, is called perifyftole. The fyftole and diaftok of both Earlets do happen at one and the fame
time ; for when the right undergoes its diaftole, then and at the very fame inftant the left undergoes the fame. And they do the like in thejyftok. But though the Heart hath the fame motions as thefe Earlets have, yet it doth not perform them when thefe do ; for the fyftole of the Earlets happens at the fame time with the diaftok of the Ventricles ; and on the
|
||||
|
88 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
the contrary, the fyftole of the Ventricles, with the diaftole of the
Earlets. r ufi. Now the ufe of thefe Ears or Earlets is, to prevent the too violent mill-
ing in of the bloud out of the Cava and Lung-vein into the Ventricles of the Heart, whereby both the Valves might have been violated, and the Vital faculty fuflocated. For thefe receiving the bloud out of the faid Veins, do meafure it as it were into the Heart, fo much bloud diftilling out of thofe Veins into thefe Earlets in each of their diaftole s, as can be conve- niently rarefied and elaborated at one time in the Ventricles. Table XVI.
Reprefenteth the Earlets, Ventricles and Valves of the Heart.
Figure I.
Shews the Vena cava with the right Ventricle diflèöed, fo as to fhew
the treble-pointed Valves. A Shews the orifice of the coronary Vein.
B The trelle-pointed Valves, which admit of the hloud into the right Ven-
tricle, but hinder its return back that way. CCC The little Fibres which f aften the ends" of the Valves to the fub- ftance of the Heart.
D The Ventricle cut long-ways, the better to fhew tlx before-named Parts. Figure II.
Shews the right Ventricle of the Heart laid farther open, to fhew the
Valves of the pulmonary Artery. A Shews the Ventricle opened.
BBB The Sigmz-fajbioned Valves of the pulmonary Artery, that let the
bloud out of this Ventricle into the Lungs. CC A Probe thruft through the pulmonary Artery croft the right Ventri-
cle of the Heart. Figure III.
Shews the left Ventricle opened alfo long-ways to mew its Valves.
ÀA The pulmonary Vein coming from the Lungs and bringing the bloud
from thence, which it pours into the left Ventricle.
BBB The three Mitre fhaped Valves of the faid pulmonary Vein. |
|||||
|
Figure IV.
|
|||||
|
Book IL Of the Middle Venter, or Cheft. S?
Figure IV.
Shews the great Artery cut afunder near the Heart to fhew its Valves.
AAA The f aid Valves of the Aorta or great Artery.
BB A f robe thrufl through the pulmonary Vein into the left Ventricle of the Heart. |
||||||||
|
CHAP. IX.
Of the Organs of Breathing, and their Vfe 5 viz. of the
Lungs, and Wind-fife. |
||||||||
|
TH E Lungs, which are the chief Inflruments of breathing or refpi- the names of
ration, are called in Latin Tulmones, in Greek Pneumones, fromtbe Lm&s' their office of drawing in and blowing out the Breath or Air. Their ftuation is in the cavity or hollownefs of the Cheft, which cavity their fitua-
they almoft fill up ; efpecially when they are diftended or filled with ^^ni wind. They are divided into two equal parts called Lohes, one of which lies on the right fide of the Mediastinum, or Partition-membrane of the Cheft, and the other on the left. Their fuhflance hath hitherto been taken to be a parenchyma or flefliy their fub-
fubftance ; but by the diligent fearchjng into Nature of forne of our Mo Jtam' dern Authors, efpecially or an Italian named Malpighius, they have been found of a contrary fubftance ; for lie affirms them to be excarnous or without flefli, and merely membranous, made up of the branches of the Wind-pipe and little bladders at the ends of them, likewife of the pul- monary VelTels, and the Skin that cloaths them. But the greateft part of their fubftance confifts of the little bladders. This that worthy Man experienced by cafting Water into the Lungs of
fome Creatures he diflê&ed, while they were yet warm, fo often till the whole frame of the Lungs appeared white ; then fqueezing the water clean out, he with a pair of Bellows or Pipe filled them by the Wind-pipe full of Air, and pent it in by tying the Windpipe ; which done, he hung them up to dry; and when they were dried, he could difcoVer (by hold- ing them up to the light) the little bladders at the ends of each little branch of the Wind pipe, as they are lively reprefented in Figures by that great Inquirer into Nature, the never to be forgotten DoOror Wilfa, juft- See willis ly ftyled the honour of hisUniverfity and Country, in the fecoad Part of Jjjf *• His Book called Pharmaceutice rationalis. cap.'u'cfhk Again, faith the forementioned Malpighius, If you cut any part of the Hiannaceu-
Lungs thus dried, you may very plainly fee a great number of thefe bladders Ss.rac,c looking white. Moreover he affirms that by the help of a Microfcope he could difcern a certain wonderfull Net as it were, tying all thefe bladders to one another, which he conceived to be made up of the ftnall branchings of the pulmonary Artery and Vein,which Veflels convey the bloud through the
|
||||||||
|
o0 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
the (lender and winding dufts, and through the manifold bendings of the
Pipes. And befides thefe Vefìéls which make this Net, Doftor Willis faith that there are another fort to be perceived in living DhTe&ions, which are called Lymphedutts, and aredifperfed all over the Lungs. Of what nature and ufe thefe VefTels are, we have fhewn above in the Firft Book, chap. ix. and fhall do further by and by. And laftly, he fays there are abundance of twigs of Nerves diftributed every-where through them. Onely one thing further is to be noted concerning the Veflkls of the Lungs from the faid Doctor's obfervation, that the Bloud-veflëls there- of are not onely branches of the pulmonary Artery and Vein, but alfo fome proceed from the Aorta it felf; which fhould feem to intimate that the Lungs are truly nourimed by thefe laft, as are all other Parts of the Body, and that the bloud that comes to the Lungs from the right Ventri- cle of the Heart by the pulmonary Artery, and returns to the left by the pulmonary Vein, pafïès not this way for the nouriihment of thes Lungs, but onely that it may be impregnated with Air, without which as it wants of its perfection, fo is it unfit and unable to preferve the vital heat of any Part, or to contribute any nouriihment to it. But this onely by the bye. Table XVII.
Reprelènteth the Wind-pipe defcending into the Lungs, as alfo the whole
ftrudlure of the Lungs placed as they lie in the Body, to ihew their feveral Lobes, as alfo the Lympheducis, after Doftor Willis, Figure L
A A Shew the fubflance of the Lungs. :. ï -, :
BB The feveral Lobes.
CC The Lymphedu&s.
DD A portion of the Afpera Arteria or Wind-pipe.
Figure II.
AA Shew the upper part of the Wind-pipe cut off.
B The Cartilago fcutiformis. C The Glottis. DDD The feveral Griftles that make the Wind-pipe.
EEE The Membranes betwixt each Cartilage or Griflle, which make the other part of the Wind-pipe. Now the feveral things here named, of which the Lungs are compo-
fed or framed, do plainly ihew their fubftance is not carnous or flelhy, but merely fiftulous, being compacied of Pipes of feveral kinds and mag- nitude, and varioufly and intricately difpofed; which Pipes we will par- ticularly fpeak to in order, and firft of the chief of them, which is the Wind-pipe, called Afpera Arteria the rough Artery. the Wind- The Afpera Arteria is a Pipe or Chanel which defcends down the PW- Neck beginning in the Throat at the root of the Tongue, and reaches as far as the Lungs, in which it difperfes it felf into innumerable branches
great and fmall, which branches reach to all the extreme parts of their fubftance,
|
||||
|
Book II. Of the Middle Venter, or Cheft. pi
fubftance, and at laft end in little bladders, each of them in refembiance
like a Grape, into which they conveigh the Air in infpiration. Thefe Grape-like Bladders are lively reprefented by Doctor Willis in a Lobe of W;nis pw. the Lungs of an Ox, as you may fee in the firfl Figure of the third Table "wm. Ra- in his fecond Part of the operation of Medicines ; of which bladders you £&,-■£*}] may there reade more at large. The fore-mentioned Wind-pipe is by Anatomifts divided into three The Pans of
principal parts, viz. the Larynx or Throttle, which is the upper end öf-'^f Wmd' it (of which more afterwards.) The fecond part between the Larynx and the Lungs, being a long Pipe, is called particularly Trachea or affe- rà Arteria, the rough Artery ; rough, to diftinguifh it from the fmootb Arteries which contain the bloud and vital fpirits ; and an Artery, be- eaüfe it keeps or contains the Air in refpiration. The laft part of the Wind-pipe is diftinguifh'd by the name of bronchus or bronchia, which in- cludes the ramifications or branchings of it in the Lungs ; though the name bronchus is fometimes ufed to fignify all of it. Now before we pafs on further to the defcription of this Wind-pipe, it whether «»;
will not be amifs to examine whether any part of the Liquors that an *£• V^*fc Horfe drinks pafs along it, or whether all go down the Gullet. That the win'J. part of'the drink glides down the Weazand was the opinion of the Ancient M* im thé Phyfician Hippocrates, who experienced the fame in an Hog newly kil- mg'' led, in whofe Lungs was found a quantity of Liquor of the fame colour with that which the Hog had drunk a little before. And Bartholin thinks that the fame thing may be proved from an obfervation of Julius Jafolin ail Anatomift of the City of Naples, who feeking in the Body of a Noble Per- fori the caufe of his death, found his Heart-bag fo filled with humour, that it being fqueezed, fome of the faid humour came out of his Mouth. But me- thinks it is an odd inference to conclude from hence, that therefore fome part of the drink ufually paflès down the Wind pipe. For if one mould fuppofe that it did fo pafs, it cannot ea/ily be imagined by what ways it could pafs from thence to the Heart-bag; feeing all the branches of the Wind-pipe end in the Lungs, which are covered with a Membrane that never adheres to the Heart-bag, and very rarely if ever to the Mediafti- num that comes between the Heart-bag and the Lungs. 'Tis true it feems fomewhat ftrange, that upon preffing the Heart bag, the liquor contain- ed in it mould come up at the Mouth ; but if the matter of fad be true.) it muft do fo by fome preternatural paflage, feeing every one that is skil- led in Anatomy knows, that there is no communication between the Pe- ricardium and afferà Arteria. Indeed as to the great quantity of hu- mour in the Heart-bag, I have obferved the fame in Horfes, in which I have feen both it and the Cheft extremely filled with liquor, but I dare not conclude from thence, that it came thither down the Wind-pipe ; for feeing it has been onely in difeafed Horfes, that have been broken-winded and troubled with coughs, I am much rather inclined to think, that fo great quantity of water proceeded from a Dropfie of the Cheft, which is a difeafe not unfrequent in Mankind, in whom yet the beft Anatomifts deny that the leaft drop of drink does naturally pafs down their Wind-pipe: of which any one may be pretty well fatisfied, that has obferved in him> felf or others, how when upon occafion of laughing or the like in drink- ing, any of the drink paflès down the wrong Throat as we fay (which is down the Wind-pipe) the party falls prefently into a moft violent cough- And as to Hippocrates's obfervation, 'tis more likely the Hog's Lungs fhou Id |
||||
|
^2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
be tin&ured by fome preternatural and difeafed humour lodged in them,
of a like colour to which his drink happened to be, than that they were tin&ured by the drink it felf. The coats of The Wind-pipe is covered with two coats or skins, one outward and the Wind- ^ otfer inVDarJm
The outwardmoft is but of a reafonable thicknefs, neither fo thick nor
fo ftrong as the other. It fprings from the pleura or skin which invefts the Ribs, and flicks clofe to the Ligaments of the Griftles, yea does it felf ferve to knit them more firmly one to another, and is a mean of con netting the whole Pipe more ftrongly to its neighbouring Parts. It alfo ulhers along the Nerves of the Wind-pipe and Lungs. The inmrmofl is thicker and more folid than the former, in the Throttle
efpecially, whofe infide it covers, as alfo all the infide of the Wind-pipe and its branches from thence to the bottom of the Lungs. It has two rows of Mufcular Fibres, the outer ftreight, the inner flanting ; the firft ferving to fliorten the Wind-pipe, the latter to ftraiten it. And one reafon of the great ftrength of this Membrane feems to be, that it might the better endure the violent motion of coughing without being injured. It is very fenfible, and has its infide befmear'd ufually with a fattifh or flimy humour, which likely is feparated in the Kernels of the Throat, and this ferves to keep it moift and glib, that refpiratioii may be performed with the greater eafinefs and freedom. the Grilles Between thefe two coats or skins is the body or fubftance of the Wind- Tte'mni? P*Pe' being partly of the nature of a Griftle and partly of a Ligament; He. '" for it is made up of many round Griftles like Rings, being pretty round on its fore-part, but on the back-part which is next to the Gullet a fourth part of the circle is wanting, in the room of which there is a thick, ftrong and membranous fubftance, more foft than the Griftles, that the Gullet which lies upon it on that fide, might not be hurt by them. Thefe Ring-falhioned Griftles are joined together by ftrong Ligaments,
which Ligaments do every-where keep the Griftles at an equal diftance one from the other. Table XVIII.
Fig. I. Shews the lower part of the Wind-pipe with all its branches as
they were fpread through the Lungs, clearly feparated from all other Parts of the Lungs ; to which branches are annexed all the bladders of Air, found out by Malpighim and here lively reprefented. AA Shew a portion of the afpera Arteria or Wind-pipe.
BBBB Its divifion into branches which run into the fever al Lobes of the
Lungs.
CCCG The fever al extremities or ends of the faid branches. DDDDDD The innumerable Utile bladders at the ends of thofe branches. E Shews where the Wind-pipe is cut off from the upper part of it. FFF The fever al circular Griftles which help to compofe the Wind-pipe. GGG The membranes or skins betwixt each Griftle which are another part of the fubftance of the Windpipe.
|
|||||
|
Fig. n.
|
|||||
|
Book IL Of the Middle Venter, or Cbe/i. p%
Fig. II. Shews the upper part of the Wind-pipe cut oft
A Shews the caitilago fcutiformis, or Shield~fajhi$ned Grifile.
B The fever al Grijlles and Membranes that make up the body of thé Wind-pipe. The Wind-pipe like other Parts hath Ve f els of all forts; firft it hath its VefftU.
Feins from the external Jugulars ; Arteries from the Carotides ; and Nerves from the recurrent Nerves of the wandring or eighth pair, (com- monly reckoned for the fixth.) When it is defcended about two hands-breadth into the Ctieft, it is di- in divipm.
vided into two trunks, one whereof goes into the right Lobe of thé Lungs, and the other into the left. Into which as foon as they are en- tred, each is again fubdivided, and thofè fubdivifions üill branch out into more, till they become very numerous and flender, and are difperfed among the pulmonary Bloud-vefïèls, but end into the little bladders above- defcribed. The ufe of the Wind-pipe is, firft, to ferve as a nozle to a pair of Bel- u$ ufu.
lows, to wit, that the Lungs by the Air entring in by it may be heaved up. Whence when the infide of it is flabby with too much flegmatiek humour, or there happens to be any obftru&ion in it, or any of its branches in the Lungs, there follows a wheazing and fhortnefs of breath, becaufe the Air has not a free ingrefs into the Lungs. The next ufe of it is to let the Air out from the Lungs, and together
with it fmoaky vapours (learning through the pores of the Lungs out of the bloud. By help of it alfo, but efpecially of the Throttle or upper part, does the Horfe neigh, or whinney as they call it in feme Countrys, while the Air is driven forcibly out of it in expiration. And thus much as to the Wind pipe. A fecond fort of Veflèl or Pipe difperfed through the Lungs, and com- The Bloud-
pofing a confiderable part of their bulk, are the Bloud-vefïèls, which w$u °f,he are partly a branch from the great Artery, but principally the pulmona-Lav' ry Artery and Vein, whofe branches are fpread to and' fro in a great number through its whole fubftance, and there complicated and twifted with the branches of the Wind pipe, the Artery running along the un- der fide and the Vein the upper fide of it, both cleaving fo clofe to it that they are not eafily to be feparated. Th«fe Arteries and Veins have com- munication one with another in feveral places by anaflomofes, the link twigs of the Arteries opening into thofe öf the Veins, for the readier cir- culation of the bloud through the Lungs. Moft admirable is the con- texture of thefe Vefïêls about the Air-bladders ; for their fmall thred-like twigs are interwoven one with another with the moft curious artifice ( fomewhat refembling a Net ) round about all of them ; which moft probably is fo done, to the end that all the particles of the bloud may be impregnated with Air, while it paflês through thefe fine Veflels that twine about the Air-bladders on all hands. |
|||||
|
O z Table
|
|||||
|
94 The Anatomy of an Horfê.
Table XIX.
Reprefenteth the pneumonick or pulmonary Artery and Vein cut off from,
the right and left Ventricles of the Heart, and alfo freed or feparated from the branches of the bronchia or Wind-pipe. AA Shew the pneumonick Artery cut offclofe by the right Ventricle of the
Heart.
BB The pneumonick Vein cut off from the left Ventricle of the Heart. CCCC Their fever al branches accompanying the branches of the Wind-pipe fromwhich they were pulled or torn, which are difperfed through the whole fubftance of the Lungs. DDDD The ends or extremities of all the f aid branches which do end in the extreme parts of the Lungs, and which for their fmal/nefi are called capillary or hairy. Their L3m- A third fort of Vefïèl branching in the Lungs are the Lymphedufis,
jbcdutit. f0 called from their office, which is to hold and convey a certain kind of water or humour called Lymph a. Thefe Veflèls we defcribed more fully in Book I. chap. 12. Here they wait on the Veins and Arteries through the whole furface of the Lungs, and receive the humour or water that they contain from them, being flrft feparated by the Glands ;- which hu- mour feems to be a fuperfluity of the bloud and it may be the nervous juice, which after they have received, they difcharge into the thoracick duci:, into which the greater branches of them are infërted. Though thefe Veflèls be but flender, yet they are of great ufe and neceffity ; for as Doctor Willis affirms, if at any time any of the branches of them hap- pen to be obftru&ed or broken, there follows thereupon in Man a Dropfie of the Lungs and Bread, oft-times accompanied with Coughs or Phthi- ficks: and this happens, becaufe by their being obftrucied or broken, the fuperfluous humour which they like fo many chanels ufe to contain or let pafs through them and carry off, is left behind, or diflils into the Cheft, which there breeds the fore mentioned Diftempers. Which opi- nion of his confirms me in my belief of the original of that watery hu- mour in a Horfe, which I have very often in a plentifull manner found in his Thorax in diflèdìrion, as I have above in this Chapter already faid. Their tierves. To thefe three forts of Veflèls a fourth is alfo added, which are the Nerves, with which they are well ftored, having innumerable branches of them difperfed through all their fubftance, accompanying the Bloud- vefïèls and Pipes of the Wind pipe f which Nerves do branch to them from the recurrent Nerves of the wandring pair. , Tbtìr ime. Now the Lungs being thus interwoven with thefe four forts of Vefièìs,
§raneMmm are covere^ Wlt^ a ftrong ^in, or indeed two skins, for it is no hard matter to feparate it into two. Thefe skins are furnifted with very many pores or holes of an indiffe-
rent largenefs, plain to be feen (faith Bartholin) if you blow up the Lungs with a pair of Bellows or Pipe. Which he doth not onely affirm that himfelf hath feen, but alfo quotes Johannes Walceus, who (faith he) hath obferved them to be in Live-anatomies as large as to contain a pret- ty big Peafe. Such pores, perhaps, there may be difcernible in Live- anatomies, though whether fo large as to receive a Peafe I fomewhat queftion.
|
||||
|
Book II. Of the Middle Venter, or Cheft. $$
queftion. indeed I had never my felf the opportunity of obferving thè
Lungs in Creatures yet alive, but as foon as they have been dead, though I have made never fo great hade to take the Lungs out before they ftiould be any thing cold, yet I could never fee any of them, although I have blown the wind through the Wind pipe with fuch violence, that I have broke fome of the fmall branches of it, and with the faid wind have raifed little bladders in the outer skin of the Lungs ; I fay notwithstanding, X could never fee or difcern any of thefe little pores, that did let any of the faid wind out, but the wind hath continued in thofe little bladders feve- ral days. Which experiment I alledge not with a defign to difprove thofe Avorthy and learned Anatomifts, that affirm to have feen them ; but one- ly to fhew that if any fuch there be, nothing paflès through them out of the Lungs into the Cheft. But now on the other hand, that fomething may be received by them out of the cavity of the Cheft into the Lungs, is not improbable ;"feeing one cannot imagine how corrupt purulent mat- ter collefted in the Cheft from an Impofthume breaking in it, or thé like, fhould by any other way get into the Wind-pipe, fo as to be cough'd up, which it often is as well in Horfes as in Men. If the inverting skins be removed in any part of the Lungs, and afterwards one blow into them through the Wind-pipe, then will the Air iflue pretty ftrongly out at the Breach. The outer of the skins is fmooth and thin, but the inner is pretty thick, and on its infide rough, appearing like an Honey-comb, by reafon of the extremities of the Veflèls, and of the bladders ending at it. Both growing clofe together as they do, make a very ftrong Mem- brane, which is very neceflary ; for otherwise in anhelation, or deep and violent infpiration, it would have been in danger of breaking when the Lungs are fo much diftended, to the great inconvenience if not certain death of the Creature to which it fhould fo have happened. Having finifhed the defcription of the feveral things of which the Lungs Their atl'm
are compounded or framed, in the next place we proceed to fpeak oïaniu^ their attion and ufe. Their firft ufe then is, (according to Galen) to ferve as a foft Pillow
or Bolfter for the Heart to reft upon, that the hardnefs of the Parts be- hind them ihould not offend it in its pulfation. Secondly, They are the inftruments of refpiration or breathing, which
is their proper attion. Now refpiration is performed by two motions of the Lungs, viz. dilatation and contraction. When they are dilated, they receive in Air, and this is termed infpiration ; but when they are con- tracted, they expel or drive forth the Air, which is called expiration. While the Air is drawn in in infpiration, a double benefit accrews to
the Beaft : Firft his Heart and Bloud are thereby cooled ,* whence we fee that the hotter he is, the more frequently he draws his breath, that the bloud may be the more fanned by the cool Air. Secondly, hereby the vital flame is continued ; for as an ordinary Fire is extinguifhed by with- drawing the Air from it, fo does the Animal die when it is denied Air to breathe in. To thefe benefits of infpiration may be added, that when the Lungs are heaved up by the Air drawn in, their fubftance is rarefied, fo that there is granted a freer circulation of the bloud through them. The Air having performed thefe offices, by its flay in the Lungs it be-
comes hot, and fo can be of no further ufe for cooling the Heart and Bloud ; and its nitrous particles are confumed by the vital flame that feeds upon them, and therefore it becomes neceflary to expel it, that there may- be |
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
be room for new and frefh Air to be drawn in for the ufes aforefaid. So
that this drawing in and expelling the Air fucceed one another by turns, and anfwer to the jyftole and diaftole of the Heart ; onely this motion of the Lungs is partly voluntary and partly natural, but that of the Heart wholly natural. But neither is expiration or breathing forth without its particular ufes ;
for by it are vented or voided the fmoaky or footy fleams or excrements of the Heart and arterial Bloud, ( which excrements are brought from the Heart through the pneumonick Artery with the bloud :) alfo the thin and thick excrements of the Lungs gathered in the branches of the Wind- pipe are by this motion of expiration, ( heightened into a cough ) brought into the one great trunk thereof, through which as through a Reed it is driven by the force of the Air up to the Mouth and Nofe, to be by them voided. Of what nature the motion of the Lungs is, and by what Mufcles of
the Breaft it is affifted, the Reader may inform himfelf in the fourth Chapter of this Book that treats of the Midriff whofe motion corre- fponds to this of the Lungs. |
||||||
|
CHAP. X.
Of the Neck,
HAV ING now finifhed my Difcourfe of the two Lower Penters, or-
der of DiiHtion requires that I ihould afcend to the third and up- permofl Venter, and treat of the Head and Animal Faculty ; but I will firii fpeak to thofe Parts which lead me thither, and thofe are the Parts of the Neck. The Meek is called in Latin Collum, a colle, from an hillock ; for it ari-
feth out of the Body as an hill doth out of the red of the Earth. It comprehends the diftance between the Head and Bread, and its
Parts are containing, or contained : as for the former, they are fuch as
are found in the other Parts of the Body ; but
The contained The Parts contained are peculiar to it Mf, and are thefe : the Gullet,
Pam of the the Wind-pipe, the Vert eh te, or Joints of the Neck, and its Mufcles.
Neck.. qc j-jjgfg two jatter we ^a|j difcourfe jn fhe fourth and Fifth Books ; and
of the two former, we treated of one in the Firfl Book, as belonging to
the Stomach, and of the other in this as pertaining to the Lungs. But
becaufe the uppermoft parts of both thefe next to the Throat are diftin-
guiih'd from the reft by peculiar names and have particular ufes, we lhall
treat of them in this Chapter. Now the top of the Wind-pipe is called
Larynx, and of the Gullet, Pharynx.
of the La- The Larynx or Throttle is fituated, as hath been faid, at the upper
rynx. part of the Neck, adjoining to the root of the Tongue. It is in Humane
Bodies the inftrument of the Voice, and in whatfoever other Creatures,
of that noife which they make, by what name foever it be diftinguifhed,
as particularly of the neighing of an Horfe,
Its
|
||||||
|
Book IL Of the Middle Venter* or Chef. 97
Its figure is round and almoft circular, onely bunching a little out on /„ ^gHte,
the forefide, and depreflèd as much on the back-part next to the Gullet, for the Gullets better and more fecure paiTage, and that the meat in fwal- lowing might not be hindred from defending by it. It is framed of five Cartilages or Grift les, the firft of which is called Jf^gjf-
Scutiformis or Buckler-like, becaufe it refembles a Shield or Buckler, be- Iages. ing hollow within and bunching without. In Humane Bodies ( in Men more efpeciaJly, for Women have it not fo far ftieking out as Men ) this bunching out is by fome Anatomifts termed Adam's'Apple, from an old Tradition that a part of the fatal Apple abode flicking in Adam s Throat in that place. The next or fecond Griftle of the Larynx is called Annularis from the
refemblance it hath to a Turkifh Ring, wherewith they arm their Thumb when they moot. This Griftle is round, and incompaüeth the whole ^ThTthird and fourth, becaufe as they are joined together they refers
ble the neck of an Ewer, are called Guttales. Thefe two Grifte many times pafs for one, becaufe they have but one skin proper to them both, and untili that skin be removed they are not to be parted. Thefe two form the glottis or little tongue, being a chink of that fhape. The fifth is termed Epiglottis becaufe it is placed above the glottis or
chink. The fubftance of this is foft, and its ihape like an Ivy-leaf Its ufe is to hinder the falling down of any thing that may be oflenfive to the Wind-pipe, when the Creature doth fwallow either his meat or drink. Thefe Cartilages are moved by feveral pairs of Mufcles, which fhall be
defcribed in the Fourth Book. Table XX.
Reprefenteth the upper part of the Wind pipe faftned to the « Hyoides,
as alfo to the root of the Tongue ; l&ewife the os Hyndes jt felf fe- parated from all other parts ; it containeth alfo two other figures of the upper part of the Wind-pipe, to fhew its feveral Parts. Figure J.
Shews the upper part of the Wind-pipe, and the Parts to which it h
faften'd. AAA A Shew the Cartilages or Grift les of the upper part of the Windpipe,
BB The head of the f aid Wind-pipe faftned to the os Hyoides.
C The Ligament that faftneth the head to the f aid hone.
ÖDDD The os, Hyoides. .
EE The iones that join with the os Hyoides at the bottom of the Head*
FF The Tongue.
|
|||||
|
Figuj»
|
|||||
|
og The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
Figure II.
Shews the os Hyoides feparated from the Wind-pipe and from the
Tongue. AA Shew the two long hones joined to the os Hyoides, who/e other ends
are faftned (when in their places) to the bottom of the Head.
BBB the feveral cartilaginous hones that make up the os Hyoides. Figure HI.
A Shews the Epiglottis or Throat-flap turned more upon the upper fide>
the plainer to /hew the hack parts of it.
B The hackjide of the Scutiformis. CCC The Cartilages or Griftles of the Wind-pipe. Figure IV.
Shews the upper part of the Wind-pipe with the Shield-fafhioned
Griftle and Throat-flap turned on one fide to fhew the fides of thofe Parts. A The Epiglottis or Throat-flap.
B The Shield fafhioned Griftle. C A portion of the Wind-pipe. its Veffiis. The Veffels of the Larynx are of all forts. Veins are derived to it
from the external Jugulars ; Arteries from the large branch of the Ca- rotides ; Its Nerves it hath from the recurrent Nerves of the ( eighth, commonly reckoned for the ) fixth pair, which are called in thofe Crea- tures which have voices, vocales. Its Kernels. There are alfo two forts of Kernels belonging to it. One pair is called
Tonfi Ha, which are placed at-the fides of the Vvula, and at the upper part of the Larynx. Thefe are thofe which in Humane Bodies are called the Almonds of the Ears, and are of this ufe, viz. to feparate that fleg- matiek humour from the bloud that makes the flaver; which humour ferves to moiften.it> and alfo the Gullet, thrt by their glibnefs or flippe- rinefs they may the better ferve for their refpe&ive ufes. The other pair of Kernels are placed contrary to the former, namely
•at the lower end of the Larynx, in number two, one on each fide of the Buckler-like Griftle. In Horfes they are much larger than the former, and by them large branches of the external jugular Veins and Arte- ries do run. Theiè are thofe Kernels under the Throat or between the Jaws of an Horfe that one may plainly feel at any time, but more efpe- cially when an Horfe has the Glanders, for in fuch they are much fwelled. |
|||||
|
The
|
|||||
|
Book II. Of the Middle Venter, or Cheft. 9$
The Pharynx ( or top of the Gullet) is fo called from a Greek wordjrfepharynx*
that fignifies to carry, becaufe it conveys the meat and drink from the Mouth toward the Stomach. It is fomewhat more fleftiy than the reft of the Gullet, and reaches up, lehind, to the Vvula, on the fides to the Tonfils, and on the fore-part to the Epiglottis. It has feveral Mufcles by the help of which it performs its motion, of which we fhall treat in the Fourth Book. Its ufe is to receive the meat when it is chewed, and graf- ping it on every fide by contracting it felf, to fqueeze it down the Gullet, by which it defcends to the Stomach. Thus much of the Parts of the Meek, which brings me to
|
||||||
|
The End of the Second Book
|
||||||
|
p the
|
||||||
|
( 101 )
|
|||||||||
|
THE
ANATOMY
O F A N
HORSE.
|
|||||||||
|
BOOK III.
Of the Head.
|
|||||||||
|
CHAP. I.
Of the Head and Animal Parts contained therein. HAVIN G finiftied the defcriptiori of the two Lower Fernery
which are two of the principal Parts of the Body ; I come now in the next place to betake my felf to the lafl principal Part which is the Head, being the feat of the Animal Fa- culty, as the two lower are of the Vital and Natural. In directing of this Part I (ball follow the fame method as in the two former, examining its Parts in order, as they offer1 themfelves to our fight in diflèction, firft dividing it into parts to that intent. But before we begin to divide it, I think it will not be amifs to fpeak
fomething of its fupereminency over all the other Parts ; for in refpecl: that it is the feat of the Senfes, it is lookt upon by Anatomifts to be thé chief Manfion-houfe of the Animal Soul; and Senfe is fo neceflàfy to eve- ry living Creature, that without it, it is not far from being without life. And as the Head in this regard is the moft principal Part, fo isitaccor- dingly fituated in the uppermoft place, above all the other Parts of the P x Body,
|
|||||||||
|
102 The Anatoviy of an Hor [e.
Body, for this reafon, viz. that the Animal fpirits as from a fountain
might fpring from thence, and communicate fenfe and motion down to all Parts of the Body : but for the Eyes fake more efpecially has it this high fituation, for thereby two conveniencies accrue to the fenfe of fee- ing ; firft, the Eyes being placed as in a Watch-tower, can difcover things at the greater diflance, and thereby prevent many dangers which might otherwife come unawares : and in the next place by being placed fonear the fountain of Animal fpirits, the optiek Nerves, which are of a foft fub- ftance, and could not therefore endure a long paflàge, are fecured from breaking. As to the figure or ihape of the Head, I will omit fpeaking of that,
fince it is fo vifible and fo common to be feen. And though iomething might be fpoken as to the true and moft natural lhape of an Horfe s Head, yet that being already defcribed by other Authours, and may by me (if God filali fo long fpare my life ) be treated of more at large in another Book which I defign to fet forth of the feveral Cures performed by me, by fuch means and methods as I have experimented fince I came to un- derftand Anatomy ; I lhall wave it at this time, and fpeak no more of the Head in general, but proceed to treat of its Parts. The Parts of the Head, ( as of the other two Venters before difcourfêd
of) may be diftinguifhed into Parts containing and contained. The contain- ing are either common or proper ; of which in order. The common Firfl: then of its common containing Parts ; the firft of which is the Cu- Tlm'of the^e w*tn *ts hairs, °f which we have fufficiently treated in the firft: mad. Chapter of the Firft Book ; the next is the cutis or True skin, alfo the Fat and flefliy Pannicle, of all which we have treated at large in the five firft Chapters of the Firft Book, whither the Reader may pleafe to turn back for his better information. The proper The proper containing Parts of the Head are five, namely the Mufcles, containing t|ae feriCranium, the Periofteum, the Skull, and the Membranes or Me- ninges contained within it. The Mufdet. To the Mufcles we will fpeak in the next Book which is of the Mufcles, as being the moft proper place.
The Pericra- The flefhy Pannicle .or membrana carnofa together with the other com- nium. rnon invefting Parts above it being removed, the Pericranium next appears, which is a thin, white and very fenfible Membrane fpread over the whole Skull, adhering immediately to the Periofteum every-where, faving where the temporal Mufcles on each fide come between them. There are ma- ny flender Fibres that pais from this Membrane through the futures or feams of the Skull, which are knit to the crajfa meninx or outer skin, which cloaths the Brain on the infide of the Scull ; whence fome arèpf opinion that the Pericranium has its rife from it. Whether that be fo or no, thefe Fibres however ferve to ftay the dura mater in its place, where- by it hinders the Brain which it invefts from being clafh'd againft the ruggid Skull in violent concuffions of the Head. 77;<?Periofte- The next invefting Part is the Periofteum, which is a Skin of much um* alike fubftance with the Pericranium, onely thinner. It is of the fame na- ture with that Membrane that invefts all the Bones in the whole Body,
excepting the Teeth which are bare. From this Membrane it is that the Skull as well as all other bones are fenfible, for of themfelves they are fenflefs Parts. It fticks very clofe to the Skull, and it, as well as the Pe- ricranium, has Arteries from the external Carotides, and Veins from the external Jugulars. We |
||||
|
Book III. Of the Head. Ï05
We mould in the next place fpeak to the Bones of the Head, or the fe-
veral Bones of the Skull diftinguilhed by feveral futures ; but I omit them alfo here, and mall fpeak to them in their proper place, (viz. in the Fifth Book ) and proceed to the Parts within the Skull, the f/rft of which is the dura meninx, that is, the hard Skin or Membrane, called likewife crafia meninx, to diflinguilh it from the thinner that lies next under it, and immediately cloaths the Brain. This hard or thick Membrane is called by many Authours dura mater Dura m©;
or the hard mother, becaufe they conceive that moli: of the Skins of the n,nx' whole Body do fpring from it, and therefore it is efteemed as their mother. Its figure and amplitude anfwer to the Bones of the Skull, by reafon it its connexion
inveiieth all its cavities. It is knit, and that very flrongly, to the bot- tom of the Skull, to its proceïlês, and to the circles of its holes, from whence it cannot eafily be removed. It is fufpended alfo by the Fibres above fpoken of that come through the futures of the Skull from the Pe- ricranium, as likewife by the Bloud-veflels that penetrate the Skull and are inferted into this Membrane. By which Veflèls it is in like manner fattened to the Skin under it called the pia mater, and in feveral places to the Brain it felf. It confifls of two Skins, as the Peritoneum of the Lowell Venter, and the ? leur a of the middle do. In its upper part it is doubled, and its duplicature divides the Brain into two parts, the right and left. This duplicature being in the hinder part broad, and growing nar- rower Hill as it inclines to the fore-part, I mean towards the Nofe, is by Phyficians called falx or the fickle, becaufe in a Man's Head which is the faix. pretty round, it makes almoft an half circle, as a fickle does. We may retain the fame name for it in an Horfe, though lefs properly, as differing fomewhat in ihape. In this reduplication there are feveral cavities or hollowneilès, com-
monly called by the Latin name finus, which are accounted receptacles its Smm'u of abounding bloud and fpirits ; by Galen they are called the Ventricles of the dura mater, by others ciilerns of bloud. The higheft of thefe, and alfo the longeft, doth run all along the top or upper part of the falx from the Nofe length-ways of the Head towards the Noll, where it is divided into feveral branches, two of which defcend downwards to the bottom of the occiput, and a third runs to the gianduia pine ali s. Into thefe hollowneflës or finus'-'s the mouths of the Veins and Arteries
are faid to open, the Arteries pouring bloud into them, and the Veins receiving it from them again, as hath been obferved in the difïècling the Heads of living Creatures, for in the long or uppermoft yf»«r hath been feen a ftrong beating or pulfe occafioned by the bloud that is difcharged into it by the Arteries. The other Membrane or Skin which invefts the Brain is called tenuis Tetmis ms-
meninx from its thinnefs, and pia mater or tender mother from its imme^ ninx' diate covering or clofe flicking to the Brain, unbracing it as a Mother does her Infant. It is fpread over all the cortical or outer part of the Brain, infinuating it felf into all its windings, as alfo into thofe of the cerebellum and medulla oblongata, and ties all their proceilês and parts to one another, that they cannot be difplaced or bear hard upon one ano- ther. And whereever it goes, the Bloud-veiièls min along it, and are difperfed out of it into the Parts that it cloaths. This Skin is very thin, and of a moll exquifite fenfe, yea this and the
dura mater feem to be the inftruments of all fenfation, For as fenfe is commu-
|
||||
|
lQA The Anatomy of an Horfe.
communicated to every part immediately by the Nerves, fo the nervous
Fibres are more probably propagated from thefe Membranes that cloath the Nerves, than from the medullar Part it felf of the Nerve which is de- rived from the medulla oblongata and fpinal marrow, which of themfelves have little or no fenfe, but onely by virtue of thefe Membranes that in- veli them. Us Veffeh. It is furniflied with very many Arteries and Veins, moft of which are exceeding fmall, but in number infinite, interwoven one with another in tlie manner of a Net. The Arteries do fpring from the Carotides and Cervical Arteries, and the Veins from the jugular Veins. The ufe of the The ufe of thefe two Membranes that inveli the Brain is to fuftain the Meninges. Veilèls that enter into it, to cloath and defend it from the hardnefs of the Parts that environ it, to keep it in its due form and fituation ( for of it felf it would run all about, it is of fo foft a confiftency ) and laftly to afford a coat to all the Nerves, not onely to thofe that fpring within the Skull, but to all thofe alfo that arife out of the Back-bone, for thefe two Mem- branes are propagated all along it, inverting its pith, ( called the fpinal marrow ) out of which thofe Nerves fpring. |
||||||
|
CHAP. II.
Of the Brain in general.
Tha exceUen* F) E ING come to treat of the Brain, it fliall not be amifs, if before I
cy of the J^ fpeak of its feveral Parts, I fay fomething as to its excellency, and the eminent offices it performs for the benefit of the Animal. All Au- thours agree that it is one of the moft noble Parts of the whole Body, ranked for its dignity even with the Heart it felf. And indeed, as I have intimated in the foregoing Chapter, its fituation fheweth plainly as much, it being placed in the higheft part of all the Body, and there fenced about as it were with ftrong walls on every fide, to fecure it from outward in- juries. In it are contained the Animal Faculties, viz. thofe of Senfe and Motion. The former of thefe two Faculties fits in it as in a Throne of Majefty, beholding the forms of all things under her feet, having all the Organs and Inftruments of the Senfes attending Her, at her command. For firft the Eyes are placed near her, that as Spies or Centinels watching day and night they may difcover the Enemy. The Ears alfo are feated near her, at her command to be turned this way or that way, to liften to any dangers that are approaching, that fo they may be avoided. Like- wife the Inftruments of Smelling and Tailing are near her, that at her command thofe Foods that are profitable and neceftary may be received, and that unpleafant or hurtfull Food may be rejected. And as the Faculty °f Senfation hath the forementioned Minifters or Inftruments placed near her for the execution of her oftices ; fo hath the motive Faculty a domi- nion extended to the furtheft limits of the Body, of which every Limb and Member is perfectly at her beck, to move this way or that way as me directs. I fay, both thefe noble Faculties have their feat in the Brain ; for
|
||||||
|
■Book fit Of the Mal ïê$
for it is not a private or particular Organ of Senfe, but an univerfal one?
nor doth the motive Faculty exert it felf in the Brain it felf, which is in- capable of voluntary motion ; but that motion which it has, is natural, and that not owing to it felf, but to the Arteries that are difperfed in it, for the beating of thefe makes it feem to widen, and contrae: it felf, as hath been obferved in Wounds of the Heads of both Men and Beafts. This motion, I fay, is communicated to it from the Arteries, and in its dila- tation it receives arterial bloud by the Carotid Arteries, and in its con- traction it forces that Bloud into the Veins, and the Animal Spirits into the Nerves, by which they are carried into all Parts of the Body, and with them the moving power is imparted; for without fuch influence from the brain an Animal would be like a Log, it would be able neither to move nor feel, or rather it would ceafe to be an Animal, and become a dead Carcafe. How abfurd and ridiculous a thing is it then for any Man that hath That an Korft
any Brain himfelf, to imagine a Horfe to have none? yet fuch Men I ****&#•> have my felf met withall, yea I know feveral which to this day will not be convinced of that erroneous opinion by any arguments whatever. Neither will they take the pains to irifpeft the Parts, to fatisfy themfelves of the contrary, but will ftill continue in their falfe received opinion, merely taken from a filly obfervation they have made when they have feen Horfes and Oxen knocked on the Head, where they fee the Skull broken and nothing under it, but a few hard and dry Bones, without any marrowy fubftance : I fay from this obfervation they draw their conclusion, that a Horfe hath no Brain. I much wonder how any fuch Dolt can have the confidence to take upon him the name of a Farrier, and pretend to cure he knows not what. Such Perfons I would defire onely when they fee another Horfe knockt on the Head, that they pre- vail with them that doe it, ( or other wife when any Horfe is dead ) to ftrike him a blow or two with the fame force above the ufuai place be- tween the Ears or a very little lower, and they ihall then be foon convin- ced that he hath a Brain, (though not fo large by much as a Man hath, confidering the different bulk of their Bodies. ) And when they are con- vinced of that, I hope they will take pains to be fatisfied in the other Parts of the Body by fearching into them, as by thefe my Labours they are di- rected ; fo fhall they improve themfelves in their profemons, and I have the wifhed end of my pains, which I have taken to advance them. |
|||||||
|
CHAR
|
|||||||
|
*-
|
|||||||
|
io 6 The Anatomy of art Hor &
|
||||||||
|
CHAP. III.
Of the feveral Tarts of the Brain-, viz. that which is jirit%~
ly called the Brain, the Cerebellum or After-brain^ and the Spinal Marrow. the Pmu <ƒ T F we take the Brain in a large fignifkation, it comprehends all that
the Brain. J marrowy fubflance that is found in the cavity of the Skull : yet for diftindKorfs fake it is by all Authours divided into three parts; firft, the fore-part, being the largeft, is called the Brain ; fecondly, the middle-part is called Cerebellum, the Brainlet or After-brain ; and laftly, thehindmoft and lowermoft is termed Medulla oblongata, being that part of the Spinal Marrow which is within the Skull. The manner Now to find out thefe feveral Parts we muft divide the Skull with a Saw s/T"r tbC^or t*at PurP°^e» beginning almoft as far back as the Noll-bone, or in- d}* a'm" deed quite as far, dividing the hole of the Noll-bone in the middle, and fo go with your Saw firft along one fide of the Head a little above the auditory paflàge till you come to the Fore-head a little below the Eyes (or juft even with them;) where being come, and having fawed onely jufl through the Skull, ( for you muft have a care that your Saw do not pierce the Brain, for that will hinder your feeing the Parts of it ) then crofs the Fore-head with your Saw and pafs along the other fide till you come to the hole of the Noll-bone again : by doing which you will loofen the up- per part of the Skull, which with care you muft take on> that you break not the dura mater or Skin next under it, for that Skin is faftened to it in feveral places. When you have removed that piece of the Skull, then remove the Skin alfo by parting it lengthways down the middle, where- by you Ihall plainly fee the Brain with its convolutions or folds, alfo the After-brain with its wormlike proceflès, &c in fuch manner as they are reprefented in the following Table. |
||||||||
|
Table XXI.
Fig. I. Shews the Skull of an Horfe fawed afunder in fuch a man-
ner as that the Parts of the Brain may be feen in their natural fituation. FF Shew the fubflance of the Brain covered with the pia mater onely, the
dura mater being removed for that purpofe.
HH The Cerebellum or After-brain alfo in its natural fituation. IX The procerus vermiform es or worm-like Procejfes. MM A portion of the medulla oblongata. NN The dura mater fo far as it contains the medulla oblonatag, cut in funder and turned back.
OO The Noll-bone cut in funder. |
||||||||
|
Fig- II.
|
||||||||
|
Book III. Of the Head 107
Fig- II. Shews the Brain removed and taken out, that the After-brain
and its Worm-like Proeeffès might be the plainer feen. CCCC The Cerebellum or After-hrain turned a little downward to
fhew its Parts more plain.
B The Wormlike froceffes. D The Spinal Marrow fo much as is contained within the Skull.
EE That part of the dura mater which invefts the Spinal Marrow with- in the Skull, opened and turned back. Of thefe feveral Parts of the Brain we fhall fpeak in their order, and the fubfiarce
firfl of that which is ftri£tly fo called. It is of a marrowy fubftance, ^.f»^0-" but not equally fo, for the upper part of it ufes to be called its cortex or ff/tity™1 bark, being of a more dusky colour ; whereas the inner or lower part is caüed-J more white, and is particularly called the marrow or pith of the Brain. It is divided into two parts, a right and a left, by a Membrane that runs length-ways of the Head, from the Fore-head to the Noll ; but this divi- sion defcends no deeper into the Brain than the Afh-coloured part of it reaches. The Skin which divides it, is called falx or the fickle, of which I have already fpoken in the firfl Chapter. The atlion of the Brain is to elaborate the Animal Spirits, which from its aiihn.
it are tranfmitted tò the Medulla oblongata, and from thence into the Nerves, for the fenfation and motion of the whole Body, as lias been more fully fhewn in the two foregoing Chapters. The fecond part of the Brain, called the After-brain, is fituated in the The cerebei-
back-part of the Skull next the Noll bone, onely parted from the Brain on,UDn- its upper part by the pia mater or undermoft Skin. This diflëreth not much from the Brain either in colour or fubflance,
but onely in its convolutions or foldings : for the Brain obferveth no or- der in its winding, but the Brainlet doth, for all its folds are circular, be- ing extended one over" another like plates, and each is kept apart from other by the pia mater that invefls each of them feverally. It is framed of four Parts, whereof two are lateral, (or on each fide) itt pam.
the right and the left ; and thefe are fpherical, or round like a Globe : The other two are in the middle betwixt thefe, Handing before and behind ; and thefe are made up of feveral orbicular Portions m fimilitude like the' Worms which are found in rotten Timber, and are from thence called Worm-like Proeeffès. The ufe of the Brainlet or After-brain is the fame as of the Brain.
|
|||||||
|
o_
|
CHAP.
|
||||||
|
ïog The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
|
||||||
|
CHAP. IV.
Of the Spinal Marrow contained within and without the
SkjiU. The sphai /•■■-* HAT part of the Spinal Marrow that is within the Brain, is ter-
i^AWfcmw- -*- mec* Particu^arty medulla oblongata, and is the third part of the
Brain, being of an uniform, white and compact fubftance, fomething harder than either the Brain or After-brain. tu rife. It arifes out of the Brain and Brainlet, and that from fix roots ; two of
which fpring at the upper and fore-part of the Brain, and are called cor-
pora flriata, the ftreaked or chamfered Bodies, being onely the ends of its two Thighs ; the other four arife lower and more backward, by which it adheres to the Brainlet, and are thofe protuberances or jettings out that are called Nates and Teftes, its Buttocks and Tefticles. it, few. Its figure (after its rife) is long and round, being thicker near its be-
ginning than afterwards. Its length within the Skull is about two inches, beginning towards the fore-part of the Head, and reaching to the Noll, whence it is lengthned and continued down the Chine as far as the Dock. That part of it which is contained in the Chine, we commonly call in Horfes the pith of the Back. its Mem- Within the Skull it is clad onely with two Memlranes ; but without,
branes. jt js covered with three. The firft of which it hath from the inner Skin of
the Brain or pia mater ; this immediately covers it. The fecond it hath from the upper Skin of the Brain or dura mater ; this is next to and co- vereth the former. And the third is faid to fpring from a flrong Liga- ment which binds together the fore-part of the Rack-bones, covering both the former, and is very flrong. tts ufe. Now the ufe of the Spinal Marrow is to be the original of all the
Nerves, which from it ( as from a Fountain ) like fmall Rivulets con-
vey to all Parts of the Body the Animal Spirits. For although the Brain in common fpeech be accounted the original of the Nerves ; that is to be underflood in a large fenfe, when all the three Parts of the Brain are included in that one general appellation : But when the Brain comes to be divided into Parts, which are diftinguifh'd by particular names, then are both the Brain and Brainlet thrown out of the office of being the original of the Nerves. For ocular Infpe&ion doth teftify, that it is from that part of the Spinal Marrow contained within the Skull, from which all the Nerves of the Brain do fpring ; as likewife from that part of the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, called the Pith or Marrow of the Back, that all the other Nerves of the whole Body do arife. Which large and far diftant origination of the Nerves is very necefìàry ; for it would not have been fafe ( in confederation of the length of the way) that all the Nerves ihould be carried from the Brain to the inferior or lower Parts ; and therefore it is wifely provided by Nature, that from the Marrow or Pith of the back thofe Nerves mould fpring which furnifh the Parts fo remote from the Brain. |
||||||
|
As
|
||||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal tàf
As for the numler of Nerves which fpring from the Spinal Marrow j* mmbef
without the Skull, they are in a Horfe thirty feven pair, according to f kovù the number of Joints or vertebra from the Noll-bone or the going out off**** the Marrow from the head, to the fetting on of the tail ; for out of thé holes or perforations in every Bone do pals a pair of Nerves. Therefore there being fo many Bones, there are fo many pair of Nerves that fpring from the Spinal Marrow. And from the medulla oblongata or that part of the Spinal Marrow that is within the Skull, there fpring nine pair, as fliall be further ihewed hereafter. |
||||||
|
CHAP. V.
Of the Tarts of the Cerebrum, or Bram properly fo called
viz. the Rete mirabile, Gianduia pituitaria, Infuridi- bulum, thè Ventricles of the Brain, the Corpus cal- Iòfum, plexus choroides, Nates, Teftes, Penis or Gianduia pinealis. HAVING givenalhortdefcription of the Cerebrum, (or Brain pro-
perly fo called) the Cerebellum, and Spinal Marrow; we now return to the Cerebrum, to take a more exad view of its feveral Parts ; and we fliall begin with the Rete mirabile or wonderfull Net. This Net is framed of innumerable twigs of Arteries which fpring from ne Rete m-
the largeft branches of the Carotid and Cervical Arteries, which pais in- "biIe" to the Skull by proper holes in the Bones of the Temples. This Net is far more difcernable in Oxen and Horfes than in other leïïèr Animals. It is called the wonderfull Net by reafon of its (tratture, the Arteries^ «taa,
of which it is compofed croffing one another like the threds of a Net, or rather as if feveral Nets were fpread one over another. It is difperfed all over the bottom of the Brain both without and within the dura mater, fome of the fmalleft moots of it branching into the pituitary Glandule. The ufe of this Net is faid to be for the preparing of the Bloud and Vi- its «/?.
tal Spirits to make Animal Spirits of. For which purpofe in the twinings and windings of thefe fmall Venels they are a long time detained, for the better elaboration and preparation of them, and left they might rufli into the Brain in too full aftream, and thereby overflow and difturb the Ani- mal Faculty. * To fee this wonderfull Net, as alfo the other Parts of the bottom Of The manner of
under-fide of the Brain, you muft (after having fawn the Skull afunder ^goutfe as is fhewed in the foregoing Chapter ) with a pair of fharp Pincers pinch *£'$#"■ off by little and little the fides of the remaining part of the Skull, all''* Farts round, untili you come as near the bottom as you can; and yow muftappm' then with as much care as ppffible lift up the Brain, beginning at the fore- part of it, where the Bone of the Fore head a little Separates it. After you have lifted it a little way up, there will come in fight the mam- millary ProcefTes together with their nervous Filaments or Threds that s-j;-- Qji pafs |
||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
pafs through the Sieve like Bone, hanging at them ; which being loofened
and the Brain farther pulled up, the next thing that appeareth are the branches of the Carotid Arteries, which having penetrated the Skull are carried to the Brain ; which being cut orFand the Brain yet a little farther turned up, the unition or coming together, and the going out of the Op- tick Nerves are to be feen ; the Trunks of which if you likewife cut of£ there are other Arteries (alfo branches of the Carotides) to be feen, coming in through the Bones of the Temples : which Arteries ( as I have already fliewed ) are ( with fome fmall Veins joined with them ) thofe Veflèls which make up the Rete miratile or wonderfull Net, dif- courfed of at the beginning of this Chapter. After you have cut in funder thefe Arteries alfo, then you may by lif-
ting up the Brain flill a little higher, perceive the moving Nerves of the Eyes ( for they come next to view ) and after them the other pairs of Nerves follow in order, in fuch fort, that one pair of them being cut off" and the Brain with its Appendices or Proceflès more lifted up, the next is flill more plainly difcerned by the carefull Anatomift. In which method and order all the Nerves, to which I fliall particularly fpeak iö a conve- nient place, ( I mean the Nerves arifing within the Skull ) and alfo the Arteries, as well the Carotid as Vertebral, being at length cut off, the whole frame of the Brain may be taken out of the Skull. Table XXII.
Reprefenteth two Skulls, the one to fliew the bafis or bottom of the
Brain and the Head of the Spinal Marrow contained within the Skull, with the rife of the Nerves from it ; and the other ihews the cavity of the Skull in which the Brain was feated, but now remo- ved, the better to (hew the Gianduia pituitaria and other Parts that lie under the Brain. Figure I.
Shews the bottom of the Brain and Spinal Marrow.
AA Shew tie Eyes.
BB The Optiek Nerves.
CC The miming Nerves of the Eyes.
DD The fourth pair of'Nerves,by Dottor Willis called the Pathetiek Nerves,
proper to one of the Mufcles of the Eyes onely, hy which the Eye is chiefly moved in the Paffions of Love, Anger, &c. EEEE Several other Nerves arifing from the Spinal Marrow within the
Skull. • FFFF The bottom of the Brain.
GG The Spinal Marrow called here medulla oblongata.
HH The Spinal Marrow cut off at its going out of the Skull.
IIII The fever al barrs of the Palate of the Mouth.
<N The cavity or hol/ownefi that goes from the Palate of the Mouth te
the Nofe. RRRR The feveral Teeth.
SS The dura mater cut in/under and turned back.
T The Gianduia pituitaria.
Figure
|
||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal 111
Figure II.
Shews the Skull with the Brain taken out of it
A Shews the hole where the Spinal Marrow paffeth out of the Skulls
B the Gianduia pituitaria or Flegmgland.
CC The Optiek Nerves.
DD The hottom of the Skull upon which the Brain did refi.
After you have thus taken out the Brain and viewed all its Parts as
they appear before you diflècì it, you will at the very middle of its bot- tom, a little above the uniting of the Optiek Nerves, within the hard Skin or dura mater, (for that is in the next place to be taken off and re- moved, otherwife it will hide all other Parts from you ; but that Skin being removed in the place aforefaid, I fay) you will find a fmall round Kernel, in compafs about the bignefs of a Groat, and fomething flat and round. Its feat is in a little hole made for that purpofe at the very bot- tom of the Skull, in a Bone called the wedge-like Bone. This will be more plainly feen if you take the Brain out and leave the dura mater be- hind ; for then you fee it in its natural pofition, as the letter B in Fig. z. of the foregoing Table fliews it : but if you take the dura mater out, this comes out with it. This Kernel is called Gianduia pituitaria, the fnotty Gianduia pf- or flegmey Kernel, from its office, which is to receive the fnotty Excre- cuita"«- ments of the Brain from the Infundilulum or Funnel, and afterward to tranfmit or convey them away, as fome Authors fay, into the Palate, from thence to be avoided by the Mouth or Nofe. But others will have it, that it is fent into the Jugular Veins by two fmall ducts or pafliges, one on each fide, being branches of one Trunk that begins at the bottom of the faid Gland, and is divided into two, after it has penetrated the wedge-like Bone. Which pafTàges they have found out by injecting Li- quors of feveral colours with a fyringe into them, for they have obferved the faid Liquors to pafs into the Veins, but none to come to either the Pa- late or Nofe. By which Experiment they conclude, that whatever ferum or wheyiih or flegmatiek Humour iffues out of the Ventricles of the Brain through the Funnel, diftils not upon the Palate, but is poured again into the Bloud and mixed with it. Whence we may gather that the Rheum From whence or Snot which iffueth fo plentifully out of the Nofes of Horfes that have fe Sm.H great Colds, and alfo of glander'd Horfes, falls not ( as I have my^tX. fclf fometimes thought ) from the Brain, but is feparated out of the Arte- ries from the Bloud by the Glands or Kernels of the upper part and infide of the Nofe. Which we may the rather believe, when we obferve that other Glands are fwell'd with Rheum at the fame time, as particularly the Kernels under the Horfe's Jaws ; which is one of the certaineft figns we have of a Horfe s inclining to the Glanders. And this may ferve to con- vict of errour all our ancient Authors who did hold, ( and our Practitio- ners who at this day do hold) that the Glanders proceed from a defect and wafting in the Brain ; and that all that fnotty matter comes from thence which iflues out of the Nofe. Which were it fo, all the Brain in the Horfes Head would not be fufficient to fupply it with matter for three daies, according to the quantity that I have feen come from one in that time. It is therefore a very falfe opinion, taken up merely upon |
||||
|
jj2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
guefs, without infpefting into the Parts, that our Practitioners do com-
monly entertain concerning this Difeafe. No fitch Dif- Neither is there fuch a Difeafe as the mourning of the Chine, as they eafe at the do to this day hold ; for it is impoffible any Creature fhould continue fo "thTchme. l°ng alive as till all his Brain be fo far wafted by this Difeafe, that it comes to reach the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, which is that I fuppofë they call the Chine. But this Difeafe, by them called the mourning of the Chine, is diftin-
guifhed into a different Difeafe from the former from the Matter's altering its colour ; for it is generally obferved that after the Horfe hath had this Difeafe running on him for fome time, the corrupt Matter or Snot chan- ges by degrees from an indifferent white to a more dull colour, inclining at firft to a little reddifh, but after a longer time, efpecially when the Horfe begins to grow towards his end, it will be very black and very naufeous both to fee and fmell. From this alteration of the colour, as I have faid, I do believe they
give the Difeafe this proper and diftinguifhing name of mourning of the Chine ; whereas it is onely a greater degree of one and the fame Difeafe, in which the Chine is not at all affected, at leaft no more than any other Part of the Body, all of which languifhes away by this inveterate Diftom- per. By what fteps it proceeds, and how the Matter comes to alter its co- lour, I will give you my opinion. The màfs of Bloud being depraved either by unwholfome Food, or by
great Colds, or laftly by infection from the Air and from other Horfes (for this Diftemper is catching) this flegmatiek Matter collefted in it is fpued out of the ends of the Arteries in the upper part of the Noftrils, about the fpongie Bones chiefly ; for in an Horfe there is little of this Mat- ter comes out of the Mouth, but it ftill defcends by the Noftrils. This Humour, I fay, diftilling out of the Arteries by the fpongie Bones conti- nually, doth in procefs of time fo fill the faid Bones with filthy Matter, that like a Sink or Chanel being choaked up with filth, there is not fo free a paflàge for the Humour, as when the Difeafe firft began ; fo that the Matter by that means is there ffayed, and by its continuance there it acquires fo bad a quality that it corrodes and cankers thofe Bones, and indeed ulcerates and gangrenes all the paffages of the Noftrils, till it have mortified and confum'd them (as happens fometimes to Venereal Perfons) and at length deftroy'd the Beaft : for indeed it is feldom or never cura- ble when it is once come truly to be a Canker. Now by the foulnefs of thefe Bones, (as I have faid) that Matter or
Snot which doth defcend by thefe paffàges, ( which indeed doth at length drivel down in a greater quantity than before, by reafon of the paffàges being widened from the Parts being gnawn afunder by the cankered Hu- mour ; I fay that Matter or Snot which doth defcend after this) is of a contrary colour to what it ufed to be, for it is become more black and waterifh, mixed with a little Red, and hath a very ill fmell : but this altera- tion happens not from the Matter's flowing from a new Part, but is caufed by reafon of the foulnefs of the Parts through which it paflêth, for from thence it hath its dye in a great degree. Not but that there is yet another caufe of it, which is the greater foulnefs
of the Bloud : for as the beginning of the Diftemper did proceed from the corruption or depravation of the Bloud, which was become as it were de- generate from its fpirituous, balfamick and vohtilifed condition, into a flat
|
||||
|
Book III. , Of the Heal 113
flat and vappid ftate, like to dead Wine ; fo in procefs of time for want of
the Spirits to quicken it, and caufe the fermentations neceflàry in the proper places of the Body, where the eXcrementitious parts of the bloud ihould be thrown off, (there being feveral Bowels of the Body appointed to feparate, and fome that have Receptacles to receive the fame) I fay, for want of thefe Spirits to caufe a fermentation whereby the excrementi- tious parts of the Bloud ihould be thrown off, fuch Excrements are col- lected every day in greater quantity, and acquire a greater degree of ma- lignity, being hardly any part of them difcharged any other way but this, which is preternatural, arid mod times becomes deftru&ive to the Beaft, after the Difeafe hath arrived to this height. Thus have I given you my opinion concerning this Üiftemper, which
though it be new, will I hope to the intelligent Reader appear to be truer than that of our Ancient or Modern Practitioners, few of whom ( I may affirm without boafting) have made fo diligent an inquiry into this Di- ftemper as I with great pains and charge have done ; for if they had, they would with great eafe fee themfelves in an error, and no more be- lieve that there is or can be fuch a Difeafe as the mourning of the Chine. But enough of this, (though I hope it will not be deemed to be from the purpofe : ) I fhall therefore return from whence I have digreflèd, and de- scribe the remaining Parts of the Brain. Having examined fufficiently the Rete mirabile or wonderfull Net, as
alfo the Pituitary Gland, if you then remove the dura mater quite from the Brain at the bafis or bottom of it, there will appear the head of the Spinal Marrow, fo much as is contained within the Skull, of which we have treated in a foregoing Chapter. There may be alfo plainly feen the rife of the feveral conjugations or pairs of Nerves, of which we will treat at large in a convenient place; alfo the bottom of the Cerebel or After- brain, as the next Table doth demonftrate to you. After thefe you may take a plain view of the end of the Infundihulum The infundi-
ór Funnel, (a cavity fo called) which end reaches (before direction) to^'™/#or thé Pituitary Gland, upon which it pours the flegmatiek Excrements of the Brain, as hath been already fhewed. This Funnel is fo called from its fliape ; for above, the head thereof is
large ; but the lower part, is a long and ftrait Pipe. By fome Authors it is called Pelvis the Bafin. Its beginning is faid to be on the fore-part of the third Ventricle, by fome fo called, but I could never in a Horfe fee more than two that I could properly call Ventricles, between which two this Funnel is feated, and into which they do empty themfelves, difchar- ging their ferous or wateriih moifture into it. This Funnel I have often found near filled with a thickifh Flegm ; and Doctor Willis fays that in an Horfe's Brain he has obferved it wider than a Goofe-quill, and full of a clear Water. Next come we to fpeak to thofe Parts of the Brain that lie hid, and Corpora ftri-
cannot well be feen without diflêfting of it; and firft of the Buttocks J»' $$£• and Stones, ïhefe are four orbicular Prominences or round Bodies jet- ting out of the medulla oblongata (or head of the Spinal Marrow) of Which the two firft, namely the Buttocks, are largeft, and the latter (viz. the Stones) feem to be onely accrefcences to them. The Buttocks ftand lowermoft, and adhere to the Brainlet; (as do alfo the Stones.) They are larger than in a Man, and look of a flefhy colour while they are cloathed with the pia mater; but that being removed, they appear yellowifh,
|
||||
|
! 14 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
yellow l(h, and of a different colour from the reft of the Marrow. But
of thefe we difcourfed before at the beginning of the fourth Chapter ; as alfo of the corpora ftriata or utmoft ends oi the medulla oblongata, that adhere to the Brain properly fo called. Thefe four Prominences'are by Do&or Willis compared to Mole-hills,
and are therefore by him fo called. They may be plainly feen if you
but lift up the hinder part of the Brain after you have feparated it from
the After-brain, turning it as far back as you can without breaking it.
the phe- Between thefe four Prominences, or rather between the two lower of
apple Gland, them, to wit the Buttocks, there is placed a certain Glandule or Kernel,
which goes by the name of gianduia pinealis, or Pine-kernel Glandule,
- from the refemblance it is faid to have with the Kernel of a Pine-apple. It
is alfo called the Yard or Prick of the Brain, from its being placed fo
near the Buttocks and Stones, as alfo becaufe it refembleth a Man's Yard;
This Gland as alfo the Buttocks and Tefticles before-fpoken of are repre-
fented in the next Table,
Its ufe. Concerning the ufe of this Glandule there are great difputes among the
Learned ; but I fubfcribe to Bartholin's opinion, who believeth its ufe to
be the fame with that of other Kernels, which is to feparate the Lymph a,
from the Arterial Bloud.
There is as it were a chink between the Buttocks near this Glandule,
which I think fit to mention, becaufe moft Authours fpeak of it. Some give it the name of Anus or Arfe, others call it Vulva ; but why they Have impofed fuch names as thefe upon thefe Parts, I cannot judge, nor is it worth the while to inquire, feeing they have no other foundation but fancy : however, fince they are known by thefe names, I did think it fit not to pafs them by, finding them as plainly to be feen and as eafie to be found in Horfes as Anatomifts find them in Humane Brains. The Ventri- I come in the next place to fpeak to the Ventricles of the Brain, which des. are by fome accounted four, by others three ; but if diflêftion be made by beginning from beneath, there will appear onely two : and indeed I
could never find more ; for that which is called the third, I cannot think to be one, but rather a portion of the other two joined together. Nay, fome Authours will have it that there is but one, being onely divided at the beginning, but at the end they unite into and become one common Cavity, as any one that will diligently trace them may obferve. The manner To fee thefe Ventricles you muft cut the whole fubftanee of the Brain %mCmmginfonder in or as near the middle as you can guefs, dividing the upper from the lower fide, whereby you will difcover them in the middle of the Brain of that ihape as the firft Figure of the following Table repre- fents them in : for there they are reprelënted to the life, as much of them I mean, as can be feen without farther diflecTrion ; and appear to be of a femicircular or Half-moon fhape. But if you cut the Brain further, and fo follow their Cavities lightly with a Probe forwards down towards the Nofe (for there they fink deep into the callous body, òr white inner part of the Brain ) you will trace them as far as the mammillary Procef- fes ; and if backwards, you will find them to defcend as far as the bafis or bottom of the Brain ; and then if you will take a view of them when you have kid them fo far bare both ways, you will find them to refemble in fhape an Horfe-fhoe. Their ufa. Now the ufes of thefe Ventricles according to the divers opinions of Authours are many, but I will follow the mod Modern in this point. Firft
|
||||
|
Book III. Of the Head.
Firfl then they are framed for the more eafie pafiàge of the Bioud ,• for
along their fides do pafs many branches of the Bloud-carrying Vefìèls,
which could not fo conveniently be conveyed through the fubftance of
the Brain, left being compreflèd by the great weight of it, the pallage
of the Bloud fbould have been obltrucTred, whereas now it hath a free
pafiàge.
Another ule of them is, to ferve for the reception of the ferous or
wheyie excrement of the Bloud that is feparated from it by the glaridu- lous Skin that in veils them, and by the gianduia pituitaria.; which fe- rous Humour ifluing out of the Arteries, is fuckt up again by branches of the Jugular Veins; and is by them returned with the Bloud to the Heart. In the Membrane that cloaths thefe Ventricles there is a contexture of
finali Vefìèls of both Veins and Arteries, which is called plexus Chor o ides. The VeiTels that make up this plexus, are little branches of the Carotid Arteries, and fome of the internal Jugular Veins interwoven with them. The Skin wherein thefe Vefìèls are fo interwoven has a great many fmalf Kernels flicking in it, which as I have already faid, feparate the ferous Matter from the Bloud. In the Anatomical Difcourfes of Humane Brains there are feveral other
Parts of the Brain considered, as the fornix, the corpus callofum, the fep- tum lucidum and the like, all which are as difcernible in the Brains of Horfès as in Men, and might therefore as largely be difcourfed of: but it being not very material to treat of them, I will for brevity fake but in a manner name them. Firfl then, that which is called the corpus callofum, is the white fub-
ftance of the Brain, plainly feen when you cut the Brain afunder in the middle to fee its Ventricles ; for then you may view its white fubftance which makes the middle part of the Brain ; the outfide of it being of an Afli-colour, and going by the name of cortex, or the bark. The feptum lucidum is onely the Partition that divides the two Ventri-
cles abòve-defcribed, fome taking it to be a reduplication of the pia matery' and others a portion of the Brain. The Fornix or Vault is a kind of àn Arch that Hands between the Brain
and the medulla oblongata. It is of a fubftance like the corpus callofum, • and is of a triangular figure. Its ufe is to bear up the upper part of the Brain, that its weight may not prefs upon the fubjacent Parrs. Table XXIII.
Fig. I, Reprefenteth the Ventricles of the Brain with the plexus
Choroides. A A Shew the two Ventricles of the Brain. ,
BB The corpus callofum or white fubftance of the Brain, hing the mid-
dle part of it. CCC The Cerebellum or After-brain. £>D The plexus Choroides feat ed in the Ventricles of the Brain, |
|||||
|
R Fig. II.
|
|||||
|
j j £ The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Fig. II. Reprefents the protuberances of the medulla oblongata called
Mates and Tefies, and alfo the Gianduia Pinealù. D The Gianduia Pinealis or Pine-kernel Glandule.
GG Thofe two bunchings out of the medulla oblongata called Teftes or
Stones.
HH Its other two protuberances called Nates or Buttocks. II A Ventricle between the Brainlet and roots of the medulla oblongata, by fome Authours called the fourth? - * ; „
MM The Procerus Vermiformes or Worm-like Procejfes.
NNN The other Parts of the After-brain. OOO Part of the Cerebrum or Brain to be f een under the After-brain. |
||||||||||||||
|
CHAP. VI.
Of the Aüion of the Brain, and the exercifes of the Animal
Faculty by the Nerves and Fibres. |
||||||||||||||
|
H
|
[AVING hitherto fpoken of the ftructure of the Brain, and dif-
courfed of all its Parts ; I come in the next place to fpeak of its |
|||||||||||||
|
Atlion, in general, and to fhew, according to the opinion of our mod
Learned and Modern Authours, how the Animal Faculty exerts it felf. the aSimof It is generally agreed that the proper aft ion of the Brain ( taken in a the Brain. jarge fenfe ) js ^ elaborating of Animal Spirits ; which Spirits are con- veyed from it by the Nerves into the feveral Parts of the Body for the performing of the Animal actions or motions ; for all voluntary motions are performed by the help of thefe Spirits. what the A- Thefe Spirits are made out of the Vital Spirits and Arterial Bloud, as a^emaïeX out °^^lt ProPer matter. And the place wherein, or the principal in- ' flrument that elaborates them, is not the Veflèls, but the very fubftance of the Brain, into whofe parenchyma or marrowy fubftance the Bloud and Vital Spirits are extravafated. Now concerning the manner how this Work is performed there are
great controversies amongft the Learned, and many arguments urged by
each, which will be too tedious here to recite : I will therefore give you
onely the opinion of a late Worthy Authour as delivered in his own
words.
How the Ani- "The Heart, fays he, is like the primum mobile of the Body, to
Tntefïmt'be " whicn tne motion °f a11 tne Humours that have once paft it, is owing.
Serves -, • " This by its Jyftole impells the Bloud as into all other Parts, fo into the
"Brain, by the feveral branches of the Carotides, whofe innumerable
" twigs run partly through the outer cortex or greyilh part of the Brain,
" and partly into the inner medullar or white fubftance of it. Thefe
" twigs of Arteries fpring partly from the Plexus Choroides and Rete mi-
" r-abile, and partly from the Carotides themfelves immediately. The
" fuperfluous ferum of the Bloud is feparated by the Glands before de-
" fcribed;;
|
||||||||||||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal 117
" fcribed ; and that Bloud which is not elaborated into Anittial Spirits, is
" returned again to the Heart by the Veins. But thofe particles that are " fit and proper to be converted into them, are extravafated into the ve- " ry parenchyma of the Brain, or at leaft are diftributed through it by " invifible capillaries, in which being perfe&ed into Spirits, thefe by the " help of the Fibres or Filaments which the inner part or fubffonce of the '- Brain chiefly confifts of, are conveyed into the Corpora firiata ( or " other Proceflès of the medulla oblongata that adhere to the Brain ) which " confili of the like Filaments, and by them to the Nerves, whofe inner " fubftance is fibrous like the medulla from whence they fpring. And " the reafon of this fucceffive motion from one to another, is the pulfe of y the Heart, whereby that which comes behind always drives forward " what is before. Whence ( fays my Authour ) the true caufe of an Apo- "plexy (wherein motion and fenfeare almoft quite abolifhed) is from " the obflru£tion or compreflion of the Arteries of the Brain : whereby " both little Bloud and Vital Spirits can be conveyed thither to make " Animal Spirit of; and alfo when it is made, it is not impelled out of " the Brain along the Fibres into the Nerves, to enable them to perform " their functions. Thefe are the words of that worthy Authour concer- ning this Work. It remains now to inquire how thefe Spirits, after they are thus elabora-
ted, do perpetually flow from the Brain through thepaflàges of the Nerves, and how they enter and fill the feveral forts of Fibres of which the mo- ving and fenfitive Parts confifl. That the Brain and Cerebel are the firit fountain of the Animal Spi- And how into
rits I have in my foregoing Difcourfe already Ihewed ; from whence }*e Fibm' they flow along the Nerves as by fo many rivulets unto differing and di- ftant Parts ; till at length they pafs out of the molt capillary Nerves into the fmall Fibres interwoven in the Membranes, the mufculous Flefh, and other Parts, and laft of all into the tendons of the Muicles, making them the organs of Senfe and Motion : in which Parts becoming more fixed, they are called the implanted Spirits, attending their office whenfoever the Nerves with their influent Spirits bring from the Brain the inftindt for performing the fame. Now concerning thefe nervous Fibres in their feveral Parts, which are whence the
the immediate inftruments of the Animal Faculty, we ought to inquire fibm ar'fe' from whence, they have their rife : It is plain they do not arife immedi- ately from the Head, or any of its marrowy Parts ; neither can we reafo- nably judge them to fpring from the Nerves, becaufe the Fibres in moll: Parts do much exceed the bulk or bignefs of the Nerve that is brought to them, as may be eafily feen by the tendon of every Mufcle, which being made up of united Fibres, is obferved to be far greater than the Nerve that is inferted into the Mufcle : fo that it is unlikely they fhould be onely continued portions of the Nerves divided or jagged into fine threds, as fome have imagined ; and it is more probable that they are fpermatick and primigenial Parts, that is, that the rudiments of them were drawn in the firft formation of the Parts of the Embryo in the Womb, as well and as foon as the Nerves themfelves ; unlefs one would with Do&or Willis except the Fibres of the fanguineous Parts, which he thinks to be bred fecondarily of the Bloud and nervous Juice flowing into thofè Parts. |
|||||
|
R x One
|
|||||
|
118 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
They can One thing further we mull note concerning thefe Fibres, that they are
move by the enabled to perform their motion, not onely from the Animal Spirits that
Stmdln A°w kycneNerves at the inftant of fuch motion, but alfo from the Spi-
\bm. rits that are ftored up in the Fibres themfelves ; of which any one may
fatisfy himfelf in obferving an Animal newly killed when its Skin is taken
off; for when life is perilhed, and all the force of the Spirits flowing in
through the Nerves hath quite ceafed, yet the Spirits implanted in thefe
Fibres breaking forth from the Mufcles ftill move and lhake them, and
force them into feveral convulfions and trembling motions. This I have
not onely feen my felf in feveral Horfes I have caufed to be killed on pur-
pofe to diflècl, but have alfo mewed it to feveral Spectators who have
been very much pleafed at the obfervation, and at the variety of their
motions.
|
|||||||||||||
|
CHAP. VII.
Of the feveral pair of Nerves arifing from within the
SkjiU, particularly of the fir ft, fecond and third pair. |
|||||||||||||
|
H
|
AVING fufficiently treated of the Brain and Animal Faculty or
Spirits, it is fit that in the next place I fhould come to fpeak of the |
||||||||||||
|
Nerves, beginning according to the order of diilècïion with thofe that
arife immediately from the Brain, which I find to be of the fame number in Horfes as Dr. Willis hath obferved them to be in Humane Bodies, viz. nine pair. I will therefore obferve the fame method, and begin as the faid Learned Do&or hath done, with the:. f melting Nerves firft, becaufe they are the foremoft, and therefore do firft appear in difie&ion. Thefirfl pair Thefe Nerves are called the mammillary ? roc effe s, becaufe they are of Nerves, r0und at their end like a Pap. They take their rife from the fhaaks of "smelting- tne me^u^a oblongata betwixt the corpora flriata or chamfered Bodies, and the chambers of the Optiek Nerves ; from whence running under the bottom of the Brain they do in their courfe by degrees increafe, and become broader and larger, and at length reach as far as the Sieve-like Bone that is feated at the top of the Noltrils. During all which way they arefoft and marrowy, (being hollow within and pretty full of moifture) but being arrived at this Bone, they receive a new covering or coat from the dura mater, (being clad before onely with the pia mater) with which they are divided into many little Fibres or Filaments like little firings, which do many of them pafs through the holes of the Sieve-like Bone into the cavities of the Noftrils, where they are diflributed on every fide, entring into the Membranes that cover thofe Parts. Thefe Fibres or Fila- ments which do thus proceed from the before-named Procefies, are be- lieved to be the true organs of Smelling, and of Senfation alfo. From whence it is that thofe Perfons that do not accuftom themfelves to draw fnulh up their Nofes, are upon the leali feent of it provoked to fneeze : which is occafioned by the Powder's afcending up the Nofe and reflbg upon the tender Membranes thereof, wherein the little Fibres of the fmel- ling
|
|||||||||||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal 11§
ling Nerves being difperfed, are immediatly irritated or provoked into a
convulfive motion, which is that we call fneezing. It was an old opinion that the Snivel was milked as it were out of the Ventricles of the Brain by thefe Procefiès ; but having above in the fifth Chapter fhewn other Veflêls which difcharge that flegmatiek matter into the Nofe, namely the Arteries, it feems more probable that thefe Mammillary Procédés have a nobler ufe, namely that we have afcribed unto them, to be the inftru- ments of fmelling. And therefore they are larger in Horfes and all forts of Cattle than in Men, becaufe it was neceflàry their Smell fhould be very exquifite, feeing they can diftinguilh of the wholfomnefs or hurtfulnefc of their Food by that Senfe onely. Table XXFV.
fig. I. Shews the Mammillary Proceftes, and the Bones at the upper
part of the Noftrils. NN Shew the Cartilaginous or griftly Bones of the Noftrils.
OO The Mammillary Procefes or Smelling Nerves. SSSS The Sieve-like Bone through who/e holes the Filres of the Smelling Nerves are branched. Fig. II. Shews the Brain in its natural fituation, and the Parts afore-
faid, &c. AAAA Shew the Brain in its natural fituation covered with the pia
mater.
CCCC The fpongy Bones laid hare. DE The grift ly Bones of the Noftrils \
GGG The Partition which divides the upper part of the Braimnto two
parts, a right and a left.
HHH The os occipitis or Noll-hone. OOOO The Sieve-like Bone, upon which the Mammillary trocejfes
do reft. Next come we to the fecond conjugation or pair of Nerves, and thofe The femd
are the Optiek or Seeing Nerves; fo called, either becaufe they carryg^f the vifive Spirits to the Eyes, or becaufe they convey the reprefentations * of vifible things from the Eyes to the Brain. Thefe arife a little behind the former out of the medulla oblongata,
and having proceeded a while with a certain compafs, they are united above the faddle of os fphenoides, and that with a total confuiion and mingling of their fubftances, as far as by the naked Eye I could ever de- cern in all Horfes that I have dhTefted; though fome Authours fay that in Humane Bodies they do unite indeed, but that it is onely by contati:, without confounding their Fibres with one another. Thefe Nerves after they are thus united, do foon after again feparate,
and so out of the Skull into the centre of the Eyes, three ot whofe coats are made out of the fubftance of thefe Nerves being dilated. |
|||||
|
M
|
|||||
|
129 The Anatomy of an Horje.
, At their rife and a pretty way in their progrefs they are very Toft he
mg covered onely with the pia mater ; but as loon as they reach the 2 ^r, they are coveredmthitahc, and thereby become^ foontrtnd harder. This outmoft Membrane it is which doth conftituL Z c"f of the Eye called thehorneyCoat or Sclerotica ; and from the inner t p mater àxh proceed the next Coat or Skin of the EyecaKf Grapehke from its colour; andiaftly the marrowyMwcZfZ Nerve doth, make the third Coat called Retina or Net-hke The Senfe of Seeing like that oï Smelling is by Dodror Wi/Ï;l f»U «. u
performed not fo mucìi by the help of theVr/e, as o^m^th are interwoven with the Organ; namely, faith he the lir.i r u • the Coats of the Eyes, and especially thofe thf are in tod 1^ m nea or fclerotick Coat, and difpofed after the mz^oUKe^L """" the impreflion of the vifible fpecies, and by r^dmi™ L d°receivef the thing fo as it is offered withou , cJlS ^l^T °l fe I felfht0 tranfmit Rffl*- as « fere b^pS^F^
2St££ thatimaSeorfenfib^P-ies, andtoLryiLotïefom" S/St*. cou^edne,fePr r J the *rWT?' Which are hY A™ Authours ac
—' /wtair ^ Pair' bUt d° by °Ur M°der" A^ours go for the Thefe take their beginning from the balls or bottom of th* ~, j „ r aJgt/Sfe
Bone ; where, as the Optiek Nl^lÈdtC^tZ ?f ^e"iike
pafs through the fecond hole of that Bone andf^^ nHll /h ' f° thefe
or finali branch, which is in each Mufcle füwÖS.Y- a tWl§
other fmaller ones, by which the Animal Suirfr ° inTmerable Fibres of the Mufc es, and by confequTce rE, f ^^ ««o the
come to be performed, as fliüteS^a^fej"^0^^ place, when I come to treat rfdBJ^^rE^ne°S,S |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal
|
|||||
|
CHAP. VIII.
Of the fourth ami fifth fair of Nerves that arife within
the SkjiU. TH E fourth pair of Nerves dó arife contrary to all other : for where- the fourth
as the reft do take their rife from the bottom or fides of the oblong £rrt£?j£ Marrow, thefe have their beginning at the top of it, behind thofe round bunchings out of the Brain Called Hates and teftes, ( of which we have already treated where we defcribed the Parts of the Brain. ) From Whence bending a little forwards by the fides of the faid oblong Marrow, they are immediately hid by the dura mater, under which they run for fome time, untili they come to that hole of the Skull, where the other Nerves defigned for the Eyes do pafs out, which thefe accompany, but do not unite with, and at length terminate in the Trochlear Mufcles of the Eyes. This pair of Nerves are by Do&or Willis called the Pathetiek Nerves,
becaufe, fays he, their office is to move the Eyes pathetically, according to the force of the paffions and inflintts of Nature, delivered and remanded from the Brain to the After-brain, and on the contrary from this to that, through the Nates and tefies and their Medullar Procefies. For, faith that Learned Anatomift, feeing that by the diverfe impulfe and undulation of the Animal Spirit's dwelling in this by-path, there happen certain mu- tual commerces between the Brain and Pracordia ( the Cerebel media- ting between either, from whofe Ring-like Procefs he will have the Nerves of the Pnecordia to arife ; ) it is neceflàry that thefe Nerves that are rooted in the middle way, fliould be ftruck upon by every march or remove of the Spirits going this way or that way, whereby the motions of the Eyes muft needs follow the afFeftions of thofe Parts. With thefe Nerves, (faith he) all perfeft Animals are furniihed, there being none but are obnoxious to anger, love, hatred, and other ArTedions, as may be difcovered in every little Creature, but much more in this which we are a-difcourfing of, there being none the afpeft and gefture of whofe Eyes do fliew them more than a Horfe's do. Next come we to treat of the fifth pair, concerning the rife of which Mefifthpatr.
there are feveral difputes amongft Authours, (Dodor^/Zw, particularly, affirming that they fpring from the Ring-like Procefs of the Cerebel:) but if their original be ftriaiy inquired into, I cannot find, in an Horle, (however it may be in Humane Brains) but that they do take their be- ginning as the others do, I mean from the oblong Marrow, onely a little below the former pair. Thefe confift of very many Fibres gathered together, lome ot wnica.
are foft, and fome hard ; fo that they feem not to be fo much one fingle pair of Nerves, as a colleftion of many fmall Nerves into one bundle, fome of which are defigned for one ufe and fome for another, being for that purpofe diftributed into feveral Parts remote one from another; in which they ferve, in fome for motion, in others for fenfe : from whence it is, faith Doftor Willis, that there is that fympathy and confent or actions
|
|||||
|
I22 The Anatomy of a?i Horfe.
a&ions in thofe feveral Parts to which thefe Nerves are diftributed. As
for mftance, feeing fome twigs go to the Eyes, others to the Palate of the Mouth, Nofe, &c. therefore when we fee or fmell what pleafes our Palate, our Mouth waters, as we commonly phrafe it. But that it may be better underiiood what and how many Parts have
confent by means of thefe Nerves, it will be convenient to difcover their divifion, progrefs and different infertion. Their Trunks, beginning or arifing out of the oblong Marrow, as hath been fhewed, are divided each of them into two notable branches, the firft whereof tending ftreight downwards, and going out of the Skull by their proper holes, are in their defcent towards the lower Jaw, ( for whofe Parts, faith my Authour, they are chiefly defign'd ) divided into many lefTer branches, which pro- vide for the Temporal Mufcles, as alfo for the Mufcles of the Face and Cheeks. From thefe branches alfo there go twigs or little fhoots into the Lips, Gums, roots of the Teeth, Jaws, Throat, and to the farther end of the Palate, and alfo to the Tongue. The other branches of this pair of Nerves are called the fuperiour or up-
permost branches, being larger than the other, and do thus run their courfe. After their divifion from the former they go ftreight forward for a little fpace under the dura mater nigh the fide of the Bone called the Turkey chair, and over againft the gianduia pituitaria fend little twigs to the Trunk of the Carotides, that makes the voonderfull Net : then they are inoculated into the' Nerves of the fixth pair, and from thence fend back fometimes one, fometimes two fhoots apiece, which being united with two other flips turned back from the Nerves of the fixth pair, do conftitute the root or firft trunk of the intercoftal pair of Nerves, rec- koned for the ninth pair, of which more fhall be fpoken by and by 'm the tenth Chapter. After they have fent out the flips for the root of the Intercoftal Nerve,
thefe fame great branches of the fifth pair are again divided each into two notable branches ; the leffer and upper of which tends towards the globe of the Eye, and being again divided fends forth two other, the jirft of . which is parted into two more, that go, one, to the Nofe, and the other to the j Eye-lids ; and the fecond into four or five flips, that are moftly fpent on the Eye-lids, but partly on the Coats of the Eye and its Glands. The fecond or greater branch of the fecond divifion of thefe Nerves,
being carried towards the orbit of the Eye, is again divided into two new branches : the lower of thefe being bent downwards, and cleaving it felf into* many fhoots, is bellowed on the Palate and upper region of the Jaws ; the other, being the higher, is carried beyond the orbit of the Eye, and pafleth through a proper hole of the upper Jaw with the Vein and Artery which it twifts about, and fends many flips to the Mufcles of the Cheeks, Lips, Nofe, and roots of the upper Teeth. The reafon of From this pair of Nerves being diftributed to fo many Parts, I fay, may blujking. the confent 0f thofe Parts one with another be learned : and particularly this is worthy obfervatiön, That feeing they twift about the Bloud-veflèJs that go to the Cheeks, &c. hence it is, that when in Men and Women the Animal Spirits are difturbed by the imagination of fome uncomely thing•;■ as if they took care to hide the Face, they enter thefe Nerves dif. ordedyi, whereby their twigs that embrace the Bloud-veflèls do com- preis and pull them, fo that the Bloud comes to flow too impetuoufly in- to the Cheeks, fev. by the Arteries, and is detained there for fome time ' b7
|
||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal
by {training the Veins. But fuch obfervations belong more to an
Anatomift of Humane Bodies to which they are proper, and therefore I fliall return from this digreffion, which yet, I hope, will not be unplea- fant to the inquifitive Reader. - Table XXV.
Reprefents the Brain of an Horfe taken out of the Skull, with the Op-
tick, Eye-moving, and Pathetiek Nerves; as alfo the Eyes with their Mufcles faftned to them, having been taken out of the Skull without tearing or breaking of them. AAA A Shew all the hot torn of the Brain covered with the dura mater.
' BB The Cerebellum or After-brain. CC Tart of the medulla oblongata, or head of the Spinal Marrow. DP The Gianduia pituitaria cut in two in the middle, and turned hack to each fide with the dura mater, the better to fhew the Chink or Funnel. E The Chink, called Vulva. FF The Mammillary F roc effe s covered with the dura mater, otherwife cal-
led the Smelling Nerves or the firft pair. GG The rife of the Optiek Nerves, or fecond pair. H The uniting of the Optiek Nerves. II Their feparating again, and their courfe down to the Eyes.
KK The moving Nerves of the Eyes or the third pair. LL The Pathetiek Nerves reckoned by Dottor Willis for the fourth pair. MM Dottor Willis his fifth pair of Nerves. NN The heads of the, Mufcles of the Eyes, from whence they were all of them cut, to he feparated and placed as in the Figure.
00 The orbicular Mufcle of the Eye in its natural fituat ion in this Eye, hut in the other Eye it is quite removed, the plainer to fhew 'the courfe of the Optiek Nerve to the Eye. PP The Mufcle that pulls up the Eye, called Attollens, or fuperbus, the proud jMufcle.
QQjThe humble Mufcle or puller-down of the Eye, called humilis. RR. The Mufcle that brings the Eye inwards to theNofe, called Adducens, or bibitorius, the drinking Mufcle.,
SS The Mufcle that pulls the Eye outward, called Abducens, or indigna- torius, the angry Mufcle.
TV The Mufcle that brings the Eye towards its inner corner obliquely, and from that office is called obliquus inferior.
yV The obliquus fuperior cum trochlea, whofe office is to bring the Eys obliquely to its outward corner.
WW The homey Tunicle or Coat of the Eye, with the pupilla or fight. |
|||||||
|
S
|
|||||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||||
|
i2a The Anatomy of an Hor [e,
|
|||||
|
CHAP. IX.
Of the fixth and feventh pair of Nerves arifing within
the Skull the fixe T~* HOSE Nerves which are by Dofror Willis reckoned for the fixth
t^r. X Pair' are m tne next P^ace to ^e fp°ken to. T'hefe take their be- ginning juft by the fifth, and being for a little time hid under the dura
mater, go at length out of the fame hole of the Skull with the before-named fourth and fifth pairs,and are carried each with a fingle Trunk nigh to the- Sockets of the Eyes ; but fo, that near the fide of the Turky-chair-bone they are inoculated with the fecond or greater branches of the fiith pair. Whence they fend back fometimes one,fometimes two twigs, which being united with the firft or recurring branches of the fifth pair, as was noted in the foregoing Chapter, do conftitute the beginning of the Intercoftal Nerves. Afterward going a little forwards, each of them near the Orbit or Socket of the Eye, is divided into two branches ; one of which is in- ferted into the Abducent Mufcle of the Eye ( or the Mufcle that draws the Eye outward ) which is feated in its outer corner ; and the other be- ing fplit into very many Fibres is beftowed on the feventh Mufcle of the Eye, which is faid to be proper onely to Brutes. Whether Men do wholly want them, let others examine ; however, in the Animal We are treating of, they are very confpicuous and moft eafie to be found, concerning whofe ufe I will fpeak when I come to a proper place for that purpofe. the feventb Next are the feventh pair to be examined, which by the Ancients (and pair, or Audi- j-,y ajj untill Dr. Willis altered the account) were reckoned for the fifth mj ems. ^.^ j^gfg are employed about the Senfe of Hearing, and are therefore called the Auditory Nerves. They take their rife in Humane Bodies (ac- cording to Doftor Willis) out of the lower fide of the Annular or ringy protuberance of the Cerebel ; but I am fure they do not fo in Horfes, in whom I have always found them to arife from the fides of the oblong Marrow. They have each of them two Procejfes, one foft and the other harder ;
which diftinction of them makes many be of the opinion that they are : indeed two pair of Nerves, though ufuàlly they are accounted but for one. The foftefl of thefe two Proceflês is properly called the Auditory Nerve,
the which is carried through an hole of os Petrofttm ( or the craggy Bone) into the Cells of the Ear, which it cloaths with a moft thin Membrane, and by which the founds are conveyed to the common Senfory. The harder part or procefs of the Nerve is faid to conduce more to
Motion than Senfe ; which pafling out alfo through its proper hole in the aforefaid Bone doth immediately receive a twig from the eighth or wandring pair ; after which it is (freight divided into two branches ; the firft of which tending downward is beftowed on the Mufcles of the Tongue and the Bone Hyaides ; the other winding about the auditory pafTage and bending more upwards, is divided into three Shoots ; the firft of which anfwering to the Nerve of the former divifion, bellows certain flips
|
|||||
|
Book III. Of the He adi 125
flips on the Mufcles of the Lips, Mouth, Face and Nofe, and fo actuates
fome of the outward organs of the Voice, as the former doth f ome of the inner. The fecond of thefe Shoots being divided into many other lefler, is fent into the Mufcles of the Forehead, as alfo to the Eye-lids. And the third'or laft of them doth run towards and fpreads it felf into the Mui- cles of the Ears Whence upon any unufual and aftonilhing found the Ear is by a natural infuna prickt up, to liften to it the more attentively, and at the fame time the Spirits flowing by other branches of this Nerve into the Mufcles of the Eye-lids, caufe them to be drawn as far afunder as ispoffible, that the Bead may have the clearer view of any threatning danger; which pofture of the Eyes we cz\\ flaring. |
||||||||||||
|
CHAP. X.
Of the eighth and ninth fair of Nerves-
|
||||||||||||
|
T
|
H E next pair of Nerves we are to treat of are the eighth, (com-the eighth <n
monly reckoned for the Jtxth) otherwife called the wandring pair, faju |
|||||||||||
|
from their being diftributed into many Parts, wandring as it were not one-
ly through the Head and Neck, but through many of the infenour Parts of the Body both in the Cheft and Paunch, furniftiing them with Nerves branching from them. Thefe Nerves do alfo arife out of the oblong Marrow a little below the
Auditory Nerves. Their root or beginning confifts of many Fibres, fome of which are fmaller and fome thicker, to which is added a notable Fi- bre or rather Nerve, much greater than the reft, coming from the Spinal Marrow of the Neck, which is joined with them and wrapped about with one and the fame Coat taken from the dura mater, as it they were but one Nerve. They continue to be thus united till they have paft with- out the Skull, after which they are difperfed to feveral Parts. The Ac- ceflòry Nerve is diftributed to the Mufcles of the Neck and Shoulders; and one notable Fibre of the eighth pair joins it felf on each fide to the harder Procefsof the Auditory or feventh pair, as alfo two others run to the Mufcles of the Gullet and Neck. But the reft of the Fibres of the wandring pair continue together, going forward in one Trunk ; and in- Head of the other companion lately parted from them (I mean the Spinal or Acceflory Nerve) they entertain a new one, which is the Intercoftal, or Nerve of the ninth pair. ; .... ,.' T In this place where the faid Intercoftal Nerve is united with this Nerve
of the eighth pair, there is made a notable Plexus, (that is, the Trunk of the Nerve in that place fwells into a kind of tumour, refembling the Joint or knot of a Cane. ) For as the Intercoftal Nerve is received into it, fo out of it there fprings a conftderable branch, which being carried to^ wards the Throttle is divided into three twigs ; the>/ of which is ftretch- ed out into the fphm&er of the Gullet ; the fecond being hid under the Shield-falhioned Griftle, diftributes its Shoots to the upper Mufcles of the Throttle, and particularly to the Mufcle by which the Chink of the Si Throttle
|
||||||||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Throttle is fhut up. The third of thefe moots or twigs going alfo under
the Shield-faftiionéd Griftle, meets the top of the Recurring Nerve and is united with the fame. Below the aforefaid inoculating of the Intercoftal with the wandring
pair, which makes that Plexus before-named, the Trunk of this latter goes (freight down by the fides of the afcending Carotid Artery, on which it beftows fome flips, and at the bottom of the Neck it fends out another twig into the Recurrent Nerve, but this it does onely on the left fide. From hence the Trunk of the wandring pair defcends without any no-
ted branchings till it comes over againft the firft or fecond Rib, where out of a fecond Plexus many moots and numerous Fibres are fent forth towards the Heart and its appendages, but not altogether in the lame manner on both fides. Doctor Willis fays, many more branches are fent from this pair towards the Heart in Beafts than in Men ; for in thefe lat- ter there are a great many twigs fent thereto from the Intercoftal pair, whereas there are very few in Brutes ; fo that in both, the plenty of the one fupplies the defedi: of the other. There is (faith the fame Authour) one notable difference worthy of
note, of the two Recurrent Nerves that fpring out of the Trunk of this eighth pair, viz. that that on the right fide ariies out of it higher, and winds about the Axillar Artery ; whereas that on the left fprings much lower therefrom, and twilling about the defcending Trunk of the Aorta, returns back from thence, and afcends upwards where in its progrefs it fends forth ihoots to divers Parts. And that obfervation of the faid Doctor is worthy to be taken notice
of, viz. That the Nerves that pafs towards the Heart of Brutes are much fewer in number than thofe in Men, of which ( as alfo of their procee- ding chiefly from the wandring pair ) he gives this ingenious reafon ; That feeing Beafts want prudence, and are not much liable to various and divers paflions, it was not therefore neceflary that there fhould be two ways of deriving the Spirits from the Brain to the Pracordia, name- ly one to bring Spirits to maintain the exercife of the vital function, and the other to minifter to the impreflions of the affections; but it isfuffi- cient that all the Spirits, for whatfoever office they are deftin'd, fliould be conveyed thither by one and the fame path. Over againft the Heart, the Trunk of the wandring pair fends forth
many notable branches on either hand, which paffing to the Lungs, are diftributed through their whole fubftance along with the Bloud-veffels and branches of the Wind-pipe, which they climb upon and twift about : and as it defcends by the fides of the Wind pipe, it diftributes alfo many flips into the Coats of the Gullet. After thefe branches have grown out of thefe Nerves, then is each Trunk, as it defcends by the Gullet,divided into an outer and inner branch : but prefently the outer branches unite with the outer, and the inner with the inner ; and being fo united, the former def- cends by the outfide of the orifice of the Stomach to itsbottom, where it difperfes it felf; and the latter defcending by the infide of the orifice of the Stomach, turns back there, and creeps along its upper part. To what other Parts the twigs of this eighth or wandring pair are extended, the Reader may learn in the defcription of the Parts themfelves, in treating of which we have conftantly obferv'd to fhew from whence their Nerves were derived. |
|||||
|
After
|
|||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal i2^
After the wandring or eighth pair, by order of diffe&ion the ninth and^e ninth
laft pair ot Nerves that fpring from within the Skull are to be fpoken to. huMfid Concerning the rife of which pair, there are various opinions ; for fomepair' there be that will have them onely branches of the wandring pair, and that they take their beginning from them : but that opinion is rejected, fince it is now made very apparent that they have another original, of which the often before-cited Doftor Willis was the firfl difcoverer, whom I may be bold to follow, fince none have given, nor 'tis probable can give a better account of them than that Learned man, who faith that the beginnings, (as alfo the different Trunks in the progrefs) of thejfe Intercoftal Nerves are eafily diftinguimed from the former, notwithftan- ding they do often communicate or join together by branches fent forth from one to the other. But though they owe not their original to the wandring pair, and
much lefs are to be reputed as branches of them, yet have they no proper root of their own, but do borrow their original from two or three recur- ring branches of the fifth and fixth pairs near their origine, growing put of them as a Shrub upon another Tree or Shrub. Thefe Nerves thus conftituted do afterward run out of the Skull by
their proper holes, and prefently on each fide form a Plexus near that of the wandring pair, into which two Nervous Proceflès out of the firft vertebral pair are inferted, and out of which there goes one twig or /lip into the Sphincter of the Gullet, and another into the Plexus aforefaid öf the wandring pair. Whence defcending by the vertebra of the Neck,by that time they arrive at its middle, they have each another greater Plexus, into which a large Nerve from a neighbouring vertebral pair is inferted,and from which proceed fome twigs that uniting with others of the wandring pair are diftributed all about the Prcecordia, (that is, to the Heart and Lungs) as alfo one fingle one a little lower. 'Tis true, Doctor Willis affirms that this Plexus laft fpoken oils proper to Man onely ; but fince I find fo little dif- ference in the other Parts between a Man and the Animal I am treating of, I fufpend my belief whether this Plexus may not be found in him alfo, though I have not been yet fo diligent as.to make any exaéì: inquiry into it. This Plexus is called the Plexus cervicali*, becaufe it is formed in the
Neck ; whence the Trunks of this Intercoftal pair defcending by the Cla- vicula or Chanel-bones into the Cheft, as foon as they have arrived at the fecond Rib, each of them receives three or four branches from the Verte- bral Nerves next above, whereby is made another notable Plexus, com- monly called the Intercoftal From whence as its Trunks pafs down by the roots of the Ribs, in every one of their Interftices, arid even as low as the Os facrum from every jointing of the Ver tehee each Trunk receives a Vertebral Nerve. As foon as they are defcended out of the Cavity of the Cheft, and are
come over againft the bottom of the Stomach, they fend forth on each fide a notable branch, each of which tending towards theMefentery makes its chief Plexus's, being in number feven, viz. five large ones which are upper, and two lefs that are lower. For each branch is prefently divided into two other, and every one forms one Plexus, which make four ; and the fifth is in the middle of thefe, being the largeft : and thefe are the five upper. |
|||||
|
The
|
|||||
|
128 The Anatomy of an Hor f e.
The two lower Plexus are framed of two branches that fpring from the
Trunks defcended as far as the lower part of the Loyns, and are diftin- guifhed by the names of Plexus infimus, and minimus, ( i. e. the loweft, and the lead ) which two Plexus do furnifti feveral Parts of the Lower Belly with Nerves. Laftly, When this Intercoftal pair have defcended as low as the Osfa*
e rum, and have furniflied in their courfe the feveral Parts of the Lower Belly with Nerves, they bend towards one another and feem to be knit together by two or three Proceflës, and at length each of them ends in fmall Fibres which are diftributed into the Sphincter Mufcle of the Arfe. Thus have I given a defcription of the feveral pairs of Nerves arifing
within the Skull, in defcribing of which I muft own my felf obliged to feveral worthy Authours, whofe Dottrine I have been forced much to follow and relie on in this particular, having not as yet made a thorow inflection into thefe mod curious Inftruments of the Animal Faculty my felf : the chiefefl of which Authours and whom I have moil followed, is that accurate Tracer of them, Doctor Willis, to whom all that have trea- ted of thefe Parts fince him, have been fo much beholding.» But onely where he affigns fome differences betwixt the courfe of the Nerves in Men, and all Brutes in general, I cannot eafily acquiefce in his opinion in relation to a Horfe, the frame of whofe Body comes almoft in all re- fpects fo near to that of a Man's'; however, till I have made a more exact fcrutiny, I.ihall forbear contradiction. . : Ta,ble XXVI. '
Shews the bafis or bottom of the Brain of an Horfe taken out of the
Skull, having the dura mater removed, the better to fhew the rife of all the Nerves, and the other Parts of the bottom of the Brain. A AAA Shew the fubflance of the bafis or bottom of the Brain.
BB The Cerebel or After-brain placed in the hinder part of the Head.
CC The Oblong Marrow.
DD The Smelling'Nerves, being the firft pair.
ÈÈ The Optiek Nerves, being the fecondpair.
FF The third pair of Nerves, which move the Eyes.
GG The fourth pair of Nerves, by Dottor Willis called the Pathetiek
■ . ' ■ Nerves.
HH The fifth pak. II The fixth pair. KK Dottor Willis his feventh pair, being the Auditory Nerves, which went formerly for the fifth pair.
LLlll The eighth pair of Nerves, called otherwife the wandring pair, which before Dottor Willis were reckoned for the fixth pair.
MM The Spinal Nerves, or Acceffory pair, that unite with the wan- dring pair.
NN The ninth pair. QO The tenth pair (or rather the firjl of the Neck) arifing from the further or hinder part of the ObbngMarrow near its going out of the Skull.
PP The Trunk of the Carotid Artery cut off where it is divided into the fore and hinder part. |
||||
|
Book III. Of the Head. 119
QQ^/4 branch of it going into the fui (lance of the Brain.
R The Infundibulum or Funnel.
SS Two Glands or Kernels placed behind the Funnel.
|
||||||
|
CHAP. XL
Of the Nerves arifing from the Spinal Marrow, while it is
in the Vertebrae of the Neck HAVING treated of the feveral Conjugations or Pairs of Nerves
which take their beginning from that part of the Spinal Marrow contained within the Skull, the ufual and moft natural method requires me next to proceed to thofe that fpring from that part of it that is con- tained in the Vertebra of the Neck and Chine without the Skull. 1 We obferved in a Chapter above, that in its whole progrefs from the fhhtj [even Skull to the Rump-bones there fpring from it thirty leven pair of Nerves. P*ir cf Particularly, while it is in the Neck, there arife out of it feven pair;/prX7«f» "f while it is in the Back, feventeen pair ; while it is in the Loyns, fevenihe sP'nal pair ; and while it is in the Os facrum, fix pair : for as was noted before,Mmm' fuch is the number of the Joints in the Rack-bone, betwixt every of which a pair of Nerves iflues. Of all which we will treat briefly in order. / The jirfl pair of the Neck, though it be commonly reckoned among the The firfl pah pairs of the Spine or Rack-bone, becaufe it comes out from between the "fthe Nect- firft Vertebra and the Skull ; yet if we confider its rife, it ought rather to be reputed the tenth pair of the Brain ; for it rifes with many Fibres from the Spinal Marrow while it is yet within the Skull, but prefently after its rife tends backwards or downwards (whereas all the reft that arife within the Skull go forwards. ) This pair is chiefly bellowed on the Mufcles of the Neck. The fecond pair comes out between the firfl and fecond Vertebra oÏThe fecond.
the Neck, and is bellowed upon the Neck, Head and Face. The third and fourth pair come forth of the holes that are between the The third and
fecond and third, and the third and fourth Vertebra, and are fpread into fmrth' the Mufcles of the Cheeks, as alfo into the Mufcles that are common to the Head and Neck. The fifth fpringeth forth between the fourth and fifth Vertebra. A The fifth.
twig from each Nerve of this pair, being joined with the like twigs of the fourth and fixth, do make that remarkable Nerve that goes to the MidriC and is called Nervus Phrenicus. The other branches of this fifth pair are diftributed fome of them backward and fome forward into fe- veral Mufcles ; fome of which do bow the Head ; other twigs run to- ward the Fore-legs, and are diftributed into feveral Mufcles about the Shoulders. The fixth pair cometh out under the fifth Vertebra, and hath, as the the fixth.
reft, feveral branches ; fome of which go to the Mufcles of the Fore-legs, and fome to the Mufcles of the Neck ; but one particular twig helps to make
|
||||||
|
loo The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
make up the Trunk of the Nervus fhrenkv.s, joining it felf with the afore-
faid twigs of the fourth and fifth pairs. The feventh. The feventh pair cometh out of the hole common to the fixth and feventh Vertebra, which joining with the foregoing pair, viz. the fixth of the Neck, and likewife with the two following, viz. the two firft of the Cheft, is difperfed into feveral Mufcles of both the Shoulders, alfo to the Neck and Cheeks. The Acceffory About where this feventh pair of Nerves arifes, there fprings another Nfands to the f°ur,d out by Do&or Willis, and by him called Nervus ad par vagum ac- Btah, and ceffbrius, which afcends up by the fides of the Spinal Marrow (growing unites with m \ts courfe thicker and thicker ) untili it reach up to the Skull, during fairWan mg which way it continues in one body without fending any branches to any Part. When it has entred the Skull, it then joins it felf with the Fibres of the eighth pair of the Brain called the wandring pair, with which it takes its progrefs out of the Skull, but prefently after feparates from them, and is difperfed into the Mufcles of the Neck and Shoulders, as was ihewed before in the foregoing Chapter, while we difcourfed of the wandring pair. |
|||||||||||||
|
CHAP. XII.
Of thofe Nerves that arife out of the Spinal Marrow whilfi
it k in the Vertebrae of the Back, Loyns, and Os facrum. |
|||||||||||||
|
F
|
OM the Marrow of the Back proceed feventeen pair of Nerves,
there being in an Horfe fo many Spondyls or Back-bones ; which |
||||||||||||
|
number exceeds that of the Joints of the Back in Humane Bodies, there
being in them but twelve, and fo accordingly they have no more than twelve pair of Nerves from the Marrow within the Back. The firft pah Thejtrfi of thefe pairs fpringeth out of the hole which is common to of the Baci(, the laft Vertebra of the Neck and the firft of the Cheft : Each of them (as are likewife all the following ) is prefently divided into two branches, of which the formore is larger than the hinder. The formore joineth it felf with the two laft of the Neck, and fo goeth the greateft part of it to the Fore-legs ; onely one little twig that arifeth out of it before fuch con- junction, is beftowed upon fome of the Mufcles of the Breaft and Neck • and the fmaller which is the hinder, is beftowed upon the Mufcles feat: on the Back. The fecond The fecond pair fprings out between the firft and fecond Vertebra; oj tavr' the Cheft, whofe formore branch being united with the firft of the Cheft, together with it is joined with the fixth and feventh of the Neck, which
all together make one Plexus, out of which proceed moft of the Nerves that are inferted into the Mufcles of the Shoulders and Fore-legs. But before the aforefaid formore branch unite with the foregoing, it fends forth a twig to the Intercoftal Nerve (or Nerve of the ninth pair) def- cending
|
|||||||||||||
|
Book III. Of the Head. 131
cending down the Thorax or Cheli, as alfo do all the reft of the re-
maining fifteen pair. That branch of this pair which is called the hinder branch, hath the
fame diftribution with the hinder of the foregoing pair, and therefore I will omit (peaking particularly of it : Neither do I think it neceflary to the remain. treat of every particular of the remaining pairs that proceed from the Mar- JJ#WBI row of the Back ; firfl:, becaufe my defign is to be as brief as poffible' both in thefe and all other Parts, that I may not make my Volume fwell too big ; and in the next place, the remaining pairs coming out of the feveral holes betwixt the jointings of the other Bones of the Back as thefe already fpoken of do out of the former, it would be but repeating almofl the fame things over again fo to defcribe particularly every pair. I will therefore onely fpeak thus much of them in general, that alter they are come out of their feveral holes of the Vert ehm, they do each of them im-~ mediately divide themfelves into two branches, whereof the formore (being, as hath been faid, the larger) fends one twig to the Intercoftal Nerve, and the remainder of it is bellowed on the Mufcles between the Ribs, called the Intercoftal Mufcles, both external and internal, and a few twigs alfo upon the other Mufcles of the Cheli that lie upon the Ribs ; and lallly, a twig or two on the obliquely defcending Mufcles of the Lower Belly. The hinder and lelTer branches prefently upon the divifion bend backward to the Spine, and are fpent upon the Mufcles and Skin of the Back. . Next come we to fpeak to thofe Nerves that fpring from that part of the firfl pair
the Spinal Marrow that is contained within the Vertebra of the Loyns,0?theLo}nt- which are in number feven pair according to the number of Bones in that Part. The firfl of which comedi out between the firfl Vertebra of the Loyns and the laft of the Back. Each of them, like thofe of the Back, is prefently divided into two branches; the formore of which is beflowed upon the flelhy part of the Midriff efpecially its two Proceilès, and partly on the Mufcle Pfoas ; and the hinder of them is inferted into the Mufculus longiffimus or longeft Mufcle of the Back. The fecond pair come out between the fir ft and fecond Vertebra oïThe fami
the Loyns under the Mufcle Pfoas ; the formore of whofe branches is be- Pair- ilowed upon the Mufcle that fills up the Cavity of Os Ileum or Haunch- bone ( which Mufcle is the fecond bender of the Thigh) alfo a twig of it is fent to the Mufculus fafcialis, and to,other neighbouring Parts. The hinder branch paflèth into the Buttock Mufcles, and doth lofe it felf in the bodies of thofe Mufcles, The third pair of thefe Nerves of the Loyns come forth between the the ehi
fecond and third Vertebra of the Loyns, from under the Mufcle Pfoas, **"• as the former did. The fore branch is difperfed down the hinder Leg to the Cambrel or Hock, furnifhing feveral Mufcles about thofe Parts with Nerves. The 'hinder branch is bent back and difperfed through the Muf- cles of the Loyns, fupplying them with Nerves. The other four pair of thefe Nerves of the Loyns, like the former, the remain-
come forth from between the other four Vertebra of the Loyns. Their '^m *m' fore branches are difperfed into moll of the Mufcles of the Buttocks and hinder legs ; alfo fome twigs are fent from them to the Mufcles that raife the Yard, fonie others to the neck of the Bladder ; and in Mares fome twigs are fent to the Matrix or Womb. And the hinder branches are car- ried backward, and are bellowed upon feveral Mufcles of the Back. T In
|
||||
|
j22 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
In the next place I come to treat of the remaining Conjugations or
pairs of Nerves that fpring from the Spinal Marrow, which are thofe that come forth of the holes of Os facrum, and are in number fix pair, there being iri the faid Bone fix Vertebra, with pretty wide holes for the coming forth of the Nerves. fhefirfi pair The fir fi of thèfe pair iflueth out between the lafl Verteira of the of os fa- Loyns and the firft of Os facrum in the fame manner as thofe that fpring crum' out of the Vertebra; of the Loyns, and like them is divided into two branches ; the foremofi of which is a great part of it mixed with thofe other of the Loyns, and with them runs down to the hinder Legs, fup- plying feveral Mufcles of thofe Parts with Nerves. And the hinder fur- nifheth the biggeft Buttock-mufcle and other Parts thereabouts with Nerves. the reman- This pair of Nerves, as I have faid, come out fide-ways like the Nerves ing five pam 0ftne Loyns,. and are divided like them afterwards into a fore and a hin- der branch; but the other five pair come out before and behind; but before they go out of the Bone, they are on each fide double, and on each fide one Nerve goes into the fore-parts and the other into the hinder. Thofe that go into the hinder-parts are difperfed as thofe of the Loyns were, that is, into the Mufcles that lie upon the Os facrum, and Ileum ; but thofe that go into the fore-parts are difperfed into fome Mufcles on the fore-part of the Thigh ; alfo fome twigs of them are lent to the Cods, the Bladder, and to the Mufcles of the Fundament. |
||||||
|
Table XXVII.
Reprefents all the Nerves of the whole Body, as well thofe that arife
from the Oolong Marrow within the Skull, as thofe that fpring from the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, (taken out of a French Authour. ) A A AAA A Mofi of the Nerves that fpring from the Oblong Marrow within
the Skull. B The faid Oblong Marrow.
CC The Eyes with the optiek and moving Nerves branched to them the
one making their Coats, and the other ferving to move them. DD Dottor Willis his eighth pair or the wandring pair of Nerves, with
their courje through the Middle and Lower Belly. From the Figure or Cipher i to 7. are /hewn the Nerves that fpring from
the Spinal Marrow while it is in the Vertebrae of the Neck. From the Figure 1 to 17. are fbewn thofe that fpring from it while it is
in the Vertebrae of the Back. From the Cipher 1 to 7. are /hewn thofe that arife out of it while it is con-
tained within the Vertebra of the Loyns. From the Cipher i to 6. are /hewn thofe that arife out of it while it is in
the Os facrum, which Nerves are branched into all the hinder Tarts and down the hinder Legs, imparting to them both Senfe and Motion. Thus have I given a brief defcription of the feveral Conjugations or
Pairs of Nerves that fpring from the Spinal Marrow, {hewing where they arife, which way they pafs, and to what Parts they run ; which may
|
||||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal 13I
may be of great ufe to our Praftitioners, if they wiH but take the pains
to inquire into this part of Anatomy ; for by underfhnding the be- ginning or rife of the Nerve that furniiheth an affë&ed Part, one may learn where tò apply the Remedy. As for inftance ; When from any outward caufe, as from a fall, ftroke, bruife or any other accident, any Part hath loft either Senfe or Motion or both ; or from any inward caufe a Pa'lfie happens, by which the ufe of fome particular Limb is taken away ; it would conduce very much to the cure if the rife of the Nerves of fuch Part were known by the undertaker of the dure of thofe Affec- tions ; for the Medicine is to be applied always to the beginning or rife of that Nerve that paflès to that Part, or as near to it as is poflible. I mould here put an end to this difcourfe of the Spinal Nerves, if it
were not convenient to add a word of the manner how they arife out of the Marrow, which is very accurately defcribed thus by Doctor Willis. " On Mrh fide of the Spinal Marrow, near its outer edge four or five Haw the m
« FibVes artfe in its upper fide, and as many in its lower : both which *-£" "companies penetrate firft the pia mater or lnmoft Coat of the Spinal spinal M*rz " Marrow and then the dura mater or middle Coat, (which is as it were ""• "a common cafe to them all) with diftinll Fibres : but afterwards as " both companies of Fibres are to pafs through the third Membrane ( for " the Spinal Marrow has three) they meet together, and being inverted " with the Coat they borrowed from the fecond Membrane, they become " as it were one Trunk : which Trunk paffing out of the jointing of the " Vertebra is again divided into feveral Nerves defign d for fundry Parts. " After this' manner in the whole traft of the Spinal Marrow have the " feveral vertebral Nerves their origine ; and in thofe places where the "brachial {or fore-leg) and crural Nerves pafs out, the Spinal Marrow " encreafes both in thicknefs and breadth, and the nervous Fibres are Jar- " eer All which that it may be the better apprehended, I have thought good to annex the following Figure from Him, onely encreafing the num- ber of the pairs of Nerves as they are found to be in an Horfe. Table XXVIII.
Shews the Spinal Marrow taken whole out of the Rack bone, where
the Membrane that cloatheth it is diffecled and turned back on each fide the better to fhew the beginnings and productions of all the vertebral Nerves, (from Doctor Willis.) Ah Shew the top of the Spinal Marrow, where it is cut off from the- Ob*
B The sZnalArtZyfeemingto defcend through the whole Marrow, which
however is made up of Arteries brought into it from between the Je- ver al jointings of the Vertebras. CC the Spinal Nerve coming from the fifth or fixth Vertebra of the Neck to the beginning of the wandring pair.
DD Portions of the Membrane cloathing the Marrow dijjetted and turn- ed hack. ,": , EEEE the Spinal Nerves fent out of the upper margin of the Marrow by bakds,with which the like bundles fpringing from the lower margin alfo meet, and join together all into one Trunk within the junc- J Ti **res |
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
tares of the Vertebrie, then being feparated again without them,
they ate carried into their reffettive provinces. Ff Nerves fpringing within the region of the Neck. Gg Nerves deft ivated for the Shoulders and For e-legs, where loth the Marrow is thicker in bulk, and the Nerves greater.
Hh Nerves going out about the Back and Loyns, where loth the body of the Marrow is again become fmaSer, and the Nerves are fomewhat flenderer. Ii Nerves deftinated for the Buttocks and hinder Legs, where both the Me- dullar body and the Nerves are again larger. K Nerves going out of Os facrum. |
||||||
|
CHAP. XIII.
Of the Eye-lids, Eyes and their fever al Parts, viz. their
Coats and Humours. The Eyes, T H E Eyes are termed in Latin Oculi, from the word occludo tö
their name. X frut, or from occulto to hide, becaufe they are hid by the {hutting
of the Eye-lids. They are the Organs or Inftruments of Sight, confuting of many Parts, viz. of Humours, Membranes, &c. Their mm- Their number is by all People known to be two, and that for the fe-
ber. curity and perfection of fight ; that if one be defective, or fhould by acci-
dent be loft, the other may fupply its place and office, though not alto-
gether fo perfectly. Their figure. The Eye alone, when its Mufcles, and the Nerves and Bloud-vefTels that
enter into it, are removed, is of a round figure, both that it might move the better, and alfo that it might the better receive the vifible Rays. Their Parts. Adjoining unto the Eyes are the Eye-lids, which contain them as it
were, and ferve as a fafeguard or cover to preferve them from externa! injuries : United with them are the Fat and Mufcles : and laftly the Parts that conftitute the Eye it felf are the Membranes, Humours, and Venels. The Eye-lids. The Eyelids do ferve as Curtains to the Eyes, by which duff, Flies,
or any thing elfe that might annoy them, is kept out. They are made up of the Skin, themembrana Carnofa or flefhy Pannicle, and Mufcles; but both the Mufcles and flefliy Pannicle are in thefe Parts very thin. On the infide next the Eye they are lined with a Membrane that is propaga- ted from the Pericranium, which is very fmooth, that it may move glib- ly upon the Eye. The extremities or edges of the Eye-lids are hard and griftly, partly to ftrengthen them, and partly that they may meet the more exactly, and not fall one over the other. And thus much fhall fuffice for the outward or containing Parts of the Eyes, viz. the Eye-lids. . As for the Mufcles, we fliall defer fpeaking of them till the next Book.
And as to the Fat, it difiers not from that which is intermixed among the Mufcles in other Parts, and ferves here to keep the hinder-part of the Eye and parts adjoining moift, that the Eye m ly move the more glibly in its Socket, We |
||||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal *1%
We fhall therefore next proceed to the Eye it felf, and ^ff^^^^
of which it confifts, and firft its Tunicles or Coats, the firft or ■outmoft ^fcgj. of which is a common Coat, arifing from the Pericranium, and is pread over all the white of the Eye. By this is the Eye kept firmly within its 5oc- ke tor^ Orbk It i o exquifite fenfe, and hath many finali Arteries and Veins creeping through it! which are very difcernible when there is any A nis annata Deing r f hardnels is called yta-
being in number three; trie lint or wmuiu
!«*!, This arifes from the dura mater or (which is all one) from thw
™n- root- nf the Ootick Nerve. It is fomewhat hard, and opaque on ks bac^de bu o^fore-part, becaufe k is tranfparent like an Horn idofes ïs mme emerotica which it had from its hardnefs, and is called tunica cornea or horney Coat from its cornels «chonftlei. The fecond proper Coat heth next under this, and goetii by tne name 3
JfS tecaufe it refembles that Membrane that in wraps the Foal ?f iZfrl cM Chorion As the former did arife from the dura ma. ^X^t^^^ (or if you will, horn the inner Coat of the Opti k Nerve') All over the back-part of the Eye, this Coat on its infide is blackhi, that the Idea's received in might appear is in compafs to permit the rays of vifible Species totals m to the cry-
ftaLe Zmòur Which fore-part, becaufe fo much of it as is from under . S^«1^what of the colour of a Grape is called uvea: by which Sme ïhe Le-part of this Coat is diftinguimed from its l^der-part, as ?he former was by the name of cornea, ho^fihritom which I thought fiftoake notice of in this place, that the Reader might not take the four names for Several Coal, when they are but two, and fo ought go about to find what indeed there is not ed ^^^ u Vfmt^^tTM^^r, there is formed a Ligament
bends it felf back to the cryitau n Filaments or Fi- r^ifalSnSS ^"S^^^^tibe^S^s io ««mane Bodies, run-
Slfct^Sffi» from the circumference of the „*» the mngliKe 10 many yw hi h Humour they encompafs, and ^entt^TjS^S., by coning or opening the
^e1wo*n»rftV^Tunide of the %*£**%g£ * *"
Net falhioned Coat, becauie it encompaflès the vmeous or glatley Hn "Thlfc^made of the mednllar fubftance of the Optiek Nerve be,
This Coat is mane u liahtfom colour, mixed with an
nig very *'nVani^re is flieircular, round on its outf.de, and hol-
Som the crystalline «f»-««fc^^gS5S^fa£
the/i?«»»'».tó««. t0"h;tnbtaedtlatif this Coat be taken and
continuance of us motion. It « obfaved *«• mucous Qr put into «arm Water, .^»g " '^Tp to the light, the Fibres or
Having
|
||||
|
1^6 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
the Humoms Having done with the Tumcles or Coats of the Eyes, I come next to
of the Eyes, fpeak of the Humours contained within thofe Coats, which.are in number three, that is the Aquem or watery, the Vitreus or gìafley, and the Cry- ftalline : of which the laft for its ufe is the mod noble, and is placed al- raoft in the centre of the Eyes. the ■wawj Of thefe Humours the Aqueus or watery is outermoft, being thin and mmour. fluxive like Water, from whence it hath its name. It fills up that fpàce that is betwixt the horney or outmoft Coat and the cryftalline Humour in the fore-part of the Eye. It is obferved in Men, that if any clotted and coloured bits or motes fwim in this Humour, the fhapes of feveral Infecls, as Gnats, Flies, Spiders and the like, will feem to be flying before their Eyes, as hath been oft declared by Men who have had this Affection. I am therefore apt to believe that many Horfes are not without fuch kind of congealed bits floating in this Humour, that without any evident or external caufe to occafion it, are much given to ftart, efpecially with their Head ; the reprefentation of the aforefaid InfedTs moving before the cryftalline Humour, which makes them fear fomething or other is ftill flying into their Eye. Yea it is in Humane Bodies farther obferved, that oft times feveral of
thefe coloured Particles in the watery Humour do gather together, and unite fo clofe, that they grow as it were into a skin or film, fpreadine before the fight of the Eye, which caufes an abfolute blindnefs, and is that Difeafe which Phyficians call a Catarall ; which Difeafe the Animal we are treating of is much fubjecT; to, though we have not fo proper a term for it as this is. The cryftai- The next Humour is the CryftaOine, which is fo called from its excee- I'me. ' ding bright and fhining colour, being as tranfparent as Cryftai ; It is it felf of no diftinguifhable colour, that it might receive the Idea's of all colours. It is placed betwixt the watery and glaflêy Humours, but not exactly
in the middle or centre of the Eye, but 'rather towards its fore-part. It is inclofed in the bofom, as it were, of the glaflèy Humour, and is flattifli on the fore fide, but rounder behind. This Humour is believed to be the primary or chief inftrument of the
fight, becaufe it collects or receives the rayes of vifible things; though the tunica Retina doth afterwards flop them by its dark body, and com- municate them to the common Senfory by the Optiek Nerve. The Glaffey. The third and laft of the Humours of the Eye is the Vitreus or glajjey, fo called becaufe in colour it is like to molten glàfs. This is not of fo thick a confidence as the cryftalline ; but it much exceeds both it and the wa- tery in quantity. It is round in its hinder part but plane before, onely it has a little hollownefs in the middle wherein the cryftalline Humour is placed as in a mold or cafe. It fills up all the hinder part of the globe of the Eye, as alfo fome part of the fides. The ufes of this Humour are faid to be, firft, to nouriih the cryftalline
Humour, as Galen conceived ; next, that the vifible fpecies received into the cryftalline Humour might not be reflected, or return defiled by dark and coloured tin&ures, whereby the fight fliould be difturbed; but that they might have a free paflage through it to the Retina. |
|||||
|
Table
|
|||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal
|
||||||||||||
|
Table XXIX.
Reprefents the feveral Coats, Humours and Mufcles of the Eyes, Figure L
A Shews the cryftalline Humour.
B The Iris or circle about the fight of the Eye.
|
||||||||||||
|
Figure II.
A The cryftalline Humour.
B The watery Humour encompajftng the cryftalline on its fore-fide.
|
||||||||||||
|
Figure III.
, A The lack fide of the cryftalline Humour.
B The vitreous or glaffey Humour receiving the cryftalline into its bofom. |
||||||||||||
|
Figure IV.
AAAA The common Coat of the Eye or Adnata, cut afmder and thrown
lack.
B The Cornea or horney Coat. C The Choroides, whofe fore-part is called uvea by re of on it is of the co-
lour of a Grape. Figure V.
Shews the Eye taken out of the Head with its Mufcles infitu, not
being loofened from either their rife or termination. A The Optiek Nerve cut off near the Brain.
B The rife of the Mufcles.
CC Their feveral terminations or endings into the Coats of the Eye.
D The common Coat of the Eye called Adnata or Conjunctiva.-
E The Cornea or horney Coat.
F The Apple of the Eye.
|
||||||||||||
|
Figure
|
||||||||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
|
|||||||||
|
Figure VI.
Shews the fore-part of the Eye with its Mufcles removed from their
originals, and placed round the Eye according to the motions they perform. AAAA The right Mufcle that lifts up the Eye, called Attollens.
B The Adnata Turitele.
C The Tunica cornea or homey Coat.
D The Pupilla or Apple of the Eye.
E The right Mufcle that draws down the Eye, called Deprimens.
F The Mufcle that draweth the Eye from the Nofe towards the outer cor-
ner, called Indignatorius. G The Mufcle called Bibitorius, which brings the Eye inwards towards
the Nofe. H The fuperiour oblique Mufcle called Trochlearis, which carries the Eye
flantingly to its outward 'angle. I The inferiour oblique Mufcle, that moves the Eye flantingly to its in-
ward angle. |
|||||||||
|
CHAP. XIV.
Of the Ears and their [everal Tarts.
|
|||||||||
|
THE Ears (whichaccording to order we come now to fpeak to)
are the inftruments of Hearing, framed by Nature with no lefs Art than the Eyes ; yea fo full of intricate Meanders they are, and con- fili of fo many Parts, that they will be very hard to be deciphered. Not- withftanding I will endeavour to give what fatisfa&ion I can, by what I have learned by Infpeftion, as well as by the Writings of the mofl accu- rate Anatomiils. ihi Auricle. Firfl then the Parts of the Ear are either Outward or Inward. The out-
ward part is called Auricula, which is onely an adjuvant or aflifting in- flrument of Hearing, colletting in its hollo wnefs fome part of the Air that is the vehicle of the found, as it is pafling by. its Farti. The Parts whereof the outward Ear is framed, are either proper, or
common. The common are the Scarf skin, the true Skin, and membrana nerve a, or nervous Membrane. The proper are the Mufcles, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, and the Griftle. Of the Mufcles we lhall fpeak in their proper place, •viz. in the next Book that treats of the Mufcles. The Feins of the Ear are branched to it from the external Jugular Vein ; the Arteries from the Carotid Arteries ; and the Nerves from the fecond pair of the Neck be- ing joined with the harder Procefs of the feventh pair. As to the Griftle of which for the greateft part it confifts, that is a fubftance that is fitteli for this place ; for if it had been bony, the Ear would both have been im- moveable, |
|||||||||
|
Book III. ,0f the Heal i?9
moveable, and fo could not have turned it felf toward the found, as we
fee the Horfe can now move it ; and alfo it would have been in conti- nual danger of being broken off: and if it had been flefhy or membra- nous onely, the Horfe's Ears would have fJap'd down like Hounds Ears, which would have been a great deformity. The ufes of this outward Ear are, firft, to ferve for an ornament to Its uji.
the Head ; fecondly to receive, or at leaf! to help to receive the founds? for firft, it gathereth them being difperfed in the Air; fecondly, it doth moderate the fiercenefs of their motion, fo that they come gently to the Tympanum, or Drum, and beat moderately againft it. The internal or inward Ear hath alfo fundry Parts, contained in the tke inward
Os petrofum, as the outward Ear is faften'd upon it. Ear:- Thefe Parts are firft the Drum with its Cord and Mufcles ; fecondly, its fans;
four little Bones ; thirdly, its Cavities with the implanted Air ; and laf t- ly, its Vefïèls. The Drum, called Tympanum, is a nervous, round and tranfparentTheVrm.
Membrane, of ffioft exqu-ifite fenfe, arifing from the foftef procefs of the Auditory Nerve expanded. It is exceeding dry, that it might give the better Echo to the found. It is alfo ilrong, that it mould the better en- dure outward harms or injuries. It hath a Cord behind it for ft rength- ning and ftretching of it, even as the Military Drum hath. As for its Mufcles, we ihall defcribe them in the next Book. ■ Within the Membrane of this Tympanum or Drum there is an internal Four link
Cavity, called Concha, in which are feveral little dry Bones, which have in Bms° them no Marrow, nor are covered with any Membrane or periofteum : yet at their ends where they are joined together, they are bound with a fmall Ligament, proceeding from the before mentioned Cord of the Drum. Thefe little Bones-are four in number ; the firft of which is called mal the Hammer.
leolus, that is, a little Hammer. This Hammer hath a round head, which by a loofe Ligament is jointed into the Cavity of the fecond little Bone that is called the Anvil ; which head is continued into a fmall neck, that reacheth beyond the middle of the Drum and adhereth to it. About its middle it hath two Proceffes, the one of which, being Ihorter, hath the tendon of the internal Mufcle inferted into it ; and the other, being longer, hath the tendon of the external, the Drum intervening. The next of thefe little Bones is by Anatomifts called Incus, the Anvil, The Anvil.
having one head and two feet, being therefore more like to one of the grinding Double-teeth than to an Anvil. The head of this is indifferent thick, having in the top of it a little
fmooth hollownefs, which receives the knob or head of the Hammer. The fmaller foot of the Anvil is tied to the top of the Stirrop by a loofe but firm Ligament, but the thicker foot refteth upon the Os fquamofum> or fcaly Bone. The third is called the Stirrop, having a perforation in the middle, and The Sthnf.
is fixed before or rather round that paffage that is called the oval Window, by which founds pafs out of the firft Cavity into the fecond called the Labyrinth. Which Cavities are wrought by Nature in the Rocky-bone, and contain in them the inbred Air. Now as the cryftalline Humour of* the Eye is the chief inftrument of the Sight, in refpeci: of the reception of vifible Images or Forms ; fo is this inbred Air of the Ear, the chief in- ftrument which receiveth the forms of Sounds, although there be another more noble Oman which judgeth of them, as ihall be ihewn by and by. U The
|
||||
|
140 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
The figure of this Bone is in Horfes triangular, very like the Greek Let-
ter A, (but in Men it is reprefented to be of fomewhat another fhape) which Letter is like fuch a Stirrop as we often fee in old Hangings (not fuch Stirrops as are ufed now-a-tkies) from its fimilitude unto which I fuppofe it hath its name. The upper part of this Stirrop is fmall, as you may fee by the figure of
it, upon which the longeft foot of the Anvil Hands. the articular The fourth and laft of thefe little Bones of the Ear was not long fince Bona found out by a diligent Anatomift, named Franc. Sylvius, till whofe time there were but three Bones of the Ear reckoned.
This Bone from its round fhape is called orbkulare. It is tied by a /len-
der Ligament to the fide of the Stirrop, in that part where the Stirrop is faftned to the Anvil. The ufe of The ufe of thefe four Bones is not, that by hitting one againft another thefe Banes, fay fl^y produce a found, but firft, to defend the Membrane of the Tympanum or Drum, left it ihould be torn and beat inwards by the vio- lent fhaking of the outward Air againft it, in loud founds, fuch as Thun- der, or the noife of great Guns and the like. Secondly, They are affifting to the Senfe of Hearing on this manner :
The external Air beats againft the Drum, which is driven againft the Hammer, and this ftrikes upon the Anvil, as the Anvil bears, againft the Stirrop ; which as it does, more ftrongly or weakly, fo does the Stirrop open the oval Window more or lefs, and proportionably the found ap- pears to the common Senfory, louder, or lower. the cavities We come in the next place to fpeak of the Caverns or Cavities, by »ƒ the Ear. fome cauec} Dens, which are formed in the midft of the Qs petrofum or Rockey-bone where it bunches out moft, and are three in number,
concha. The, firft of them is to be feen as foon as the Membrane of the Drum is taken away, and is called Concha, from its refemblance to the fhell of a
Taber. Others call it the Bafin, and fome the Den. It has its firft deno- mination, ( which is that which it is moft commonly known by ) not fo much from its fhape, as from its ufe ; for when the Membrane is ftruck upon by any outward found, the Echo is made in this Cavity, even as it is in the hollow of a Taber, or in our common Drum when the Parch- ment is beat upon ; for in all thefe the found is principally occafion'd by the Air included in the Cavity. Nature hath placed in this Cavity divers Inftruments ; as firft, fome
ferving for pulfation, fuch are the four Bones, the Cord and the Mufcles, ( of all which before. ) Secondly, others for conduction into the other Ca- vities ; fuch are two perforations or little holes, commonly called Win- dows. And laftly, a third fort for Expurgation ; fuch are the paflàges which lead, one into the Palate, and another into the Noftrils, by the help of which the pituitous Matter which is collected in this Cavity is difcharged. f eneftra The firft of the perforations being the upper and larger, has added to oralis. j£ tjle Epfchej. Oval, alluding to its figure. This opens inwards or back-
wards, and that with a pretty wide mouth, into the Labyrinth ; but is kept fhut next the Concha by the bafis of the Stirrop, when found ceafes. The other being the lefs and lower, is of a round fhape ( and therefore Fcneftra ro- ftyled Rotunda.) This is always open having no covering, and is divided tunda. by the Osfquamofum into two Pipes, one of which tends to the Cochlea, the other into the Labyrinth. The
|
||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal Ï41
The fecond of thefe Cavities of the inward Ear is (from its windings^ ubj.
and turnings) called Lahyrinthus, the Labyrinth. If one corifider it in.»"*** its whole dimenfion it is round, and much lefs than the former. Its windings are circular, yet the circles run not quite round the Cavity, but come as much fhort of an intire circle as the Griftles of the Wind-pipe in the Throat do, or rather more, fo that they are commonly termed femi- circular. Their ufe is to modulate the founds fo as they may be leifurely communicated to the Auditory Nerve which is difperfed through the Membrane that inverts this Cavity, or rather makes it. It has three pret- ty wide holes, two opening into it, and one out of it. The two that open into it, are the oval and round holes, mentioned in the foregoing Para- graph. By thefe the internal agitated Air partes out of the Ctncha'mto the Labyrinth. That which opens out 0fix. is that which partes towards the third Cavity called Cochlea, into which the aforefaid Air pafìès further by it out of the Labyrinth. Befides thefe there are four other very fmail holes for the ingrefs of the nervous Fibres that are inferted into the Mem- brane that cloaths this Cavity. The third and laft inner Cavity is called Cochlea or the Snail-fliell, cochlea,
from the refemblance it hath with that Shell, efpeciafly in its Spiral winding ; which, if you take ofFthe upper part of the Bone, will plain- ly appear. This Cavity is far lefs than the former two, being indifferent long but
crooked. Into this endeth one Pipe from the round hole of the firft Ca- vity, and another from the fecond, juft now mentioned. It is inverted, as the other Cavities are, with a foft and thin Membrane
(after the fame manner as the fockets of the Teeth are) into which (as into that of the Labyrinth) the flender Fibres of the Auditory Nerve do enter, and that through three or four feveral holes which are all very fmall. It is filled with the internal inbred Air as well as the former, by which
the Echo is made to the impulfë of the external Air upon thefympanum that is the vehicle of the found : And the Auditory Nerve being inferted into the Membrane that cloaths the Cavities, is affected therewith, whereby it comes to be communicated to the original of the Nerves where the com- mon Senfory is feated, that judgeth and diftinguifheth of them. Into thefe three Cavities that make up the Internal Ear, are the fame
Bloud-vertels distributed as to the External : The Nerves are alfo from the fame conjugation, namely the feventh pair ; onely whereas the harder Procefs of the Nerve goes to the External Ear, it is the fofter that comes to the Internal. Table XXX.
Reprefents the inner ftrufture of the Ear or Organ of Hearing, with
the Auditory Bones as well lerter as bigger. Figure L
AA The infide of the Temple-bone, or Os temporis.
BB The fpongy Bone, or Os fpongiofum. C the hole into which the Auditory tferve is inferted. Ö The greater winding of the Cochlea or Snail-fhell. U z %fhe
|
||||
|
42 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
E The three bony half-circles that form the Labyrinth.
F The Malleus or Hammer in its fituation.
G The Incus or Anvil.
H The Stapes or Stirrop.
I The External Mufcle of the Ear.
K The Internal Mufcle.
Figure If.
aaa Shew the Labyrinth.
b The Cochlea or Snail fkett.
e The oval hole before which the Stirrop is feated.
d The Ague dull found out by Fallopius.
ee Little holes to let out the Veins and Arteries.
f The Feneftra rotunda, or round Window.
Figure III.
Shews the Cochlea and Labyrinth difìè&ed.
aa The intermediate fpace dividing the Cochlea into two wreaths.
b The round hole that makes the pajfage out of the Concha, into the lower
wreath of the Cochlea.
e The windings or circumvolutions of the Labyrinth opened. d The Feneftra ovalis, or oval Window. ■ Figure IV.
Shews the Os petrofum cut through the middle, the plainer to fliew
the round circle over which the Drum is placed. A The round circle covered with the Tympanum or Drum.
B The Malleus or Hammer in its natural fituation. C The Incus or Anvil in the like. D The Stapes or Stirrop alfo in fitu. Figure V.'
Shews the Incus or Anvil taken out and freed from the Hammer.
Figure VI.
h the Hammer taken out alfo and freed from the other Parts.
Figure VII.
Is the Stirrop out'of its place.
|
|||||
|
CHAP,
|
|||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal ^
CHAP. XV.
Of tber Nofe, Lip and Mouth.
|
||||||
|
HAVING defcribed all the Organs of Seeing and Hearing, we come
in the next place to the third outward Senfe which is the Smelling, of which the Nofe being the Inftrument, we are now to enter upon its defcription. As therefore the Ear is divided into an External or outward, and an
Internal or inward part ; fo will we divide the Nofe, it being made of the like parts. The External Parts are the Skin, the Mufcles and Griftles, Veflels of ^e extend
all forts, as alfo many Bones, and thofe diftinguifhed or divided by feve-jj!' *the ral Sutures. The Skin wherewith the Nofe is covered is thin, and without any fat The skin,
under it, for beauty fake ; for if there had been any fat naturally in this place, it might have been collected to that quantity or bulk, as to have become a great deformity to the Creature : for which reafon Nature hath fo ordered it, that in this place the Skin fticketh fo fail to the Mufcles and Griftles* that it is not eafie to part it from them without renting. The Bones which make the Cavities of the Nofe are fome proper, and Bones ani
fome common : of which hereafter in the Fifth Book of the Bones. The &*flles. Griflles are five in number, of which we mall alfo difcourfe in the fame Book. The Veffels of the Nofe are, Veins from the Jugular Veins, and Arte- veffdi.
ries from the Carotides ; alfo Nerves from the third pair of the Brain, Which fend to each fide of the Nofe one branch, ( befides the olfa&ory Nerves or firft pair, called the Mammillary Procefìès.) As to the Internal Parts of the Nofe, we ihali begin firft with the Coat theintern J
or Skin which compaflèth the whole capacity of the Noftrils. This Coat Zf"- is faid to arife from that Skin of the Brain which is called the dura mater ; Memkm! and is not peculiar to this Part alone, but is as well common to the Mouth, Palate, Tongue, Larynx, &c. as to the Noftrils ; onely in the Noftrils it is thinner and of exquifite fenfe ; for any thing blown up the Nofe that is of a biting nature, lb irritates it, as immediately to caufe the Horfe to fneeze. This Skin hath on its back fide abundance of little Glands or Kernels, in which the Rheum is fepsrated that runs out by the Nofe. There is alfo another Skin belonging to the infide of the Nofe called The mufcuW
the mufiular Membrane, which is faid to draw together or contract the Membrane. Noftrils. In the upper part of the Noftrils there is a tea fiejhy fpongious fuh- sm) Fkp
fiance, with which the fpongy Bones are filled up. There are alfo feated at the upper end of the Nofe next to the Brain siewtye
over both Noftrils a Bone which from its likenefs to a Sieve, (by reafon Bm- of the innumerable little perforations or holes that are in it) is called Os ^ibriforme or Sieve-like Bone. In the infide of this Bone are feated thofe *wd productions of the Brain called procefns mammillares, which are the true
|
||||||
|
144 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
true Inftruments of Smelling, and are therefore better called the Smelling-
nerves. There pafs from them through the holes of this Sieve-like Bone many little Strings or Fibres, which are difperfed into all the inward ca- pacity of the Nofe, ferving there to be the immediate Organs of Smel- ling, but the Scents are communicated to the common Senfory of the Brain by the aforefaid Mammillary Procefles. the ufes of The principal ufe of the Nofe is for Smelling, which is performed in the Nofe. tnis manner. The Noftrils are adjuvant Inflruments of Smelling even as the External Ear is of Hearing. For as the Ear gathereth the founds that fly in the Air ; fo when fmells exhale out of odoriferous Bodies into the Air, the Horfe by taking in his breath at his Nofe, ( which he for the raoft part does, and not in at his Mouth as we often do ) the fcents ac- companying the Air afcend up the Noftrils to the top of their Cavity, and fo to the before-named Sieve-like Bone, where affecting the little Fi- bres of the Olfaftory Nerves that come, as hath been faid, from the Mammillary Procefïès through thofe little holes, thofe Fibres communicate their fenfation to the Procefles, and thefe convey it to the original of the Nerves or common Senfory, by which it is diftinguiihed. Inferiour ufes of the Nofe are, firft, to take in the breath by ; and
next, to ferve as a common Shore or Sink for the difcharge and evacua- tion of the fuperfluous flegmatiek Humours of the Bloud. The tips. In the next place we come to treat of the Lips (or the external Parts
neh fub. of the Mouth ) which are two in number, one upper and the other lower.
fiance. xhefe are framed of a foft flelhy fungous fubftance, as alfo of fome pro-
per Mufcles covered with the hairy Skin on the outfide of them, but on the infide they are covered with a Membrane common to the Mouth and Stomach. their ufe. The ufes of the Lips are firft to gather the Hay or Oats or other Food
into the Mouth; fecondly to retain, or help to retain it, while it is chewing ; thirdly, they ferve to keep the Gums and Teeth from exter- nal Injuries. the Mouth. Within the Lips is the Mouth, whofe Parts are either containing or con-
tained, that is, either thofe that make the Mouth, or fuch as are con- tained in it. the Parts The Parts whereof the Mouth is made, are of two forts, fome flefhy,
containing, others bony. The flejhy Parts are the Lips, of which we have already
fpoken ; alfo the Mufcles of the Cheeks and lower Jaw. The lony are the upper and nether Jaws, with the Teeth fixed in them. All thefe Parts (as alfo the whole inward capacity of the Mouth) ex-
cept the Teeth, are lined with a thick Membrane or Skin, which in the Palate is rugged and knotty as it were, by reafon of the many little Glands on the back-fide of it, by which part of the Slaver is feparated into the Mouth; and this Membrane reduplicated maketh the Vvula, as fome think ; though others more probably hold, that it is of a peculiar fubftance. the Parts The Parts contained within the Mouth are divers. As firft the Teeth and
contained. the Bone Hyoie{es at tne root of the Tongue ; of both which we Ihall
treat in the Book of the Bones. Befides thefe there are the Gums, the Palate, the Vvula, the Al-
monds, the Tongue, and the Mufcles that ferve to move it. the Gums. The Gums being in number two, are made up of a hard flelhy fub-
ftance, deftitute of motion, that fo the Teeth might be better faftned in their Sockets. The |
||||
|
Book III. Of the Heal 145
The Palate is the upper part of the Mouth, and is called by that name, j-te Paiate,
irom its being as it were fenced or paled in with Teeth. It extends from the back-part of the Mouth to the Fore-teeth, but is not fo much hollow- ed in an Horfe as in Humane Skulls. It hath in it fome eighteen fteps or bars which reach from the infide of the Fore-teeth to the very farther end of the Mouth. It confifts of Bones, of a peculiar glandulous Flefh, and a thick Coat ; which Coat is full of little perforations or holes for the Sla- ver that is feparated in the little Glands ( above mentioned ) to diüiil through into the Mouth. The Vvula is a red, fungous and longifh kind of a Kernel feated in The Uvula,
the inward or backer-part of the Palate, where the Noftrils open into the Mouth, hanging directly downward with a fmall but bluntilh end juft over the chink' of the Larynx. The ufe of this Z>vula is faid to be, firft, to moderate the coldnefs oïits ufe.
the Air drawn in by the Lungs. This is Bartholin's opinion, who fays further, that from this ufe of it it comes to pafs, that fuch Perfons as want it, die PhthificaL Whether that be fo or no I cannot tell : but the main ufe of it in an Horfe I take to be, fecondly, to hinder the Water, when he drinks, from paffing out of his Mouth into his Noftrils. This Kernel is very necefiàry to be known by all profefled Farriers, the failing tf
for fuch knowledge might have contributed to the preferyation of many i'* p'^m. Horfes which for want of it have been loft. Such are thofe which by PJ/ÙTrf,enL reafon of Humours too much flowing to this Kernel have had it fo much wen a, Men, diftended, that it hath hung down into the Throat to that degree, that the Horfe hath hot been able to fwallow, there being no pafiàge left for the Meat to go down ; but when he has chew'd it and endeavours to fwal- low it, inftead of its going down the Gullet into his Stomach, it comes out at his Nofe ; whereby it comes to pafs that although the Horfe have never fo good a Stomach, yet for all that he comes to ftarve to death With hunger. This my felf have been fometimes an Eye witnefs of, and have oftener
heard of it by others ; but could never fee nor hear of any of them, that had any help for this Diftemper ; their endeavours proving ftill unfuccefs- full by their not well underftanding either the Diftemper, or the Part affefted. This fwelling of the Vvula in Men is called by Phyficians Cafus Vvu*
l& ; and by the Vulgar, the falling down of the Palate of the Mouth. It is aDiftemper that commonly comes upon taking fome great cold ; but is very ordinarily cured not, by Phyficians onely, but by every old Wo- man, who knows that by holding Pepper or Ginger or the like againft it, the Rheum is thereby drained out of it, and it contraas it felf to its due and natural bulk, whereby the Party is fpeedily relieved. How far fuch Medicines might contribute to the cure in Horfes, I fhall forbear in this place to give my opinion, becaufe as I have already faid, I do by God's affiftance defign to publiih a Book of Cures by it felf, but was willing in the firft place to teach my Practitioner the frame and ufe oï the Parts, and to hint fome of thofe Difeafes they are incident to, which we have leaft understood : and by that time the Ingenious Student is come to un- derstand them, I ihall I hope be ready to publifh a new and certainer way of curing them than has hitherto been pra&ifed. Next we come to fpeak of the Tongue and its Parts. It is called in La- The Tongue.
tin, Lingua, a Ungendo, from Licking. It is in figure long, broad and thick,
|
||||
|
j a g The Anatomy of an Horfe.
iu Mem- thick, efpecially towards the root. It is covered with two Skins ; the
ham. outward, clöathing onely its upper part, which in an Horfe is almoft as fmooth as in Men, though it is much rougher in Oxen, and the like. This Membrane is very porous. The inward Skin covers the whole Tongue, the lower fide as well as
the upper, and is thin and foft, haying many Teat like Protuberances bunching out of it, which are inferted into the pores or holes of the outr ward Coat. its fubjiance. Concerning the fui ft ance of the Tongue there is diverfity of opinions ;
for fome would have it of a glandulous, others a mufculous fubftance ; and fome, that it has a peculiar fubftance : to which opinion I moft in- cline, becaufe I do not find in any Part of the Body a fubftance like it. /// Vejfeh. It hath Fejfels of all forts ; Feins from an inward branch of the exter-
nal Jugular ; Arteries from the Carotid Arteries ; and Nerves of two kinds, one from the fifth and another from the eighth pair of the Brain. The Tongue hath at its root feveral Mufcles, by which all its motions
are performed, of which we will fpeak in the next Book. And befides the Mufcles, there is alfo at the root of the Tongue a confiderable quan- tity of Fat, with which the Mufcles are interlarded as it were. its ufes. The ufes of the Tongue are, fir ft, to tafte the Food that is offered,
whereby (as well as by the fmell ) the Horfe diftinguifheth whether it be good and wholfom for him or not ; and in the next place it helpeth the chewing of the Meat, by tolling it to and fro, and after it is chewed, it afllfteth in turning it dowrn to the Stomach. The {alival There is to be found out by difie&ion underneath the root of the
Dulls. Tongue a large Kernel, from whence two Pipes, called falival Ducis, do
fpring, one from the fore, and the other from the hinder-part of it : Thefe , two at a fmall diftance from the Gland unite into one, which runs pret- ty ftreight forward under the Tongue toward the Chin : but in the mid- dle way, as Doftor Wharton affirms, there are other pretty remarkable Glands (in an Horfe) that ftartd on each fide this Duel, and difcharge themfelves into it. When it is come near the Chin at the Bridle of the Tongue, it ends into other fmall Glands, through which it pours into the Mouth part of the Slaver that keeps it continually moift. Befides this Duft there are two others of the fame ufe, which do arile
out of the Kernels below the root of the Ear, ( called Parotides) and run on the outfide of the Jaw-bone to the middle of that Mufcle of the Cheek that is called Buccinator, where they open into the Cavity of the Mouth, into which they difcharge the before-named Liquor, which in thefe and the other Glands of the Mouth is feparated from the Bloud. The ufe of Now we muft underftand, this Slaver (or Saliva) is not merely an Hu-
tbe siaver. mom excrementitious,as that is which is feparated in feveral Kernels in other
Parts of the Body, as particularly in the Guts ; for this is of great ufe, not onely in that it continually moiftens the Mouth, as alfo the Hay and Oats whilft they are in chewing ; but being fwallow'd down with the Meats, it doth further the fermentation and conco£tion of them in the Stomach, whither part of this Juice alfo goes with every morfei. It is of the fame nature with that which in Men we call the Spittle, and of the fame ufe. And here it may not be amifs to recite a ftory I have read of a Perfon
that had one of thefe external falival Duds wounded, becaufe I have ob- ferved (the laft Spring at Greenwich) the fame accident happen to an Horfe, with the fame fymptom. The Story is thus : A Noble-man being wounded
|
||||
|
Book III. Of the Heai.
wounded in the middle of the Cheek with having a Glafs thrown at him ;
the Wound was quickly almoft clofed, but in the middle of it, through a little hole, there leifurely diftilled out of it for a long time a watery and clear Liquor, which for all that ever the Surgeon could doe, hindred the intire clofing up of the Wound for almoft two years. This Liquor did diftill out of the falival Du£t, which was not then found out ; but at laft an a£tual Cautery being applied to the end of the Du£t, the Liquor was by that means ftopt, and the Wound prefently healed. The Horfe that I faw had a clear watery Humour running in like manner out of the fide of his Cheek, but in that quantity, that in a few hours time ( efpecially in the time next after his drinking) it would make his Manger all a float. A Farrier had him under cure there, and my opinion being ask'd, I ad- vis'd to fear it, but he that had him in hand not knowing the occafion of this flux of Humour, thought rowelling of him would ferve ; but what he did to him, I had no opportunity fince to inform my {elf. Now feeing a like cafe to this may happen, that my Pra&itioner may
underftand where to apply his Cautery (or red-höt Iron) for the Han- dling of the Liquor, I have thought it convenient to annex a Scheme of each of thefe falival Dufts ; that under the Tongue being found out by Do6tor Wharton, and the other arifing from the Parotides and running on the outfide the Gums, by one Stem, a Dane. Table XXXt.
Fig. I. Shews the falival Duft that fprings from the Glands under thé
Ear called Parotides, (in a Calves Head.) aaaa The conglomerate Parotis.
bb The conglobate Parótis.
e The lymphatick Feffel tending downwards from the conglobate Gland.
dddd The roots of the falival Dull.
eeë The Trunk of the f aid Dull.
ffff The outer branches of the "jugular Vein.
ggg The Nerves, which as they are inoculated one with another within the
Gland and the head, jo without thefe places as in h.
ii The twigs of Nerves accompanying the falival Dull. Fig. II. and III. Shew the Gland under the Tongue (called the maxil-
lar Gland ) with the Duci: that fprings from it, ( from Dr. Wharton.) A The hinder part of the Gland.
aaa The hinder roots of the falival Dull.
B The fore-part of the Gland.
bb The fore-roots ofthe f aidDull.
C The hinder Trunk of the fame Dull, climbing upon the Tendon of the don-
ble-bettjd Mufde.
D The return of the fame and its union with the Foreduli; E The common Trunk of the falival Dull. FG The double-belly d Mufcle. H The progrefi of the f aid Trunk towards the Fore-teeth of the lower jaw* |
|||||
|
X Ï tht
|
|||||
|
a g The Anatomy of an Horje.
I The opening of the falival Dull under the tip of the Tongue near the Fore-
teeth of the f aid Jaw. K The round Gland that lies by the Maxi liar. L A row or rank of a/perities (or roughneffes) under the fide of the Tongue.
M The Tcngue thrufl to one fide out of its place, that the exit of the Veffel may be f een.
N The Tonfil or Almond of the Ear. Having now gone through the firft divifion of the Body, which is into
three Venters or Regions, wherein I have principally treated of the Parts contained in them. ; it now remains that I examine the Parts wherewith the Venters themfelves are made up, laying each apart by themfelves, that their natures, differences and figures may better appear. The Parts of this nature are the Flefh and Bones, of which two it will be moft pro- per to begin with the Flelh, both becaufe it maketh the greateft part of the bulk of the Body, and alfo becaufe of its quick tendency towards pu- trefaction, whereas the Bones are of a durable nature, and fo no incon- venience will happen upon deferring the examination of them to the laft. |
||||||
|
The End of the Third Book»
|
||||||
|
THE
|
||||||
|
( '4?)
|
|||||||||
|
THE
ANATOMY
OF A N
HORSE*
|
|||||||||
|
BOOK IV.
Of the Mufcles.
|
|||||||||
|
CHAP. L
Containeth a defcription of the fever al forts of Flefh, and
an Apology for not expreffing the Mufcles fo particular- ly in Figures as I have done other Parts of the Body. IN the Firft Book Chap. 6. treating of the Mufcles of the Belly, I
affirmed that all the flejby Parts of the Body are mufcular ; which mull be underftood not of all Flejh in general, but onely of Flefh properly fo called. For there are four kinds of Flefh : Firft, that which is properly fo called, fuch as is that of the Mufcles ; fecond- ly, that of the Bowels, as of the Liver and Spleen, and the like ; thirdly, that of the Glands or Kernels ; and fourthly, membranous Flefh, fuch as is that of the Stomach, Guts, &c. The Flefh of the Mufcles is foft and ruddy, confifting of Fibres and coa-
gulated or curdled Bloud, called a Parenchyma. For the Bloud in its cir- culation as it paflèth out of the Arteries into the Veins, is extravafated out of the Arteries into the very flefhy fubftance, out of which it is not X % &
|
|||||||||
|
/
|
|||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
fo clearly imbibed or drunk up by the Veins, but that fome particles of it
adhere to the flelhy Fibres, and fill up their interftices, that is, the empty fpaces between one and another : which Bloud congealing and fixing there, does, I fay, together with the Fibres conftitute that fubflance which we properly call Flefb. As to the other Parts that ferve to conftitute a. Mufcle, as alfo of its ufe,
and the reafon of their fundry denominations, I difcourfed fo fully in the above-meÈtioned'fixthChapter òf the Firft Book, that I lhall not need to add any thing to the fame purpofe here : onely I think my felf in this place obliged to give the Reader the reafons, why I have not reprefented the Mufcles in figures particularly, as I have done other Parts of the Body, nor dare be fo confident of my exattnefs in the defcription of them; for Firft, The Mufcles are fo numerous, that to have expreft them all in
Figures would have made this Volume at leaft half as dear again as it is; as may be gìièft by the number of Copper-plates (in Folio); that Mr. Brown has reprefented the Mufcles of an Humane Body upon ; for they are near fourty, and thefe of an Horfe muft have required rather more than fewer. Secondly, Though fome knowledge of the Mufcles, efpecially the ex-
ternal ones, is necefiary that one may know in Tumours which way to make incifion (that is, lengthways of the Mufcle and not acrofc, for fear of rendring it ufelefs by cutting its nervous Fibres afunder) yet to be fo very exaft in the knowledg of all of them, is matter rather of commen- dable curiofity than real ufefulnefs. But thirdly, The chief reafon is (for I will confefs it) that I have not had
the opportunity my feif to raife and infpeci: every particular Mufcle, fo that I muft have delineated feveral of them by guefs and upon truft, whereby I mould both have betrayed my own importune vanity, and have led my Reader 'tis like into feveral Èrrours. Neither probably may my ver- bal defcription of them be truly exdl as to thofe which I have not my felf viewed : though feeing in thofe that I have infpecled, I have found fo great a fimilitude between the Mufcles of an Horfe and thofe of a Man, I hope I mall not be much wide of the truth, if I prefume of the fame Ana- logy or likenefs in thofe that I have not infpected. Now as to the likenefs of a Man's and an Horfe's Mufcles the Reader
may be pretty well fatisfied if he compare thofe of an Horfe's Belly ( de- lineated with the autopfie or felf-view of the Graver) expreft at the end of the fixth Chapter of the Firft Book, with thofe of a Man's : or take but a profpeft of the next following Figure which reprefents an Horfe, feveral of whofe Mufcles I have preferved, and after having raifed them, placed them in their feveral places again, the Horfe ftandirig up in a Prgfs with them on, juft in the fame pofture as he appears in the Figure. To thefe reafons I might add the impoflibility that moft of my Profef-
fion mould ever attain to an exacT: knowledge of them ; fo that this Book being principally defigned for their ufe, I fhould have been at a great deal of coft and more pains to no great purpofe. Now the difficulty lies in this, That rhoft of the names of the Mufcles being originally Greek, and feveral of them fuch as can no way aptly or intelligibly be rendred into Englifh ; and considering the mean education of moft Farriers, that few of them un- derftand fo much as Latin ; I fay confidering thefe things, 'ris impoflìble to defcribe them to their capacity, and therefore I have contented my |
|||||
|
Book IV. Of the Uufcles. 15 ï
felf with a more fupérficial and fuccina defcription of them. And though
for my own part I may without vain-glory pretend to a more liberal edu- cation than moft of my Profeffion, fo that the Cramp-names (aswecali them) of the Mufcles are no fuch hindrance nor difcouragement to me as they will be I fear to mod others ; yet I hope no curious and ingenious Anatomift, that knows how much time and pains is necefTary to befpent tvpon the exaa examination of any one Part, will think.me fluggift and topine; that I have not in thofe few years that I have af^Jfj? this ftudy, attained as yet to the full knowledge o all th Parts of this Beaft that I anatomize. And as on the one hand I hop1may, my felf attain to greater skill in this Art than I have yet arrived at ; fo on he other hand I would not be guilty oi the vanity of thinking o monopolize it but (hall both defire and hope that others will make up what I mall kave rZ feft But thus much I hope may ferve for mine Apology With alTLgenuous Men, I fhall therefore return from whence I have di~ grCf fecond fort of Flelh is that of the Bowels, as of the Liver, Spleen
and Kidneys, whofe fubltance hath been held to be for the greateft part pareXmous or to confrft of an affufion of Bloud congealed about the S Sough latter Anatomifts do affirm them to be for the greateft part glandulous. And to thefe hath ufed to be reckoned the Heart ; but that is of a fubftance far different from thefe, as being truly mufcular and mayXrefS!? more properly be ranked with the Mufcles, though it be by fome is called the Sweet-bread, and is fituated near the Collar-bone
ìuft within the Cheft, of which we have already treated in the Second fiook Of this fort of glandulous Fleili likewife are the Parmies or Ker- nels below the Ears, alfo theTonfils ( commonly called the Almonds of the EarsTve Y many Glands in the Mefentery and other Parts of the Bo- t To w5 may be added the Pancreas feated in the Lower Belly, 1chis ~mmSy known by the name of the Sweet-bread. Nowtheelands being fpermatical Parts, their parenchyma or flefhy
fubtae is nl fanguineous or bloudy, as that of the two former kinds of Fleflr totenStical, compofed out of the very firft rudiments of or fieni1, dul lF™ > *, thougll the Glands are many.times en- Almonds of the Ears 3"^i wiu not be able t0 fwaliow his Drink,
fweUed and fore, that "K"?™ , , ; but muft be forced to have flowing to thofe Parts, but by a flegmatiek Humour fall.ng uponttan,
,nd when the Diftemper is cured they return again to their torma: lmall Siting according^ Nature inca>e *%&&%$£& and proper to the Parts called fanguineous. To this lort 01 ncni Uay of the mi» Coat of the Gullet, Stomach, Guts, Womb and Bladder.
For though the inmoftand outermoft Coats be purety nervous ormo* b no„?ye the middle confifts of two ranks of Fabre, and a wg |
||||
|
1^2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
chyma that adheres to them, which is difcoverable particularly in the
Guts, when they are fcraped by Men that make firings for mufical In- ftruments, for then you may perceive a great deal of (limy fluff to be fcraped off them, which is this Parenchyma : For that they lofe no part of their membranous or fibrous fubftance is evident, in that their ftrength is rather increafed than diminifhed by fuch fcraping. This Coat not- withstanding it is mufcular, yet its Parenchyma differs in many regards from that of the fanguineous Mufcles, particularly in that it is fpermatical as was faid before of the Glands. Now the Parts that confift of thefe three latter forts of Flefli are all de-
fcribed in their proper places ; but thofe that confili of the firft fort, which as I have faid, is moft properly fo called, I intend to treat of in this Book which containeth the Do&rine of the Mufcles. |
|||||||
|
CHAP. IL
Of the Mufcles of the Eye-lids.
|
|||||||
|
' Aving in the fixth Chapter of the Firft Book fpoken of the feveral
Parts of which a Mufcle is compounded, and alfo of the differences and aétions of therri ; as likewife of what ufe they are in general; (to which Chapter I refer the Reader) My propofed method requires that I mould now come to fpeak to every particular of them, beginning with thofe of the Lower Belly : but having in the before-cited Chapter of the Firft Book treated particularly of them, I will in this place pafs them by, defiring the Reader to confult the faid Chapter for his fatistà&ion ; for I love not to be tedious with repetitions. The Eye-lids The next Mufcles then that we come to fpeak to according to order,
have three are the Mufcles of the Eye-lids, which are in number three to each Eye.
ITel. The firft of thefe is called Rett us or Aperiens, from its office, which is
one pair to to lift up or open the Eye lid.
open them; Tj1jg jg feate£j m tne upp£r part QC tIle orJ-,jt QC t}le £ye> ancJ fp^ngg^Jj
with a flender but flefhy beginning from the fame place as the Elevator
of the Eye doth, ( which is at the hole which the Optiek Nerve pafïês through into the orbit ) and holds the fame courfe with it, being of the fame figure and fubftance, that is, flefhy ; till at laft parting from it, with a pretty broad but thin Tendon, it is inferted into the Griftle at the edge of the upper Eye-lid, where it ferves (as hath been faid) to open the Eye lid by lifting it up. Two to flmt The two other Mufcles of the Eye-lid are called Shutters, and other- them. wifefemkircular, becaufe each runs the length of one Eye-lid : though there are fome that call them circular or orbicular, fuppofing them to be
but one Mufcle which compaflès the Eye-lid round as with a circle. But in Bodies that are very mufculous or flefhy, they have by curious Anato- mifts been plainly difcovered to be two, and that the rather, becaufe each receives diftina Nerves from different places. They lie betvrixt the car- nous Membrane and the inner fmooth Skin that lines the Eye-lids, That
|
|||||||
|
Book IV- Of the Mufcles. *53
That which draweth down or flmtteth the upper Lid is terger, and
arifeth from the inner corner of the Eye, from whence it pafleth acrois, though with a kind of an oblique line, towards the outward corner, grow- ing prefently fleihy and broad, fo that it fillet*i up all the fpace cetwixt the Eye-brow and the lowed edge of the Eye-lid, and fo at laft is inferted into the outward corner of the Eye. The lelTer of thefe two is that which moveth the lower Lid in order to
Amt it. This is rather membranous than fleihy at its origin, (being aho very thin ) and takes its rife at the inner corner of the Eye with a fliarp beginnbg as the former did : whence being carried overthwart, it pro- ceeds to the middle of the Eye-lid, where it becomesSomething fleihy and continues its courfe to the outward corner which it turns about and afcending a little to the upper Eye-lid, is with an indifferent broad end m T'neiTs'another pair of Mufcles which though not belonging properly The. «j*
toA^ycSyet ièein to contribute fomething to their motion up- Jg ** ward or opening; which therefore may leafonabh'be; defmbed m this place, and thoÌare the nufcult frocks, or Fore-head Mufcles^ Thefe arife from the Skull near the coronal Suture, and defcend with ftreight Fibres to the Eye-brows, where they terminate. By the help of thefe Mufcles the Skin of the Fore-head to which they clofely flick is contrac- ted or wrinkled, and fo by confequence the upper Eyelids a little drawn upward. |
||||||
|
CHAP. HL
Of the Mufcles of the Eye.
TO the moving of each Eye of an Horfe do belong feven Mufcles ; Jh^
though in Humane Bodies there are accounted but fix, becaufej,,., „ƒ mf_ the circular or fufpending Mufcle is faid in them to be wanting. cl«. • Of thefe feven four are ftreight, two oblique or flanting, and the
other circular or round. The ftreight ferve to move the Eyes upwards and downwards, to the right hand and to the left. The oblique move Sem^obliquely ; and the circular or round one keeps the Eye fufpended "3S* £foles have all their rife from one and the g^g^g» JR^
have alfo the fame progrefs and ftrufture, and their termination is alike. for fhey do all arife from the Membrane that inverts the Orbit of the Eye near the hole where the Optiek Nerve pafleth from the Bram into the faid Orbit touching one another at their beginning; but they immediately feparate, and in their courfe become ftill more and more bulky and fleihy till their middle, which is round and buncheth out With a kind of a bel- ly • but as they grow toward their ends or terminations they degenerate from their fleihy into a thin membranous fubftance, which is inferted into the homey Coat of the Eye, encompaffing it as far as it is white. Thefe
|
||||||
|
j sa The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Wknce they Thefe Mufcles have their feveral appellations or names from the feveral
haul their motions they perform ; as firft, The firft of the ft r eight Mufcles, from names. -ts 0£flce of pulling up the Eye, is called Attollens : The fecond is called 4fS°Dcpri. Deprimens, becaufe it is an Antagonift to the former, for as that pulls the mens. Eye up, fo this by a contrary motion pulls it down again. From which offices they have alfo in Men other two names given them by Anatomifts : the firft is called the proud, becaufe when the Eye is pulled up, a Perfon looks high and lofty or proud : and on the contrary when the Eye is pul- led down by the other Mufcle, he looks with a contrary countenance^ fubmiffive and humble, for which reafon this fecond Mufcle is called hu- milis or the humble Mufcle. Mduans. The next, being the third ftreight Mufcle, is called Adducens, becaufe it pulleth the Eye towards the Nofe. It is otherwife called Bibitorius, becàufe it performs that motion of drawing th§.Eye to the Nofe when we drink, for then we commonly look into the Pot or Glafs that is before our Nofe. Abducens. The fourth ftreight Mufcle is called Abducens or Indicatorius, from its office of drawing the Eye to the outer corner, which turn or afpect of the Eye betokens anger or fcorn. Now thefe four Mufcles have thefe four feveral motions, when they
work feverally ; but when they all four work together, they have but one action, which is to keep the Eye fteady and fixt, which Phyficians call a tonick motion : but in Beafts that have the fufpending Mufcle, the tonick motion is performed mainly, if not altogether, by that Mufcle. You have thefe four, as alfo the three other lively reprefented to you in the twenty fifth Table of the Third Book, p. i z 3. the upper ob- The next are the oblique Mufcles, being as hath been faid, in number lique Mufcle. two pa^ whicn from tnejr rolling the Eye about are called circumagen- tes. The firft of them is called obliquus major i)d fuperior (or the upper-
moft and largeft oblique Mufcle) being longer than the other, but rather flenderer. It fpringeth from the upper but inner part of the Orbit of the Eye by the hole where the Optiek Nerve comes through, ( as do all the reft. ) From hence it pailèth ftreight to the upper part of the inner cor- ner of the Eye, where it endeth in a fmall round Tendon, which pailèth through a tranfverfe Cartilage or Griftle there placed, called Trochlea (or the Pully ) and thence continued! its courfe ftantingly along the upper part of the Eye, till at laft it is inferted into the outmoft Skin of the Eye between the Tendons of the Mufcles Attollens and Abducens. This rolleth the Eye towards its inner corner. the lower ob- The fecond oblique Mufcle is called obliquus minor five inferior, or the lique Mufcle. jefs ancj ]ower oblique Mufcle, being fhorter than the other, though ra- ther thicker. This fpringeth from a chink which is in the lower part of the Orbit of the Eye, beginning with a flefhy head, from whence it af- cends with a flanting courfe towards the outward corner of the Eye, about which it turns, and then ends in a (hort roundifh and nervous Ten- don, which meets with the Tendon of the other oblique Mufcle, and feeming to unite with it, is inferted in the fame place. This rolls the Eye towards its outer comer. the orbicular The feventh Mufcle is called the orbicular or round; likewife M»finlus Mufcle. fufpenforim, the fufpenfory Mufcle ; and laftly, becaufe it is onely found in Brutes, it hath the name given it oï feptimus Br ut arum, the Brute's feventh Mufcle. It is Ihort and flelhy, encornpaffing the Optiek Nerve, and
|
||||
|
f
|
|||||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles. i5g
and is inferted into the hinder part of the Cornea. You have the figure
o{ it in the afore-mentioned twenty fifth Table of the Third Book, where- in it is removed from one Eye, but in the other it is plainly reprefentcd in fitu. The ufe of this Mufcle, as hath been faid, is to fuftain the Eye, left by looking continually down toward the ground, it fhould hang too much outward ; and by it alfo the tonick motion is performed. Having difcourfed of thefe feveral Mufcles and of their feveral afrions
and ufes, I think it very necefTary to fet down the manner of raifing them, that he that will take the pains to examine them in the Creature it felf, may the better find them, without violating of them unawares, whereby he will iofe his labour, and mifs of fatisfaftion in the inquiry after them. You mult then, after the taking the Eye and all its appurtenances clear The manner
out of the Orbit ( if you will make your difie&ion that way ; but if you ùljjff"sg<fhé Will take the pains to remove the Bones of the Orbit and not cut the Eye the Eye. ° out, it will be much better, for then you are fure to fee the Mufcles in their natural fituation : but whether you remove the Bones, or take the Eye out, you mud I fay ) make your diflè&ion on this manner : Firft, you muft with a pair of Scifters cut off the Fat and the Skins before you raife any of the Mufcles, making them as clean as you can. Then begin with them in order thus : firft raife the larger or upper oblique Mufcle, then the leflèr or lower oblique ; then the four ftreight Mufcles : but you muft onely raife the larger oblique Mufcle and not remove it, un- tili you have feen and removed the other five ; for when the others are removed, you will the plainer perceive how the Tendon of the faid Mufcle paflèth through the Pully, that is feated in the inner corner of the Eye. After you have had a full view of thefe Mufcles before named, then
mind the laft and feventh Mufcle, which ftill encompafleth the Optiek Nerve, reaching from the place where the other Mufcles had their rife, quite down to the hinder hemifphere of the Eye. |
|||||||
|
CHAP. IV.
Of the Mufcles of the Nofe.
TH E Nofe of an Horfè fo far as it is griftly, is moved feveral ways,
which motions are performed by thefe following Mufcles. Firft it is drawn together to fhut the Noftrils by the Adducent or Claudent Mufcles : and fecondly it is drawn afunder to open the Noftrils by the Abducent or Aperient Mufcles. And to the performing each motion there belong two pair of Mufcles ; fo that in all there are eight Mufcles that belong to the Nofe. I mail 'defcribe the two latter pair firft, whereof The firft pair arifes from the upper Jaw-bone, near the firft proper pair The firft p*ir
of the Lips, and is inferted partly into the lower part of the Alee, or grift- °^£cem ly circumference of the Noftrils, and partly into the upper part of the uPper Lip.
F Y The
|
|||||||
|
je^ The Anatomy of an Horje.
d The other pair begins at the top of the Nofe near the Eye, with an
f Jr. acute and flefhy beginning, whence defcending fomewhat flantingly, and in its paffège lying upon each fide of the Noie, it doth at laft end at the
Alee, as the other pair did, but with a broader and flefhier end. Each of thefe Mufcles being narrow at the beginning, and ending broad, is in fhape triangular or three-fquare, like the Greek Letter A delta, from whence it is called by fome deltoides. The ufe of this pair, as aifo of the former, is to draw the griftly circumference or wings of the Noftrils upwards, and fo to widen and open them. The firfl pair The other two pair are called the Adducent or clofing Mufcles; the c/ Adducent £rft pair 0f which is external, arifing about the root of the Griftle, and Mujc es. afcending crofs ways to the ridg or tip of the Nofe, into which it is infer- ted. This pair is more flefhy than the other, though indeed there is not much Fleili in any of the Mufcles of the Nofe, and therefore it will re- quire a very accurate Anatomift to raife any of them, and to diftinguifli them. The fecond The fecond pair of the clofing Mufcles are internal, and are hid in pah. the Cavity of the Noftrils under the inner Coat that cloaths them. Thefe are not fo flefhy as the former. They arife from the end of the Bone of
the Nofe, and fpreading into a kind of membranous fubftance, they de- fcend to the griftly circumference of the Noftrils where they termmate. The firft pair of thefe Mufcles being contra&ed deprefs the Ala or Gri-
ftles of the Nofe, and the latter pair draw them inwards, and fo clofe the- Noftrils; to which motion the orbicular or round Mufcle of the upper Lip is affiftant, for by its drawing the upper Lip downwards, it doth at the fame time conflringe or ftraiten the Noftrils. |
|||||||||||||
|
CHAP. V.
Of the Mufcles of the Lips and. Cheeks.
|
|||||||||||||
|
T
|
O the Lips do belong feveral pair of Mufcles, fome of which are
proper to the Lips alone, and others are common both to the Cheeks |
||||||||||||
|
and Lips.
the firfl com. The common are on each fide of the Face two. The firft of which is
mn Thk' ca^ec* detrahens quadratus, or the four-fquare drawers afide of the Cheeks fourfquare ano" Lips. This fhews more like a Skin than a Mufcle, being broad and Mtfde. thin, onely it is interlaced with flefliy Fibres, which makes it to be ac- counted a Mufcle. It arifes from one of the Vertebres of the Neck on its outfide, as alfo
from the Shoulder-blade, the Collar-bone and Breaft-bone, from whence
it afcends with oblique or flaming Fibres up to the Chin, Lips, and root
of the Nofe ; which Parts it draws downwards with a flanting motion.
the fecmd The fecond common Mufcle of the Cheeks and Lips, is called in Hu-
dTtdSSf'mane B°dies Buccinator the Trumpeter, becaufe in blowing a Trumpet
the Trum- ^e main ftrefs lies upon this Mufcle ; though others derive that name
peter. from Bucca the Cheek, becaufe it is the moft considerable Mufcle of it,
and
|
|||||||||||||
|
5ook IV. Of the Mufcles. i$y
and on this account it may retain the fame name in an Horfe : òr it
may be called the Contratto, from its adion, which is to contrad the Cheek. It fprings from almoft the whole length of the upper Jaw-bone, and is
inferted into the whole length of the lower, at the root of the Gums. It is thin and membranous, and interlaced with divers Fibres running fun- dry ways ; and hath the inner Coat of the Mouth fo clofely and firmly adhering to it, that it is fcarce feparable from it. This Mufcle is feated under the upper part of the former, and is fpread over the whole dimen- fion of the Cheek. Its ufe in Horfes and other Brutes is to be as a Hand to help the Mouth
irt its chewing motion ; for as the Meat in chewing falls on the outfide of the Teeth, betwixt them and the Cheek, this Mufcle helps to turn it over the Teeth again, that it may be fufficiently broken and ground, and made thereby the readier for concoction when it is turned down to the Stomach. * Befides this office of aflifting in chewing, it doth ferve alfo at other
time's upon any occafion to move the Cheeks and Lips. Next come we to the Mufcles that are proper to the Lips onely, and He firft pn-
thofe are by Anatomifts accounted five pair and one odd one. The firft ^JJ^ ƒ of them is called par Attollens, or Lifters up of the Lip. This pair fpring the Lift, cat- from the upper Jaw, where it makes the hollow of the Cheek. At theirled Par At" rife they are broad and flefliy, from thence paffing down obliquely along the Cheeks, each of them is inferted into its own fide of the upper Lip, near the Nofe. The ufe of thefe Mufcles, if they both of them aft toge- ther, is to draw the upper Lip dire&ly upwards and outwards ; but if onely one ads, then is but one fide of the Lip drawn upward oblique- ly. You may plainly fee thefe Mufcles work, if.you take notice of a Ston'd Horfe after he hath fmelt to a Mare ; for then he will moli times hold up his Head in the Air, and turn up his upper Lip till he hath almoft turned it infide outwards. And the like you may fee many Horfes doe, if you onely let them fmell to another Horfe's Dung. The fecond pair is called Alducens, the Drawers of the Lip on one fide. The fecondi
This arifes at the Cavity that is under the Os jugale with a ileihy and round pa^,^ed beginning, which is cover'd with fome Fat, efpecially in fat Horfes;ccn». from whence they run down on each fide to the middle of the upper Lip, into which they are inferted with a ftrong round Tendon. Thefe jointly move the Lips upwards and outwards as the former did, aflifting them in their motion ; and when either of them a&s fingly, then it affifts the a&ion of one of the former that is on its own fide, and helps to draw the Lip upwards of one fide. The third pair is called by Riolanus, Zugomaticum or Jugale, from its The third
rife, which is outwardly from the procefs of the Os jugale. At their be- gj^jjf' ginning they are fleihy and fomewhat round, and running downward a cul?mau" little overthwart the Cheeks they reach at laft to the fides of the upper Lip, where they are inferted near the corner of the Mouth. The ufe of this pair is to draw the Lip upwards fideways. The fourth pair is called Depnmetts, or the Drawers down of the lower The fourth
Lip. Thefe arife flefhy and broad from the lowermoft and out wardrrioft f'f' .Jjjjjj part of the Lower Mandible ; from whence each marches obliquely tö the under Lip, into which they are inferted about the middle of it. The Vfe of this pair is to draw the under Lip downwards and fomewhat out- Y % wards*
|
||||
|
Ie;8 The Anatomy of an Horfe,
wards. So that it joineth in the fame action with the firfl pair of thé
common Mufcles called Detrahens quadratus.
the fifth The fifth pair is called Oblique detrahens, from their office, which is
obli' uf'dit0 draw ^ i°wer Lip obliquely downwards and outwards. They take
traheï e* their beginning from the fides of the lower Jaw, where they rife with a
fïeftiy and broad head ; from whence they afcend upwards, growing in
their paflàge fomething narrower, and are each inferted into the corners
of the lower Lip. The ufe of this pair is, as hath been faid, to draw the
lower Lip obliquely downwards and outwards.
ne odd Muf- In the next place we come to the odd Mufcle, called Orbicularis, or
de, called orbicular, becaufe it goes round the circuit of both the Lips. It is alfo
or icu ans. ca]|e j Conftringens, becaufe it ferves as it were for a Sphincter Mufcle to
purfe up or contract the Lips. Befides thefe names it has in Men that of
Ofiulatorius, the Killing Mufcle, becaufe it contracts or draws the Lips
together in killing. It flicks very clofe to the Skin of the Lips, and
makes up the greateft part of their fubftance.
|
||||||
|
CHAP. VI.
Of the Mufcles of the lower Jaw.
TH E upper Jaw being immoveable hath no Mufcles, there being no
occafion for them where there is no motion, which is their onely ufe. But the lower Jaw which hath motions of divers forts, doth require divers forts of Mufcles to perform them. Now thefe Mufcles are in num- ber five pair. jhe firfl pah The firfi pair of thefe Mufcles is called the Temporal, becaufe they OeTl" are feated uPon tne Temples. They fpring on each fide from the Bones Temporal, of the Brow or Fore-head, the Synciput, Temples and Wedge-like Bone. They are the ftrongeft and largeft of all the five pair. Their beginning is flefhy, large and femicircular, their infide lying upon the Periofieum, and their outfide covered with the Pericranium. They defcend under the Osjugale to the acute Procefs of the lower Jaw, into which they are in- ferted by a fliort but very ftrong Tendon. Thefe Mufcles with great force pull up the lower Jaw, and fo fhut the Mouth. ne fecond The fecond pair hath the name of Deprimem, becaufe they pull down pah, called tne Jaw. They are alfo from their fhape, having as it were two bellies, Deprimere. cajjecj biventre. Thefe being aflifted by the quadrati, which were de- fcribed in the foregoing Chapter ( being one of the pairs that are common to the Cheeks and Lips ) pull down the Jaw, and fo open the Mouth. They arife with a broad and nervous beginning from the Procefs of the Temple-bone called Styloides, and fuddenly becoming round, flefby and finali, they pafs downwards, and in their middle where they come to the flexure of the lower Jaw-bone, they lofe their flefhy fubftance and Re- generate into a nervous and round Tendon, and then becoming defhy again they are inferted into the inner fide of the lower Jaw at the middle or fore-part of it. The
|
||||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles. lSp
The third'pair is called Majfeteres, becaufe they are very affiftant jhe third
in the office of chewing, by moving the Jaw to the right and left fide. p*ir> called Each hath two beginnings : the firlt is large, ftrong and nervous, arifing Maffeteres- from that Suture where thé fourth and firft Bone of the upper Jaw are joined ; the other beginning is fleihy, fprifiging from the Os jugale. They arer firmly and largely inferted into the outfide of the lower Jaw. Thefe Mufcles, by reafon of their diverfity of Fibres, move the nether Jaw both forwards/ backwards and to the fides, and fo in a manner cir- |
||||||||||
|
The fourth pair are called Pterygoideam externum, as if they refembled The fourth ,
a pair of Wings. Thefe like the former have alfo a double beginning, £*"> ca!l*d partly nervous, and partly flefliy. They fpring partly from the upper um^xwr!" and outward fide of the Wing-like Procefs of the Wedge like Bone, andnnm' partly from the rough and lharp line of the fame Bone, from whence they march down with ftreight Fibres, becoming in their courfe larger and thicker, till they come to the lateral part of the lower Jaw, into whofe infide they are inferted with a ftrong Tendon. The ufe of this pair of Mufcles is to open the Jaw and move it forward, which appeareth when the Teeth of the lower Jaw are ftretched farther out than thofe of the upper. The fifth and laft pair of Mufcles of the lower Jaw ire called Vterygoi- the gth
deum internum. Thefe arife with a nervous beginning from the inner fide £"r> C"/M or cavity of the Wedge-like Bone, at its wing-Jike Procefs ,• then becom- um mter-T ing fleihy, large and thick, they march down with a ftreight pailàge to nnm' the inner and hinder part of the lower Jaw, where they are inferted by a nervous, broad and ftrong Tendon. The ufe of thefe Mufcles is to draw the Jaw towards its head or backwards ; and alfo to help the Tem- poral Mufcle to draw the Jaw up. |
||||||||||
|
CHAP. VII.
Of the Mufcles of the Ran
TH E Mufcles of the Ears in Brutes ( efpecially fuch as have large
Ears, asHorfes, Afles, Oxen, Hares, f&c.) differ much in mag- nitude from thofe of Men, in whom they are fo very fmall, that Galen calls them, the lineaments of Mufcles. The reafon of which is, that in Man the Ears are mod commonly immoveable, (though there have been fome that could move them) and therefore to have large Mufcles were needlefs ; and yet to have none at all, would look like a defect in the inoft perfect of all Animals. But though Man cannot move his Ears, yet is that no prejudice to his hearing ; for thè want of that motion is reconv penced by the eafie and fpeedy motions of his Head, whereby he can turn it on every fide to receive the founds ; whereas four-footed Beafts, that have the motions of their Heads not fo nimble, have need to have their Ears always moveable every way, to receive the founds from every fide : and their mpveablenefs has alfo a further ufe, to wit, to drive away f lite
|
||||||||||
|
■
: |
||||||||||
|
i éö The Anatomy of an Hor je.
Flies and other Infecïs that are troublefome to the Béafl:, which Meri
can doe with their Hands. The External The Ear we divided, in the former Book, into the Outward and Jh- %mkitVm voar^- T*ie 0uWar^ C°f which we have been difcourfing thus far in this Chapter) has four Mufcles ; and thefe are thofe which are fo much lar- ger in Brutes than Men. The Inward Ear has two, which are of a pro- portionable largenefs in both. r. The lifter The firft of thefe we come to treat of is the firfi of the Outward Ear, up of the Ear. wh^jj g0es j^ tfe naQle Qf Attolkns Aurem, the lifter or puller up of the Ear. This arifes at the outfide of the Frontal or Forehead Mufcle, and at its rife is thin and membranous; from whence being carried over the Temporal Mufcle, and growing in its courfe fomething narrower, it doth at laft infert it felt' into the upper part of the Ear, moving it up- wards and forwards. 2. the puller The fecond is called Detrahens Aurem, or the puller back of the Ear.
back of the This Mufcle arifes from the Mammillary Procefs with a fleihy, broad and fibrous head ; and lb growing narrower in its progrefs is at length in-
ferted into the root of the Griftle of the Ear, fometimes by two, fome- times by three Tendons. The ufe of this Mufcle is to draw the Ear back- wards and fomewhat upwards. 3. Adducens The third is called Adducens Aurem, by which the Ear is drawn for-
Aurem. wards and fomewhat downwards. This is faid to be bat a part of the mufculus quadratus before fpoken of in the fifth Chapter of this Book, be-
ing one of the common Mufcles of the Cheeks and Lips. This Mufcle afcending with its Fibres is implanted into the lower fide of the root of the Ear. 4. Abducens The fourth is called Ahducens Aurem, becaufe it draws or pulls the Ear
Aurem. backwards. This takes its beginning at the Occiput or back-part of the Head from the Coat that cloaths thofe Mufcles that belong to that part,
Where it is at firft fomething narrow, but afterward waxing broader it is carried tranfverfly to the hinder part of the Ear, into which it is inferted. This àfiìfts the fecond in its action, having fometimes two, and fometimes three Tendons as that has. The inward The next are the two Mufcles of the Inner Ear ( called Auris, as the Ear hath Outward'Ear is called Auricula) the firft of which is called Ext emus Tym- T"he Ex- Pant Auris, or the external Mufcle of the Drum of the Ear, becaufe it nmai. moves the Membrane of the Ear fo called upwards and outwards. This is thin but broad at its rife, which is from the upper part of the paflàge of the Ear ; then becoming narrower it grows into a very fine and fmall Tendon, which is carried on the outfide of the Tympanum till it arrive at its centre or middle into which it is inferted, where on the infide of this Tym- panum the little Bone called the Hammer fticketh, which with the Mem- brane or Tympanum this Mufcle draweth a little outward and upward. This Mufcle as alfo the next are very fmall, there being fcarce any in the whole Body again fo fmall as they are ; and therefore it will require great skill to raifethem without violating of them. To prevent which the un- dertaker is to open with great care the Os petrofum which is to be done on that fide which is next to the Temples, taking out the pieces of Bones by degrees that thefe Mufcles may receive no prejudice. It is left to the difcretion of the Difïèftor whether he will remove the Bones' with a Chif- fel, or Saw, or by filing, fo he doe it carefully, |
|||||
|
The
|
|||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles, 16'1
The fecond is called Internus, and hath its origination from the bottom 2. the inter.
of the Os cuneiforme or Wedge-like Bone, there where it is joined withnal- the Procejfus petrofus. It is feated inwardly in the Cavity of the Os petro- fum, being flefhy at its beginning, yet thin and fmall.- at its middle it is divided into two very fmall and very thin Tendons, whereof one is in- ferted into the upper Procefs of the Malleus or Hammer, and the other into the neck of it. The ufe of this Mufcle, alone, is to draw the head of the . Hammer obliquely forwards, and alfo to draw it fomewhat inwards : but when thefe two a£t both together, they move the Tympanum with its fmall Bones upwards and downwards, which is done when the Horfe would carefully liften or harken to any approaching noife. |
||||||
|
CHAP. VIIL
Of the Mufcles of the Tongue*
TH E Tongue in Brutes hath but two principal ufes, <vie. to tafte the
Food, and to rowl it up and down the Mouth : but in Men it has a third ufe which isto be the main inftrument of Speech.Yet notwithstanding there are' as many Mufcles that belong to it in Brutes as there do in Men ; for in fome regard it has a further ufe in them than in Men, feeing it does not onely tafte and rowl about the Meat, but it ferves alfo to gather it into the Mouth ; for that they doe with their Tongue, becaufe they have not the help of Hands as we have. Wherefore that the Tongue might perform all thefe offices, it was neceflàry it mould be furniihed with va- riety of Mufcles, to make it capable of being moved every way, out- ward and inward, upward and downward, and fideways. And left in undergoing thefe motions it mould be made to reach farther than is necef- fary, Nature hath reftrained it with a ftrong Ligament underneath, which in Men is called the Fraznum or Bridle of' the Tongue. The Tongue therefore hath five pair of Mufcles proper to it felf, befides the tongue
thofe that are common to it and the Os hjoides, of which in the following ]«thff™Jak Chapter. m . Mufcles.
The firfi pair proper to it is called Genioglqffum (or the Chin-tongue 1. Gcnio-
pair) fo called becaufe their rife is from the Chin, and their infertion into gioffum. the Tongue. This name is proper enough in Men who have Chins, but agrees not fo well with them in Horfes (or other Brutes) in whom we call all that part below the Teeth, the lower Jaw, not diftinguifliing any part of it by the name of the Chin. But notwithstanding I ihall defcribe them by that name, becaufe it would be too tedious and too bold an un- dertaking for me to invent new names for this as well as for others that are in Brutes as improperly called by fuch names as this pair is ; leaving fuch an attempt to thofe that have both more leifure, and that make a greater figure in the Anatomical Province. This pair arife from the ruggednefs which is in the middle of the lower
Jaw before, in the inner and lower part of it. In their progrefs they are faid to have feveral fuch infcriptions as the ftreight Mufcles of the Paunch
|
||||||
|
j £2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Paunch have, as if each confifted of feveral Mufcles ; however that be,
they reach to the middle of the Tongue where they are inferred into its lower fide. Their ufe is to move the Tongue forwards, towards the Fore- teeth, and many times out of the Mouth, that is, when the Beaft gathers in his Meat, a. Hypfito- The fecond pair is called Hypfilogloffum, ( which word fliould be writ gioflum. without an H, feeing they have this name becaufe they rife from the bot- tom of the Os hyoides, which is otherwife called Tpfiloides,) from its re- fembling in ihape the Greek Letter v ( Tpfilon. ) They end in the middle of the Tongue, and have an aftion contrary to the former ; for as thofe mov'd the Tongue outward, fo thefe move it ftreight inward or back- ward. ?. Mylogiof- The third pair is called Myloglojfum, from the places of its rife and in- funi, fertion ; for they arife from the inner part of the lower Jaw,, at the roots of thefartheft grinding Teeth, and are inferred into the Ligament by which the Tongue is tied to the fauces or Jaws. If this pair work toge- ther, they draw the Tongue downwards; but if onely one of them work, then it draws the Tongue obliquely to its own fide. 4. cerato- The fourth pair is called Ceratogloffum, becaufe they arife from the
gloffunt. horns ot the Os hyoides, and reaching from thence to the fides of the Tongue are there inferted into it. If one of thefe work alone, it draws
the Tongue afknt to either the right or left fide ; but if both work to- gether, they draw the Tongue downwards and inwards. 5. Scyloglof- The fifth and laft pair ot Mufcles proper to the Tongue are called Sty.
film. logloffum, becaufe they arife from the Styloides (or Pen-like) Procefs of the Temple-bones, being fleihy at their beginning, though very fmall and
iharp ; but afterwards becoming broader and thicker, they run to the fides of the Tongue, into which they are inferred about the middle of its length. If either of thefe Mufcles move fmgly, the Tongue is drawn to the right, or left fide ; but if both aft together, they pull the Tongue upwards and inwards. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
Book IV, Of the Mufcles,
|
|||||||||
|
163
|
|||||||||
|
CHAP. IX.
|
|||||||||
|
Of the Mufcks of the Bone of the Tongue, called Os
hyoides. THE Mufcles of the Cheeks and Tongue ferving to tofs the Meat ite öshyoï.
to and again in the Mouth, and thofe of the lower Jaw helping to «fc« batkfw chew or grind it ; after it is fufficiently minced, it wants afterward to be pa'r' fwallowed and to be tranfmitted into the Stomach. Now none of the fore- laid Mufcles contribute anything thereto, therefore it was neceflàry there fhould be others appropriated thereto, which by moving diverfly the root of the Tongue might make way for the morfei to defcend into the Gul- let. Such are thofe that are common to the Tongue and the Bone called hyoides that is faflen'd to its root or bafis, which are in number four pair. The jirft pair is called Sternohyoideum, becaufe they fpring from the 1. Scernohy.
upper but inner part of the Sternum or Breaft-bone ( with a broad and oidcum? fleihy beginning ) and afcending under the Skin of the Neck by the Wind-pipe ( ftill keeping the fame largenefs and fubftance) are at length inferted into the root or bottom of the Os hyoides, which they move downward and backward. The fecond pair is oppofite to the former, and is called Geniohyoideum. 2. Geniof]y.
Thefe are large, fhort and flefhy all over, and arife with Fibres of a divers oi'deum. " courfe, from the infide of the fore-part of the lower Jaw (called in Men the Chin ) and are inferted into the middle part of the Bone hyoides, which they draw ftreight upwards and a little forwards. The third pair is called Coracohyoideum. Thefe are flender, but ftrong, g. corao*
and long ; yea confidering the flendernefs of them, they are the longeft tyoMemn. Mufcles of the whole Body. They arife out of the Procefs called Coracoi- des at the upper end of the Shoulder-blade near the Neck, and run ob- liquely upward under the firfl pair of Mufcles of the Head called Maftoi- deum, where they lofe their flefliy fubftance, as giving way to the other that are more worthy and confyierable than themfelves, and degenerate each into a nervous and round Tendon for fome time ; but fo foon as they are paft thefe Mufcles, they become mufculous again, and fo conti- nue till they reach to the Os hyoides, into whofe horns they are inferted. Thefe becaufe of their two bellies are by fome called Digaftricks. Their uje is to pull the Os hyoides obliquely downwards. The fourth and laft pair of Mufcles of the Os hyoides is called Styloce- 4,
Styloce^
ratohyoideum. Thefe arife from the root of the Appendix or Procefs cal- ^ohyoide-!
led Styloides, and end in the horns of Os hyoides. They move the Bone obliquely upwards. I hope the Englifh Reader will pardon me for not tranflating the names
of thefe Mufcles, for it is impoffible for any Man to doe it, feeing our Englilh Tongue is not capable of fuch compofitions as the Greek admits of, from whence thefe names are borrowed : but he will fee the reafons of the names, if he obferve but the parts from whence the Mufcles are faid to rife, and into which they are inferted, in the defcription of them. |
|||||||||
|
Z CHAP.
|
|||||||||
|
164 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
C.H A P. X.
Of the Mufcles of the Larynx or Throttle.
ihe Larynx 'T"""* HE Larynx in Mankind is the main inftrument in modulating or
hath wo $ah f^ forming the Voice, fo as to make the tone high or low, &c. And Sfik^vL though few Beafts can alter their tones with that variety that a Man can, yet have they the fame number of Mufcles to move the feveral GrifUes whereof the Larynx is compofed. Now its Mufcles are either proper, or common. The common are thofe that are implanted into the Larynx, but arife not therefrom ; and the proper are thofe that both arife and end in the Larynx. The common are four, and the proper nine. t. stemo- The firfl of the common pair is called Sternothyreoideum, and by fome «hyrcoide- Bronchium, or the Weazand-mufcles. Thefe arife with a fleihy and broad beginning from the upper and inner part of the Sternum or Breaft-bone at the very Throat, afcending with right or ftreight Fibres up by the fides of the Wind-pipe, continuing the fame largenefs and fubftance till they reach to the Cartilago thyreoides, or Shield- fafhioned Griftle, into which they are inferted. Their ufe is to draw down the faid Griftle, and fo to widen the Chink as fome Authours think ; though others are of opinion that fuch drawing of it down, ferves to ftraiten the Chink. %. Hyothy- The fecond pair is called Hyothyreoideum. Thefe arife from the lower seoïdeusn. fIcje of the Bone hyoides, having a broad and flefhy beginning ; from whence defcending with ftreight Fibres they are inferted into the Cartila- go thyreoides ; by lifting which upwards they are faid to ftraiten the Chink of the Larynx ; though fome on the contrary affirm that they widen it. and four pair Next come we to the proper Mufcles of the Larynx, the firJl pair of Pr°Pcr on" which is called Crkothyreoideum antkum, becaufe they take their begin- on?, viz. ning from the fore-part of the Ring-fafhioned Griftle called Crkoides, and i. cricothy- proceed obliquely to theShield-fafhioned Griftle or Thyreoides, into whole reoideum. ^e$ ^y are imp]anted. The ufe of this,pair of Mufcles is to move the Shield-fafhioned Griftle or Thyreoides obliquely downwards, and by that means to open the glottis or Chink of the Larynx. 2. cricoary. The fecond of the proper pairs of Mufcles of the Larynx are called Cri-
* ofticurn!" coarytamideum poflkum. Thefe contrary to the former arife from the po lower and hack-part of the Ring-fafhioned Griftle, and running upward with ftreight Fibres are inferted with a nervous end into the lower fide of
the Arytanoides or Ewer-like Griftle, which it pulls upward and back- ward, and thereby opens and widens the Larynx. 3. Cricoary- The third pair is called Cricoarytanoìdeum laterale, becaufe they are
ïter!deiun featec* at ^ fées of *he former Pain They arife from the fides of the
Anulary or Ring-fafhioned Cartilage fomewhat (lender; from whence proceeding directly upwards, and becoming more large and flefhy, they come to the Arytanoides, into the fides of which they are implanted in that part that the foregoing pair did not cover. The ufe of this pair is t(i open the Larynx by drawing the Griftles obliquely afide. |
|||||
|
The
|
|||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles. 165
The fourth pair is called Thyreoarytanoideum. Thefe are the largeft 4. Thyreoa
and ftrongeft of all the proper Mufcles of the Larynx, yea almoft equal rytxnoide- to all the reft put together. They arife clofe one to the other from theUD1, inner hollow and middle part of the Thyreoides or Shield-fafhioned Griftle, whofe inner Cavity they fill through the whole length of it, and with oblique Fibres they afcend upward, growing narrower in their afcent, till they come to their infertion into the fides of the Ewer-like Griftle. Thefe are the Mufcles that are principally affèfted in Humane Bodies when they are in the greateft danger from that Difeafe called the Squi- nancy or Quinfie. For when thefe Mufcles are inflamed, they fwell in- wards into the Throttle, and make the Cavity thereof fo ftrait, that the Patient cannot fetch his breath, but is ftrangled. The fifth and laft is reckoned but for one fingle Mufcle, and is called $■ ne M»p.
Arytcenoides, alfo Claudens fecundum,/or the fecond Shutting-mufcle. ?(? 5Arytamo' They take their rife from the hinder line of the Ewer-like Griftle or Ary- tcenoides from whence it hath its name. It is very fmall but flefhy, and running with tranfverfe Fibres, it is inferted into the fides of the fame Griftle, which it helps to conftringe or draw both its fides together, and fo flraitens the Throttle. The Epiglottis or Throat-flap, that covers the Chink of the Larynx
has no difcernible Mufcles in Man, nor I believe in an Horfe : but in Cattle, Sheep, &c. that chew the Cud, it is faid to have evident ones ; fome of which fpring from the Os hyoides, and are inferted into the bafis of the Epiglottis,, which they lift up ; and others are placed between the Coat and Griftle of the Epiglottis, helping it to ftiut the Larynx. |
||||||
|
C H A P. XL
Of the Mufcles of the Uvula and Throat.
TH E Vvula is faid to have two Mufcles to hold it up, one of which The Uvula
is called Pterygoflaphilinus externus. This fpringeth from the upper JSJZ*' Jaw a little beyond the furthermoft Grinder, and is inferted into the 1. Pterygo- Vvula. . £82?"
The fecond is called Pterygoflaphilinus intemus. This proceeds from 2. pterygo„
the lower part of the inner Wing of the Procefs Tterygoides (or Wing- ggjjj» like) and is inferted in like manner as the former into the Vvula. This is the defcription that Anatomifts commonly give of thefe two
Mufcles ; but it may be queftion'd whether they are any more than ima- ginary ones ; for feeing the Vvula has no apparent voluntary motion, it feems to have no occafion for any Mufcles. Next to the Mufcles of the Vvula come thofe of the Throat ( or the be- The Pharynx
ginning of the Gullet called Pharynx ) to be treated of, to which belong %h(£.en feven Mufcles, that is, three pair and a Sphincter. The firfl of the pairs u r*rSphc- is called Sphenopharyngaum. Thefe arife thin and nervous from the Ap-"°£.ryn" pendix of the Wedgelike-bone, defcending by the inward Cavity of its Z 1 " Wing-
|
||||||
|
166 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Wing-like Proceffès, and are inferted into the lateral parts of the Palate
and Pharynx, which they widen in fwallowing. 2. cephalo- The next pair is called Cephalopharyngaum. Thefe fpring from that piiarynga:- part wkere the Head is joined to the firft Vertebra of the Neck, from whence they defcend to the Pharynx, into which they are fpread with a large plexus of Fibres, which feemeth to make its Membrane. The ac- tion of this pair is contrary to the former ; for as thofe widen the Pha- rynx to let the nquriihment defcend into the Gullet, fo thefe ftraiten it when the Food is paft by it, and thereby fqueeze the Food down the Gullet. |. Styloplu- The third pair is called Stylopharyngàum. Thefe arife with a fmall i yngmm. beginning from the inner part of the Styloides Procefs of the Temple-bone, and defcending with a thin body are inferted into the fides of the Pharynx which they dilate or widen. 4. The Muf- The lofi of thefe Mufcles is that which hath no fellow, and is called Oe- de octyhi.j-yhagzaus, or the Sphin&er of the Gullet. This arifes at one fide of the Thyreoides, or Shield-falhioned Griftle, and is inferted into the other fide of the fame, wholly encompaffing in its courfe both the fore and back part of the Gullet, in the fame manner as the Sphincters of the Anus and Bladder do thofe Parts, ferving here for the fame ufe, viz. to draw or purfe in the mouth of the Gullet, as thofe do the Arfe and Bladder. Now though I have the warrant of feveral Authours in defcribing of thisMufcle laft of the feven, yet there be others that treat fìrft of it, and reckon it the firftMufcle of the Throat, faying, that if you firft raife this, the two next before-mentioned pairs, namely, the Stylopharyngceum and the Ce~ phalopharyngceum, may be the better found. Two pair of Having done with the Mufcles of the Z/vula and Throat, as alfo with Mufdes kte- all the Mufcles of the inward and outward Parts of the Mouth- and Chaps, % 'SShr* according as they are treated of by the Ancient and Modern Anatomizers cioune, vfe. of thefe Parts ; it remains now that I ihould defcend to the Mufcles of the Head and Neck, and fo to the inferiour Parts ; but before I depart quite from hence, I think it neceflary to give the Reader an account of two pair of Mufcles more, which belong to the Palate of the Mouth, never treated of by any Anatomift yet, fave Mr. Brown, who in his Book of the Mufcles lately fet forth, gives the firft account of them, at the defire of the difcoverer of them, which was the moft ingenious Do&or Croune now living, and. at this time Le&urer at Chirurgeons Hall in London. This worthy and learned Difcoverer hath given them thefe names fol-
lowing ; the firft he calls Mufculi Pterygo-palatini, and the other Spheno- palatine Pterygo-pa- This defcription hath he alfo given of them, viz. The firft or Pterygo- latini, and palatini are feated in the lower part of the Cavity of the Wing-like Pro- cefìès of the Wedge-like Bone, and terminate about the Gianduia palati with their Tendons, which run upon part of the fore-mentioned Procef- fes, as on two Trochlea: or Pullies. The -ufe of this pair is to deprefs the before-named Gland of the Palate and the Vvula. spheno-pa. The latter of them, which he calls Spheno-palatini, have an ufe con- latini. trary to ^g former> i#fe to lift up the fore-mentioned Gland and Vvula. Their rife is from the Os fphenoides or Wedge-like Bone, and their inser- tion ( with a broader Tendon than the former) into the fides of the be- fore-mentioned Gland and Vvula. It is believed from the fituation and ac- tion of this laft pair of Mufcles, that when the Rheum that had fwelled the Gland
|
|||||
|
/
|
|||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles, i^7
Gland and relaxt the tfvuU, is drained away, thefe Mufcles help to re-
duce the Z/vula to its proper and natural fituation; thougn to me it feems, that its own contracting of it felf is fufficient* |
||||||||
|
CHAP. XII.
Of the Mufcles of the Head.
|
||||||||
|
TH E Mufcles of the Head are either proper or common The com- m «£
^arfthofe which primarily move the Neck,and the Head one- J ^ I f nf which in the next Chapter ; for according to order the paa }M^k!. fnely, the Neck at that time remaining unmoved, the number of which
areTh?S v^IàMaftoideum (which pair fome Authours indeed ,. Maftoid,
reckon for the eighth or laft pair, and the Splendor the firfl: ; but be- «•>• Lg wHling to follow the moreVodern Writers I will begin with the Ma- floideum ^^„^^JSrfti^, having each a double be-
r^^^^^^^j^^^ befng altogether ner-
SmmnfrJdXe ote from the Collar-bone, which is fleihy. From thefe
V° ' 11w ffrend obliquely upwards by the Neck, till they come to
^bone,inPto which each is g^^g^gSZj '
both thefe Mufcles work togethe^ then they be ^ B^ a °r doWrnrOf all'ffi^r tto ^ onelythis that bend the Head
to one fide. Of all the^eignu p fore-part of the Neck ; for all back, or elfe to one fide. , of the Head) is called £/>/<?-a. spkniut».
The W pair (orJfJ*S
»«W*, Thefe are long and ^ ning ; from whence ^fendon. The 4 of thefe, if both of them
end withabroad and fldhy^ backward; but if either of adì together, is to draw uw , fide<
them ad fingly, then ?n^£Si bS of the Head) is called ,comp,e.
The riiftj pair, ( being ™™fj^mkk feems t0 confift of three «
Complexum or Trtgemnur», becaule eacn i iu tranfverfe Procefs for it arifes with three heads; ; one f £^^^fiU the Aft
of the fourth and fifth f^rft^rf Ite Uid^t^c and fecond of the fame, and the third froml theridge ^ „*„ of the Neck : all which unmng into one body^ upward as far as to the Ocaputc* f^^oil.hone> at the root 5 fleOiy and broad) and are *J*^^£ and fometimes by a triple the MammiUary Procefs, fometimes oy out, j r Tendon, .. The
|
||||||||
|
i68 The Anatomy of an Hor (e.
Parvum The third puller back of the Head, or fourth pair, is called parvum &
& mffum. craffum, becaufe they are.fmall and thick. Thefe are fituated under the for- mer, arifing from the tranfverfe Proceffes of the fix uppermofl Vertebra? of the Neck, _ with a nervous beginning ; but afterward becoming fleihy, they are carried obliquely upward, and are inferted into the hindermoft root of the Procerus MammiOaris. Their ufe is, if they aft both toge* ther, to bring the Head lightly backwards ; and if but one act, then to bring it backward to one fide. 5. Reaum The fifth pair is called Retfum majus or the greater right pair, being
ma'u5- fmalJ, fleihy and /lender, and arifing from the tip of the Spine or ridge of the fecond Verteira of the Neck, where they touch one another ; but
prefently part, and afcending both upward, end with a round Tendon in the middle of the Noll-bone or Occiput. The action of this pair is the fame as of the former. 6. Reöum The fixth pair ( being the fifth of the pullers back ) is called Rettum
minus. minus, or the iefìèr right pair. Their fituation is juft under the former pair, as it were concealed, and are of the like fubftance, form and pro-
grefs. They arife clofe together from the back-part of the firft Vertebra of the Neck where the Bone fhould have ended in a Spine, but that Spine is wanting becaufe it would have offended the former pair of Mufcles that fpring from the fecond Vertebra and march over this. Prefently after their original they part, and afcend upwards, and on either fide are im- planted into the Noll-bone. The ufe of thefe is to aflift the motion of the two foregoing pair. Now the reafon why there are fo many Mufcles appointed to move the Head backward, and but one pair forward, is be- caufe the Head by reafon of its great bulk and weight, is prone enough of it felf to incline forward or downward ; but it requireth a great force to move it upward or backward. .7. obliquum The f event h pair is called Obliquum fuperius, or the upper Oblique
fuperius. pajr# xhefe are feated under the right or {freight pairs, and are like them
in form and fubftance. They are fmall, arifing out of the middle of the Occiput at the outfide of the flreight pairs, from whence they defcend downwards, and are inferted into the tips of the tranfverfe Procefïès of the firft Vertebra of the Neck, the right-hand Mufcle into the right Pro- cefs, and the left into the left. The ufe of thefe, if they both act toge- ther, is to nodd the Head gently directly backwards. 8. obliquum The eighth pair is called Obliquum inferius, or the lower Oblique pair.
inferius. Thefe arife from the Spine or ridge of the fecond Vertebra of the Neck,
from whence running obliquely upwards, they end at the tranfverfe Pro- cefïès of the firft Vertebra of the Neck. They are longifh, round and flefhy, and make (as do alfo the former) a Triangle of equal fides. The ufe of this pair is to move the Head as it were femicircularly, (for
it cannot be moved quite round ) the firft Vertebra turning upon the Tooth-like Procefs of the fecond : but this motion is performed, when one of them onely acts at a time ; for if both of them move or act toge- ther, then they either keep the Head fteady ( as fome Authours con- ceive) or elfe draw it a very little backwards. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
Book IV, Of the Mufcles, i6>
i
CHA P. XIII.
Of the [Mufcles of the Neck- THE Head is not onely moved by improper Mufcles mentioned in **»%*.
the laft Chapter, primarily ; but fecondanly alio by other Muf- Head ani cles belonging to the Neck, which are in number eight, on each fide four, Neck, are
by the help of which the Neck is fometimes bent forward, other times >mrim' extended backward ; it is alfo fometimes drawn to one fide, and fome- times to the other : but there are more Mufcles to draw it backwards than either forwards or to one fide, becaufe the labour is greater by rea- fon of the weight of the Head and Neck ( as was faid in the former Chapter ) There are therefore two pair of Mufcles to bend the Neck 'backward, namely the firft and fecond, which do alfo draw it a little obliquely ; and the third and fourth pair draw it both forward and to one fide as both aft together, or but one of each pair at a time. •The/r/? pair of thefe is called Spinatum, becaufe they are feated a- i.Spinatum.
mongft the Spines of the Vertebra. They arife from the roots of the Spines of the feven uppermoft Vertebra: of the Cheft, and five lowermoft of the Neck being feparated from one another onely by the tips of the Spines and are inferted into the whole lower fide of the Spine of the fe- cond Vertebra of the Neck. They bend the Neck backward, or a little obliquely. Some think that they have no original from the Spines of the Neck, but that they onely adhere to them in their pafiage. The next pair is called Tranfverfale, becaufe they both rife from and are *•Tranfrer-
inferted into the tranfverfe Proceffes of the Vertebra They take their be- a ' Sinning from the roots of the tranfverfe Proceffes of the fix uppermoft Ver- tebre of the Cheft ; from whence afcending by degrees they become ftron- eer and thicker, and are inferted into the outfides of all the tranfverfe Procenes of the Neck-bones. The ufe of this pair, as alfo of the former, is as hath been faid, to pull or draw the Neck dirediy backwards ; but if one Mufcle of either pair work alone, it pulls the Neck with an oblique The third is called Longum, or the Long pair. Thefe lie hid under 3. l°Wm-
the Oefophavus or Gullet, wherefore they are by fome called the Under- gullet-lurkers They arife with a thin and fharp but flefhy beginning from the body of the fifth and fixth Vertebra of ^e Back and as they afcend upwards, are knit to the fides of all the Vertebra, till they come to the firft or higheft of the Neck, where each touching other they are both inferted into its Procefs. The ufe of this pair, when they work to- gether, is to bend the Neck direftly forward, and withal to incline the Head ; but if one of them aft alone, then is the Neck drawn towards that fide on which the Mufcle moveth. • The fourth and laft pair of the Mufcles of the Neck is called Scalenum ^.Salcnm,
or Trianvulare. Thefe by fome Authours are accounted as the eighth pair of the Cheft. They are feated on the fides of the Neck inclining rather to the fore than hinder part of it. They take their beginning from the firft Rib, arifing flefhy and large, and are inferted into the infide of all tu&
|
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
the tranfverfe Procefìès of the Vertebra of the Neck. Their ufe is the
fame with the foregoing pair. They are obferved to be perforated or to have holes through them, by which Veins, Arteries and Nerves do pals out of the Body into the Fore-legs. |
|||||||
|
Table XXXÏI.
Reprefenteth an Horfe {landing'with his Face towards us, that one
may have the fuller view of fome of the Mufcles of the Head and Neck. It flieweth alfo feveral other Mufcles, lefs perfectly. AA Shew the par Maftoideum.
BB The Mufcles of the Shoulder-blade.
CC The par Trigeminum or Complexum.
DD That pair of Mufcles of the Meek called Scalenum or Triangulare.
E The Wind-pipe in its natural fituation.
FF That fair of Mufcles of the Meek called Longum, removed from under
the Gullet.
GG The pair of the Nofe called Philtrum. HH The Adducent or clofing Mufcles of the tfoftrils. II The Mufcles of the Eye-lids. KK The Temporal Mufcles. LL The Mufcles of the Ears. M The Frontal or Fore-head Mufcle. N The Cucullaris or Monk's hood. O The Deltoides of the Shoulder. P The Serratus major Anticus (Jhrunk up, for naturally their Teeth reach
to thofe of the obliquely defending pair of the Abdomen.) QQjThe Peftorales.
R The Oblique defcendens of the Abdomen, a little Jhrunk up from the
Serratus major.
S The Deltoides of the Thigh, (which I prefume to call fo, for it is jufl of the fame figure with that of the Shoulder.)
T The Serratus pofticus. VVV The external Intercofi'al Mufcles. W X Y The three Buttock Mufcles. Z The Vaftus extemus. a The Sacrolumbus. b The Longirlimus dorfi. e The Semifpinatus. |
|||||||
|
CHAK
|
|||||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles. i/t
C H A P. XIV.
Of the 'Mufcles of the Breaft. HAving difpatched the Mufcles of the Head and Neck, we come ia
the qext place to fpeak to thofe of the Cheft or Thorax, in which are contained the principal Inftruments of Life, the Heart and Lungs. Now the Lungs being the principal organs of Refpiration, and wanting Mul- ete whereby to dilate or contract themfelves it was neceflary they ihould receive aififtance from the Cheft in which they are included, by the dilatation or contraction whereof, they might be alfo dilated andI con-, tracked To which end the Cheft is furnilhed with feveral Mufc es, fome of which contract it in Expiration, that is, when the Horfe lets forth his breath, and others dilate it in Infpiration, when he receives in "ofSe Dilaters or thofe that widen the Cheft there are four pair, be- gwjj
fides the fixteen pair of the External Intercoftals, there being (as is &Jmfl, th{( ready faid in Chap. a. of the Second Book where I largely treated of ■**. * therJ) between each Rib two Mufcles an External and an Internal one. <** Now there being in number feventeen Ribs, reckoning a Rib for the ex- treme part both toward the Neck and toward the Flank, there muft be one pair of Mufcles fewer than there are Ribs, of which thofe that are feated externally, ferve all as one Mufde to affili in the widening or dila- ting the Cheft, and thofe that are feated internally (lying under the for- me?) affift in the contrago* of it. For a more full defoiption of thefe Seles you may pleafe to turn back to the afore-cited Chapter MThe Z? pair of the dilating or widening Mufcles is called Subclaim, ,Subch. fjtórfim^
hey fill up that fpace that is between the Clavicle and the firft Rib.
Thefe arife flefliy from the inner and lower part of the Clavicle or Collar- bone which is next to the Rib, and running oblique y or flatting for- ™3' nre imnlanted into the firft Rib near the Breaft-bone with a ilefhy S?' tf*SK*V of Mufcles is to draw die firft Rib upwards and outwards, by which motion the cavity of the Cheft is widened. The nevi- or fecond oair of the Dilaters is called Serratum majtu Anticum, a. Serratum
„^SKSSft&w-iike pair, fo called partly from their fitua- = — or the greater ana ior u Tendons which Hade and the two upper Ribs, and are inferted into the lower five Xue-
ribs and two uPpe/baftard or Short-ribs, ^f re they end xn o^Gr ftles fo that its breadth takes upa great part of the fideot the ClieL, and it baio very flefty. The ufe of thispair of Mufcles is to draw theRibs outwards and upwards, and fo to dilate or widen the Cheft, wh1Ch it Hnth more efpecially in great and violent ftrainings. r^7JproPeJV,S of the Mufcles of the 9^^^^ jjSSS
backward Saw-pair, or Serratum pf cum fupenus They arefeated on £erius, tucKWdiu r d Rhomiol([es or the fourth Mufcle of the tXbUdt b«wS both the Hades, an^above the firft pair ofthe
|
||||
|
j j 2 The Anatomy of an Horje.
Head. They fpring membranous from the Spines of the three lower
Rack-bones of the Neck and the firft of the Back, and are inferted into the Interftices of three or four of the upper Ribs. Their ufe is the fame as of the former, viz. to draw the Ribs upward, whereby the Chefl is - dilated, and the inner Cavity thereof inlarged. 4. Serratum The fourth is called Serratum pofticum inferius, the lower backward ?°?u5Um '"" ^aw-pair. Thefe are feated almoft in the middle of the Back, under the broad Mufcle that is the firft of the Deprefiors of the Shoulder. They arife from the Spines of the three loweft Vertebra of the Back and of the firft of the Loins, with a membranous, nervous and broad beginning ; afterwards they pafs with an overthwart line crofs the Mufcles of the Back, and being increafed with fleihy Fibres are inferted into three or four of the lower fliort Ribs before they turn into Griftles. Their ufe is to draw the three or four loweft Ribs outwards, and fo to dilate or widen the lower part of the Cheft. Befides the four pair already named there is yet another Mufcle that af-
fifts thefe in the motion of widening the Cheft in Infpiration, which is the Diaphragma or Midriff of which I have already fpoken in its proper place, namely in the fourth Chapter of the Second Book ; I fhall there- fore omit fpeaking of it any farther here. Impair that Next come we to treat of the Mufcles that contrari or ftraiten the comau the Cheft in Expiration or letting forth the breath. The firft pair of thefe is i. Par' Tri- called par Triangular e, or triangled pair, though they make not a perfect anguiare. triangle, becaufe they confift of two long fides and one fhort one. Thefe arife trom the middle line of the Breaft-bone on the infide of it, (for their feat is within the Cavity of the Cheft, under the Breaft-bone) being lit- tle and flender, and are inferte^ into the bony ends of the third, fourth, fifth and fixth True-ribs (where they are faftned to the Griftles. ) The ufe of this pair is to draw the Ribs toward the Breaft-bone, and there- by to ftraiten the Cheft in Expiration, a. Sacro- The next is called Sacrolumbum from their rife, which is from the Os lutnbum. facrum and from the Spine or ridge of the Lumbi or Loins. They are feated under the Serratum pofticum inferius, and creeping upwards mix themfelves with the long Mufcle of the Back, and alfo faften themfelves to the tranfverfe ProcefTes of the Racks of the Loins as far as to the loweft Rack of the Cheft, from whence afcending up to the Ribs, they are in- ferted into the lower fide of them all by a particular Tendofl about three or four fingers breadth from the ridge of the Back. The ufe of this pair according to Veflingius, is to contrae!: the Cheft ; but Spigelius and alfo Bartholinus do believe that becaufe it grows out of the fame beginning with the long Mufcle of the Back, therefore it extends and raifes up the Cheft as that doth. Cervicale There is another pair oppofite to this defcribed by Diemerhoeck, a di- defeenden5. ligent Anatomift, who hath given them the name of Cervicale defcendens. Thefe, fays he, do fpring from the third, fourth, firth, fixth and feventh Vertebra of the Neck, and are inferted into the upper fide of each Rib, as the Sacrolumbum is into the Lower ; and fays, that this pair by pulling the Ribs upwards in Infpiration widen the Cheft, as the other by draw* i°g them down in Expiration ftraiten it. To the Mufcles already fpoken of, which do contract the Cheft, do
belong the fixteen Internal Intercoftal Mufcles : For as the External ones aftift the Wideners or Dilaters of the Cheft in their motions, fo do the Internal
|
||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles,
Internal alfo aflift thefe contra&ing Mufcles in the drawing together of
the Cheft, and do all a& together as one Mufcle, as the others do; for they pafs obliquely from the lower to the upper Ribs, as the others did from the upper to the lower, their Fibres running contrary to or acrofs the former. All thefe Mufcles are faid, fecondarily, to be aflifted in their motion by the Abdominal Mufcles, as alfo by the Mufcles of the Shoulder- blade and Fore-legs. |
|||||||||
|
m
|
|||||||||
|
CHAP. XV.
Of the Mufcles of the Back, and Loins.
|
|||||||||
|
THE Mufcles of the Back, as alfo of the whole Spine, are fo di-
verfly and intricately intermixed and knit together, that fome Anatomifts have divided them into more, others into tewer, and that by reafon of the infinite originals of the Fibres and the multitude of their in- fertions, all which the admirable wifedom of Nature thought fit to min- gle and knit one within another, that they might the better and with the more ftrength fuftain and accomplilh thofe ftrong and violent actions to which they are defign'd, and alfo with more eafe and fafety bear fuch ex- traordinary heavy weights, as this noble Animal, the fubjecl: of my Dif- courfe, doth continually undergo. For if power united be the ftronger, (as the common faying is) then certainly,if many Mufcles confpire together unto one motion, they will be better able to perform it. Now that there are not more than one apparent motion performed by the Mufcles
the Mufcles of the Back of an Horfe is plain, which motion is by the of the Back help of the Back-bones to raife up and fufpend as it were the whole bulk motion"* m' of the Body, and to bear alfo great weights many times upon it : I fay this is the main, if not the onely motion performed by thefe Mufcles ; for the Bodies of Horfes cannot be turned backwards and forwards, to the fides, and almoft femicircularly, as the Backs of Men are, as may be feen in Dancers, Tumblers and the like. Again, thefe Mufcles though they are by later Anatomifts divided into
feveral pairs, yet the Ancients (as Galen for one) were of opinion, that feeing they cannot be by any means truly feparated, either there muft be fo many pair as there are Rack-bones, or elfe ( which is more likely) that there is but one onely pair, offering tendinous diftributions to all the Vertane of the Back. And fays Galen, If one of this pair work alone, the Spine is inclined towards that fide, be it the right or left ; but if they both work together, the Spine is bended to neither hand, but pulled flreight backward, or rather the Spines are held in their feveral proper places. And, adds he, whereas almoft all Mufcles have their An- tagonists, that are the Authours of a contrary aëtion to theirs, yet thefe Mufcles of the Spine (if you except the bending Mufcles of the Neck) have no Antagonifts or Oppofites. Neither are thefe Mufcles of the Back proper to the Back alone, but Four pair tf
common to the Loins alfo, being reckoned their fecond pair, of which IK* A a % will
|
|||||||||
|
i74 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
will flrft. treat though it be contrary to the cuftom of Anatomifts to
i. Mufcuii doe fo. This pair then goes by the name of Mufculi longiffimi, fo called iongiffimi. from their extraordinary length, as being the longeft Mufcles (and alfo the ftrongeft) in the whole Body : For they arile from the Os facrum, and Ileum or Haunch-bone, and pairing along by the Spine or ridge of the Loins, Back and Neck, they reach as far as to the Procerus Mammilla- " res, or Mammillary Procellès of the Temple-bones. They are almoft con- founded with the Sacrolumbum and Semifpinatum in their march through the Loins, whence by fome thofe are taken to be parts of this pair : but as foon as this pair arrives at the Back, it parts with thofe, and appears to be diftinci; from them. Their ufe is (if they aft together) directly to extend the Back and Loins ; but if one onely work, then is the Spine inclined on one fide, for their Fibres are oblique or flanting. a. Par Qua* The next pair goes by the name of Qttadratum or the Square pair, from dratum. their Figure ; for whilit they are in their natural fituation they both of them together make a four-fquare figure, though when they are fepara- ted they are each of a triangular fhape. They arife broad, thick and fleiliy from the backward and upper Cavity of the Haunch-bone, and from the inner and upper fide of Osfacrum, and remaining flefhy in their whole courfe, they are inferted into all the trànfverfe Proceftès of the Vertebra of the Loins as far as the loweft Rib. Their ufe is to bend the Racks of the Loins with a right motion forward or downward ; but if one of them work alone, it draws the Loins to one fide a little down- ward. 3. Sacri. The next are the Mufcles called Sacri, or holy Mufcles, from their
rife, which is from the Osfacrum. They fpring with an acute original
from that part of the faid Bone where the Spine is faftned to the Haunch- bones. After their original they grow broad by degrees, and though they end not till they come to the Spine of the loweft Vertebra of the thorax, yet in their progrefs they are inferted into feveral of the Spines and oblique Proceftès of the Vertebra of the Loins, their Fibres running obliquely or with a flanting line upwards and inwards. The ufe of this pair, if one work alone, is to pull the Body a little on one fide, but if both acL or work together, they extend that part of thè Spine to which they are faftned. 4. Parsemi- The laft pair is called Semifpinatum. Thefe arife with a nervous original
fpinatum. or beginning from all the Spines or Ridges of the Osfacrum and the Loins, and are inferted into the trànfverfe Procellès of the Vertebra of the Loins
and fome of the lowermoft of the Cheli Thefe with the former pair do fill up the diftances between the Spines, where they touch one another, nothing coming between them to fèparate them from one another, but a membranous Ligament iftuing from the upper Spine. The ufe of this pair is to join the Spines together, and to extend or erect that part of the Back to which they grow. Now if all thefe Mufcles of the Back and Loins work together, the whole Back is extended, or in a manner drawn backwards : but if the Mufcles of one fide work: alone, the Body is in- clined to that fide. the dijiem. Thefe Mufcles are apt to have their tone and ftrength violated by fe- JJ/vfiJi Veral accidents, as by over-great Loads, by a fudden Cold taken by pul- u%m an ling off the Saddle after hard riding before the Horfe be quite cold, and "JfS" f tne like ; whereby the Mufcles become benumbed and relaxed, aid fo tbtfim 'are in a manner deprived of both fenfe and motion; by which means the Horfe
|
||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles, i75
Horfe becomes ufelefs, being fo far from being able to carry Burthens or than any dip.
to perform any other fervice for his Mafter, that when he is up he can location "! hardly ferve himfelf, I mean, ft and to eat his Meat ; or if down, not able bfjp^erte to rife without help. This alfo often happens to old and lean Horfes, 'm whom by reafon of the weaknefs of their Bodies, as alfo becaufe they abound with flegmatiek Humours, thefe Mufcles are fo relaxt that they are fcarce able to fupport the weight of their own Bodies, much kk other Burthens. And in this cafe I think nothing more proper than good flore of ftrengthening Food, to fupport and nourifh their infide, whereby they may gain ftrength, and withall to apply fome ftrengthening Plafter to the outfide at the fame time. But to recover thofe that come by this affection by great Colds taken
as is above-mentioned, it will be the beft way to give them warm, ftrengthening and comfortable Medicines inwardly, and alfo to apply firft fome warm Sheep-skins pretty often renewed, and at the fame time to anoint the Loins with fome fovereign Ointments or Oyles out- wardly ; or if this will not doe, then to fweat him in a Dunghill, and after he comes out, to apply to the Loins a ftrengthening Charge or Plafter.
I thought my felf a little obliged in this place to inlarge upon this ac-
count, to undeceive many of our Profefibrs, who take all Diftempers in this kind to be as one, concluding ftill that all Horfes thus affecled, are either ftrained in the Kidneys or fwayed, as we call it, in the Back- when indeed thefe Mufcles are either benumbed by cold as aforefaid, or by ftrains gotten by carrying over-great weights or burthens, they are diftended to that degree, that for fome time they lofe the ftrength and vigor they ufed to perform their motions with ; this, I fay, is often the true caufe of the debility and weaknefs of the Back. Not that I will deny that there is any fuch malady as a fwayed Back,
for I have my Mï by difïêaion fëen in a Horfe that was knocked on the Head, (being not curable of this Diftemper ) not onely all the mufcular Parts'as it were bruifèd, and many of their interfaces filled with a kind / of a congealed Humour or Matter, but alfo found a kind of diflocation in that part where the Osfacrum or loweft Vertebra of the Loins are joined, and a deal of congealed Matter fettled about thofe Parts. But fuch a ftrain is feldom curable, or if ever, not without great charge and long keeping. What I have therefore faid upon this account is to let our Profeflors know, that raoft of thofe affèdions which they call fway'd Backs are onely di- ftempers of the Mufcles, and therefore eafily cured if foon taken in hand : but thofe which have broken Backs, (which we commonly underfland by fwayed Backs ) are feldom curable. And thus much mall fuffke as to this fort of difcourfe in this place ; it remains now that I return to my former difcourfe, and defcribe the remaining part of the Mufcles, of which thofe of the Anus, Bladder, and Genitals both in Horfes and Mares come next to be fpoken to. |
|||||
|
C H A E
|
|||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horje.
|
|||||||
|
17e
|
|||||||
|
CHAR XVI.
Of the Mufcles of the Fundament, the Bladder, the Te* •
fticles, Tard and Clitoris. AHorfe being a Creature made for fervice, it was fit that he fliould
void his Excrements at his own conveniency and choice, and not perpetually ; As therefore Nature hath provided Mufcles about the Mouth and Chaps for the receiving, chewing and fwallowing of the Food, fo at the end of the Guts and at the outlet of the Urine there are Mufcles fet as Porters to interclude the pafìàge, that nothing might go out but by the Horfe's own accord ; whereas were it not for thefe Mufcles, his Ex- crements would come from him continually and involuntarily, as I have feen to happen in fuch Horfes whofe Sphinfter Mufcle hath by fome ac- cident or extraordinary weaknefs been violated. Neither hath Nature onely provided Mufcles for the keeping of the Excrements in, I mean till fuch time as it is neceflàry they lliould be let forth ; but others alfo as in- ftruments to aflift in the voiding or letting of them forth. For the for- mer purpofe is appointed one Mufcle at the Anus called the Sphinfter, and for the latter, two, called Levators. the Sphinc. The Sphinfter is a flelhy Mufcle feated at the very end of the Arfe- tite Anns'^£ut' ^ whicn lt incompaileth round like a Ring, to which it may fitly be refembled. It is rather knit to than arifes Irom the lower Verte- bre of the Osfacrum, being round and broad, and furnifhed with tranf- verfe or overthwart Fibres, or indeed orbicular ones. This Mufcle is much thicker above or inwards, than below or at the Fundament, where it adheres fo firmly to the Skin, that it is not eafie to feparate it from it. Its ufe we have mentioned in the former Paragraph. Two Leva- The other two are called the Levators or litters up of the Fundament. tors. Thefe are fmall, broad and nervous, arifing from the Ligaments of the Hip-bones and Osfacrum, from whence paffingby the fides of theftreight
or Arfe-gut they adhere to it, and are inferted into the upper part of the Sphinfter. A portion of them alfo grows to the root of the Yard, and in Mares to the neck of the Matrix. Their ufe is to aflift the Abdominal Mufcles in the expulfion of the Excrements, which they doe by lifting up the Fundament. They alfo help to keep the Fundament from falling out, which fometimes happens when they are too much relaxt. The Sphinc- To the Bladder doth alfo belong a Mufcle called a Sphincter, which is bUU* feated in the beginning of its neck, the which it compalleth round. It is furnifhed with orbicular Fibres as the Sphinfter of the Fundament is, and is of the fame ufe ; for it conftringes or purfes up the neck of the Bladder (as that doth the Anus) that the Urine may not pafs out with- out a fpontaneous relaxing of this Mufcle. In Mares it is feated at the very end of the Bladder, viz. at the hole where the neck of the Bladder opens into the Vagina. The Mufcles of the Tard are in number four (or two pair) of which
W/ihave alreacty treated in the Firft Book at Chapter 20. of which the firft pair are called the Erettore* or Lifters up of the Yard, and the other Dilatantes,
|
|||||||
|
Book IV. 'Of the Mufcles. if?
Dilatantes, Wideners, and by fome they are called Accelentom or Haft-
ners. I thought fit in this place onely to name them, referring the Rea- der to the above-named Chapter for his farther fatisfadion ; as alfo to the faid Book at Chap. is. for the defection of the Mufcles of the Tefltdes called the Cremafier, Mufcles, by which the Tefticles are fufpended. The Reader may alfo be fatisfied in the fame Book at Chap. 27. concerning the Mufcles of the Clitoris in Mares which are two pair, as the Yard of a Horfe, to which it is refembled, hath; for I Ml not infift upon them in this place neither |
||||||
|
CHAP. XVIL
Of the Mufcles of the Scapula or Shoulder-blade,
HAving fufficiently treated of the Mufcles of the three Venter^ it re-
mains that I defend now to treat of thofe ofte^ beginning firft wfcjtI theSoft of them, the firft of which mall be thofe that move %Z1UÏMe is obferved to have four motions, «it forward,«jgjf
backward upward and downward, which motions are performed by bath fm four pair óf proper Mufcles. The fir fi pair are feated betwixt the: two j*. tnlìd^bJe^^ Their ftrit origin j defcend down the Neck they
or hinder ^*^%^£bJtoe࣠the Spines thereof, yea
hTf o^eiSornine of thf uppeLtf of the Cheft : but they prefently
and from eight or nine^rm Py Shoulder-blades, into bePrt0Lffnn^M^tó^Tare implanted, as Hkewife into the
S.h0ftWt .tTCoXFwtot the Collar-bone. This pair of Muf- Shoulder-bone and broader pare in wi,PnrP t-hev We feveral cles becaufe of their divers originals, from whence tney nave leverai
for 's of Fibres are faid to perform feveral motions; as when the upper "*-"ïfte8S from the 1S
Amp / ;n Men ) Patzentia Mukuli. I neie are ntuateo auuvc in
ICe takfoTtheir beginning irom the tranfverfe Procefo of the firft, fecond thW and fourth rJUm of the Neck ; which begmmng b,ng Sta the middle (or thereabouts) of the length of theMnfcles they arelt 1 ft inferred into the Shoulder-blades at their fore corner. The ufi
|
||||||
|
j-g The Anatomy of a?i Hor fé.
the teeth of a Saw ; from whence they pafs fomewhat flantingly to the
Shoulder-blade, into whofe Procefs (called its Anchor-like Procefs) it is inferted with a broad ( partly fleftry and partly nervous) Tendon. The ufe of this pair is to-move the Shoulder-blades forward to the Cheft. 4, Rhombo- The fourth and lad pair is called RhomboiJes. Thefe are feated under ides. the Cuculiar es, being thin, broad and four-fquare. They fpring flefhy from the hinder Proceflès or Spines of the three lowed Rack-bones of the Neck,
and as many of the uppermoft of the Cheft, and continuing fleihy to their very infertion they are implanted into the bafis of the Blades. Their ufe is to draw the Blade fomewhat upward and backward, couching it to the Back. Note, that feeing a Horfe and all four-footed Beafts go prone, whereas
Man walks ere£t or upright, the motions of the Mufcles might, and ought in ftri&nefs, to be explained diverfly in them from what they are in him : As for example, Thofe which are faid in Man to move the Part upward, 'viz. toward the Head, ought in a four-footed Beafl to be faid to move it forward ; and thofe which move it backward in Man, move it upward in the other, becaufe of the different pofture of their Bodies : and the fame might be faid as to their motions forward and backward. But feeing many of the Mufcles have their names from their offices in Men, it would make but a confufion and a great impropriety in their ap- pellations to explain 'their motions by other termes in Brutes. And there- fore the Reader is defired to obferve, That when we fay a Part is moved upward, we mean towards the Head; when downward, toward the Tail; when backward, toward the Back; and when forward, we un- derftand it toward the Breaft or Belly. |
|||||||||||
|
C H A P. XVIII.
Of the Mufcles of the Shoulder.
|
|||||||||||
|
T
|
HAT which I call the Shoulder is that Part or Bone that reaches
from the top or pitch of the Shoulder (and is joynted into the |
||||||||||
|
Shoulder-blade) to the next Joint which we call the Elbow ; which it is
neceffàry to intimate for diftin&ion fake, becaufe the Shoulder-blade and this part are commonly both underftood by the name of the Shoulder. Having advertifed this, pafs we now to its Mufcles. Each shuU The motions of the Shoulders are five, 'viz. backwards, forwards, up- d^J£Ìfe wards, downwards and circularly. To perform which each hath nine firft'tm™'. Mufcles, of which there are two that move it upward, namely the Vel- rettcrs. toides and Suprafpinatus ; and of thefe we mall treat in the firft place. Deltoides. The firft is called Deltoides from its figure, which refembles the iliape of the Greek Letter A delta. It is flefliy and ( as you may fee ) triangu- lar, arifzng from the midft of the Clavicle or Collar-bone, the top of the Shoulder, and the whole ridge of the Shoulder-blade, and is extended as far as to the middle of the Shoulder-bone, where it is inferred. This Mufcle is obferved to have divers forts of Fibres ; fome of which run ob- liquely |
|||||||||||
|
Book ÌV. Of the Mufcle-s. jf?
liquely downwards, fuch are thofe on the fore-part ; others run oblique-
ly forward, which are thofe on the back-part of it ; and a third forr^ which are placed in the middle, run dire&ly toward the Fore-leg : Where- fore (fays my Authour ) when the Fibres of the fore-part are contracted, the Shoulder is lifted upward and forward towards the Horfe's Nofe ; if the middle Fibres be contracted, the Shoulder is lifted dire&ly towards his Back ; and if the hinder Fibres be contracted, then is the Shoulder carried obliquely backward : fo that this Mufcle is faid not onely to raife up the Shoulder (which is indeed its chiefefl ufe) but helps alfo to per- form other motions as well as that. The fecond Erector or Lifter up of the Shoulder is called Suprafpinatut Siiprafpina*
by fome, but by others Superfcapularis fuperior, or the upper Blade-rider,tu%' becaufe it is feated uppermofl upon the Shoulder-blade, and filleth up all that cavity which is between its fpine and upper edge. It arifes from the fpine of the Blade with a long and flefhy beginning, and paffing over the jointing of the Scapula with the Shoulder-bone by a broad and itrong Tendon, is inferted into the neck of the faid Shoulder-bone. This Muf- cle is by fome Authours thought not onely to lift up the Shoulder (which is its principal ufe, as being one of the Ereftors) but alfo to help to turn it a little round. The Depreffors òr Pullers down of the Shoulder are alfo two, namely Secmdfy,tm
Latiffimus and Rotundus major. The Latiffimus is fo called from its breadth ®W.efrr'' and largenefs, for with its fellow it covereth almoft the whole Back. It goeth alfo by the name of Ani-fcalptor, or Scratch-arfe Mufcle (in Men.) It rifes with a membranous and broad beginning from the tops of all the fpines of the Rack-bones that are betwixt the fixth Vertebra of the Cheli and the middle of Os facrum, as alfo from the upper part of Os ileum or Haunch-bone : from thence afcending upward untili it come to that part of the Back where the Ribs begin to bend backward, there it becomes more fleihy, and is carried over the lower or hinder corner of the Shoul- der-blade, at which place it begins to grow narrower but continues fleihy : and at length by a broad and ftrong Tendon it is inferted below the up- per head of the Shoulder-bone lengthways, on the infide, betwixt the Pectoral and Round Mufcles, there being a fpace left betwixt them for that purpofe. This draws the Shoulder downward or toward the Tail, though a little obliquely backward. The fecond Puller down of the Shoulder (ör its fourth Mufcle) is cal- Rotundi»
led Rotundus major, or the greater Round Mufcle, It takes its beginning mz)0U from the whole lower Cofta or Rib of the Shoulder-blade, and is inferted into the upper and inner part of the Shoulder-bone with a ihort but broad, ftrong and nervous Tendon. The ufe of this is the fame with the former, W2. tO pull the Shoulder downward. The two pair of Mufcles that pull the Shoulder forward are called, the thirdly, tm
one by the name of Tett oralis, and the other Coracoideus. The Pettorali* ™%$ fa- is fo called from its fituation, which is upon the fore-fide of the Breafl. pea0*ralis; It hath a very large and for the greatefl part membranous beginning, which it takes from divers parts : for its upper part arifes from the middle of the Collar-bone on that fide next the Breafl; its middle, from the whole length of the Breafl-bone and the ends of the Griftles of the Ribs that endin it ; and its lower part fprings from the Griftles of the fixth, feventh and eighth Ribs. After it hath taken thefe beginnings, it prefent- ly becomes fleihy and thick, and running towards the Shoulder is at B b length
|
||||
|
18 o The Anatomy of an Horje.
length inferted into the Shoulder-bone with a Ihort, but broad, finewy
and ftrong Tendon a little below its head, betwixt the Mufcle Deltoides, and that which is called Biceps. The office of this Mufcle is, when it contrað it felf equally, to move the Shoulder equally and dire&ly for- ward or toward the Breaft, inclining to neither hand : but if all its Fibres be not equally contra&ed, (for by reafon of its divers beginnings it hath alfo divers forts of Fibres, fome running with a flaming line from above downwards, others with the like flanting line from below upward, and thofe betwixt thefe running ftreight ; wherefore I fay, if all thefe Fibres be not equally contra&ed, but fome work, and others not) then are other motions performed by this Mufcle, as the Shoulder drawn more upward or downward, as the different Fibres work. Cortcoideus. Coracoideus is by Bartholin accounted the ninth Mufcle of the Shoulder
( which, fays he, was firft obferved by Arantius and Placentinus) but we do after the more modern Aufhours reckon it for the fixth, and fecond drawer forward of it. It hath its name Coracoideus from its beginning, which is from the Procerus Coracoides of the Scapula ; from whence it reaches to the middle of the Shoulder-bone where it terminates. Its ufe is (as fay the difcoverers of it ) to draw the Shoulder to the Procefs of the Blade-bone, or forward upon the Breaft. rtretrùtteri The Shoulder is moved alfo backward by three Mufcles, which are In-
backward, frafpinatus, Subfcapularis or Immerfus, and Rotundus minor.
infrafpma- j-^at wj1icf1 [s reckoned the firft of thefe, is the Infrafpinatus, by fome
called Suprafcapularis inferior. It is feated upon the Shoulder-blade and fills up all that fpace which is betwixt the ridge or fpine of the Scapula and its lower edge, even as the Suprafcapularis fuperior fills up the upper fpace. It arifes flefhy from the bafis of the Blade below the ridge of it, ^ecoming narrower in its progrefs as the Blade-bone grows narrower, and is inferted by a broad and Ihort Tendon-into the fourth Ligament of the Shoulder-bone. Subfcapnia- The fecond Ruller or Drawer back of the Shoulder is the Subfcapularis t
rffc the Under-blade-lurker, or Immerfus the drowned Mufcle, becaufe it is
feated under the Blade-bone betwixt the Ribs and it. Very flefhy it is, ari-
fing fo from the inner part of the bafts of the Blade ; in figure it is trian- gular, like the Bone, growing narrower or ftraiter by degrees as it de- fends, and is inferted into one of the Ligaments of the Shoulder. Rotundui The next being the third and laft of the Drawers back of the Shoulder
|
|||||||||
|
minor.
|
|||||||||
|
is called Rotundus minor, the leflèr Round Mufcle, from its figure. It
arifes from the loweft corner of the Scapula, and is implanted into the neck of the Shoulder-bone. As for the circular motion of the Shoulder, that is not performed by
any one Mufcle, butbyfeveral of thefe already named, a&ing fucceflive- Iy one after another. |
|||||||||
|
CHAP-
|
|||||||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles, 181
CHAR XIX.
Òf the Mufcles that move the Fore-leg and Foot, THAT part of the Leg which reaches from the Elbow to that which «j» £ iw
we call the Knee, anfwers to that part in Humane Bodies which ^£. reaches from the Elbow to the Wrift. Onely in an Horfe there is but Aw m iu onffioneTthis fplce" which we fhall call the Cubit-toe) whereas in £-* Men there are two going by two diftinci: names one of which bemg the Ma, greater is called Cubitus or the Cubit, and the other Vina or the Ell But ìs for that part which we call the Knee it agrees more exactly with the Wrift in Men, and might more properly be called fo : For examining the Patofee of what it is compounded, I find it made up of two ranges of little Bones as the Wrift of a Man is, and not like the Knee of a Man, which confifts of one little round Bone (called the Knee-pan) faftned be- tween the Jointings of the lower head of the Thigh-bone and the heads of the tibia ma fibula : for that Bone is exaftly found in the Hind-leg of a Horfe in that Joint we call the Stifle which is indeed the Knee, as lhall be proved in a convenient place. And as the Knee of a Horfe is like the Wrift cfa Man fo is that Bone below it, (or indeed three Bones for the K whkh we' call the Shank or Shin, hath two (mall Bones faftned to it running by its fides down almoft all its length till within two or three inches of the great Pattern ; I fay that as the Knee is that part which is the Wrift in Man, fo is this part between the Knee and great Mem) anfwerable to the ketacarpJ that is, to *^^£^™ the Wrift to the fettina on of the Fingers. Onely in Man tnere areftve
the Wri^otóftig Hkewife does the paftem Bones ^m *n "°?^Urf^eFinfier; the little Paftern to the fecond
^Ü^cffiit whicg the Hoof grows, to that Joint of *B?£ ™ fc tetSSS* 0/ an Horfe com,very near the
like Parts of a Man, the number of Bones and Mufcles of the Fingers one- ly exceed For a Horfe ^fiUSf*. or whole-footed fo that the wMe of it is necelTarily moved at one time and therefore has no need of that variety of Mufcles that a Man's Hand is endowed withall An Horfes Fore-feet are of no other ufe than to go upon, any more than his Hinder- feewhTJtteHand of a Man is ordained for other ufes, and is there- teet, wnerea'\^Z„ed and divided into more Parts, to wit four Fin- ^aXthÖ
To perform thofe motions to which they are defigned Whence tóe
number of the Mufcles come to differ greatly. Now we fhall ake no nodce of thofe that a Man has more than an Horfe, but ihall onely treat of thofe that are to be found to move the Joints of an Horfe already rnen- rioned,vL the Cubit-bone, the Shank, the two Pafterns, and the Cof finFX'the Cubit is either bended, or extended. Of the .Benders there g. Mfg
are two- the/^ of which is called Biceps kom its double beginning;; Jf for it hath two heads, the firft being outward, tendinous and round, ari-,. Eiccp». B b i *et"
|
||||
|
I82 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
feth from the upper brim of the hollownefs of the Shoulder-blade ; the
fecond head is broader, and is framed partly of a Tendon and partly of Flelli : this arifes from the Trocejfus Anchor iformis or Anchor-like Procefs, of the Scapula ; then defending by the inner head of the Shoulder-bone, it meeteth with the former head, and becometh a ftrong fleihy Mufcle, * running down the infide of the Cubit-bone to the Knee, where it is infer- ted. This bends the Cubit forwards and fomewhat inwards, a. Brachials The fecond Bender is from its fituation in Humane Bodies (being pla- inccrnus. cec| as ,tne former \Sj Upon the infide of the Arm in them, and of the Leg in Horfes ; I fay from its fituation it is) called Brachials Int emus. This lies inwardly under the Biceps, and is fomething fhorter than it, but of a fleihy fubftance like it. It takes its beginning near the end of that Muf- cle of the Shoulder called Deltoides, about the middle of the Shoulder- bone, to which it is firmly faftned : after which it runs its courfe as the former, and is inferted into the forefide of the Cubit-bone a little above the Knee, affifting the motion of the former. Tm alfo ex- There are alfo two Mufcles to extend the Cubit, which lie on its outer tend it. an j hinder fide. The firft of them from its length is called Longus. This i. ongus. ar-fes w^t{j a fl-rong anc[ broad original, partly nervous and partly flefhy ( which fome make to be two heads ) from the lower Rib of the Blade- bone, after which it defcends on the hinder fide of the Shoulder-bone, and alfo of the Cubit-bone, and is inferted into its outfide juft at the Knee. This draws the Cubit backwards and fomewhat outwards, and thereby extends it or flretches it out ftreight. 2. Erevis. The fecond Extender of the Cubit is called Brevis from its fhortnefs. It arifes from the hinder-part of the neck of the Shoulder-bone, and hold- ing the fame courfe as the former, is inferted into the lower end of the Cubit-bone at the fame place with the former, and affifts its motion. Befides thefe there are faid by fome Anatomifts to be two more Exten-
ding Mufcles, viz. one called Brachiaus Ext emus from its being placed on the outfide of the Arm in Men. But this is by Spigelius looked upon to be the fecond head of the Long Mufcle, becaufe it grows into one Muf- cle with it, and has the fame infertion with both it and the Short one. The other is called Anconeus, being a fmall-bodied Mufcle, arifing
from the lower and back-part of the Shoulder-bone, and is inferted into the Cubit an inch or two below the Elbow. But fome make this to be but a part of the Short Mufcle. As for the other Bone of this Joint in Men, called Radius, that alfo
has its Mufcles, which ferve to turn the Arm and Hand round : But fee- ing there is no fuch Bone in an Horfe, as neither any fuch motion of an Horfe's Leg, it cannot be expe&ed there ihould be found any Mufcles in him anfwerable to the other, as to this part. Pafs we on therefore to the next Joint commonly called the Shank, but
which truly anfwers to the Metacarp, or back of the hand in Men. And this like the Cubit is either hended or extended. Tm Mufckj To bend it there are two Mufcles ; of which the firfi is called Cubitaus SEnfc* internus. This arifeth from the inner knob of the Shoulder-bone, and de- ,. cubitasus fcending along the infide of the Cubit, is implanted into the inner and intemus. hinder fides of the top of the Shank. 2. Radisus _ The fecond is called Radiceus intemus in Men, though very improperly
intemus. in an Horfe, feeing he has no Radius. This has the fame rife, progrefs and infertion with the former. There
|
||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles. 183
|
|||||||
|
There are alfo two Mufcles to extend it; the firft of which is called two alf
|
'o ex-
|
||||||
|
Cubitceus exterms. This fprings from the outer knob of the Shoulder- '">d it.
bone, and defending down the Cubit, is inferted into the outer and fore- êxSnus?"5
fide of the head of the Shank.
The fecond of the Extenders is called Radiaus extemus ( improperly 2. Radius
as to an Horfe, as was noted before. ) This has the fame rife, progreisexternBS-
and infertion with its fellow.
The next Joint is the great Pajlern which anfwers to the firft Joint of
the Finger in a Man's Hand, as the little faftern anfwers to the fecond
Joint, and the Coffin-joint to the kit on which the Nail grows. All thefe
are either bended or extended as the former Joints were. But before we defcribe thofe Mufcles that perform thefe actions, there is one other to be treated of that is called in Man Pahnaris, from its being fpread over the Palm of the Hand ; but in an Horfe its Tendon is fpread over the Sole of the Foot, whence the name of Plant arts would better agree to it. This fprings flelhy from the inner knob of the Shoulder-bone, but prefently grows into a (lender Tendon which deicends to the Sole of the Foot as aforefaid.
The Paflems and Coffin-joint are bended by two Mufcles; the firfl oithe P*ftmu
which is called Sublimis, ( I fuppofe becaufe it rifes high up. ) It fprings ffntCJenb'en.
from the inner knob of the Shoulder-bone, and is inferted into the ded bj, m»
Paften». . r , ,.: Subi'imis.
The fecond is named Profundus. This anfes trom the upper part of the 2. Profun-
Cubit-bone, and is inferted into the Coffin-joint. d«. They are extended by one very confiderable Mufcle, called Extenfor Th are ex-
magnus. This fprings from the outer knob of the Shoulder-bone, and its Ï^Exren-' Tendon is inferted into the fore and outer fide of the Pafterns and Coffin- for magnus. joint. Some reckon this to be two Mufcles. There are feveral other proper Mufcles that belong to the Fingers in
Men fome to one and fome to another, as alfo others that move them laterally or to and from one another, which it were from our purpofe here to mention, as not being to be found in 'an Horfe. Though I dare not affirm pofitively that there are no more than I have here defcribed ; for I am apt to fufpeft the contrary from the multitude of Tendons that defcend into the Coffin-joint : however thefe that I have mention'd are the moft confiderable and plainly difcoverable ; and rather than encreafe their number at a venture, I will be content that this Chapter be reputed imperfta- Table xxxnr.
Reprefents an Horfe with the Side towards you, that you may have
a fight of as many of his Mufcles at one view as is poffible. AA Shew the oblique defeendent Mufcle of the Abdomen or Paunch.
B The oblique afcendent Mufcle of the fame fart, at its original from the
Hip-bone.
C Its membranous tendon reaching to the White-line. D The tranfverfe Mufcle of the Paunch. E The right or flreight Mufcle of the fame part. F The Peroral Mufcle. G The Serratus major Anticus. H The Deltoides of the Shoulder. . II The
|
|||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
II The Serratus Pofticus.
K The Cucullaris. L The Sacrolumbus. M The Longiffimus Dorfi, N The Semifpinatus. 00000 The Jntercofial Mufcies.
PPP The Ribs laid hare. Q_ The end or griflly part of the Shoulder-hlade.
R Gluteus minor or leffer Buttock-mufcle. S Gluteus medius or middle Buttock-mufcle. T Gluteus major or greater Buttock-mufcle. V The Deltoides of the Thigh, having its Tendon broken off it.
XX The Mufculus Biceps. Y The Vaftus Externus.
Z The Mufculus Rectus. a One of the proper Mufcies of'the Cheek called Lateralis.
b A Mufcle of the Noflrils called Philtrum.
e The external Adducent Mufcle or clofing Mufcle of the Nofe.
d The orbicularis or conftringens, which draws the Lips together, being
common to both Lips.
e The Mufcies of the Eye-lids. f The Temporal Mufcle. g The Buccinator or Trumpeter. h One of the Mufcies of the Neck called Longus, feated under the Gullet, lut to be fee» in this Figure by reafon of the pofiure of it.
ii One of the proper Mufcies of the Head called Mafloides. k The Mufcle of the Head called Splenitis or Triangularis. 1 The Frontal or Fore-head Mufcle.
m The Spinatus, being one of the Mufcies that move the Neck.
n The Complexus or Trigeminus fo called from its threefold beginning.
o The Subclavius pulled a little outward from under the other Mufcies.
p The Infrafpinatus or Subfcapularis inferior.
q The Suprafpinatus or Superfcapularis fuperior.
r The Scalenus.
f The Rotundus major or Humerum deprimens a little tut of its place
at its lower end.
t Mufculus Biceps, u Longus. w Brachials externus.
x Cubitasus externus* y Radiseus externus. 2 Extenfor magnus.
a. Radiasus internus. jg Cubitaaus internus. ii The Gaftrocnemius internus of both the Hind-legs,
^^ The Gaftrocnemius externus of the like. 3 The Tendon of the Mufcle Plantaris coming out as out of a fully.
4 The Tibials Anticus.
$5 The Extenfor tertii internodii digitorum aut Longus, fo ca^ ty
Mr. Brown. CHAP.
|
||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufdes; *8£
CHAP. XX.
Of the Mufcles of the Thigh.
BY the Thigh we mean that part which is betwixt thè Joint of the
Huckle or Whirle-bone, and that which is cilled the Stifle ; which confifteth of one large and long Bone, going by the name of the Thigh- bone, or Femur. This Bone hath a round head which is jointed into the round Cavity of the Hip-bone, fo that it admits of all kinds of mo- tions, whence it hath a multitude of Mufcles to perform thefe motions; fome of which move the Thigh forwards, whereby it is bended ; fome move it backwards, and thereby extend it : a third fort bend it inward, as when a Horfe rubs the contrary Leg with his Foot, which is often feen upon any itching or pricking humour afle&ing that Part : a fourth fort move it outwards ; and a fifth obliquely about. But firft of the Benders forwards, which are accounted to be three in number. The firft of which is called Pfoas or Lumlar'u. This is almoft round, The Benda t
thick and livid, and lieth in the inner part of the Abdomen, upon the Ver- "le%™'eb teine of the Loins. It arifes flefliy from the tranfverfe Procefìès of the r. Pfoas. two loweft Vertebra of the Cheft and two or three uppermoft of the Loins ; from whence defcending by the infide of Os ileum, at length it ends in a ftrong and round Tendon, which is infertedon the forefide of the upper part of the lefïèr head of the Thigh-bone. The ufe of this is, ftrongly to draw the Thigh upward, and fomewhat inward. Uporï this Mufcle the Kidneys are placed, near that part of it where its Nerve enters into it ; which in Men is the caufe of that ftupor or numbnefs that is felt in the Thigh by thofe that are troubled with the Stone in the Kid- neys, on that fide that the Stone is on. . The fecond Bender forward is called Iliacus internus, or the inward 2. iliaca» in-
Haunch Mufcle. It fpringeth with a flendef and flefliy beginning fromternus- the infide of the Haunch-bone, and being joined by its Tendon to the former Mufcle, is inferted with a round Tendon into the le/Ter head or Rotator of the Thigh-bone. The ufe of this is the fame with the firft, which is, to lift the Thigh up and fo to bend it forward ; yet it doth not move it fo much inward as the Pfoas doth. The third is called Peàineus, arifing broad arid flefliy from the line of 3. Pteftfo»*
the Share-bone near its Griftle, and is implanted into the infide of the lower end of the Thigh-bone with a broad and large Tendon Its ufe is to draw the Thigh upward and inward. This is the Mufcle that m Men helps to lay one Thigh over the other in fitting. Note, that both this laft foregoing, and all the following Mufcles fave
the two laft, are inferted at the lower end of the Thigh-bone, iuft above the Stifle ; whereas in Men they are mod of them if not all inferted into its upper part, viz. either into its neck, or into one or other of the two knobs jetting out at the lower end of the neck, ( called the great and lit- tle Trochanters. ) What may be the reafon of this different mfertion is iiot eafie to guefs, unlefs it be the ftiortnefs of the Thigh-bone, which in an Horfe is not half fo long as it is in a tall Mafl ; fo that art Horfe $ Maf- |
||||
|
l$6 The Anatomy of aü Horfe.
cles being fo plump and bulky upon his Buttocks, it was neceflàry they
mould have fome confiderable fpace to grow flenderer in and to become tendinous ; and therefore they are extended as far as the Stifle which an- fwcrs to the Knee in Mari. The Exten- Next come we to the Mufcles that bend lack and fo extend the Thigh,. den an aifi (as when an Horfe ftretches himfelf ) which motion is alfo performed by i.rGiurasi» three Mufcles. The firfl of which is called Glutaus externus, or the out- major, wardmoft Buttock Mufcle ; in Men it is alio called Glutaus major, the greatefl Buttock Mufcle ; but in an Horfe it is not fo, for in them the mid- dlemoft is the largefl. This fpringeth with a very flefhy beginning from the Crupper, from the Spine or ridge of the Haunch-bone, and trom the Os facrum. Afterward defcending a little obliquely and riding over the Joint of the Huckle-bone, it at length grows narrower and more (lender, and fo endeth into a ftrong and broad Tendon, which is inferred into the inner part of the Thigh-bone juft above the Stifle, yea it feems to reach ,as far as to the top of the Tibia. Its ufe is to draw the Thigh backward and fo to extend it, as alfo to enable the Horfe to go backward. 3. Glutsus The next or fecond is called Glutaus medius, or the middle Buttock mediu». Mufcle. This in Man ( becaufe of his going eredi ) lieth quite under the former, and is fo hid by it, that unlefs the former be firfl removed, it can- not be feen. But in Horfes it is larger than the former, and lieth fide by fide with it, as doth the next alfo, and they are both to be feen without removing the firft, as may be plainly obferved by the following Figure. It arifes with a flefhy and broad beginning, a little higher than the firft, from the Spine of the Haunch-bone on the fore-part of it, and from thence defcends fomewhat obliquely over the Joint of the Hip as far as to the lower end of the Thigh-bone, into the outer fide of which it is in- ferred with a broad, ftrong and membranous Tendon. Its ufe is to ex- tend the Thigh and to draw it outward and backward, as when the Horfe ftands to fiale. 3. Glutaem The third and laft of the Extenders is called Glutaus minor, or lefïèr minor. Buttock Mufcle. This in a Horfe arifes equal in height with the former at the Spine of the Haunch-bone. At its beginning it is round, fharp and flefhy ; but in its courfe it becomes more broad, defcending with an oblique line by the fide of the fecond Mufcle, and is inferted at the lower end of the Thigh-bone, rather towards its fore-fide. This affifts the ac* tion of the former, drawing the Thigh outward and backward. one Mover of The Thigh is drawn to the infide by the Mufcle triceps, or Quadri- Sr^'viz"1" ce?s* *°r lt Soes by both aames> becaufe fome affirm it to have four, and
Trfcepwr others but three beginnings. This Mufcle is looked upon to be the thickeft Quadriceps, of all the Mufcles of the whole Body, being furnifhed with great va- riety of Fibres. The firft of its beginnings is from the upper part of the Share-bone,
where it arifes with a nervous head, and defcending is inferted into the infide of the lower end of the Thigh-bone. The fecond part of it arifes from the lower fide of the fame Bone, being
flefhy and broad, and is inferted into the infide of the Thigh-bone, a lit- tle higher up than the former. The third head of this Mufcle arifes with a flefhy and fometimes ner-
vous beginning from the whole lower part of the Coxendix, round about the circumference of its wide hole ; and is inferted near the laft- |
|||||
|
The
|
|||||
|
Book 1% Of the Mufcks. iêj
The fourth head fpriiigs with a nervous and flefliy beginning from the
tip of the Coxendix, and afterward running along the infide of the Thigh, endeth into a round Tendon, which joining with the Tendon of the nrft part of this Mufcle is inferted into the lower end of the Thigh-bone with it. The Thigh is alfo turned outward, which motion is performed by four ^eM£k3
fmall Mufcles called Quadrigemini, all which are placed one by another ^ «*. upon the outfide of the articulation of the Thigh, The firft of them is *«4. .«** from its fituation called Iliacus externus, and from its figure, PyriformàsS. or Pear-like Mufcle. This is longer than any of the reft of them, anting round from the lower and outer part of Osfacrum; thence it runneth downward upon the backfide of the great Rotator, and is implanted into the outfide of the lower end of the Thigh-bone. The fecond and third of thefe Mufcles do want particular names ; but
both of them arife from the knob of Os ifchium, near one another, and are inferted with the firft, ■ ' " ^ The fourth and laft is called Quadngeminus quadratus. It is more
flefliy and broad than the reft, arifing from the inner part of the knob of the Ifchium, lying fome two or three inches diftant from the third, and endeth with the former. ' To thefe muft be added that Mufcle which we have named the Del- ff^P^
toides of the Thigh, not finding any in Humane Bodies to anfwer to it, g^JJ ° fo as to borrow a name from thence. It fprings ( as you may fee plain in the foregoing Figure) from the outfide of the tip of the Ileum, with a fliarp beginning ; but prefently enlarging it fell, becomes three-fquare, and is inferred with a broad membranous Tendon into the outfide of the Thigh-bone, from which infertion it appears torn offin the Figure. By its fituation it feems to affili the a&ion of the Quadrigemini. The Thbh is turned about obliquely by two Mufcles called Otturato- The nigh *
res, or Stoppers, becaufe they fill up the wide hole between the Or pubis *™L * ! tt-d bone The firft is called Obturator tnternus. This arifeth from two Mufcles.
tte inner" circumference of the hole before fpoken oi, and faffing over- **£ £. thwart the end of the Hip-bone, is inferted into the Cavity of the great ternus. ^The other is called OltUrator externus, the outward Filler. This ari- 2. obturator
fes out of the external circumference of the above-named hole with amcrn flefhv and broad beginning, and winding about the neck of the Thigh- bone turneth into a ftrong and large Tendon which is implanted into the Cavity of the great Rotator fth ^ former ._. And thus much for the Mufcles of the Thigh, which tor order fake'I
have according to the cuftom of Anatomifts firft treated of; but it is ne- *s£to^^ our dindon in the Leg firft to remove thofe Mufcfes for we cannot fo eafily nor conveniently raife nor fnew thefe of the Thigh, untili thofe of the Leg be removed, becaufe the heads of fome of them lie upon the Mufcles of the Thigh. |
|||||||
|
cha p:
|
|||||||
|
Cc
|
|||||||
|
88 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
CHAR XXL
Of the Mufcks of the Tibia or Leg.
|
||||||
|
TH E Mufcles of the tibia or Leg are of the fame number in Horfes
as in Men, ( like as the Mufcles of moft other Parts are ) the infer- tion of fome of them onely excepted. Which difference fprings from hence, that this Bone of the Leg which in a Horfe is but one main Bone fupported on each fide with another (lender immoveable one for ilrength, as alfo for the fafer paflàge of the Tendons of the Mufcles between them, ( which I fuppofe to be the onely ufe of them, as not being moveable ; I fay this Bone which in a Horfe is but one) is in a Man two, going by two different names, viz. the one by that of Tibia, and the other, by that of Fibula, and fome of the Tendons of the Mufcles are inferted into one of them, and fome into the other. But otherwife fo far as I have had opportunity to examine them, I have found them to have the fame original, fubftance, figure and courfe in a Horfe as in Man ; and there- fore I fhall proceed to treat of them after the fame method as I have done of all the reft, forbearing to fpeak any further of the difference ( in a Man and an Horfe) between the Parts that are moved by the Mufcles to be treated of in this and the following Chapter, untili I come to the Book of the Bones, where I fhall fhew at large the fimilitude between them, and that the difference is not fo much as it may be believed to be. the Leg it The Leg hath three motions allowed it, viz. bended, extended, and extended by moved obliquely outwards. All the Extenders are placed on the fore-part £wmSt"' of the Thigh, of which the firfl: is called Membranofus. This Mufcle is by nofus. Bartholin called the Abddlor, as if its ufe were to move the Leg oblique- ly outwards ; but that office is by other Anatomifts fince him afcribed to the Poplitaus, and this faid to extend the Leg- It arifeth flefhy from the upper part of Os ileum on the outfide, and near the great Procels of the Thigh-bone it becomes broad and nervouffy membranous, where- fore it is called Fafcia lata, the broad Swadling-band, for it enwrappeth almofl all the Mufcles of the Thigh within it felf ; and being come as low as the Knee in Humane Bodies, and that Joint we call the Stifle in Horfes, ( which exactly anfwers to the other, even as far as to the little found Bone between the two Bones of the Femur and Tibia, called the Patella or Knee-pan ) I fay when it is come as low as the Stifle ( over which it croffês ) it is at laft inferted into the fore-fide of the Tibia or Bone of the Leg. Its ufe is, as hath been faid, to extend the Leg direct- ly ; or as fome Authours will have it, fomewhat to abduce it or draw it obliquely outwards. 2, tongus. The fecond Extender is called Longus, and Sartorim or Sutorius, from its ufe in thofe Men that fit crofs-legg'd at work, as Shoomakers and Tai- lors, it arifes fharp and nervous from the upper and fore-part of the ap- pendix of Os ileum, and as it pafïès obliquely down the infide of the Thigh, it becomes more flefhy and broad, continuing fo till it come to the infide of the Leg a little below the Stifle, where it ends in a broad Tendon, and is inferted into the Bone of the Leg or Tibia. The vfe of this Mufcle
|
||||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles. 18?
Mufcle is not onely to extend the Leg, but alfo to draw it inwards;
wherefore it is by fome Authours reckoned for one of the Benders of the Leg. The third, from itsjlreight courfe, is called Reel us, the Streight Muf 3. Rea™
eie. This takes its beginning from the lower brim of the Haunch-bone, and pafling with a flelhy and round belly flreight down the fore-fide of the Thigh untili it come to the Stifle, it there turns into a flrong and broad Tendon, which adhering to the Patella defcends over it, and is im- planted into the fore-fide of the upper part of the Shank. The fourth is called Fajlus extemus, becaufe of its great flefliy bulk, 4- Vaftu*
and becaufe it defcends on the outfide of the Streight Mufcle. It arifesexternus- broad and nervous from the root of the great Rotator or trochanter, cleaving clofe to the outward part of the Thigh-bone all along its courfe, untili it come to the Stifle, where it becomes membranous and broad, and uniting with the Tendon of the Streight Mufcle or Rettus, is inferted into the fame place with it, but on its outfide. The fifth is called Fajlus internus, running on the infide of the Reiïus. 5. vaftusiri-
It arifes from the root of the lefïèr Trochanter and from the neck of theternus- Thigh-bone \vith a nervous beginning, and afterwards growing flefliy defcends down the Thigh-bone, {ticking clofe to it, till it come to the Stifle, over which it paflèth, and afterward unites its felf with the for- mer two, and takes its infertion in the fame place of the Tibi# as they do. It is worth the Difïè£tour s taking notice of thefe three lafl Mufcles,
hpw they be joined all in one juft at their croffing the Stifle, where they make one broad and very flrong Tendon, which lpreads over and involves the Patella or little Bone of the Stifle, and ties it fo fall in its place upon the jointing of the Thigh-bone with the Tibia, that it is very feldom dif- placed, or indeed never. For although by (Mentions or flrains we often have this Part affected,- yet never did I fee an abfolute diflocation in it. The Patella indeed may be ( and often is ) wrenched either to one fide or the other as the accident may happen, but it is immediately reduced to its place again by this compound ligamentous Tendon, which like a Spring retra&s it felf into its former Station, and the Bone to which it is knit, alfo. So that, that malady which is commonly taken for a diflo- cation of this Bone, feems rather to be from Bloud extravafated out of the Capillary Veflêls, which by great diftentions many times may be broken ; which Bloud lieth congealing and putrifying in the fpaces be- tween the Membranes and Mulcles, affecting the fenfible neighbouring Parts, which puts the Horfe to that great pain we obferve him to have on fuch accidents. Now the means we ufe to remove this pain is by cha- fing the Part with penetrating Oils, which commonly effect the cure, if they be ufed prefently before the Bloud be too much congealed -• But if the pain be not removed by this means, we are fain to open the Skin by way of an Iflue, blowing in wind to feparate the feveral Skins one from another, and fo make way for the congealed Matter the better to come forth ; which done, the pain is removed, and the aheclion quite taken away, and the Horfe molt times goes again as well as ever. Whereas fhould this Bone be difplac'd, as it is by many Farriers thought to.be, this way of proceeding fèems fo far from contributing to the cure, that by laying the Skins open there is rather given more liberty for the Bone to remove out of its place, than any affiftance afforded toward the relioring it again. But C e z {q
|
||||
|
i po The Anatomy of an Horfe.
fo much by way of digreffion to inform our ProfefTours in this point ; I
fhall now proceed to defcribe the remaining Mufcles, the next of which are the Benders of the Leg. Four M»fdet Thefe are in number four ; the firfl of which ( according to Bartholin) tend the Leg. js called Biceps, though by other Authours it is reckoned the laft and lceps' fifth, fuppofing that there are five of thefe Mufcles. It arifes fliarp and ner- vous from the appendix of the Coxendix, and being carried on the outfide of the Thigh, it doth about its middle become flelhy, as if it begun there with a fecond head ; from whence defcending it groweth in its courfe more thick and outwardly nervous, untili it becomes a ftrong Tendon, which is inferted into the outer fide, ( but fomewhat backward ) of the appendix of the Tibia. The ufe of this Mufcle is to bend the Leg by pulling it backward. a.Semeiem- The next, according to the before-named Bartholin, is the Semimem- branofus. irmofits, which by others is reputed the fourth Bender. It takes its be- ginning from the knob of the Coxendix as the former doth, with a fmal/, membranous head, from whence it runneth down the back-part of the Thigh, till it come to the Leg-bone, into which it is inferted with a round Tendon behind, in that place which in Man is called the Ham. 3, Seminer- The third (according to the fame Authour) is the Seminervofus, fo
tofus. called from its fubftance, it being partly nervous and partly flefhy, as the former was partly flefhy and partly membranous. This arifes fmall
and nervous from the fame knob of the Coxendix as the former two did ; from whence defcending obliquely by the back and inner part of the Thigh (in which courfe it becomes flelhy) its Tendon reaches towards the middle of the Leg-bone, into whofe inner and backer part it is in- ferted. 4. Gracilis. The fourth is called Gracilis, the flender Mufcle. This by fome Au-
thours is accounted for the fecond Bender of the Leg, but I fhall after the
method of the before-named Authour rank it for the fourth and laft. It arifes with a large and nervous beginning from the middle of the Share- bone juft at its jointing, from whence it runs down the infide of the Thigh untili it comes to the Tibia or Leg-bone, into whofe infide it is in- ferted with a round Tendon near the former. Note, that fome of thefe Mufcles being placed more outward and o-
thers more inward ; if they all work together, they draw the Leg direft- ly backward ; but if one be contracted alone, then it doth bend the Leg a little either to this or that fide, according as the Mufcle is placed, as well as draw it backward. one mms it There is another Mufcle whofe ufe is to move the Leg obliquely ; its PoXmJï!12'name *s Vophtteus- It takes its fife broad and nervous from the outer head of the Thigh-bone, and afterward becoming flefhy runs with a flan- ting line down the Thigh to the back and inward part of the upper knob of the Tibia, where it is inferted. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles* ***
C H A P. XXII.
Of the Mufcles that move the lower fart of the Leg, and
the Foot. D Y the W «M of the Leg is to be underftood that Bone whkh is
• j j. u«p » r Houeh. reaching from thence to the great la- ten ^ZtZT^SS^k five inhumane Bodies that make the
fn&p.WLtkewl the great Pattern and *™*™*£™£i& confiftinL of feveral joints, that by fpreading themfelves and gn.fp.ng
Zet "n what he treads upon, they may keep tan the more firmly «eft. wÜas a Horfe and oth« four-footed Beaftshav.ng.four Feet „gn the around have no need of fo broad nor large a Foot, and do therefore go fit weVeuron Tip-toes, their Heels reaching as h.gh up the Leg as to MSfö t^matebut ahnynauadruped, as a Dog or the l.ke,
ftand upright lifting up his Fore-feet, and you may obferve all that part of his introni the Hough downwatds to lie upon the ground as a Mans or ns a-cg uuui li»-i 5 :n their ordinary gate tread upon Foot does; yeafome as CongsjBfe in the™£ ¥J ^ into ^
whets tel^haU2rStba« arifes a difference as to the
? ïw^7imMdiattly or mediately) above it, as may be ob-
or fome other Part Ommeaiaicry j ferved by the foregoing à^^^M^^ll^&oia^
ThusthofeMute^^
the Hip-bone, Share-bone, or j Share-bones, or elfe
wife thofe that move the Leg, ar le ttom F which ^ ^
tm £ "n^hustó^toïe to move all that part of
above it ; and ttoW , H k f ing from and he upon the the I^orF^wh^g^^^PJy^ ^ andthe Parts above the Ho*^^^*J (which ^ rly be cal- f lantans which is at tne aoje or cue v, v ' uut rather
led a Mufcle neither for * > very ^-^^S^Sffild. hi-
limmentous) for otherwife onely the lendons or tnc «oK themoS :ftïe"-OV(for( fo weVl. call it for di- J-j-J
cording to me motion o _/ ^ fa drawn ds and for ^^
fhnftions fake. ) Firit, it isjeme
warH To perform which motion tnere arc;i« ö It Tibixu«
firftof which is caUed 75tor «M or the forward Leg-mufcle^ fo amFc„,.
|
||||
|
j^2 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
named from the fituation of it, which is upon the fore-part of the Leg-
bone towards its outer fide. It arifes fliarp and flefhy. from the upper ap- pendix of the Leg-bone, cleaving clofe to it all along as it defcends, and towards the bottom of it, it turneth by degrees to a Tendon, which paf- fing under the Griffie that compafleth about the next Joint or Hock, is • divided into two or more Tendons that are inferted into the forefide of the Inftep-bone, which ( together with the reft of the Foot ) it moves forward and upward. 2. peronaeus Xhe next is called Veronaius amicus, becaufe it arifes in Man from that anticu5. gQne op tj^e j^eg tji[at - cajjec[ ferone or Fibula, and therefore it is im- properly fo called in an Horfe that wants that Bone, and in whom it fprings from the upper appendix of the Tibia, and defcending downwards with a flefhy body till it come almoft to the bottom of this Bone, it turneth into a Tendon as the former did, which Tendon pafTeth down by the outfide of the Hock, and is inferted into the outfide of the Inftep- bone, which with the reft of the Foot it moves forward and fomewhat outward. It u extended The Foot is alfo Extended, that is, when the Inftep-bone is drawn by three, kackwarc|Sj which motion is performed by three Mufcles : of which the i. Gaflro- f5rfj; j[s called Gemellus externus, or Gajlrocnemius extemus. This in Men £"ren™us ex" makes the greateft part of the Calf of the Leg. It takes its rife broad and flefhy from the inner head of the Thigh-bone at the lower end of it, and alfo from the outward head of the fame Bone, for it hath a double be- ginning ; which two heads defcending for a while apart, they begin to be united into one about the middle of the Leg-bone, after which they both turn into one entire, broad, ftrong and nervous Tendon, which unites with the Tendon of the following Mufcle called Gajlrocnemius in- ternus, and both are inferted into the Heel-bone. 2. Gafiro- The fecond Extender ofthe Foot is called Gajlrocnemius jnternus. This «£«!" '" Mu^e tyeth fomething under the former, arifing from the hir der-part
of the upper end of the Leg-bone with a flrong, nervous beginning, and growing tendinous toward the lower end of the Bone unites witu the Tendon of the foregoing, and is inferted into the Heel*bone with it as aforefaid. 5. Plantari*. The third and laft is called Tlantaris, or the Mufcle of the Soal or Tread. This arifes flefhy, round and flender between the former two, taking its beginning from the back-part of the lower head of the Thigh- bone. After it hath defcended a little way down the Leg-bone it becomes a flender ro.und Tendon, which running between the Tendons of the former two and joining very clofely with them defcends down to the Heel-bone, wrhere it leaves them and proceeds along the back-part of the Inftep-bone and the two Pafterns, and terminates within the Foot, fpreaa- ing all about the bottom of it, making that Part which is called the boa! of the Foot in Men, and in Horfes that Part that lieth next under the Soal, and is plain to be feen when we have drawn the Soal of the Foot out. the Tendons It is the Tendons of thefe three Mufcles that make that ftrong and 0^cfsthree thick Tendon by which Butchers hang up their Meat, which by reafon make the of its greatnefs and fingular ftrength is called Chorda magna. It is alfq ch 8Ida r^ls Tendon running down the back-part of the Leg, which we call the back Sinew, which being affe&ed either by a ftrain or bruife or other ac cident, caufes fo great a pain, by«reafon of the fenfiblenefs of the Ten When it Is hurt, the Horfe many times falls exceeding lame, though acci-
|
|||||
|
*
|
|||||
|
Book IV. Of the Mufcles. 193
accidents are not fo dangerous to life in Horfes as they are faid to be in
Men; for we make no difficulty, in curing them, efpecially if prefently taken in hand, but Chirurgeons do molt times conclude Wounds of this Part in Men to be very dangerous by reafon of their frequent falling into convulfions thereupon. The Foot is alfo moved fomewhat fideways, m. inward and outward, tt u moved
bv two Mufcles. The 'firfi of which is called Tibialis poflkus. Thisf^' hl fpringeth from the upper end of the Leg-bone, from whence it defcends 1. Tibialis among the before-named hinder Mufcles till it come to the Inftep-joint, Poftïcus- where it becomes tendinous, and from thence runs down the inner fide of the Inftep-bone and Patterns, till it come to the Soal of the Foot, into which it is inferted. Its ufe is to move the Foot obliquely inward. The fecond is called Teronaus poflkus ( improperly in an Horfe. ) It *; *™
arifes from the upper and hinder-part of the Leg-bone by a nervous and v ftrong beginning, from whence it defcends all along the outfide of the Bone cleaving firmly to it, untili it reach its middle, where it becomes tendinous, and defcends with the Tendon of the Teronaus ant kus on the outfide of the Inftep-joint or Hock, but is not joined with it ; for it con- tinues its courfe further untili it reach the Foot, into the bottom of which it is implanted. This moves the Foot contrary to the former, viz. obliquely outward. The Patterns and Coffin-jokit are lifcewife hended, or extended by their The Faftent
proper Mufcies. The Benders are two, of which the frjl is called Flexor jg£ ^f£„. lonfus or the Long Bender. This arifes from the upper and hinder-part ded by two of the'Leg-bone, about the middle whereof it becometh tendinous, andfgj^ defcends on the inner fide of the Hough down the Inftep-bone and Pa ìongus. items into the Coffin-joint. The fecond is called Flexor hrevis, the Short Bender. It fprings from 2. Flexor
the infide of the Heel-bone a little below the Hock, and has the fame in-bre™' fertlon with the former. Thefe bend the Patterns and Coffin-joint by drawing them backward. , r n ■ ,ltl * *r- r
The Extenders are alfo two. Thefrfl'is called Longus Jenjor, or They me ex-
the Long Extender. It arifes from the fore and inner fide of the Shank ?"££«*"• iuft under thé Stifle, and defcends on the fore-fide of that Bone, the In-1. Extenfof ■ ïtep-bone and the Patterns, and is inferted into the fore and upper part of i°ngus- the Coffin-joint.
The fecond arifeth from the fore-part of the annular Ligament that a. Extenfof
binds about the Inftep-joint, and defending-under the former has thebrcvis- fame insertion. Thefe two extend the Patterns and Coffin-joint by draw- ing them forward. xaVi • 1 r -i ■ Thus I am come to the end of the Treatife of the Mufcles, in defcnbmg
of anv of which if I have erred, I hope the Apology with which I prefa- ced this fourth Book will obtain my excufe with all ingenuous Men : and as for the morofe and carping, I ffiall take it as a favour from them, if inftead of railing at random, they will take the pains to demonltrate mv miftakes. 3 Table XXXIV.
Reprefents an Horfe with his hinder-part toward you, that the Muf-
cles of his Buttocks, &c. may be the plainer (een. AA Shew the Cucullaris or Monk's Hood.
B The edge of the Deltoides of the Thigh, ^
|
||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
C The Gluteus minor or leffer Buttock Mufcle.
DDD The Gluteus medius or middle Buttock Mufcle.
EE The Gluteus major or greater Buttock Mufcle.
F The Biceps.
GG The Seminervofus of both Legs.
HHH The Lividus or Pe&inalis of both Tlind-legs.
I The Semimembranous.
K The Orbicularis or orbicular Mufcle of the Lips.
L A portion of the Longiffimus dorfi.
M The circular Mufcle of the Nofe.
N The fphintter Mufcle of the Fundament.
O The Maftoides on the other fide the Neck.
P The Mufculus lateralis or Manforius, being one of the Mufcles of the
Cheeks.
QThe Mufculus fcalenus or Triangularis. R The Com plexus or Trigeminus. S The Tranfverfalis Colli or tranfverfe Mufcle of the Neck. T The Spinatus Colli being one of the Extenders of the Neck. V Vaftus externus.
WW Gaftrocnemius externus.
X Peronsetis anticus. Y Perqnasus poflicus.
|
||||||
|
The Eni of the Fourth Boo^.
|
||||||
|
T H E
|
||||||
|
(m)
|
|||||||||||||
|
THE
|
|||||||||||||
|
ANATOMY
|
|||||||||||||
|
OF AN
|
|||||||||||||
|
HORSE.
|
|||||||||||||
|
BOOK V.
Of the Boner.
|
|||||||||||||
|
CHAP. I.
Of the nature, definition, differences and parts of Bones,
|
|||||||||||||
|
TH E Bones are by a learned and ancient Philofopher com-
pared to the Carkafe of a Ship, to which the reft of the Parts are faftned and whereupon they are fuftained. Thefe afford {lability, ftreightnefs and form to each Part and to the whole. The knowledge of them is raoft neceflàry ; for without it we mud needs be ignorant of the originals and infertions of the Mufcles; and upon fra&ures or diflocations of them, it were very unlikely that any fhould fet them right again without the knowledge of their fhapes, and the manner of their jointing one with another. A Bone is faid to be a fimilar Part, the driefi and coldefl of all the the definition
refit rnade of the mofl earthy and tart areous part of the Seed in thetf'* Sone' Womb, (i. e. of the Humour in the Ovum or Conception) and is nou- riihed with the like particles of Bloud after the birth, and moiftned with the Marrow contained in it. Dd In
|
|||||||||||||
|
ip6 The Anatomy of an Hor le.
the material In which defcription the word [Seed~] is to be interpreted as we have in-
and efficient timated,and not of the Male and Female's Seed mixed together in the Womb,
'ion" ^ a as tne Ancients conceived ; for it is certain that the Female hath no true
Seed, and that the Male's being onely an aclive principle of generation,
affords nothing of matter to the Parts of the Foetus, but onely impregnates
the Ovum, as ihall be (hewed more at large when I come to fpeak to the
Generation of Animals. Thus the Male's Seed is no material caufe at all
of the Bones, but onely a remote efficient caufe of them as it is of other
Parts of the Body ; of all which the plaftick or formative power that is
feated in the Ovum it felf, is the immediate efficient.
iheir diffe- As to tne differences of Bones, they are many, as being divided or di-
rences. ftinguifhed feveral ways. And firft from their hardneis, or foftnefs :
thus the lower parts of the Temple-bones are called Tetro]a, ftony Bones,
and fuch are alio the Bones of the Teeth. Others are in refpect to thefe,
foft ; fuch are the fpongy Bones of the Nofe, and thofe which are called
appendices to any Bone. And laflly of a mean fubftance between thefe
may be reckoned all the reft of the Bones.
They are:again divided or diftinguifhed by their magnitude; thus fome
are efteemed great, fome little, and fome of a moderate fize betwixt both. Alfo they are divided by their figure ; fome being plain, fome round ;
fome have three fides, others four; fome are like a Boat, fome a Cup; fome like a Hammer, an Anvil, or a Stirrop, fuch are the Auditory Bones. They are alfo diftinguifhed from their fituation, connexion, cavity,
fenfe, and upon feveral other confederations, which it would be tedious further to profecute. iheir Parts: Again, .the Bones are many of them divided into three pans -, firft, that part whereof the body of the Bone confifteth ; fecondly, the part that groweth to the Bone ; thirdly, the bunching part of the Bone : of which the firft hath no proper name belonging to it, but is called by the name of the whole Bone ; the fecond being that part that groweth to the Bone is properly called Epiphyfis, the Appendage; and that part that bunches out beyond the plain furface, is called Apophyfis, or the Procefs. How many In relation to this difcourfe of the Bones we iliall divide the Body into E ^'he tnree Parts' Vlz- tne Head,, the Trunk and the Limbs. By the Head is implied both Head and Neck. The firft and uppermoft Part of the Head is the Skull, called Cranium, becaufe it is as it were Cranos an Hel- met to the Brain. It is compounded of feveral Bones to the number of fifteen or feventeen in Humane Bodies, fay moft Anatomifts, that is, in all, as well little as big ; for of the large ones there are but nine, three of which are common to the Skull with the upper Jaw-bone, which are the Wedge-like Bone or cuneiforme, the Yoke-bone, and Jpongiofum-, the fpongy or Sieve-like Boae^ The other fix are proper Bones and make up the Skull it felf; and thofe are the Fore-head Bone, the Noll-bone, the two Bones of the Synciput, and the two Temple-bones, in which laft are contained ( in each of them ) three fmall Bones, of which we have alrea- dy treated where we fpoke of the Parts of the Ear in the third Book at Chap. 14. namely the Hammer, the Anvil and the Stirrup, all which make up the faid number of fifteen Bones of the Skull ; to which it we add the lately found-out Bone of the Ear, called the orbicular Bone, there will be feventeen. Now the larger Bones are divided or diftinguifhed by feveral
|
||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. ipj
feveral Seams called Sutures, and both Bones and Sutures are of the fame
number in this Animal we are treating of as in Men, as may be feen by the following Figure. Table XXXV.
Reprefents the Sutures or Seams of the Skull of a young Foal newly
foaled, which in a grown Horfe are not fo difcernible. Figure I.
Shews the Sutures of the top and fides of the Skull.
AAA The firfi Suture called Coronalis, or the Coronal Suture.
BB The fecond proper Suture called the Lamhdoidal or Lambdoides. CCC The third proper and true Suture called the Sagittal or Sagittalis. DD The firfl counterfeit proper Suture, fo called becaufe it is not Saw-like as the other three are ; it is alfo called Squamofa.
EE The fir ft common Suture hy which the lower Procefi of Os frontis is joined with the firfi Bone of the upper Jaw.
F The fecond common Suture hy which the Wedge-like Bone is joined with the faid firfl Bone of the upper Jaw. This is called Cuneifoimis.
G The third common Suture called Cribrofa, which is common to the Wedge-like Bone and the feptum of the No/è.
H The common Suture that divides the Os jugale into two, or hy which it is joined together.
Figure II.
Shews the Sutures of the bottom of the Skufl. AA The common Suture that joins the bottom of Os occipitis to the Os
fphenoides. >
BBBB Some other Sutures that belong to the bottom of the Skull
|
|||||
|
Ddi CHAR
|
|||||
|
log The Anatomy of an Horfe,
■ C H A P. IL
Of the Sutures or Seams of the Head,
A Sunn A Suture is the connexion of one Bone of the Head to another, of
what, and of J^ which there are two forts : the one is plain and linear, like two fhdiT^ boards glewed or ftones cemented together ; the other indented like the teeth of two Saws put tooth within tooth.
the Sutura Of thefe Sutures fome are proper to the Skull alone, and fpme are torn- are proper or mon t0 jc ^jj j-jjg Upper jaw. xhe proper Sutures are again double, The proper that is to fay, true or falfe. Of the former fort are thofe Saw-like ones
are true or before-named, which are three in number, -viz. Coronal, Lambdoidal '*'e' and Sagittal ; and of the latter are the plain ones, which fome reckon to be more, fome fewer.
ime Sutures The firft of the Saw-like ones is called in Humane Skulls Coronalis or Vthe coro- tne Crown-Suture, becaufe the Ancients were wont to wear their Crowns nal. or Garlands in that place. This Suture, as in Men, fo likewife in a Horfe runs overthwart the Skull above the Fore-head, reaching from the
Temple-bone of one fide to the Temple-bone on the other, joining the Os frontii or Fore-head-bone ro the Symiput or Bone of the fore-part of the Head, a. the Lamb' The fecond is called Lambdoides or Lambdoidal Suture, as refembling doidai. -n -ts dimenfion tne Greek letter A lambda. This is feated on the back- part of the Head, being oppofite to the former, beginning at the bottom of the Occiput, from whence it afcends obliquely to either Ear in Men, but in a Horfe fomething above the Ear, running with a more flanting line. It joins the Bone of the Occiput to the Bones of the Synciput and Temples. 3. the Sa- The third runs not overthwart the Head as the two former, but gmal. lengthways of it, reaching in Humane Skulls from the top or middle of the Lambdoidal to the middle of the Coronal Suture onely ; but in Horfes it reaches further (as it does in Children ) crorling the Coronal Suture, and runs afterward down the Fore-head-bone to the Nofe. This is not fo Saw-like in Horfes Skulls as the other two are, as may be feen by the foregoing Figure. It is the laft of the true or Saw-like Sutures, and hath the name of Sagittal, from its ftreightnefs, its courfe being ftreight like an Arrow. The falfe Sh- Next come we to the falfe, counterfeit or baftard proper Sutures, which |
||||||||||
|
I
|
ÌWQ.
|
m are tn°k tnat refemble a Line onely, and are not Saw-like at all. Thefe are
|
||||||||
|
in number two ; the firft of which paflèth from the Root of the Proceffus
mammillaris upwards with a circular Duel, and paflèth downwards again towards the bottom of the Ear, after it hath compaflèd in the Temple- bone. By this Seam are the Bones of the Synciput, Occiput and Sphenot- des joined with the Temple-bones. The fecond of the baftard proper Sutures runs obliquely downwards,
arifing from the fide or rather top of the former, and runs down toward «he Socket of the Eye, to the beginning of the firft common Suture. |
||||||||||
|
The
|
||||||||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. ipp
The common Sutures are thofe that belong not to the Skull alone, but rke common
are common to it with the Wedge-like Bone and the upper Jaw. Of smwes are which thefe that follow are the moit remarkable. Firft, the Frontalis, by which the outer Procefs of the Fore-head-bone »• Frontalis.
is joined with the firft Bone of the upper Jaw. The fecond is that which is called Cuneiformis or Wedge-like, by?, cùneifor-
which the Wedge-like-bone is joined with the firft Bone of the upper mis- Jaw. The third is called Cribrofa, which is common to the Wedge-like- ?• cribrofi.
bone, and the feptum or partition of theNofe. Now the ufes of thefe Sutures or Seams are, firft, to be Vents of the mufeoftbè
Brain, through which the impure and footy excrements might exhale or SHt*t"- evaporate ; fecondly, to help to ftay the Brain from tottering, and its parts from being mifplaced in violent motions, by giving way to the Fi- bres that pafs through them from the Dura mater within, to the Pericra- nium without the Skull, by which Fibres the faid dura mater and alfo the Brain it felf (which is wrapt within it) is kept fufpended as it were, that fo the hardnefs of the Skull might not ofiend it by preffing againft it, nor the Brains owrn weight bear too hard upon the bottom of the Skull, which it would be apt to do were it not for its being thus bom up or fufpended by thefe Fibres that tie the Dura mater to the out fide of the Skull. Thefe Sutures were alfo made for the ingrefs and egrefs of the Vefiels,
for the life and nourifhment of the Parts contained within the SkuJJ. Laftly, that if at any time the Head fhould happen to be broken, the
fracture might not run through the whole Skull, but ftay at the end of the fractured Bone ; whereas were it not for thefe Seams, it would like an earthen Pot with one knock or fall be in danger of being fhivered all 'm pieces, which it is not now fo apt to do, for the crack will not fo eafily pafs over a Seam as it would run along an intire bone. |
||||||||||||
|
CHA P. III.
Of the proper Bones of the Skull
|
||||||||||||
|
T
|
H È Bones of the Skull are of two forts, proper and common. Of The Bona of
the firft in this Chapter ; and of the latter in the next. JfjS «™ |
|||||||||||
|
The proper are in number fix ; one of the Fore-head, another of the won.
hinder-part of the Head or Occiput, two of the Crown, and two of the The troPer Temples, all which are divided or diftinguiflied from one another by the *u before-named Sutures. The Fore-head-bone, called Os frontis, is feated before, and maketh i. tbt Pttè.
the fore-part of the Skull, both above and a little below the Orbit of the head-bone- Eyes. It is bounded before by the Coronal and firft common Suture, on the fides by the Temporal Bones, and on the infide by the fpongy Bones, Betwixt
|
||||||||||||
|
2oo The Anatomy of an Horfe.
its cavities. Betwixt the Lamina or Scales of this Bone at the top of the Nofe there
is a large ( or rather double) Cavity, from whence two holes pafs to thè Noftnls, diftinguiihed by many bony Fibres and fmall Scales, which are encompaflèd with a green Membrane, and contain a foft medullar, or as it were an oylie body. The ufes afcribed to thefe Cavities are various : as firll, to prepare the -
air that is drawn in by the Noilrils, for the generation of animal Spirits; fecondly, to keep for fome time the odoriferous air whereby fmells maybe more leifurably perceived ; thirdly, fome think that they ferve for the collection of flegmatiek Excrements ; and others, laftly, that they affift or promote the Ihrilnefs or echo of the Voice. I will not determine of the truth of any of thefe opinions ; but fhall onely obferve this further, that thefe Cavities are much larger in an Horfe than they are in a Man, even the difference of the bulk of their Bodies confidered. Befides thefe Cavities there is alfo a Den or Sinus made of a double
Scale; one of which being outermoft maketh the upper (inward) part of the Orbit of the Eye, and is plain ; the other maketh the Cavity above the Eyes on either fide, and is not plain, but hath inferiptions anfwerable to the winding convolutions of the Brain, whofe bunching- out portions it receives. its Holes. This Fore-head-bone hath alfo two Holes in the middle part of the Eye-brow, which go to the Orbit of the Eye, by which the firft branch of the Nerve of the fifth conjugation of the Brain goeth to the Mufcle of the Fore-head. its ProceJJes. It hath alfo four Procejfes, two of which are feated at the greater cor- ner of the Eye, and other two at its leiler, all helping to make the upper part of the Orbit. The Bones of Next come we to the Bones of the Sjnciput or fore-part of the Head, the synciput. which are in number two, being joined before with the Bone of the Fore- ?exknm' head by the Coronal Suture, with the Os occipiti* behind, by the Lamb- doidal Suture, on each fide to the Temple-bones by the fcaly Sutures, and to the Wedge-like-bone by one of the common Sutures. They are alfo joyned together, or one to another, in the middle or top of the Head ( lengthways) by a Suture common to them both, called the Sagittal Suture. Their (hope, Theirfigure is almoft four-fquare; theirfuljtance thinner than that of the fubftance,fur- other Bones, yet confili of two plates, fave in their lower edges, where they fho°iesT are joined tothe Temple-bones. On the outfide they are fmooth, but on the infide uneven, having leverai fhaliow Cavities or Dens by the fides of the Sagittal Suture, to which the Dura mater firmly grows; as alfo many long and winding inferiptions or furrows for the Vefiels which run from the internal Jugulars through the faid Dura mater to the Brain. They have likewife feveral perforations or little holes, fome of which indeed penetrate but one Plate, which are for the entrance and exit of the Vefiels that run between the Plates ; but moli run quite through them, and are made for fmall Veins and Arteries to pafs both from within outwards, and from without inwards. the Os occi- Next is the Os occipitis, or Noll-bone, which makes the hinder and P'«s- lower part of the Head, and the middle part alfo of the bafis of the Skull. It is of a very hard fubftance, harder than any Bone of the Skull befides, (except the Os petrofum of the Temple-bones) being thicker at the bot- tom where it is without flefb,, and where the two Sinm of rhe Dura mater
|
||||
|
Book V. * Of the Bones. 201
mater are joined. At the fides of the great perforation (through which
the Spinal Marrow defcends) it is fomewhat thin and without any Cavi- ties or fmall Dens in it ; but that its thinnefs here might be no prejudice to it from the edge of this perforation there afcends on the infide a large Procefs or Prominence running along to its top, to ftrengthen it and arm it againft any accidents that might happen by blows, fife. This Promi- nence it is that diftinguifhes the two Protuberances of the Cerebellum. This Bone is in fhape five-corner'd, by two of which corners it is joined lufl^d
in its upper part to the Bones of the Sjnciput by the Lambdoidal Suture ; " by two other in its fore-fides to the Temple-bones by one of the coun- terfeit Sutures; and by its fifth corner to the Os cuneiforme, or Wedge- 1 It hath in it feveral Sinus's or Chanels, of which fome are on the in- Us si™.
fide and others on the outfide of it. Of thofe on the infiJe there are two' which are pretty large, ordained for the receiving the protuberances orbunchings out of the Cerebellum or After-brain. The others on the la- ude are fome to receive the protuberances of the Brain it felf ; others to receive the two Sinus's of the Dura mater, that they might not be com- prefTed by the Bones of the Skull ; and the reft are for the like ufo. The two that are on the outfide of this Bone, are in its lower part by the fides of the great perforation, of a femicircular ihape. Th;c r™p hath alfo feveral Procefes, four of which being clad with a its Proctfc*
gB^K^dJSl tato fo 4f« of the firft Vertebra of the —. Neck But that is the mofl confiderable which I mentioned before, and ferves' to ftrengthen the Bone. It has Holes to the number of five ; the firft is in the midft of the bottom of the Noll, which is the largeft of all the inward holes of the Head, being in fhape round and fomewhat long, through which the Medulla oblongata or SpinaJI Marrow g^ut of the Skull into the Cavity of the Vertebra: of the Neck The otner lour aie kfs bv far and are made for the tranfition of feveral Veffels The rèmütbones come next to be treated of, which are feated on the the Temiie-
fiterf 3Skull£S reach to the bottom of the Ears. They are joyned on J-J _ their upper part to the outfide of the Bones of the Crown by theSuture cab nexkn. kdSgllofa, or Scale-like. In their fore-part they are joined to the firft Booe'of the upper Jaw, by its firft Procefs ; and their hinder-part is joined to the Otocchitis by one of the counterfeit Sutures. ^Ì^jT^%cmtM^ is m its upper part ample, equal and *r ft**
femicTrcular; but below, itisvery ilmpelefs hke to a -de rugged and unequal Rock, from whence as alfo from its hardnefs it hath its name of r^S^à^^alfo foil of variety ; for at its hTT[t is£fHi'
thfcband ruSed but as it afcends, by degrees it grows much thinner, *«*
and at its tof s fo tl in that it is almoft tranfparent, (efpecial y where ft gives way to the Temporal Mufcle) and like a Scale lies upon the lower edfe of the Bone of the Sjnciput, which Bone in its defcent under the Temole-bone is alfo attenuated. ^ ■ • „ ~,
The Temple-bones have each of them two Sinus or Cavities. The n* s™,
outerof thefePis much larger than the other, ^^^^
or Griftle, feated betwixt the Auditory paflage and the Procels of the Yoke-bone. It is of an indifferent length running as it were ranfverfly or oveXvart, and has the longer Procefs or the head of the lower Jaw Solutori into it. The other Cavity is imr/ at the ** |
||||
|
2 0 2. The Anatomy of an Horfe.
fide of the Procefs of the Yoke-bone, and is common to the Temple-bone
with the Noll-bone. By thefe Sinus or Cavities there (lands a fharp and longifh, and ( in
Horfes) pretty thick ( but in Men far more long and flender ) Appendix,
from its lhape in Humane Bodies called Os ftyloides, the Pen-like Bone.
then Fro- Befides which there are alfo three Procejfes ; two of which are external,
<#'• and one internal.
The firft external is blunt, thick and mort, (faid to be fomewhat hol-
low within ) tending downwards, in fhape fomething like to the Nipple of a Cow, from whence it is called Mammillaris. The fecond of the outward Procefìès runs forward from the hole of the
Ear to the Procefs of the firft Bone of the upper Jaw, both of them fra- ming the Os jugale, or Yoke-bone. For thefe two Procefìès, one of the Temple-bone and the other of the firft Bone of the upper Jaw, being join- ed by an oblong Suture do make the faihion ( as it were ) of a Bridge, or of an Oxes Yoke, from whence that Bone hath its name, and of which we lhall treat further in the next Chapter. os petro- The third Procefs, which is internal, is that which is called the £um- j Rocky-bone. It is pretty long, jetting out to the infide of the bottom mdcaviths. of the Skull, within which it hath two holes, through one of which an Artery, and through the other the Auditory Nerve pafs to the inner Ca- vities of the Ear, which are three in number, namely the Tympanum or Drum, the Lahyrinthus or Labyrinth, and the Cochlea, or Snail-fhelL On the outfide of the Skull this Procefs has three perforations or holes. The firft and largeft of which is called meatus Auditorius, or the hole of hearing. The fecond is narrow, fhort and oblique, near to the firft, by the firft hole of the Wedge-like Bone. Through this the Jugular Vein enters into the inner Cavities of the Skull. The third hole is feated be- twixt the Procerus mammillaris and the Styloides or Pen-like Appendix, ending into that paftage that goes from the Ear to the Mouth. As to the little Bones that lie hid in the Cavities of this Procefs, by ancient Anato- mifts they were reckoned to be but three, but there is by modern Au- thours added a fourth ; and they are commonly known by thefe follow- ing names, viz. Incus, Malleus, Stapes, and Os orbiculare, of all which I have already treated in the fourteenth Chapter of the Third Book, where they are alio lively reprefented in Figures, to which place I refer the Reader for his further fatisfaction ; having not mentioned them in this place, but that they make up the number of the proper Bones of the Skull. |
|||||
|
Table
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the Bòtte s. 20
Table XXXVI.
Shews the feveral Bones of the Skull both proper and common, toge-
ther with the feveral perforations for the outgate and ingate of the Veflels, as many as can be fliewed in two Figures, one fliewing the top and the other the bottom of the Skull. Figure I.
Shews the uppermofi: Bones of the Skullj of the Nofe, and of the upper
Jaw. A A The Bones of the Synciput or fore-part of the Head.
BB The Temple-bones, on which the Temporal Mufcles refi.
MM The Os jugale.
OÓ The common Suture that joins the Fore-head-bone and the Bones of
the upper Jaw together.
DDD The fix Fore-teeth of the upper Jaw. X A hole a little above the upper Gumm, through which do pafi the Palate-
vein and Artery, which branch afterward about the upper Lip. Figure II.
Shews the hinder and lower Bones of the Head, with their perforations. AA The Os occipitis or Noll-bom.
BB The holes through which the fixth pair of Nerves ( formerly fo reckon-
ed) do pafi out of the Skuf/. CC The two holes through which the feventh conjugation of Nerves (of
the fame reckoning) do pafi out of the Skull. DD The holes through which the tafiing Nerves do pafi, which are difper-
fed about the Tongue, the Mufcles of the Os hyoides and feveral other parts within the Mouth. EE The holes by which the external Jugular Veins and Arteries pafi into
the Skull
FF A hole in the Procefi of the Wedge-like Bone called Pterygoides ; feated at the bottom of the Skull.
HH Two holes in the Bones of the Palate. M The hole of the Palate through which the Palate-vein and Artery pafi out of the Mouth to the upper Lip.
OO The holes through which do pafi the Feins, Arteries and Nerves to the. roots of all the Teeth.
PP The holes through which the Optiek Nerves do pafi to the Orbit of the Eyes.
YY The Six Fore-teeth or Shearing-teeth of the upper Jaw. XX The Tufhes, or Dog-teeth. && The holes through which the fifth pair of Nerves do pafi forth of the Skull.
|
|||||
|
E e CHAP.
|
|||||
|
2 04 Tbe Anatomy of an 'Horje.
|
|||||
|
CHAP. IV.
Of the Bones common to the Skjdl and wj$# m.
HAving hitherto treated of the Bones proper to the Skull onely, I
come now to treat of thofe which are common to it with the upper Jaw ; and thefe are in number three, namely, the Os fphenoides or cunei- forme, the Os cribriforme, and the Os jugale. The Wedge- The firfl of thefe is the Sphenoides, or Wedge-like Bone, fo called from like Bone, its fituation, which is betwixt the Bones of the Skull and the upper Jaw, u jitua io. anj not from tne lifcenefs of its figure to that of a Wedge, as fome do believe. It is joined before to the Fore^head-bone, and behind to the Os occipiti*. At the fides it doth a good part of it join to the Os petrofum. Above, it is joined to the firft, fourth and fixth Bones of the upper Jaw ; and below, to the Bones of the Palate of the Mouth. tts Frocejjes. It hath feveral Procejfes, of which fome are external, and fome inter- nal. The internal are four, (landing out like four feet of a Table or Chair, which (taking in the fpace between them) form the Sella Tur- cica. The external are alfo four, of which the two formojt are contigu- ous to the upper Jaw, and are called the Wing-like Procefïês, from the refemblance they have to Bats-wings ; for they are thick in fome place and yet end into a notable thinnefs, almoft as thin and fharp as the edge of a Knife. The two hinder are ftretched out toward the Styloides Procef- fes of the Temple-bones. in cavities. This Bone hath feveral Cavities or hollowneflès ; two of which are common with it and the Temple-bones, and the Bones of the Synciput.
its Holes. It hath alfo many perforations or little Holes to the number of feven on
each fide. One of which being round gives a paflàge to the Optiek
Nerve toward the Eye. The reft are penetrated fome by one, fome by
feveral pairs of Nerves ; others by the Carotid Arteries and Jugular Veins ;
and others again by both Nerves and Bloud-veflèls.
the sieve- The next common Bone of the Head and upper Jaw is the Os cribri-
it?[motion forme> *° called from the feveral or indeed innumerable little holes in it,
Jd 'con- which make it like a Sieve, through which holes the fmells do pais to
nexhn. the Mammillary Procefïês, or Olfa&ory Nerves. It is fituated in the
fore-part of the Skull, between or a little below the Sockets of the Eyes,
under the middle bafis of the Fore-head-bone, and at the upper part of the
Noftrils. It is joined by a plain or fimple line to the Fore-head-bone,
the fecond Bone of the upper Jaw, and to the Os cuneiforme.
Its Faru. This Bone is by fome divided into four parts ; of which the//-/? is a
Procefs in the upper and middle part of it, which is long and triangular,
ending in a fharp point, whence it is called Crifta galli, or the Cock's
Comb. This runs in betwixt the Mammillary Procefïês dividing tliem
one from the other. To its {harp point the Sinus of the Falx &$■■
hereth.
The fecond part of this Bone is that which moft properly is called Os
cribriforme, being perforated all over like a Sieve, fome of which holes are ftreight and fome oblique. They are obferved to be much larger in / Dogs
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. io"5
Dogs than in any other Animal (allowing for the proportion of their Bo-
dies ) which is fuppofed the reafon why their fmell is more exquifite than that of any other Creature. The third part is a Procefs in its lower or under fide oppofite to thd
upper Procefs ; which part divideth the upper part of the Nofe into two Noflrils, whence it is called feptum Na/t, the Partition-bone of the Nofe.
The fourth and laft part of this Bone is compared to a Sponge or Pu-
mice-ftone, being porous and full of fmall cavities, which are filled with a fpongie flefh ; and from this part the whole Bone is by fome called Os fpongiofum. For the names of cribriforme and fpongiofum are confounded one with the other, being either of them given indifferently to the whole Bone But if we will confider the fpongiofum onely as a part of the cri- lr if orme, then we muft fay, that it is that part of it that is feated juft at the top of the Noftrils. Some make two Bones of it, affixing one at the top of each Noftril, and call them in the plural number Ojfafpon- The ufe afcribed to the Os cribriforme by moft Anatomifts hath been its vfu
to difcharge through its pores or holes flegmatiek excrements from the Brain into the Nofe, but he that mall examine them, will find that its holes are fo filled either with the fpongie fleih before-named, or elfe with the Fibres of the fmelling Nerves palling through them to the infide of the Noftrils, that there is no paflàge left for any humour by them. What we therefore account their true ufe to be, the Reader may be in- formed if he pleafe to turn back to the fifteenth Chapter of the Third Book where we treated of the Nofe, and defenbed its ufes : adding to what'is there faid of it, that it makes up the inner corner of the Orbit of the Eye.
The third and laft Bone common to the Skull and upper Jaw is called oi jugate
Osjmale, or the Yoke-bone. This is feated on each fide of the Horfe's Face between the meatus of the Ear or Auditory palTage, and the firft Bone of the upper Jaw ; being framed of two Bones, one of which is a Procefs of the Temple-bone that is carried from the meatus Auditonus, and is the hinder ot them; and the other Bone being the foremore is a Procefs of the firft Bone of the upper Jaw, and which maketh the lower fide of the lefTer or outer corner of the Eye. Thefe two are joined by a flanting or oblique Suture, and being fo joined do conilitute this Bone called Os j* vale Over this Bone runs the Tendon of the Temporal-mufcle, and alfo the Tendon of the Majfeter or Chewing-mufcle, as they pafs to the low- X Some make but two common Bones of the Skull and upper Jaw, not
reckoning this for any particular Bone, feeing (as has been faid) it is SSWrf '*>two Proceflès of ?e TempIe and,upper Ja^on£
But feeing it is diftinguilhed from the others by a particular name (though
not of any peculiar fubftance ) I thought it not abfurd to reckon it for a third common Bone. |
|||||||
|
CHUE
|
|||||||
|
Ée*
|
|||||||
|
2o6 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
|
||||||
|
CHAP. V.
Of the Jaw-bones and their Parts.
m
TH E Bones of the upper and lower Jaws come next to be fpoken to,
with the firft of which we will begin. The boms of This Jaw hath Bones of two forts, the one proper to it felf, and the the upper other common to it and the Skull. The common Bones are the Wedge- 'm' like and Sieve-like Bones, and the Os jugale, of which we have already treated in the foregoing Chapter. I fliall therefore proceed to treat of the Bones proper to the upper Jaw onely, which make the lower fide of the Orbit of the Eye, the Nofe, Cheeks and Roof of the Mouth. i. lygoma- The Bones that conflitute all thefe Parts are twelve in number, on ticum. each fide of the Face fix ; the firft of which is called Zygomaticum, becaufe by its Procefs it makes up the greater! part of the Os jugale. This is feated at, and maketh, the lower part of the outer corner of the Eye. 2. Lachry- The next is a round, little, brittle and thin Bone, feated in the inner male. corner of the Eye, called Os lachrymale, becaufe it has a hole in it through which the ferous humour that makes the tears in Men doth ifïue. Upon
this hole the little Kernel called caruncula Lachrymalis refteth, that hin* dreth the continual gleeting of the forefaid humour. There is alfo in the lower part of this Bone another hole which goes to the cavity of the No- ftril, through which doth pafs a branch of the fifth pair of Nerves to the inner Skin of the Nofe. ?. mnomi- The third is feated in the inner fide of the Eye, and within is conti- natwn. nued with the fungous Bones of the Noftrils. It is broad, and fome- what quadrangular or four-corner'd, alfo thin and tranfparent, like the Scale of a Fifh. On its outfide it is fmooth, but within rugged and une- qual, becaufe of the Scales that cleave unto it. It is joined to four Bones, viz., to the Fore-head-bone, to the Wedge-like Bone, to the fecond Bone of the Jaw, (viz. the next foregoing) and alfo to the fourth, or next fol- lowing. It is not known by any peculiar name ; I have therefore made bold to call it Os innominatum. 4. os mal*, The fourth Bone is called Os mal<z, the Cheek-bone, becaufe it maketh w cheek.- Up the greatefl; part 0f the Cheek, as alfo of the Palate. It likewife con- to connexion, tains the upper Teeth in its cavities or caverns. It is much larger than any other Bone of the upper Jaw, and is circumfcribed with many Su- tures ; for not to mention the Teeth that are inarticulated into it, it abut- teth upon or is joined to feveral Bones. In the firft place it is joined above, on the fide next the Nofe, to the Bone of the Fore-head ; below, to the Wedge-like Bone, and the Bone of the Palate of the Mouth ; before, to the Os lachrymale, and to the fifth Bone that makes the upper part of the Nofe, (which is next to be defcribed ; ) and laftly to its own companion^ viz. the Cheek-bone of one fide to that of the other. lu Holes. This Borie hath three perforations or holes, two of which are under the Orbit of the Eye ; that is, on each fide one, running from the lower part of the Eye outward. Their ufe is to tranfmit or let pafs two branches of the fifth pair of Nerves out of the Orbit of the Eye to the Face, on the Parts whereof they are bellowed. The
|
||||||
|
»
|
||||||
|
Book V: . Of the Bones. 207
The third tit thefe holes is in the Palate, at the backfide of the Grind-
ihg-teeth where both Bones of the Jaw meet. It is prefently divided into two, one of which runneth on one fide of the feptum of the Nofe, and the other on the other, tothe Nofhils, to which tiiere pafs through thefe % holes a fmall Vein anda fmall Artery. It hath alio a den or cavity on each fide, by the. fide'of the Nofe un-
der the Orbit of the Eye, which is covered with a very fine Membrane. This is often full of a mucous or flimy phlegm. . The fifth Bone of the upper Jaw doth with his companion make the <,. the Nop-
bony prominence of the Noie. It is a fmall Bone, in figure almoft four-boK- fquare. It is hard, folid, and reafonable thick, having iiindry fmall per- forations in it. It is joined above to the Fore-head-bone, viz. to its in- its connexion. ternal Procefs. In the fides above it is joined to the firft Bone, and a lit- tle lower to the fourth Bone of this Jaw. In the middle it is joined to its companion/and below to the Griffie^that make the-lower part of the Nofe.
The fixth is that which makes up the Roof of the Mouth, with its 6. net a-
companion ; for you muft reckon every one of thefe Bones double,, one Ute^m. on one fide of the Face, and another on the other. It is a broad Bone, thin and folid, and in the end, where it is rough, it refembleth a femi- circle. It is joined behind to the Wing-like ProcefTes of the Wedge-like Bone, and on the infide, to the Partition-bone of the Noftrlls. It is like- wife joined to the fourth Bone of this Jaw or Cheek-bone, and laftly to his companion or fellow in its back-part. This Bone hath alfo two perforations, on either fide one, running up-
ward and backward to two of the holes of the Wedge-like Bone. The lower Jaw comes next to be treated of, which makes the lower m lower
part of the capacity of the Mouth. This differs from the former in that £*;t#, it is moveable, whereas the upper is not. In fhape it is long and promi- and sinos's. nent. At both the ends of it, there are two Procetfes, which are by fome called Horns. The foremoft of them runs upward, and from a broad ba- ils grows lharp, ending into a cone or point. This point receives the Tendon of the Temporal Mufcle, which Tendon compaflèth it round about, and is ftrongly implanted into it : from whence it is that a luxa- tion of the lower Jaw, becaufe of the diflention of this Tendon that hap- pens thereupon, is very dangerous, and hard to cure. The other being the backward Procefs, is called Articularis, becaufe it
ferves for articulation. This hath a neck and a longifh head, (called Con- dyius) that is covered with a Cartilage for its eafier motion : By this head it is articulated into the Sinus of Os petrofum, that is aliò lined with a Cartilage, and is knit thereto ftrongly by a membranous Ligament. At the fides and roots of thefe ProcefTes it hath fhallow Sinus s or Cavities in its furface, but they are deeper on the infide than on the outfide. The principal ufe of both feemeth to be for the paffage or infertion of the Mufcles. This Bone of the lower Jaw is very hard, and for the moft part very Jtf CavUiet
folid, to make it the flronger. Yet on each fide ( more backward than «* Met. in Men) it hath a Cavity within it, which contains a marrowy juice for its nourifhment. It hath alfo four perforations or holes, of which two are at the roots of the Procefïês, by which a branch of the fifth pair of Nerves, as alfo a Vein and Artery do pafs to the Teeth, The two other holes
|
||||
|
2o8 fbe Anatomy of an Horfe.
holes are in its fore-part by the fides of the Chin, through which two
twigs of the faid fifth branch of Nerves do pafs out again to the lower Lip, and its Mufcles and Skin. The sockets This lower Jaw as well as the upper hath Sockets for the Teeth to Hand of the Teeth. jn> jn number equallto the Teeth, which Sockets are called by the La- tins Alveoli or little Pits. Thefe are digged deep, that the Teeth like fo many Nails might be the firmlier faftned in them. When any of the Teeth fall out of them, (as the Foal-teeth, &c.) in a fhort time they are obliterated, the Jaw becoming fmooth without any pit in it in that place. Table XXXVÏL
Repreferits an Horfe's Head and Jaws as much of them as can be feen
by the Head Handing with one fide towards us ; and (hews thofe Bones which could not fo well be feen in the foregoing Table, where the Head is reprefented in one Figure with the top, and in the other, with the bottom of it towards us. Figure I.
À The Temple-hone on which the Temporal Mufcle ù place J.
B A hole in the Skull through which doth pafiforth from the Brain a fmall
Nerve, which is difperfed about the top of the Skull. DD The Bones which make the top of the No/e.
HH The Os jugale.
F The hole through which doth pafi a branch of the Nerve of the fifth con-
jugation, which furnifbeth the Mufcles of the upper Lip and alfo the Mufcles of the Noflrils with Nerves. L The round produtlion of the upper Jaw, which produfHon ù called
cervix. M The Auditory Paffage or hole of the Ear.
N The Mammillary Procefi of the Temple-bone.
OOO The lower Jaw-bone.
P The hole where the Nerve of the fifth pair comes forth, which Nerve
furnijheth the Mufcles of the lower Lips with twigs from it. Qjfhe Produttion of the lower Jaw, which doth articulate into the
upper. K The Noll-bone,
Figure ÏÏ.
Reprefents the Skull and upper Jaw onely, the lower Jaw being remo-
ved, the better to lhew the feveral perforations in the fide of the bot- tom of the Skull, which perforations or holes in the other Figure are hid by the articulation of the lower Jaw. A The hole by which the Nerve pajfes from the Brain to the upper Jaw.
E A hole whereby a fmall Nerve doth pafi from the Brain, which is diflri- luted upon the bottom of the Occiput, and other Parts at the bottom
of the Skull.
|
|||||
|
F A
|
|||||
|
I
|
||||||||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. 20^
F A hole by which a branch of the external Jugular Vein and Artery doth
. pafi to the Brain.
' G A hole through which do pafi the fixth pair of Nerves, according to Dottor Willis,
H The hole through which the Optiek Nerves do pafi from the Brain to ' the Eyes.
I A hole through which do pafi another pair of Nerves, which branch into the Mufcles of the Tongue, and alfo fend twigs to the Mufcles of the Ears. K The hole where the Palate-vein comes forth. M Another hole through which doth pafi a finali twig of the external Ju-
gular Vein and Artery up to the Brain. O The Auditory Pajfage. Q_ A hole through which a fmall Nerve doth pafi from the Brain to be Ji- ftributed about the top of the Skull.
S The hole where the Nerve of the fifth pair comes forth of the upper Jaw after it hath fumijhed the roots of the Grinding-teeth with Nerves, from whence it marches towards the lower Lip, where it is difperfed amongfl the Mufcles thereof. XX Two other holes in the bottom of the Skull through which do pafi other conjugations of Nerves, which are difperfed about the Head, Face and Mouth. |
||||||||||
|
CHAP. VI.
Of the Figure, Magnitude, Number and Articulation of
the Teeth. |
||||||||||
|
TH E Teeth are called in Latin Dentes, quafi Edentes, from eating. The Teeth.
They are of a very hard fubftance, yea, harder than any of the JJj'^^J other Bones in the whole Body. That part of them that Hands out above Vejfeh. « the Gumm, is fmooth and free from any covering ; but that part that is within the Sockets of the Jaws is more rough and covered with a thin Membrane or Periofieum, which Membrane is of exquifite fenfe. Thofe fort of them which we call the Grinding-teeth, have a manifeft Cavity within, but theIncifores (or Fore-teeth) and Dog-teeth have but very ob- fcure ones. Into thefe Cavities by the very fmall holes that are in the roots of the Teeth, are received (into each Tooth) a Capillary Artery from the Ca- rotides, alfo a fmall Vein from the Jugulars, and a twig of a Nerve from the fifth pair ; which Nerve being expanded through the thin Membrane that inverts the faid Cavity, gives it a moil acute fenfe ; whereas the bo* ny part of the Tooth is of it felf infenfible. Thefe Vefìèls before-mentio- ned, namely, the Vein, Artery and Nerve, are united together and cloathed with a common Coat when they enter the Jaw, within which they have a proper chanel to run along in under the roots of the Teeth, to each of which roots they fend fmall twigs as they pafs by, as aforefaid. |
||||||||||
|
As
|
||||||||||
|
21 o The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Three forts of As in Men, {o in Horfes, there are three kinds of Teeth, namely, Inch
them. fores, Canini and Molares. The Incifores, Cutters or Shredders are thofe !. mei ores. ^ ^ ^ pòre-teeth from their being feated in the fore-part of the Jaw. They are fharp-edged like a Knife, and broad alfo, that they may the better bite off or crop the Grafs, &c. They are in number twelve, that is to fay, in each Jaw fix. They have each but one root or phang, though that root is indifferent large, moll times larger than any one of the phangs of the great or Grinding-teeth. t. canini. The next to thefe are thofe which in Horfes we call the Tujbes, but in Men they are called the Dog-teeth or Canini, not onely becaufe in fi- gure they are like the Teeth or a Dog, and fland out of the Gumms as Dog's-teeth do ; but from their ufe alfo, which is to gnaw upon and break (with their iharp points) what is too hard for the Foreteeth to cut or fhear in funder. The roots of thefe as of the former are fingle, having but one phang. %, Molares. Thofe of the third rank, are the double Teeth, which are called Ma- tures, or Grinders, becaufe the Meat is broken or ground by them, even as Corn is ground by the Mill-ftone. Thefe are in Horfes twenty- four in number, in each Jaw twelve. Their feat is in the inner part of the Mouth, being environed in their outfide by the Cheeks, left the bro- ken or fhredded Meat, being rowled by the Tongue upon the Teeth, mould flip over them out of the Mouth, before it be iüfficiently ground. How to know The two, foremoft of thefe Teeth, (landing next to the Dog-teeth or ^Tb h*" ^umes* are tn°fe by which the age of an Horfe is known till after {even. Teeth. 3 * years old, and that by their unevennefs at the top, having feveral little thin fhells or fcales as it were flicking up round the outfide of the top of them, whereby their middle part is made to appear hollow ; which hol- lownefs where it is found, is a certain fign of the Horfe's being under feven years of age. And it is alfo to be obferved, that the nearer the Horfe comes to that age, the more doth that hollownefs grow out by de- grees : fo that when he comes to be full feven years old it is quite obli- terated, and fo the Horfe's age to be no more known by that fign, being pafl the mark in the Mouth as we fay : for by the perpetual ufe that the Horfe makes of his Teeth, the before-mentioned Shells at the top of them, which caufe their hollownefs, are worn down even with the other parts of the Teeth, fo that the whole top of the Tooth becomes even, fmooth and plain. Neither are the refi of the Grinding-teeth without fome hollownefs or
at leafl roughnefs in their tops; but this is of a different nature from the other : which roughnefs or unevennefs is very neceffàry, for by it they are made more fit for the comminution of the Meat : For as Millers when their Milftones are grown fmooth, do pick them anew, to make them grind the better; fo hath Nature made the upper part of thefe Grinding-teeth, elegantly to imitate the rough fuperfkies of a Mu- floné, having here and there formed little pits in them. We fhall riot need to fliew the ufes of thefe, or of either the foregoing forts of Teeth,, that being intimated fufEciently in the defcription of them. |
|||||
|
Table
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones.
|
|||||||||
|
Table XXXVIII.
Shews the upper and lower Jaw feparated from one another and pla-
ced fideways, with fo much of each Jaw broken off as till one come to 'the roots of the Teeth, to fhew how the Nerves branch into the ends of the roots of each Tooth. |
|||||||||
|
Figure I.
ÀA The Shearers or Fore-teeth.
BB The two Productions of the lower Jaw which articulate into the tip-
per Jaw. CC The Procefi into which the Temporal Mufcle is inferted. D A hole through which doth pafì a branch of the external Jugular Vein and Artery.
E A hole through which doth pafi the Nerve that furnifheth the Teeth with twigs from it as it paffeth along, (being a branch of the fifth pair) which trunk doth afterwards lofe it felf about the Lips, fur- nijhing all the Mufcles of the Lips and Nofe with Nerves. E^> C Note that this Nerve in the upper Lip is that which Farriers do improperly (and by amifiake) call the Cord, which they many times take up with a Cornet and cut infunder to prevent a Horfe from flumbling ; believing that the faid Cord reaches from the tip of the Nofe where they cut it, down to the Fore-legs and fo to the Feet, by which they imagine that the Horfé's Head is fo bound down, that he cannot have the freedom of it, which caufes him to flumble. This fancy how ridiculous foever, is common amongfl Farriers, and is owing merely to their ignorance of the Parts ; for it reaches no farther than from the Brain to the Lips : fo that the cutting of it is likelier to hinder the motion of the Lips than to remedy flumbling. ) ' R A little'hole through which doth pafi a Nerve from the Brain to the
Pericranium.
T The fame hole in the upper Jaw, as the letter E points to in the lower, through which the Nerve which they call the Cord, doth pafl to the Lips.
S The Tufhes or Dog-teeth of the lower Jaw. V The Auditory Paffage or hole of the Ear.
Y One of the Tufhes of the upper Jaw.
1x3456 The Grinding-teeth. OOOO The Nerve that fends twigs to the roots of the Teeth of the lower
Jaw, being the firft branch of Doltour Willis his fifth pair. |
|||||||||
|
Ff CHAP.
|
|||||||||
|
•s
|
|||||||||
|
212 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
CHAP. VII.
Of the Bone of the Tongue called Os hyoides. |
|||||||||||||||
|
o* hyoides. 'TP H AT Bone which is called Os hyoides, is of the fhape of a Greek
& figure «ni £ v (ypjnon) ancj js featecj under (or at the root of ) the Tongue, being as it were the foundation'and fupporter of it. It is compounded of three Bones, viz. one in the middle, ( being larger than the other two) which is gibbous forwards ( or outwards ) and fomewhat hollowed in- wards ; by its gibbous fide it is joined to the bafis or bottom of the Tongue : The other two Bones are lateral, and are called Cortina, or Horns. To the firft Bone there are affixed two Griftles, and to each of thefe one. They are all tied to the adjacent parts, partly by a fle/hy, partly by a nervous fubftance. It hath three Sinus or Cavities ; above, a tranfverfe depreflèd Sinus, to admit the fecond pair of Mufcles proper to it ; and in the fides of this Sinus there are two other, which give way unto the firft pair of Mufcles that are implanted into the fides of this Bone. iti pfe. The ufe of this Bone (although it be but a little one) is very great; for mod if not all the Mufcles that move the Tongue either are inferted
into it or arife from it. It ferves alfo to keep the Throat open, admitting the Epiglottis or Throat-flap into its bofom, when it is lifted up in breath- ing. And laftly fome of the Mufcles of the Larynx or Throttle arife from it. |
|||||||||||||||
|
C H A P. VIII.
Of the Bones of the Neck,-
|
|||||||||||||||
|
H
|
ving treated of the Bones of the Head, we come in the next place
to fpeak to thofe of the Meek, which, in dividing the Body into |
||||||||||||||
|
three Parts at the beginning of this Fifth Book, (viz. the Head, Trunk
and Limbs) we considered as annext to the Head. Its Bones are of two forts, viz. the Collar or Chanel-bones, and the Fertebrte. But firft of the Collar-bones, ne collar- Thefe are in number two, one on each fide. They are called Clavi- fMan£7ndCfl^' eitner fr°m fheir refembling the fhapeofold-falhionedKeys, which «$>. ' were of the ihape of an Italick ƒ; or becaufe they lock up as it were and clofe the Cheft ; for by fome they are accounted as belonging to it. Their fubftance is fpongy and thick, efpecially about their heads ; but in their middle they are thin and flat. By one end they are joined to the töp,öf the Breaft-bone, and by the other to the firft Rack-bone of the Back, wherein they differ from thofe in Man, which are jointed into the
|
|||||||||||||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. 213
the Procefs of the Shoulder-bone. Their ufe is to uphold the Shoulder-
blades, that they mould not Aide down upon the Bread together with the Shoulder-bone, which upon a dislocation or fratture of thefe Collar- bones doth often come to pafs. The number of the Vertebra or Rack-bones of the Neck is feven, and t« ver».
they are reckoned from the Head downward ; that next the Head being jjjg 'teheil the firft. They have in each of them a large Cavity as thofe of the Back nmber and and Loins have, to give way to the Spinal Marrow to defcend by. Be-*■**• fides this large hole which is common to thefe with thofe others, they have alfo each of them two other fmaller holes in their tranfverfe Procef- tes through which the Cervical Veins and Arteries do pafs to the Head. And betwixt their jointing one with another there is a third hole, or ra- ther half of one, for one half is formed out of the lower fide of the upper, and the other out of the upper fide of the lower Vertebra : By thefe the Nerves pafs out from the Spinal Marrow. The firft of thefe Bones is called Atlas, becaufe in Men the Head the firjì de-
Hands upon it like the Globe of the World, as the Poets feigned Atlas tofcr,kd- bear the Celeftial Globe upon his Shoulders. The body ol this Bone is , more flender, but folider than the reft, and it wanteth its hinder Procefs or Spine, having onely a kind of a femicircular knob jetting out inftead of it : the reafon of which feems to be, left, the greater ftreight pair of Muf cles of the Head that fpring from the fecond Vertebra of the Neck and march over the back-fide of this, Ihould be hurt in bending the Head for- wards But it has all its other ProcelTes, viz. afcending, defending and tranfverfe. Within on the fore-fide of its great Foramen, it has a Sinus,. in fliape femicircular, which is lined with a Cartilage or Griftle, and which receiveth the Tooth-like Procefs of the fecond Vertebra. The fecond Vertebra is called Dentata, becaufe out of its upper /Ide, J* g«J
between its two afcending ProceiTes, there fpnngs an Appendix or Pro- bei cefs round and long, like the Dog-tòoth in Man (or Tuflt in a Horfe ) This Tooth is covered with a Cartilage, and is jointed into the forefaidI Sinus of the firft Vertebra, and upon: it, as upon an Axle-tree, the head turns round, from whence the whole Bone is called by iomtAxu. That part of the Tooth which enters not into the faid Sinus (viz. its ba- fis) isencompaffed with a Ligament, which knits it to the'.Occiput. This and the four following have Spines or hinder ProceiTes, each of which.are divided into two for the better connexion of the Ligaments and Mufcles to them We ihall not need to defenbe particularly any more of them, feeing they are in all things like to the fecond, faving that their lateral ProcdTes are larger, and divided into two as well as the hinder : yea the feventh it felf differs not from the reft, though in Man it do. The bodies of thefe Vertebra of the Neck are longer than thofe of the
Back or Loins ; for though the Neck of an Horfe be of fo confutable length, yet as hath been faid its Vertebra are but feven (as they are in Man) whereas thofe of the Back and Loins are twenty lour in all, which fpace notwithstanding is not fo long again as the Neck is ; whereas were the Vertebra of a proportionable length, it Ihould be more than three times the length. |
|||||
|
F f 1 Table
|
|||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
|
||||||
|
Table XXXIX.
Reprefents the feven Vertebra of the Neck all joined together in one
Figure. They are placed fo, as that the firft Figure ihews their fides, the fecond their back-parts, and the third their fore-parts. Figure I.
A Shews a hole through which a Iranch of the internal Jugular Vein and
Carotid Artery comes forth of the firfl Vertebra, having ent red the
fame Vertebra at the hole marked with the letter F.
B A hole in the f aid Vertebra out of which doth pafi the firft Nerve from
the Spinal Marrow without the Skull, which Nerve marches ftreight
to the leforefaid Vein and Artery and joins it felf with them, and
runs their courfe both up to the Head and down to the Body, there
being an afcending and a defcending branch of it for that purpoje.
C D E The ends of the f aid Vein, Artery and Nerve where they were
cut off with the feventh Vertebra from the Trunk of the Body.
F The hole in the firft Vertebra by which the Vein and Artery ent red the [aid Bone, and come out again at the letter A.
P The hole betwixt the firft and fecond Vertebra, through which doth pafi the fecond pair of Nerves of the Spinal Marrow.
HH QJl ST The reft of the holes in the other fix Vertebra, through which the Jugular Vein and Artery ^ and the Spinal Nerves do pafi in and out. I. 2. 3. 4. $• 6. 7. The feven Vertebra: of the Neck. Figure II. Shews the back-fide, and Figure III. the fore-fide of the
faid Vertebra. |
||||||
|
CHAP.
|
||||||
|
Book V". Of the Boner,, 215
|
|||||
|
CHAP. IX.
Of the Vertebrae of the Back, and Loins 5 and of the Ribs. TH E Back confifteth of feventeen Vertebra or Rack-bones, juft f0 the b«c\
many as there be Ribs on a fide, for on each fide of every Rack- ha,h feven' bone is there a Rib articulated. But feeing, as we have faid, the Col- br™#VarK" lar-bone is inferted into the firft Vertebra of the Back, it will fo fall out that the laft Rib will be articulated into that Vertebra which we reckon for the firft of the Loins : into which the Rib indeed is fo jointed, that it is not eafy to fay whether it be into the top of this, or into the lower end of the feventeenth of the Back. The Bodies of the Racks as well as their iheh Bodies Procejfes do differ fomewhat from the Bodies and Procejfes of the Racks "Pf F.rM€e* of the Neck ; for the Bodies of the Racks of the Neck are longer than f thefe, and more flat on their infide, that the Gullet might reft the more fecurely on them : and as for their Procejfes, the hinder are not cleft into two as thofe of the Neck are, and the tranfverfe ones are more Ihort and blunt, having (inftead of the holes that are in thofe of the Neck) each a mallow Sinus, into which the Ribs are partly articulated. But the Pro- cejfes are in both of an equal number, namely four oblique ones, ( that is, two tending obliquely upwards, and two obliquely downwards) two tranfverfe or lateral ones, and one acute or hinder one, which is called the Spine. The Bodies of thefe Vertebra are not fo folid as thofe of the Neck, but
they are more bulky or thicker about, and are full of fmall perforations for the admiflion of the Bloud-veflêJs to the Spinal Marrow, and befides have two at each Joint for the egrefs of the Nerves from the Spinal Mar- row. They have each of them on each fide a Sinus or Cavity for the inarticulation of the head of the Rib, which Sinus thofe of the Neck want, as having no Bones to joint into them. Note that the tranfverfe Proceflès of two or three of the loweft of thefe
Racks begin to grow fhorter and ihorter, and their Spines are more blunt, and ftand evener out, declining not fo much downwards as thofe before-going. As for the great Cavity or Perforation in the middle of the Bodies, it is proportionable to the Marrow which it contains. Next to the Bones of the Neck we come to thofe of the Loins, which the uim
make the third part of the Spine. They are in number feven, and are h^/^s bigger than any of the fore-going either of the Neck or Back. Their pZe&, 'ani hinder Proceflès or Spines are Ihorter, but broader and thicker than thofe "»>»«»«»• of the Back, fomewhat bending upwards as moft of thofe decline down- wards ; but as for the lateral or tranfverfe Proceflès, they exceed thofe of the Back in length. Thefe Vertebra are joined one to another by a clammy Griftle, and likewife the uppermoit of them to the laft of the Back, and the loweft to the firfl of Os facrum in like manner. Befides their lateral Perforations betwixt their jointings for the tranf-
miffion or letting forth of the Nerves, they have alfo feveral other little holes for the intromiffion of the Bloud-veflels. As for their middle Per- foration, nothing need be faid particularly of it, feeing it differs not from that
|
|||||
|
2 io The Anatomy of an Horfe.
that of thofe of the Back, being of capacity equal to the thicknefs of the
Marrow that it contains. jhe Ribs are The Ribs (in Latin Coflaz) are in number thirty four, that is to fay,
feventesn, on each flcje feventeen. Their fubftance is partly bony, and partly car- tilaginous or griftly ; the firft ferving for firmnefs, and the latter for ar- ticulation, that upon occafion they might yield a little without breaking. They are divided into two forts, the one called true, and the other the Nine true. BafiarJ-nbs. The true are the nine uppermoft, fo called becaufe each with its fellow makes a compleat circle, being joined together by the me- diation of the Spondyls of the Back behind, and the Breaft-bone before. I fay the Ribs are articulated into the Back-bones behind, fomething of a cartilaginous fubflance coming between : ( the manner whereof is well expreft in the following Figure. ) At this articulation into the Vertebral each Rib has two knobs, one of which is received into the Sinus of the Body of the Vertebra, and the other which is lefs, into that of the tranf- verl'e Procefs. And they are joined before to the Breaft-bone by way of articulation alfo ; for their Cartilages end into little heads which are re- ceived into the fmooth Sinus's of the Breaft-bone. Eight ba- The Baftard-nbs are the eight lower, being of a more foft and griftly flard. fubftance than the other ; becaufe being articulated onely at one end, it was neceflary they mould be of a more yielding and pliable nature, other- wife they would have been very apt to break. Yea their yielding is not onely a lecurity to themfelves, but very convenient in refpe£fc to the parts that are contained under or within them. For feeing the Stomach lies in this region which ufes to be diftended with Meat or Water, thefe Ribs ought to give way to it when it or the intermediate parts, as the Li- ver and Spleen, bear againft them. Their fiéure. The figure of the Ribs is (as you may alfo fee in the following Figure) femicircular, like a Bow when it is drawn ; which Nature hath fo orde- red to make the Cheft ftronger and more capacious. Their furface. They are on the outfide rough and unequal, efpecially near the Verte- hrce, that the Ligaments might take the firmer hold on them, by which they are tied to the Rack-bones -. but on their infide they are fmoother ( being covered with the Pleura ) left they mould hurt the Lungs and other Parts that bear againft them. They are all of them narrower and roundifh toward the Back, and broader and flatter toward the Breaft. In their lower and inner part they have a furrow that runs along them, in which a Nerve and the Bloud-veiïêls are conducted. Their ufes. The ufes of the Ribs are, firft, to be a defence to the Bowels within the Breaft, and to the Stomach, Liver and Spleen in the Lower Belly ,- and fecondly, to fupport the Mufcles which ferve for refpiration, and to be moved by them : for which caufe the Breaft ought not to confili: of one Bone, for then it would have been immoveable ; whereas now it eafily admits of dilatation and contra&ion. |
|||||
|
CHAP,
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. 217
|
|||||
|
CHAP. X.
Of the Sternum or Breaft-bone, and of the Scapula or
Shoulder-blade. THE Breaft-bone in an Horfe is not flat on the outfide as it is in The Ster-
Men, but ftands out with a ridge, and is fomething like the keel*™^ or bottom of a Boat, jetting out with its middle on the outfide, and is fiance. hollow on the infide. It is of a fpongy fubftance, neither fo fohd nor io white as mod of the other Bones of the Body. In Foals it is rather grift- Iy than bony, and does then confift of more parts than it does in grown Horfes; for as by age the Griftlesgrow into a bony fubftance fo they do unite fo one to another in time, that no footfteps are let of their firft In its upper part towards the Throat it is rather pointed and fharp, than what tarn
horned as it is in Men; however on the infide it is hollowedI for the f"*»-- more convenient defcent of the Wind-pipe. Without on each fide of its upper end there is a little Sinus into which the heads of the Collar-bones are received or articulated. Betwixt which articulation of the Collar- bones into it, and its lower end, there are feyeral Sinus on each fide of it, to the number of nine, into which the griftly ends of fo many true Ribs are iointed Its lower end terminates in a Gnftle even in old Horfes, whofe end 'is of a more obtufe or blunt ihape than in Men, in whom it is called Cartilago enfiformis, or the Sword-point-like Gnftle. Its ufe is for the articulation of one end of the Collar-bones and true iu vfe.
Ribs into it, and to ferve as a Breaft-plate for the fafeguardand defence Of the noble Bowels (viz> the Heart and Lungs) that are lodged wttfr in it. The Shoulder-blade is called in Latin Scapula.* TherearetwOof them
f viz. on each fide of the upper part of the Cheft one ) as there are of all the forts of Bones in the fort and alfo in the hinder Legs ; but we fall for brevity's fake fpeak of the Bones onely of one Leg before and another be- hind, becaufe the other two are in all *^™Jfaw%&£ is not any way neceflary to repeat the defection of them, nor yet to fpeak of them in the plural number. /i;ù.-«« «.-
The Shoulder-blade is feated upon the fide of the true Ribs (hke ajg
Target) reaching from the Vertebre of theBack almoft to the_ bottom g^-7» ofthe^Collar bone It is in figure after a fort triangular on the infide „«„. 01 the Collar -bone, it is g prominent or arched. It is jointed concave or hollow, and on trie oucnuc pui"" J. , .
to no Bone but by its lower end to the Shoulder-bone ; but yet it is km
to feveral Parts by the Mufcles that are inferted into it, or rile from it as to the hinder-plrt of the Head by the Cuculiar Mufcles, being the firft of its movers ; alfo to the Vertebra oi the Neck by its fecond pair ; and to the Back by the Mufcle Rhomboides, &c. »} ..; ,/,.",", It hath three Procefes. The firft being the fhorteft, is called its Neck /„ tm»«
Which neck ends into a finuated or hollow cup or head, which receiveth the head of the Shoulder-bone, and its brim is compared with a thick |
|||||
|
il
|
|||||
|
218 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
Grulle, whereby its "Cavity is made the deeper that the head of the
Shoulder-bone that is jointed into it fhould not fo eafily flip out. Thefe- cond Procefs, which by fome is accounted the firft, is extended along its middle on the outfide, and is called its Spine ; and that end of this Spine that by a {hallow Sinus receives one of the Heads of the Shoulder-bone, is cal- led Acromium, that is to fay, its point or tip. The third and laft of thefe Procenes is toward the lower and infide of the Bone, and from the likenefs it hath with an Anchor is called Ancyroides, Anchor-like ; fome alfo who compare it to a Crows Bill, do give it the name oiCoracoides : This Pro- cefs doth fomewhat help to hold the Shoulder-bone in its place, entring a little into a mallow Sinus of the faid Bone. its Appetì- It hath five Appendixes about its Neck, three of which do afford an dm!' original to fome Mufcles, and from the,other two do fpring Ligaments which join the Shoulder-bone to the head of the Blade.
its cavities. By means of the fecond Procefs that runs like a Ridge or Spine along the middle of its back there are formed on its outfide two long Furrows or Cavities, in which feveral Mufcles lie, efpecially the Suprafcapularis ' and Subfcapularis, which are otherwife called Suprafpinatw and Infrafpi- natus, from their being placed the firft above this Spine or on that fide next the Neck, and the latter below it or on that fide next the Ribs. Table XL.
Reprefents all the Bones of the Cheft, the Vert ebree of the Back
and the Shoulder-blades. Figure I.
A B Shew the length of the Breaft-bone, (the Bones of the cheft being
placed in a fupine pofture.)
CC The upper end of the fame Bone. PD That Griftle which in Men ù called Cartilago enfiformis or the Sword- fajhioned Griftle, at its lower end.
I. The Collar-bone, (imitating a Rib.) x. 3.4. <>. 6.7. 8. 9.10.ix.ix. 13-14.15.16.17.18. 'The feventeen Ribs.
EEE The feveral Vertebras of the Thorax into which the Ribs are ar- ticulated. FFFF The cartilaginous or griftly part of the Ribs. Figure II.
Shews the feventeen Vertebra of the Thorax or Cheft on one fide, the
better to fhew how the Ribs are articulated into the fides of the faid Vertebra. , AAB The two Troddlions of the firft Vertebra of the Cheft, which were
articulated into or with the feventh Vertebra of the Neck. CCCC Several of the fmall Ligaments which did bind in the heads of the Ribs into the articulations of the Vertebrae.
I II. IH. IV. V. VI. VII. Vili, to XVII. The feventeen backward Procefes or Spines of the Spondyls or Rack-bones of the Cheft. Figure
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the-Bones, 2i?
Figure III.
Shews the Scapula or Shoulder-blade with that fide that is next the Body
outermoft. H The Cup into which the great round head of the Shoulder-lone is articu-
lated. N The Vrocefi which is inferted into the Shoulder-hone. M Q^jThe under-fide of the Blade-hone. Figure IV.
Shews the Scapula with its outer or right fide uppermofh
H The Cavity or Cup into which the Shoulder-hone is articulated.
N The Procefs which is inferted into the Shoulder-hone. OP The upper end of the Scapula, its Cartilage being taken off. S That Procefs of the Scapula which is called its Spine or Ridge. CHAP. XL
Of the Os humeri or Shoulder-bone, and the next Bone
under it called, the Cubit.
:. '<■.-■■ THE Bones of the Fore-leg\xcàéc the Scapula or Shoulder-blade are 21^ Bones of
the Shoulder-b,one, the Cubit-bone, the Seven Offelets or little '^ Fore-leg. Bones that make the Knee, anfwering to the eight little Bones that make the Carpus or Wrift in Humane Bodies, the Shank-bone anfwering to the Bones of the Metacarpus or back oï the Hand, the great Pattern anfwe- ring to the firft Joint of the Fingers, the little Pattern to the fecond Joint, and the Coffin-bone to the laft Joint, on which the Nail grows> as doth the Hoof of the Horfe on the Coffin-bone. Of the fimilitude there is be- twixt thefe feveral Joints in a Horfe's Fore-leg, and thofe in the Arm and Hand of a Man, I have already difcourfed pretty fully in the Book of the Mufcles, where I treated of the Mufcles of thefe Parts : wherefore I {hall in this place fpeak no more of that, but proceed to the defcription of the before-named Bones in their order. The Shoulder-hone is that which reaches from the Shoulder-blade to the The shmi-
Elbow. Both its ends are called Heads, being thicker than the reft of de"-b°ne- the Bone, the upper of which that is inferted into the cup of the Blade- bone, is naturally an appendix to the Bone, but in time grows to be a part or procefs of the Bone it felf. This Head is large and orbicular, covered over with a Griftle, that it Whs Bones
might be turned more glibly within the cavity of the Cup of the Blade. h f^mUus On the outftde of this Head there bunch out two rough and uneven Pro- m ' ceflès, into which two Ligaments are inferted for the ftrengthning of the Joint; (one of which is like a fecond Head, and is articulated into the fhallow cavity of the acromium, or end of the Spine of the Shoulder- bone;) and betwixt thefe two Proceifes there is a long and round chink G g through
|
||||
|
220 The Anatomy of an Hor [e.
through which the nervous Head of the Mufcle Biceps doth pafs. There
is alfo on the infide another round Cavity in the fide of the Head, out of which the flrong Ligament fprings that ties this Head in the cup of the Scapula. The lower Head of this Bone which in Men is articulated with two
Bones, viz. the Vina and Radius, in a Horfe is jointed but with one, (which I call the Cubit-bone) yet is fo jointed to that one, that it re- ceives it and is received by it, having three Procefïës, and two Sinus be- twixt them, much like the fame Procefïës and Sinus in the fame Bone of a Man. Befides thefe Procefïës already mentioned, it hath on its infide another
notable one, from which arife the Mufcles that lie on the infide of the Leg upon the Cubit-bone : and on its outfide it hath yet another Pro- cefs, but fomething lefs than the former, from whence do arife the Muf- cles that lie on the outfide of the Leg upon the Cubit-bone. About the middle of this Bone, on its infide, may be perceived a hole, through which both Veins and Arteries pafs to the Marrow contained in this Bone, for its nourishment. The next part of the Leg is called the Culit, confiding, as hath been
faid, in Men of two Bones, but in a Horfe onely of one : The two Bones in Men reach from the Elbow to the Wrift ; and this one in Horfes from the Elbow to that Joint commonly called the Knee, but which might properly enough have the fame name as in Men, feeing it is of a like fabriek. This Cubit-bone in its hinder and upper part hath a nota- ble Procefs, long and round, onely fomething fiattifh, which entreth in- to the larger Sinus or Cavity of the lower Head of the Shoulder-bone, and maketh that bunching-out which we call the Elbow. This Procefs is fomething rough and uneven, partly that the Ligaments might be the more flrongly knit to it that encompafs the Joint ; and partly for the in- fertion of fome Mufcles of the Cubit, as alio to give original unto the Mufcles that bend the lower part of the Leg and Foot ; for which caufe alfo the Bone it felf is rough at the root of the Procefs. The circumfe- rence of the Sinus into which it is inferted, is alfo rough, that from thence Ligaments might iflite. Its lefïèr and inner Procefs is received by the lef- fer Sinus of the Head of the Shoulder-bone. There are three cavities in this upper Head, for the reception of as many Procefïës of the lower end of the Shoulder-bone. Its lower end articulates with the three upper lit- tle Bones of the Knee (that rnake the firft range) as (hall be fhewed in the next Chapter. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
221
|
|||||||
|
Book V* °f the Bom'
|
|||||||
|
CHAP. XIL
|
|||||||
|
W the (even Ofeletts or link Bones of the Knee of thè
f sSToneLhich reach from the Knee to the great Tapani alfo of the t,o f^em-hones and the - Coffin-bone. i .1 ci^nV Knnp there are two ranges of The number
pBwtffl the O^^-^^^SSEr feven, thaAs to £* •* jj Httle Bones one aboveuJ^f5»nS cinge : aU which are joined K*r. fay, three in the firft and ou ***£ ^f to be feparated. The one to ^^:S lower end of the Cubit-bone, and upper range are art™e" d of the Shank-bone. the lower range= withi the>uppa^end or t magnitude, form and
Thefe Bones do ^ °^^f SSStóoo to be all Griftles and not
fituation, and are faid in the™lh^ hard and grow bony. Their Bones, but in procefs of «^^^^XL which of Griftles be- fubftance is fpongy, as are «11 the reft ot tn£ ^^ ^ come bony, * ?^^^£$£%riw« with both a mem-
the Breaft and ^_h!£ J^^ they are fo compafted together, branous and gnftly Llf mSTTa7rneSs and feparating the Membranes sf^K -w r;ry &ght t0 be * * ** b* one
B°Sey have a double «% f^J^^dtS
ing, and another inward which is concavous or h£ow ^ ^ per part where they join to the Cubg4,one, they
over with the »f^^^^e » give proper names to, but fliall di- i* «*
ThefeBonesI will not undertake tog., i ^ ^ that .. „^ ftinguifh them *^*^T^h5b fomething longifh and
cond Bone of its own rant ^ ^ ^ ^^ ^ f thing
^Mf.S the Cubit-bone in its upper part, which part
^ht^^^
the lower rank. above with a plain Superficies to the Cubit-
b„„TehCby toS&t^^fe-dBÒneoL own U and by» lower
part to the fourth Bone of'the: next rank. fomething fmaller than The um
paThe/^ Bone or/r/? of the ^ ^^Xoft round. It is
any of the before-mentioned three and s in 1 ape
fmooth, not being hollow nor protuberagd as the j
|
|||||||
|
2 2 2 -, The Anatomy of an Horfe.
above to the outfide of the lower-part of the firft Bone, below to the
Shank-bone, and on its infide to the fifth Bone or fecond of its own rank. The fifth (or fecond of the lower rank) hath feveral little Sinus's; It
hath one notable one above into which the firft Bone of the upper rank is articulated, and another below for the reception of part of the Head of the Shank-bone. The fixth ( or third of the lower rank ) is joined with a plain Superfi-
cies on each fide to the feventh (or fourth) and to the foregoing ; above, to the fecond, and below to the Shank-bone. The feventh ( or fourth of the lower rank ) is not much unlike the
former, on its infide being joined to the foregoing, on its upper fide to the third of the upper rank, and on its lower to the head or top of the Shank-bone. The shank.- The next part of the Leg which anfwers to the After-vorifi or back ©f
km, its Ar- the Hand in a Man, is made of three Bones, one of which is long and ttcuiatw. rouncj ancj,much larger than the other two. It reaches from the Knee to the great Paftern, being articulated above with every one of the lower rank of the little Bones of the Knee ; and below it is joined to the great Paftern by a mutual articulation, having two round heads and three finali Cavities at that end of it for that purpofe. This we call the Shank-lone. The splent- To each fide of this Bone is faftned another long thin Bone, in figure bones. fomething like a Bodkin, being fomewhat thick and round at their up- per part, and from thence as they run down towards the Foot, becoming
thinner and /harper, till at laft they end in a fharp point, a little above the joining of the Shank-bone with the great Paftern. Between thefe two Bones do run the Tendons of the Mufcles that move the Foot, as they defcend down the Shank-bone. Thefe two we may call the Splent-bones, ftanding on each fide of the Shank-bone like two Splents, fuch as Bone- fetters ufe for broken Bones. The next is the Bone which anfwereth to the firft joint of the Fingers
in Man, in whom they are five in number, by the wonderfull wifedom of the Creator fo ordained as was fitteli for that variety of motions to which they are defign'd. But an Horfe being Solidipes or a whole-foot- ed Creature, hath all his Foot necefìàrily moved together, and the Bones thereof in each Joint being fingle, anfwer but to the Bones of one Finger. The great The form of this Bone, which is called the great Paftern, is gibbous and rafia*, crooked. At its top, where it is articulated with the Shank-bone, it has three finali Procefïês and two Cavities betwixt them : alfo two finali tri- angular Bones faftned to its back-part. Its outfide is plain and fmooth, and without any roughnefs at all. Its lower end confifts of two heads which are round and bunching and are articulated into the Sinus of the leffer Paftern which is under it. The little The next is the little Paftern, anfwering to the fecond Joint of the fafiern. fingers. This is not much unlike the former, onely it diners in the length, for it is not much above half fo long. Its upper end ( as was faid) is articulated with the great Paftern, and its lower end is received by the Coffin-bone in the fame manner as it felf received the lower end of tiie great Paftern by its own upper end» ■ The
|
||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. 123
The next and lad Bone of the Foot is the Coffin-bone, fo called (I fup- m coffin
pofe) from its hollownefs on its under-fide. Its figure* femil unary ^^ or Half-moon-fafinoned. It is thick at its top, (where it has cavities to friftaw ani receive the heads of the lower end of the little Partem) but thin and broad s'nus«- at its bottom and toward its edges, for its more firm fixing uponi the ground. Its Mance is fungous or fpongy, having innumerable little Soles piercing through its fides for the paffage of the Veffels ; as alfo var many fmall Sinus's whereinto are implanted the ends of the Tendons of the Mufcles that move the lower part or the Leg and the Foot : whofe Fibres being at any time aflêfted either by bruifes ill ftooing or by Handing in the water after hard riding whilft the Horfe is hot, or but by ftanding ftill in the Stable for leverai days without having the Feet ftopt up, and* the like ; I fay the tendinous fibres being affeóted by thefe or * ** other means, caufe the Horfe to have fuch great pain in his Feet that: he gjg4è can fcarce endure to tread upon them ; which lamenefs we call a Founder. Now this damper is fo much the harder to cure by reafon thefe Fibres lie fo far out of reach, moft of them running on the upper fide of the Rone ( betwixt it and the Hoof) and not to its bottom ; fo that the Hoof mowing upon the fides as the Soal doth at the bottom, there is great hazard but we (hall mifs of effecting a cure, if we onely pull the Soal out, and do not cut part of the Hoof off alfo. This is not my bare opinion but the experience of thofe that have had good fuccefs in curing loundred Horfes who by rafing the Hoof from the Coronet or top of it to the ve- ry bottom, in five or fix places, untili they have made the Bloud come, and then applying their remedies to thofe places, have.made thofe Harks found, whom the drawing out of their Soais would not cure. |
|||||||
|
Table XLI.
|
|||||||
|
Reprefents all the Bones of the Fore-legs as well joined one to another
as feparate. Figure I.
Shews the Bones of the near Leg before, ail joined together, ( the Blades
bone being taken ofl) A B The heads of the Shoulder-hone which were articulated into the ca-
nitiesof the Shoulder-blade. . . C A production in the fide of the faid Bone, from whence fome Mufcles of the Leg do take their rife.
n Its lower bead which is jointed with the top of the Cubit-bone. rank that make the Knee.
F The Procefi of the Cubit-bone called the hlbow. G the top of the Cubit-bone joined with the lower end of the Humerus or Shoulder-bone.
H The bottom of the faid Bone. I The fir fi range ofOJJelets or little Bones of the Knee, la The fecond range or rank of the faid Bones. U The-
|
|||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horje.
M The little Bodkin-like (or Spleni-) Bones on each fide of the Shank*
bone.
N The top of the Shank-lone, where it is articulated into the fecond range of the little Bones of the Knee.
0 The bottom or lower end'ofthe f aidShank-bone.
QThe great Paftern. Y The two little triangular Bones which are joined to the back-part of the
great Taflern near the top of it.
R The little Taflern. T The Coffin-bone. Figure II.
Shews the Bones of the Offcleg or right Leg, ali of them infitu.
A B The heads of the Shoulder-bone that articulate with the Scapula.
C The produtlion in the fide of the f aid Bone.
D Its lower head with which the Cubit-bone is articulated.
È The fir fi Offe let of the firfl range of the Knee.
F The produtlion of the Cubit-bone called the Elbow.
G The top or head of the Cubit-bone.
Id.The bottom or lower end ofthe f aid Bone.
1 The firfl range of the little Bones of the Knee.
L The fecond range of the f aid Bones. M The Bodkin-like (or Splent-) bone that is on the fide of the Shank"
bone.
N The top of the Shank-bone. O The lower end of the f aid Bone. P The great Taflern. S The little Taflern. Y The two little triangular Bones faftned to the top of the great Pa-
flern-hone.
Y The Coffin-bone.
Figure III.
Shews the fore-pàrt of the Shoulder-bone feparated from the other
Bones. A N The heads of the Shoulder-bone that are articulated with the
Scapula. B The produtlion in the fide of the fame Bone.
E The heads at the bottom of the f aid Bone, which are articulated into
the cavities of the upper end of the Cubit-bone. 0 The cavity into which the long produtlion of the Cubit-lone is arti-
culated. QO The body of the Shoulder-bone.
|
|||||
|
Figure
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. 225
' Figure IV. '
Shews the hinder-part of the Shoulder-bone by it felf.
A The great round head at the top of the Shoulder-bone.
B The great production of the fame Bone.
C D The divifion of the head at the lower end of the Shoulder-lone.
O The little eminence in the fide of the faid Bone.
Figure V*
Shews the fore-fide of the Cubit-bone. A The top of the long production at the upper end of the Cubit-hone, called
the Elbow.
B The middle of the faid production. C The cavities at the upper end of the Cubit-lone, into which the lower heads of the Shoulder-bone are articulated.
G The body of the Cubit-lone. P H The round heads at the bottom of the Cubit-bone. Figure VI.
Shews the back-fide of the Cubit-bone* A The top of the long produltion of the Cubit-bone.
BB The upper heads of the faid Bone which are articulated with the tower
end of the Shoulder-bone.
CC The lower heads of the faid Bone which do articulate with the upper range of little Bones of the Knee.
F A cavity of the lower end of the faid Bone, into which one of the little Bones of the upper range doth articulate.
H The body of the faid Bone. * ,
Figure VII.
Shews the fore-fide of the Shank-bone* DD The upper head of the faid Bone, as alfo of the two Bodkin-like Bones
on each fide of it, where they were articulated with the lower range
of the little Bones of the Knee.
C The two lower heads of the faid Bone, whereby it was articulated into the cavities of the upper part of the great Pafiern.
M The body of the faid Bone. [ NN The two cavities or dens at the fides of the lower heads of this Bone,
into which cavities the heads of the great Pafiern were implanted
or articulated.
|
|||||
|
Figure
|
|||||
|
22 6 Tke Anatomy of an Hor je.
Figure Vili.
Shews the back-fide or hinder-part of the Shank-bone, on which the
back Sinews lie. OO The heads of the Shank-hone and of the two Bodkin-like Bones on each
fide of it.
PP The two heads at the lower end of this Bone which were articulated with the great Pajlern.
C The cavity between thefe two heads, in which is articulated a Procefi of the upper end of the great Pajlern. Figure IX.
Shews the fore-part of the great Pattern.
A The dens or cavities in its upper part which receive the heads of the
lower end of the Shank-bone.
B The heads at the lower end of this Bone which were articulated into the Sinus or cavities' of the upper end of the little Pajlern.
Figure X.
Shews the back-part of the great Pattern. A The Sinus or cavity into which the heads of the two little triangular
Bones were articulated.
BB The two heads at the lower end of the great Pajlern, which were joined with the little Pajlern.
V The cavities at the upper end of this Bone which did receive the heads of the lower end of the Shank-bone. Figure XL
Shews the fore-part of the great Pattern with the two triangular Bones
faftned to the back-part of' it. RR The two triangular little Bones.
VV The cavities into which the two heads of the lower end of the Shank-
bone were articulated. Z The body of the great Pajlern. \ ..." . ■. ■ .....'
Figure XII.
Shews the little Paflern on its fore-fide. Figure XIII.
Shews the back-fide of the little Paftern. |
|||||
|
Figure
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones* ±2y
Figure XIV.
Shews the bottom of the Cojffin-bone.
Q_ The circumference of the faid Bone which gives the round fkape to
the Foot.
S The cavities or hollowneffes where int o the heads of the little Tafiern were articulated. Figure XV.
Shews the fides and top of the Coffin-bone.
A Shews all the outfide of the faid Bone.
Figure XVI.
Shews the fore-fide of the two little triangular Bones feparated from thff
upper part of the great Paftern-bone. Figure XVIL
Shews the back-fide of the faid Bones. „
|
||||||
|
CHAP. XIII.
Of the Ös facrum or holy Bone, together with the Coccy-
ges or Rump-bones, otherwife called the Bones öf the Dock, or Tail. TH E Ös facrum or holy Bone, is feated at the lower end of the ot facrums
Back, at the end of the Vertebra of the Loins, to the lafl of'" /**?> which one end of it is articulated, and the other end to the firft of the ^7/«S/i£ Bones of thé Dock or Rump-bones. It is much the broadeft and largeft ƒ<«"• of all the Bones of the Back. Its figure is almoft triangular, having a broad beginning, and ending by degrees into a narrownefs. On the in- fide it is fmooth and hollow, but lomething unequal; behind or on its outfide it is gibbous and alfo rough, becaufe of the Mufcles of the Back arid their Ligaments cleaving unto it. Its acute Proceilês or Spines are very fmall ; and the tranfverfe ones but obfcure : as for the oblique, there is no appearance of them, fave in the firft Vertebra. On its outer fide near its edges there are certain Sinus s or hollownefiês, to which the Haunch-bones do cleave firmly by an intervening Cartilage. Its Vertebra are in number fix, whofe Spines are much lefs than the it) v«te-
Spines of the Vertebra of the Loins, and the lower or nearer to the b«. Rump-bones, the lefiêr they are ftill. This holy Bone is perforated in feveral places ; as firft, quite through j« miei.
its length it hath a large hole or cavity to receive the Spinal Marrow; out from which there go many other leiïêr for the egrefs of the Nerves ; H h and
|
||||||
|
228' The Anatomy of an Hor je.
and thefe are not in the fides of the Vertebra as thofe are that be in the
Vertebra of the Neck, Back and Loins, but on the infide and outfide or and above, of which thofe below are much the larger. The Rump- To this Bone at its lower end are joined the Rump-bones, which in tones. this Animal we are treating of are in number eighteen. Thefe are joined to each other by a Cartilage or Griftle, but fo loofely, that the Horfe can bend his Rump which way he will. Thofe of thefe Bones that are next to the holy Bone, are ibmething thicker and broader, than thofe further from it ; for as' they defcend down, they each grow lefs and lefs, fo that the loweft grows into a cartilaginous or griftly point, as you may fee in the figure of the Skeleton, where they are all lively reprefented in fitu. Thefe Bones are not fo hard as mod of the other Bones are, but more foft and fpongy ; neither have they any Procefs, or any hollownefs, ex- cept the firft of them, which hath a finali cavity or den to receive ììjc laft Vertebra of the Osfacrum, which Vertebra, is the furtheft part whi- ther the Spinal Marrow reaches. Table XLII.
Reprefents the Os facrum and Rump-bones joined together ; alfo the
Os facrum joined with the Vertebra of the Loins ; and feveral other figures of thefe Bones. Figure IV. and V.
Shew the Vertebra of the Loins joined with the upper end of Os facrum.
i. z. 3.4. 5.6. 7. Shew the feven Spines or backward Procejfes of the Ver-
tebrae of the Loins. 1. 2. 3.4. 5". 6. The fix Spines of the holy Bone. 1.2.3.4. 5-. Holes in the Os facrum for the egre/S of the Nerves from the Spinal Marrow out of that Bone.
G The hole of Os facrum which contains the Spinai Marrow., DDD The long and flat Productions or tranfuerfe Procejfes at the fides of the Vertebrae of the Loins.
VVV The little Produllions in the fides of the Vertebra; of the Loins whereby they are articulated into each other.
Figure VI.
Shews the laft Vertebra of the Loins removed from the reft and turned
on one fide. Figure VII.
Shews the laft Vertebra of the Loins with that fide forwards whereby it
was join'd with the laft but one, in which Vertebra is to be feen the hole where the Spinal Marrow did pafs through it. Figure VIII.
Shews the fame Bone with that fide uppermoft that refpe&s the cavif *
of the Body.
f ■ ■
■
|
||||
|
Book V- Of the Bo7ies,.
Figure IX.
Shews the lower fide or infide of Os facrum, as alfo the Rump-bones
joined to it. AA The foremofl productions of the f aid Bone, which were articulated
with the loft Bone of the Loins.
BB The two long and wide Productions of the Os facrum, which were joined with the Haunch-hone or Os ilium.
C A cavity at the upper end ofOs facrum which did receive the head of the laft Vertebra of the Loins, and was articulated with it.
D The hole in which the Spinal Marrow was contained. GG Other Proddlions of the Os facrum which were articulated with the Os pubis.
HH The holes in the Os facrum out of which did paft the conjugations or pairs of Nerves that are diftrihuted about all the hinder parts.
1.1.3.4-5"-6-7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15-16.17.18. The eighteen Rump- bones or Bones of the Tail. Figure X.
Reprefents the upper part of Os facrum that joins to the Loins, as alfo
partly its infide turned upward. A The round cavity into which the head of the laft Vertebra u ar-
ticulated. BB The lower fide of the broad Proddlions of the Os facrum, which join with the Os ilium. ',„.,„., • ,
C The cavity in the f aid Bone wherein the Spinal Marrow is contained.
FF The two little foremofl Proddlions with which the hindmofi of the laft Vertebra of the Loins are articulated. <
Figure XI.
Shews that fide of the Os facrum which looks to within the Body, as alfo
its feveral perforations through which the Nerves do ifïue forth from the Spinal Marrow. A The cavity that receives the round head of the laft Vertebra of the
CC Thè two Productions that are articulated with the hinder ones of the
loweft Vertebra of the Loins.
DD The lower fide of the two broad Proddlions of the f aid Os lacrum. EEE Its holes through which the Nerves do paft from the Spinal Marrow contained in it. |
|||||||
|
Hh 2
|
CHAP.
|
||||||
|
230 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
CHAP. XIV.
Of the namelefs Borie, commonly divided into the Hip,
Haunch and Share-bones. Os ihnomi- ' I * H E Hip-hone ( commonly fo called ) is by Anatomifts divided in-
natum. or f_ to three parts. Firft, Os ilium, fo named becaufe the Gut Ilium "ml tietn under it. The next is called Os coxendicis, or Ifchium, which is the lower and outer part of the namelefs Bone, ( or Os innominatum )
which is the name of thefe three Bones as joined all together, for they are truly but one Bone in old Horfes, though in Colts they are divided one from another by Cartilages, from whence this diftinclion is made, and they come to be difcourfed of by three feveral names. The third part of this Bone is called Os pubis, alfo Tettinis, or the Share-bone. Os ilium or That part that is called Os ilium, is the uppermoll and broadeft, which Haunch-bane. ^ j0j[necj t0 tfe j10jy gone. jn figure it is femicircular, and its femicircu- lar circumference is called its Spine. On its outfide it is fomething arched, but within hollow ; the arched part is called dorfum, its Back, the hollow part cofta, or its Rib. its spine. That part which is called its Spine, is in many places unequal, that fome Mufcles might take their original from it, viz. the Oblique afcen- dent Mufcle of the Abdomen or Paunch, the Deltoides of the Thigh, the firft Extender of the Leg called Membranofus, &c. And on the back of this Bone there are unequal infcriptions or lines for the rife of the three Mufcles of the Thigh that help to make the Buttocks (called Glutai;) and alfo for other Mufcles that lie under thefe. coxendix or The fecond of the parts of this namelefs Bone is called Os coxendids. nit-bone. -j<his -ls the iower and outer part of it, in which there is a great Sinus, called Acetabulum, the Cup or Sawcer, into which the head of the Thigh- bone is exceeding ftrongly articulated. This Cup has its edges environed with a Griftle, called Super e ilium, its brow ; in whofe circumference there are obferved three Sinus, two Protuberations and an acute Procefs, and laftly an Appendix that is very thick : all which were ordained for the produ&ion partly of Ligaments and partly of Mufcles. os pubi» or The third and laft part of this namelefs Bone is called Os pubis, or the share-hm. share-bone. This is originally two Bones, parted one from another in the middle with a Griftle, but in continuance of time the Griftle it felf becomes bony, and fo unites them into one Bone. It is placed at the bottom of the Paunch, betwixt the two hinder Legs as the Horfe ftands. On its outfide it has on each fide a Sinus for the defcent of the crural Vef- fels. On the fame fide alfo it is rough to give the firmer original to the ftreight Mufcles of the Abdomen and to the fecond Bender of the Leg. It is but a thin Bone, being hollow within, and perforated with the greateft hole of any fuch-like Bone in the whole Body. Oh its hinder and inner fide it has two Proceflès, from whence the nervous bodies of the Yard, and fome Mufcles take their original, feivis or the Thefe Bones with the holy Bone do make that cavity which is called Bafon. the Bafon, which is the place wherein are contained part of the Guts, and the Bladder in a Horfe ; and in a Mare part of the Guts, the Bladder and the Womb. Table
|
||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones.
Table XLIII.
Reprefents the three Bones that make the Os inmminatüm or namelefs
Bone.
Figure I.
Shews thé faid Bone with the right fide upward.
BB Shew the upper part of Os ilium.
CC The two Productions of the faid Bone which are faflened ly very
ftrong Ligaments to the Vroceffes of Os facrum.
DD The Spines or Ridges of the faid Bone. EEEE The Os coxendicis or lower and outer part of the namelefiBone.
FF The two holes in the Os pubis or Share-hone made for the ingate and outgate of Veffels.
G The Seam which divides the Share-lone in the middle. HH The extremities or ends of the faid Bone. Figure II.
Shews the Os ihnominatum turned the upfide downward. II Shew the Cup of the Os coxendicis, into which the head of the Thigh- bone is inferted. MM The extremities or ends of the Share-lone. NN The two large holes in the bottom of the faid Bone. OO PP The infide of Os ilium. QQjThe Spines or Ridges of the faid Bone, R The Seam of the Share-hone which divides it into two parts. f
C H A P. XV.
Of the Thigh-bone and Patella or little Bone of the Stifle.
TH E Thigh is called by the Latins Femur à ferendo to bear, becaufejfc Thigh*
the Creature is born up or fuftained by it. This Bone (like the®»** Bone of the Shoulder) is but one, reaching from the Hip-bone to the Stifle. The figure of it is long, round and {freight, except where its Heads and Protuberances buhch out ; of which it hath, above, one Head, one Neck, and two Proceiles; and below, it determins into a Head which hath two Productions and a Cavity between them. The
upper fie ad is an orbicular Appendix Handing upon the Neck, and its upper
is the thickeft and largeft Head of any Bone in the whole Body. It is Head.
round and long the better to enter into the Cup of the Hip-bone, which is not onely deep of it felf, but rendred deeper by a large Griftle that com- pafleth the edges thereof. For it was neceflàry that a very firm articu- lation ihould be in this place, becaufe of the huge weight which the Thigh was to Main. And befides, to ftrengthen it the more, and to faff en the two
|
||||
|
252 The Anatomy of an Horfe.
two Bones the firmer together, there arifeth out of the Cup of the Hip-
bone an exceeding flrong and round Ligament, which is implanted into a little Sinus that is in the Head of the Thigh-bone. This Head is fmooth and crufted over with a Griftle, that it might move the more glibly with- in the Cup. its Neck, The (lender part under this Head is called the Neck of the Thigh-bone. This is pretty long and oblique, reaching upward but inclining inward, and is a Procefs of the Bone. At its lower end, where the Bone grows broader, do arife two other Procefies, called Trochanters or Rotatores, from the Mufcles of that name that are inferted into them. The upper of thefe Procefles is greater than the lower, nay greater indeed than any Procefs in the whole Body which is not joined to another Bone ; It bends upward and outward; but the other which is much iefs than this, bend- eth backward and fomewhat inward. its lower _ The Thigh-bone below its middle becometh thicker, and its lower end ^id?d'\t\to~ £erminateth into an ample and broad Head ; out of the backfide of which w». are produced two Proceflês, as it were two other Heads, betwixt which there is a large fpace left about two inches wide, which receiveth a pro-
tuberation or fwelling of the Head of the Leg-bone. Thefe two Heads at the lower end of the Thigh-bone are on their out-
fides rough, but their infides are covered with a Griftle, and thereby are made fmooth and flippery for the more eafiy motion of the Joint. One of thefe Heads is thicker, and is feated inward ; the other is thinner but broader, and is feated outward. From them do fome of the Mufcles that move the Leg arife ; and into them are fome that move the Thigh infer- ted. The fides of thefe Heads are full of little holes, out of which do ifTue the roots of the Ligaments which ftrengthen the Stifle-joint. Their Cavi- Thefe Heads have alfo four Cavities, two of which are in the middle tks' ' between the two Heads, and one on the outfide of either of them. One of the middle Cavities, being the foremoft, is made to receive the protu- beration of the Patella or Pan, and is therefore crufted over with a Griftle for that purpofe. The fecond ot the middle Cavities being more back- ward, is deeper than the other, alfo rough and unequal, made to receive the protuberation of the Leg-bone. The third is at the outfide of the outer head, and the fourth at the outfide of the inner, through both which the Tendons of feveral Mufcles of the Leg defcend. ne Patdi». At the lower end of this Thigh-bone, betwixt it and the Head of the Leg-bone, on the fore-fide, is placed a finali roundifh Bone, (called the Patella or Stifle-pan) about three inches broad, being plain without, but within bunching, bored through with many fmali holes. It is co- vered over on its infide with a Griftle, and is made firm in its place by the broad Tendons of the fecond, third and fourth Mufcles that extend the Leg, to which the Patella is very firmly knit. This Bone ftrengthen- eth the jointing of the Thigh-bone with the Leg-bone, and hindreth their diflocation forwards. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones. *&
CHA P. XVI.
Of the Lee-bone and Ranges of Ofelets which mak? that
fart we call the tiock? answering to the Heel of a Man. Tu f n v ,'c thr fame difference between the hinder Legs of an Horfe the Sbfh
"nd a Manfteg™^ we ihew'd above to be between the Fore-legs^ " *■ anda MansLegs, theK ^ ^ Bone^«. wtìd. "atfrom the B^wTthe Wrift, and but one Bone in that Joint
of afHoSs fae-leg that anfwers to this (reachrng from hrs Elbow to It Jo"n we eommonly eall the Knee, ) ft whereas m . Man's Leg there S^^^sS^Hed. there isbutone which we M
clbTthfnamTof»,, or the Shin or Shank-bone, becaufe the Bone of a Man's Leg that goes by that name, is the more confiderabk of the tWThe ime of this Bone is long, and round in an Horfe but in a Man /» #**
it ilte-fquare. The upper pa* of it which joins with the Thigh-bone, k hrnader and thicker than the lower. . t upper Head in which are two cavities and a prominence betwixt gip»
them is crufted over with a Griftle, and both receives and is received We tnem, is crimea uvei Thieh-bone; which Gnftle is faftned Withftanding equals not t^ Iajeneis J£ ,, j Thi h. fc sïnus,s
This Bone hath feveral Sinuss and AMe*a™\°lA f fome Möur W Appai-
u t Lth ■ rhe former for conveniency of the Tendons or lome: mui dices# ^JdSiSb^S the latter for the rife or'ongmal of other Mufcles "tÏi^
mis Done db yvwi P . ,-,, j tl Marrow. It is alfo
u r (Won? Heel of a Man, Thefe are of the fame number as thofe of the Ht^
to the Inliep and ™\0}* and do aifo iie in two ranges, the one of the Knee in the Fore-legs we e and do ^ ^ ^ ^^ ^
above the other, vtz ™*m™(o Yv ^^ QW wi± another>
SS XT^tufdC infFf" they may be taken to be „ot
above half the number they are truly oi ^^ To treat of ^if"^.^^K «he Shank-bone above, or
|
||||
|
2^4 ^}e Anatomy of an Hor [e.
repeating of the fame defcription over again that we gave above of the
feven little Bones of the Knee. Onely that which is the hindmofl and largeft of them deferves to have particular notice taken of it, and that is it which is truly* and ought to be called the Heel-bone, whofe fhape and poflure you may fee in the following Figure. Into this Bone it is that leverai of the Tendons of the Mufcles that bend the Leg are inferted. On its" infide it has a large Sinus by which the Tendons of thofe Mufcles that move the lower Parts of the Foot do defcend, as alfo the larger Vefïèls thereof] Thehjief The next Bones to thefe are the three that anfwer to thofe five that buna. make that part of the Foot in Humane Bodies which is called the Meta- taf f us or Inftep. Thefe I fay are but three in a Horfe, though in a Man they are five, to anfwer to the number of the five Toes. They reach from the lower range of the little Bones of the Hock before-mentioned, down to the great Paftern. One of them is a large, long and round Bone i the other two are much more (lender, and fhorter, being the one of them placed on the infide and the other on the outfide of it, adhering io clofely thereunto, that they are not eafily to be feparated from it. Thefe little Bones anfwer in all things to the like Bones which run down by the fides of the Shank-bone of the Fore-legs, which from their fhape I called the Bodkin-like Bones, (as likewife the Splent-bones, becaufethey ftand by the fides of the middle great Bone, like the Splents that Bone- fetters make ufe of for ftrengthning broken Bones till they are knit again;) I fay thefe are like thofe, and therefore may be called by the fame names. the Paftern- The remaining part of the Bones of the hinder Leg and Foot are the hm" *n*e great Paftern (with the two little triangular Bones adhering to the top of it,) the little Paftern, and the Coffin-bone; of all which having already- treated where I defcribed the Bones of the Fore-legs, (with which thefe of the Hinder-legs agree in every particular ) I fliall for brevities fake omit fpeaking particularly of them, and here conclude my difcourfe of the Bones. Table XLÏV.
ïleprefents the Skeleton of an Horfe, ( drawn exa&ly by one that I
keep {landing in a Prefs. ) #
AA The Shoulder-blade.
B The Breaft'lone.
CC The Shoulder-bone.
DDDD The Leg-bones both before and behind*
EEEE The little Bones that make the Knee and the Hock.
FF The Shank-bones.
ff The Tnftep-bones.
GGGG The Bodkin-like or Splent-bones,
HHHH The great Pajierm.
ÏIII The little Pajlems.
KKKK The Coffin-bones.
LLLL The little triangular Bones that cleave to the upper end of the
great Paflem.
MM The Qs ilium or Haunch-bone. ptf The
|
||||
|
Book V. Of the Bones:
N The Os coxendicis or Hip-bone.
OO The Os pubis or Share-bone. PP The Thigh-bones. QQjThe Utile Bone of the Stifle, e ailed Patella.
RRRRRR The Cartilages at the end of the Ribs. SSSSS3 The feventeen Ribs. TTTTTT The upper end of the Ribs where they are articulated into the
Vertebra: of the Chefl. V The Os hyoides, in fitu.
W The lower Jaw. X The upper Jaw.
Y The Os occipitis or Noll-bone.
1.2.3.4. f-6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15". 16.17. Are the feventeen VettG-
brrE of the Chefl.
i.2.3.4.5. 6. 7. The f even Vertebra; of the Loins. 1.2.3.4. 5. 6. The fix upper Produêtions or Proceffes of the holy Bone. From the Cypher 1. to 18. are reprefented the eighteen Bones of the Rump or Dock.
I II. III. IV. V. VI. VII. Shew the feven Vertebre or Rack-bones of thé Neck. |
|||||||
|
CHAP. XVIL
Of the Hoofs of an Horfe anfwering to the Nails of a Mans
Fingers or Toes, Concerning the Nails of a Man's Fingers arid Toes ( to which the
Hoofs of Horfes bear a refemblance ) learned Men are divided into feveral opinions about their generation. Hippocrates is affirmed to be of opinion, that they are made of a glutinous matter or moifture parch- ed and dried by heat, and driven to the extreme parts. Empedocles thinks them to be made of the extremities of the Nerves, calling them Nervo- rum daufulas ftimmas, the utmoft terminations or boundaries of the Nerves ; and that therefore when thefe fall off] it is a fign of great weak- nefs. Ariflotle in lib. 2. cap. 6. de generartene Animal, faith, that the Nails, Hairs, Beaks of Birds, Hoofs of Beafts, and fuch like, are ingen- dred of adventitious aliment. And laftly, Columbus thinks they take their original partly from the Skin, and partly from the Tendons of the Mufcles which move the Fingers and Toes, and that they are encreafed like the Teeth by ari apportion of aliment to their root. As for the Hoofs of Horfes, whatever be their original matter, out of #„# ^
which they are formed, their growth feems to be (according to the opi- Hoofs ate nioriof the laft mentioned Authour) from the addition of new particles IZ'ü'fö to their foots; which drive down fucceffively thofe before them. They'fimi «j*>* afe of a middle fubftance betwixt Bones and Griftles : not fo hard astbe Foor'- Bones, for then they would be apt to fplinter and break ; nor fo foft as Griftles^ for if they were, they could not fopport fo great a bulk as X i the
|
|||||||
|
j
|
|||||||
|
The Anatomy of an Horfe.
the Body of an Horfe, much lefs endure to travel amongft ftones, &c.
But they are of a horney fubftance, without fenfe, growing pretty firmly to the parts included within them, and fattened to the Coffin-bone by a Ligament that proceeds from their top or root, which root the Skin alfo fomewhat encompaiTeth. Under them lie many twigs of Nerves, and Tendons of Mufcles,
which run even to the very bottom of the Hoof or Soal of the Foot, up- on pricking of which with a Nail or the like, or when they are but bruifed with riding in hard way, the Horfe prefently bemoans himfelf, as was more at large mewed before in the twelfth Chapter of this Book. |
||||||
|
CHAP. XVIII.
Of a Cartilage or Grifile*
AS an Appendix to the hiftory or dottrine of the Bones, it will not
be unneceflary to fpeak fomewhat of the Cartilages or Griflles : e{- pecially feeing through the whole difcourfe of this Fifth Book we have had occafion ever and anon to mention them, but have not as yet given any particular account of them ; as neither of a Ligament, which we have alfo often mentioned : but of this latter in the next Chapter, and onely of the Griflles in this, becaufe they come neareft to the nature of Bones. A Cartilage is a flmilar part, cold and dry, made (as fome AutflOUrs
affirm ) out of the moft glutinous fart of the Seed. They are flexible and without fenfe, and are much fofter than a Bone, though the nature of the one is not fo much diftant from the other, but that feveral Griflles in tradir of time, and as the Creatures grow old, harden into Bones. The ufes of the Griflles are many. For firfi they help the motion of
the Bones at their jointings one with another. For which end in the Joints that are fubje£t to great motions, the edges of the Sinus, or Cups and Cavities of the Bones that articulate one with another, are generally lined with a Griftle, to make the motion more glib and fecure ; fuch are the articulation of the Shoulder-bone with the Shoulder-blade, of the Thigh-bone with the Hip-bone, and feveral others. hfecond ufe of the Griflles is by yielding, a little to give way to the
violence of outward injuries ; whereas if Bones had been in their places, they would have been in danger of breaking, from their hardnefs and ftifïhefs : for which end the ends of many Bones which are expofed to external injuries are furnifhed with. Griflles, as the Nofe and Ears, and the like. Another ufe of the Griftles is, that by their mediation, as it were by
a glue, fome Bones might be conjoined ; as the Share-bones in particular are by this means united to one another. There are many other peculiar ufes of particular Griftles, fome belong-
ing to the Sight, fome to the Hearing, fome to Smelling, fome to Respi- ration or breathing, and the like; all which have their feveral denomi- nations s |
||||||
|
BookV. Of the Bones. m
nations : But of thefe we have already treated as they fell in our way,
when we difcourfed of the parts to which each did belong. I fhall not therefore need to inlarge any further upon them in this place. |
|||||||||
|
CHAP. XIX,
Of a Ligament. |
|||||||||
|
AS the lubricity or flipperinefs of Griftles makes the motion of the
Bones more ealie and glib ; fo the Ligaments do fecure that motion bv ftrensthning the articulation of one Bone with another. A Tjfament is zfimikr part, cold and dry, of amtddle nature hetmxt a Lament
a ttftUan»faMembrane, harder than Membranes, left m vehement** motbmtheymouldbebroken; and fofter than Griftles, that they might Se more eafily follow and obey the Mufcles which move the Bones. Thofe that tie one Bone to another are generally infennble, as well be- caufe they receive no Nerves into them, as alfo left being perpetually moved they Ihould breed perpetual pain. But fuch as tie other parts as the Ligaments of the Liver, of the Womb, the bndle of the Tongue, &e. ^^ïï^^^lS^ ^e many, being taken firft from their• a* &
fdltftZ^lmfare faid to be hard, others foft, the former of-, whichi are called cartilaginous, and the latter membranous Laments. The epithet of membranous is likewife given to fome from their breadth, in oppofition whereto others are called nervous, becaufe they are round Zf^Z^^X^TZd laftly they are difenced from
theifireTthlnciMuri To give particular inftances of al which, would fe a needTefs curiofity : I mall therefore break off when I have added a W°Tlfltf the Ligaments, as well as Griftles, are many: for^theytó *„
confirmtdIrengtrfen the articulations of the Bo.des : they alfo bind and fiSStoo^ne another where there is no true articulation Third- Hhev ferve as an outward garment to the Tendons of the Mufcles, ma- ty, tney lerve as au vu*. & length covered with Ligaments ny of which are througliou^^^?^aiow betWixt the Bones
and Membranes. F™'b&*g Sy and laftly, fome of them do ferve Su^lTwels! 5Et$& - fall with their great weigh, fuch are the Ligaments of the Liver, ®c. The End of the Pifth Booh
|
|||||||||
|
Ïi2 THE
|
|||||||||
|
THE
APPENDIX,
Containing Two
r
DISCOURSES:
The one, of the
GENERATION
O F
ANIMALS;
And the other, of the
MOTION of the CHYLE,
And the
|
||||||
|
By the fame Authour.
|
||||||
|
Aaa
|
||||||
|
O)
SECTION I.
Of the Generation of ANIMALS.
|
||||||
|
The PREFACE.
IN the Introduction to the foregoing Anatomical Treatife I
premifed, that my inducement to compile and publijh it was to inftruk thofe of my own Profeffion in the frame and uk of the Parts of that Creature which zs the Subject of our Art. And becaufe moji Farriers are Perfons of [mail literature, ƒ promifed and intended to write the Difcourfe in fuch plain and familiar phrafe as they might be capable of apprehending, that they might reap that benefit from it which was defigned them. C And I have as much as I could endeavoured to ferve that firfi intention. ) But upon publishing my Propofals for printing this Book* finding that it would not be unacceptable to Perfons of the be fi rank,, as well of the Nobility as Gentry, J thought it advifeable not to pen it in too paltry and homely a fly le, left it might be naufeous and unpleafant to fuch wor- thy Perfons as by their Subfcriptions were pleafed to give me encouragement to go on with the Work: So that I hope in the perufal of it, it will both be delightfuU to thefe latter fort of Readers, and yet in/irucl and benefit the former, for whom onely (as I f aid) it was at fir ft intended. But now as to the following Difcourfe which was alfo men-
tioned in the Propofals, I found that not onely the Men of my own Profeffion made fmall reckoning of it 5 but I was cenfured hyfome of note, for pretending to treat of things above my ca- pacity. 1 muft confefs I was a little abajhed and difcounte- nancd at this Cenfure, as having but a fmall fhare of that confidence whereby fo many recommend themfelves to the World: infomuch as growing jealous of my own ability, I took, advice upon it. And it was my good fortune to meet with a Perfony that upon my imparting my thoughts to him, encouraged me to go forward, promifing, if I needed any, to lend me f ome af- fiftance. And 1 muft acknowledge that the Reader (and, my Aaa 2 felf)
|
||||||
|
4 The Preface to the Dìfcourfè
felf ) are very much owing to his kjndnefs for the beginning of
this Tre at ife ; and partly alfo for the compofure of the Re- mainder ; ( though the Obfervations-, which are the ground of the Vifcourfe, be wholly mine own : ) for I durfl not trufl my Pen alone in what I perceived would be fcand with fome feve* rity. He that doth not underftand it, may believe it was not writ for his ufe j and he that doth, is defired to accept it in good part. And now to give fome more particular account of it :
It will not be expelled that an Appendix or Supplement fhould contain an Hiftory of the Generation of all Animals ; for that would require [everal Volumes : but it will fuffice to de* fcribe the Generation of one Oviparous and another Vivipa- rous Creature (the Toung of one being formed without, and the other within the Body) to which all others whatfoever may be reduced. By Animal I underfiand every thing that hath fenfe and
motion. Concernhig which it will not fall in my way to dif- courfe of their fever al natures or actions, thofe confiderations lying before him that would treat of Animals already perfetlly generated and matured : but my province will be to fhew ( i ) from what original matter, and (2) by what efficient caufe Animals are generated, and ( 3 ) in what order and by what degrees their Parts are firfi delineated, and at lafi come to be perfected. i. Fir fi then as to their original matter, I affirm univerfaìly m«ter' ofa of all Animals, that it is an Egg, either formally, or fome*
aiwmIs. thing analogous thereto, and which upon many accounts may not improperly have that appellation given it : Tea this term may be applied not onely to Animals, but to the Seeds of Plants or Herbs, and Kernels of the Fruit of Trees alfo. And indeed feeing the Toung of every Animal in their fever alfpecies arrives to a confiderable bulk before it hath any Animal life, during which time it encreafes and grows merely as a Vegetable ; there is no fuch great difference in the fir fi principles and manner of growth of Vegetables and Animals as is commonly conceived. And therefore to fatisfy the Curious, and to lay the lower and fir- mer foundation for my defign, IJhall in the fir fi place premife the manner of procedure in the vegetation of Seeds from the microfcopical obfervations of Malpighius in his fecond Part of the Anatomy of Plants. |
||||
|
of the Generation of Animals.
Now that both Vegetables and Animals jhould proceed from
Ens, willfeem no very ftrange notion to him that hath read the Saying offome old Philofophers, Ex Ovo omnia, that all things arf from an Egg : though I muftconfefsthat it is not neceffarily to be underfiood in my (enfe, but poffibly means no more than that the firft formation of all things was from an Fm according to the opinion delivered by Anftophanes in £ifAves p W% (quoted by Dolour Cudworth in his True wnJaual Syfteme of theUniverfe,fi2i.) namely that at SK^tó« ^M^^ Chaos, which lay ng anEzz from thence was produced Love, and that mingling - JtU Thaos beeot Heaven and Earth, and Animals 4
'£d"jt gT Whofe GreeiVerfes to this purpofe are tk«* tranjlated by the aforefaid Learned Dollour. Firft all was Chaos, one eonfufed heap,
Datknefs enwrapt the difagteeing deep ; In a mixt croud the jumbled Elements were, Nor Earth, nor Air, nor Heaven did appear; Till on this horrid vaft Abyfs of things Teeming Night, fpreadmg o'er her cole-black wings, Laid the firft Eggi whence after Time s due courfe Mud forth Lof e (the World's B^fcuroe) Gllftring with golden Wings, which fluttrmg oer
^Tchaos, geldred all the numerous ftore Of Animals and Gods, iste. 1 know that the tern Egg is not alike properly "tP^J
éeM {eed of principle out of which every thmgis formed i lut fSncMn fake it «9 fc* *» »T "Ì ""'fj
tcaU fuiTtrJtle b federal names ; « in Humane kind Quadrupeds to call it a conception; m Fifhes to name rfl llMM(hough in Latin they have no other name but o™ eTJ) in Frogs, the Spawn; in Ufs, atButter- Ova, msi>'*? f aCCOrdiJto Ariftotk; m likemfe in flies, Sec. Worms l a"^a'f , f ■ 1 Trees Kernek. Plants to term them Seeds 5 in the jmts oji , *y , 1 fai it ma, leem more proper to retain this vulgar way of ]pean i^andather «(e tUfe'fundry appellations, than to confound t£mJ under L genJal me: I mil not therefm contend £ words, but iaU readily permit every mm to ufibis |
||||
|
6 The Preface to the Difcourfè
êppear that there is fo great an analogy or Ukenefs in Nature
amongft all thefe, that nothing {but the common way offpeakr ing) hinder s> why they might not aU be included under one denomination. If any think. 1 begin too far off my fcope, to treat of the ve-
getation of Plants, when my defign is to explain the generation of Animals 5 be fides what Apology the thing it f elf will make for me with every Intelligent Reader, Mofes's Hiftory of the Creation feems to authorife fuch a method, and to chalk, out my way for me, We find the Almighty proceeding every day from the more imperfetti and ignoble Creatures to the more per- feR and noble : Whence on the third day he commands the Earth to bring forth Grafs, the Herb yielding Seed, and the Fruit-tree yielding Fruit after his kind, whofe Seed is in it felf, upon the Earth. On the fifth day he commands the Waters to bring forth abundantly the moving Creature that hath life, and Fowl that may flie above the Earth in the open Firmament of Heaven. And laftly on the fixth day he bids the Earth bring forth the Living Creature after his kind, Cattel and creeping thing, and Beaft of the Earth after his kind : and on the fame day he created Man in his own image to have dominion over the Fifh of the Sea, and over the Fowl of the Air, and over the Cattel, <b-c. Whether God obferved fuch a fucceffive order of time in the Creatioìi, as the holy Text defcribes, or whether the Hifiory be onely fo delivered for our better apprehenfion, is too deep and bold a fpeculation for me to meddle with : but it is plain that it literally accords with the nature of the things created ; fee- ing the progrefs is natural from Vegetation to Animality, and from thence to Rationality. For thus a Man is for fome months onely a fort of Vegetable, capable of increafe of Parts, but without fenfe or motion, which afterwards he comes to be in- dowed with, but without any exercife of Reafon till fome time after his birth. But this lafi confideration is beyond my pur- pofe, and onely mentioned tofhew, that the fame method Mo- fes obferves in the Hifiory of the Creation, is natural enough to follow in an Hifiory of Generation. 3.. As to the efficiënt Caufe of Generation, that is the geni- SufetfS ture of the Male, I [peak of proper generation, and offuch ncraion. Animals whofe fpecies confifts of Males and Females. For there is a generation called equivoca), fuch as that is [aid to be of |
||||||||
|
Frogs
|
||||||||
|
of the Generation of Animals. 7
te^ rf * ^ZdiheT^rous to enter upon the treat- P„„.
OTe of'\kmà,it^mjV Tl . ty Reader |
|||||
|
CHAP*
|
|||||
|
S" AH :
|
|||||
|
J
|
|||||
|
O)
|
|||||
|
C H A P. I.
Of the Vegetation of Seeds, particularly of a Wheat-corn.
TH E conception of an Animal and the firft formation and encreafé
of an Embryo in the Womb, correfponds very much ( as we have already hinted), to the Seed of a Plant and its vegeta- tion in the Bofom of the great and common Mother, the Earth. Where- fore the obferving in what manner a Seed proceeds to a Plant being ob- vious to every Man ; to give an account of fuch obfervation may much conduce to the better apprehending by what degrees a Conception grows to a perfeft Fetus. But the parts of a Seed being fo minute, that the naked Eye can make no perfeft difcovery of the firft rudiments of the Plant that is formed out of it, it is neceilary to make ufe of a Microfcope to greaten the Objects, which the moll curious Malpighius hath done with that accuracy as to render further inquiry and examination needlefs. I mail therefore give you an account of his obfervations of this kind in as few words and as plain as I can. ' ',. ,,.„,, The Eggs ( or Seeds ) of Plants being excluded out of the Mother's the manner
Egg-bed (called a Pod, or Husk, or by whatever other name diftin- f «g«« Pvnfhedi reauirine further foftering and brooding, are committed to the having received them into her Bofom, doth not onelygtve them incuba-
tion or brooding by her own halituous vapours* joined with the heat of the Sun-beams ; but doth by degrees abundantly fupply what the fruitfull Seeds Hand in need of. For flie everywhere abounds with little chanels or finuous parages, in which the Rain-water fatiated and impregnated with fruitfull Salts does run like the Blood and Chyle in the Arteries of Animals ; which moliture is translated or ftrained through the Pores or Pipes òf the outer rind or husk ( correfponding to the Membranes that inveft the Embryo's of Animals) on the infide of which he the thick feminal Leaves, which are commonly two, (though in that which weihall inftance • • u La u,t it k hut one ) that anfwer to the Placenta or Womb-cake in Women or o ±e Cotyledons in Brute, For the fubftance of thefe wS'eav*; coïfifts o?a great number of little bladders or bottles, and of Navel-veflels, or a Navel-knot. Into the bott es is received the fruitfull moliture of the Earth that is {trained through the rind of the Seed which makes a fmall fermentation with that proper juice that was inherent originally in the Seed-leaves ; and this fermented Liquor is con- veyed by the umbilical VelTel to the Trunk of the Plant, and to the Gemm or Bud that is continued to it ; whereupon a vegetation and increafe of the Parts fucceed. . This in fliort, is the manner of procedure in the vegetation of Plants ;
how hr it agrees with the firft formation and encreafe of the Embryo's of nowtarlta° Bbb Animals, |
|||||
|
io Of the Vegetation of Seeds, Chap. I.
Animals, will be made more plain by and by. In the mean time, that
what I have here abftradted out of the above-mentioned moll ingenious Authour, may be the better underftood, I have thought good further to tranfcribe out of him an inftance or example of this procedure, and to ex- hibit the fame alfo in a curious Figure to the Eye of the Reader that can- not lb well conceive of it by the bare verbal defcription. My inftance lhall be in a grain of Wheat. AnHifloryof " The firfi day after it is fown, it grows a little turgid, and the fe- ?r*wïï!iN " cunc^ine or nusk gaPes a little in feveral places. The body of the Plant corn. e" ' " A being continuous with the conglobated Leaf, ( which is called the " flefli of the Seed that makes the llowr) fwells not onely with the Gemm " or Sprout, that is, with the future Stem B, which is opened and wax- 1 " eth green by degrees ; but alfo the lateral Roots CC do bunch out a " little ; and likewife the lower Root D becoming green jets fomewhat " out ; whence the Placenta or Seed-leaf E becomes loofe and gapes. " The body of the Plant is continued and knit, by the Navel-knot F, to " the conglobated Flowr-leaf, which fupplies matter for vegetation. " In two daies the Secundine or Husk G being broken through, the
" Stem, or top of the future Straw H appears on the outfide of it, and " with its top is a little diftant from the Leaf ( that is continued to it ) . " growing upward by degrees. The Seed-leaf I guarding the Roots, be- "comes turgid with the little bladders, and puts forth a white down,- " this Leaf being pulled away, you may fee the Roots of the Plant made , " bare, of which the long one K is very apparent, but the two others LL " are more obfcure. The top of the Stem H is crooked ; and within, " the Gemm or Bud and future Leaves and Stalk lie hid. Between the " Roots and afcending Stem, the trunk of the Plant is knit by the Navel- "knot M to the Flowr-leaf which is very moift, but as yet keeps its " white colour, and its proper and natural tafte. " The third day approaching, the pulp of the conglobated or round Leaf
" becomes turgid with the juice that it has received from the Earth fer- " menting with its own genuine juice. The Plant encreafes in bignefs ; " and its Bud, or Stem N becoming taller, from whitilh turns fomewhat " green ; and the lateral Roots OO break forth greenilh and pyramidal " from the gaping Sheath P, which adheres clofely to the Plant. Tlie " lower Root Qjjecomes longer and hairy, having many Fibres growing " out of it. At the fame time, in fuch Seeds as are more quick and for- V ward, the lower Root R is larger, growing green in its end, and the " Side-roots fprout out of the Sheath S that inverted them : which Sheath " fwelling with white and thick bladders, is continued, like a bark, with " the outer and invefling fubftance. Abundance of hairy Fibres hang all " along upon the Roots, except upon their tip : thofe which grow about "their bafis are longer, and thofe which follow, become lhorter and "lhorter. They twirle about the faline Particles, and little lumps of " Earth, like Ivy, whence they grow curled. The Placenta T fades by " degrees, and above the lateral Roots SS there break out two other lit- " tie ones UU. The Stem X being roundilh and waxed bigger grows " ftreight upwards. " Towards the end of the third day, the Stem Y tending upwards,
" makes as it were a right angle with the feminal Leaf Z lying horizon- " tally •' it is llenderer and more longifh ; and its outer cover is white, " and bright or tranfparent, guarding the tender and greenifli Gem. The |
||||
|
Cliap. L particularly ef a Wheat-corn.
" lafl Roots a jèt out more ; and the other three growing larger are cioà-
" thed with a down, that ftraitly embraces the lumps of Earth : this down f' is fo luxuriant, efpecially where it meets with any vacuity, that its hairs " uniting with one another make a kind of net. The conglobated or "Flowr-ieafZ is fofter, and milky as it were ; whence if one bruife it, it '} yields à white and fweetifh juice like Barly-cream : if one pull the " Plant from it, the Roots and Stem of the Plant are plain to be feen : " alfo the intermediate Navel-knot I appears, whofe outer and inverting "part is more folid like bark; but the inner part is more foft and mar- " rowy. " At the end of the fourth day, the Stalk tending upwards, (the outer
" or Sheath-leaf e being loofened) puts forth the Stdle-krfd that is green " and folded. Below, the afore-defcribed Roots grow longer ; and there " appears a new tumour (Tometimes two,) of a future Root e. The Seed- " leaf ƒ alfo that hangs upon the Plant begins to fade, whofe remaining "juice notwithstanding is as yet white and uncorrupted. If one cut the " Stem infonder, the rife of the tender Stalk g appears to be from the Na- " vel-knot, from which alfo the Roots take their beginning : outward " ly likewife the Sheath-leaf e is to be feen, wherein the Stalky and its " Leaves, and the rife of the Roots are infolded. "About the fixth day, the Stable-terì h being loofened, the Plant
"mounts upward, the thick Sheath-leaf i as yet cleaving about it like a " bark. The Seed-leaf k on its outride is finuous or full of crinkles, and " faded : this being cut and freed from the husk or fecundine, the FJe/h " or Perkarpium is not alike all over ; for its outer part, whereby the " outfide of the Seed or Grain is heaved up, is more folid, and looks like " a concave Leaf: it hath the fame appearance alfo in that part whereby " it flicks and is continued to the Navel-knot : but its infide is üÜvAous - " and fill'd with humour, efpecially that part of it that is next to the Na- " vel-knot. The Leaves being puJJ'd off, the Roots torn, and the Flowr- " leaf removed, the trunk appears, in which, not far from the Roots, " the Navel-knot / bunches out, which is folid, and hard to cut : above, " there is the mark of the Sheath-leaf / that was pulfd off: under this, " as in an Arm-pit, theGemm m is often hid ; beyond which there is like- " wife a knot, with the skar of the torn off Leaf n, and in the top the " foft Gem o is kept ; and thus the whole bulk of the future Stalk is had "in this compendium. The hinder-part alfo of the Plant (hews the " breakings forth of the Roots ; likewife the faded Placenta or Seed- " leaf/, and the skar of the Sheath-leaf i, with the following Knots and . ** Gemm o.
" After the eleventh day, the Seed-leaf q often as yet flicking to the
" Plant, is crumpled and almoft corrupted ; for being opened, it yields " an humour with airy bubbles : within, it is hollow, and about the fe- " cundines the mucous and white fubflance of the Seed, being continued " even to the Navel-knot, formes a cavity. All the Roots becoming Ion- « eer put forth new Branches out of their fides ; and the Stalk, though it « have taller Leaves, yet for the mofl part it is no longer than the trunk " above delineated : for as yet the knots and gems being very near to one "another, are not far from the Navel-knot. Sometimes, the vegetation " making progrefs, the fpaces betwixt the knots are larger ; and the «Sheath-leaf r being pull'd off the fide, a Knot ƒ appears, out of which « there fprouts fortha Leaf t that foflers the afcending Stem. In the mean Bbb % -"time
|
||||
|
12 Of the Vegetation of Seeds, &c. Chap. I.
" time the, feminal Leaf withers, and is emptied on its infide ; and if one
" prefs it, it yields nought but Water. The white and folid internode " (or fpace between the Knots ) is lengthned, and new Gemms appear ; " and the middle Root grows to be feveral inches long. " After a month, both the Roots and Stalk being grown longer, new
" Buds m appear to be breaking forth of the firft Knot, and very little " Tumours xx bunch out, which at length break forth into Roots : for " Roots fprout out fo eafily, that fometimes if one pull off the firft " Roots, there will abundance of new ones arife in their ftead. Like- " wife at the fame time, the Stem being eftablilhed with its ufual Roots, " puts forth new onesjyj' which break through even the Sheath-leaf that " cloaths it : and it alfo rifes up with a white joint that is full with- " in. Above the Roots from the fame Knot grow two Buds zz, guard- " ed with their proper Leaves ; and the intermediate Stalk runs up- " wards. This Hiftory it was thought good to tranflate at its full length,
(though there are fome particulars that may feem beyond our purpofe, and which are not mentioned in the general defcription of Vegetation that was premifed ) left we mould be injurious to the moft ingenious Authour by concealing any of his difcovcries. But paffing by them, it will appear plainly by the following difcourfe, how little the forma- tion of an Embryo and firft encreafe of its Parts, differs from the firft fpringing of a Vegetable ; and then the Reader will further fee how natural, and reafonable it was to begin with the defcription of this latter, the better to explain the former. |
||||||
|
1-» o A 1.
|
||||||
|
»
|
||||||
|
Chap. II Of the fir ft rudiment of an Egg. 13
CHAP. II.
Of the fir ft rudiment of an Egg, and what way it pafes
to the Uterus 5 a If o how it attains to its great buli, and how it becomes fruitfuU. A N f MALS are commonly, diftinguimed into Oviparous and Vivi- m^hefc
A parous ■ by which we are not to underftand any fpecifical difference f---^ in rhe firft Drinciple or original matter of one and another, as if Oviparous rous and n- ï^pSd theiApecies by Eggs, M ™»mi '***# ad- mixture of the Male and Female's Seed in the Womb out of which a Conception mould be formed; as many Philofophers have taught : but no more ought to be meant by it, than that fome Animals exclude their Eggs out of their Body, which are afterwards hatched either by incuba- tion or brooding, (as in Fowls; ) or by the bare warmth of the Sun (as in Infefts • ) or by fome other means ; whereas others retain their iiggs within their Bodies, whkh are hatched (as it were) in their-Vterns or its Cornua, and when an Animal of their refpedive Species is formed out of any one, it is afterwards excluded. Which truth that it may the better be entertained by the prejudic'd Vulgar I will firft fhew the pro- cedure in the generation of Oviparous Animals, and afterwards examme what analogy thereto there is in Viviparous, and in both of thefe o Vegetables, as to the Embryo or firft lineaments of the Fetus, both as to formation and nutrition. „ , Sg then in the firft place to deliver the Hiftory fJf£^Xl
ofOviparous Creatures, liliali "™^%^%^^^ oerfed as Infedls, Reptiles, and Aquatile* (which lalt we have no oppor- Sv to examine) and pitch upon Fowl whofe Eggs are moft perfecl; andZo^them mall chufe an ffeu, which is moft tamdiar and ready at hand for making obfervations upon. And that I may omit nothing that will iluftrate the fimilitude, it will be convenient to begin with inqui- ring S into the firft principle, or rudiment of an Egg; thm, fecon^- ^febyXt^yk^etlJtothe^m; thirty how it attains to ThatIrS bulk khath when excluded ; fourthly, how it becomes fitet- . ( fulf - ÏÏÏÏ nd Uy, by what degrees a Chicken is formed out of
t exhhbiting in Figures taken from the life, of what lhape it appears each it, exniDinng m nguiw difcernib e as to be delineated, day from that urne any of its Parts arelo ***** . f or examine its
m it is become fo perfed that ^^^f inquiry j « dif- inward parts without direction. Tnenrir ioui g j . patch in this Chapter, leaving the laft of them (which is the main
for our purpofe ) to the next. , ■ wnere the i The 7%? thing to be examined is the Ovary or ngg-w , **$#„&
firft rudiment ofthe Egg appears. And ^J^tó^S^
our purpofe to ihew the àSh^^^f^ ^ thofe dlffe. fomeother Fowl, much more ^^vf^eoncen, notour fcope:
rencesconfiftonely m leflèr cu^m«, wM £ft for in this they all agree that they nave an vyy*^ ,
principles of the Eggs are to be found therein, ^ # |
||||
|
ï4 Of the pa f age and encreafe of d?i Egg* CHap. It
the Ovmy. ^is Ovary in an Hen is feated at the Back-bone upon the great Ar-
tery and Vein defcending, a little lower than the Liver, at the fame place where thè CockJs Stones lie, which is about the place where in Vivipa- rous Animals the preparing Veflels that go to the Tefticles arife. Iri this the Eggs appear firft of a white colour, being as fmall almoft as Sea- fand. But after they are grown a little bigger, viz. about as big as Hail-fhot they turn yellow, and are truly onely the Yelks of the Eggs that (hall be, which afterwards acquire Whites, as we lhall mew by and by. Each of thefe Yelks is inveited with a proper Coat, and befides, borrows another from the Ovary, by which they are feverally knit to its foundation, or root, that is, to that part of it that flicks to the defcen- ding Trunks of the great Artery and Vein ; fo that hereby they are fu- ftained in their place, even as the Tefticles in Men are clad and fufpen- ded by their vaginal Coat that is borrowed from the Rim of the Belly (or Peritonaeum.) Thofe of the Yelks that are outmoft are largeft, thofe in the middle lefs, but thofe the neareft the foundation, leaft of all. a. Secondly, Adjoining unto and embracing the Ovary is the Infundilu- Wbich way ium or Tunnel, which confifts of a very thin and yielding Membrane.
}ex from the With it Orifice it encompaflès the Ovary, and defcending lengthways of
ovary to the the Back is continued unto the upper and narrower part of the Vterus,
uterus. ^ Do&our Harvey called the Procefi of the Womb. As the Yelks of
the Ovary come to maturity, they drop offit one after another, and fall immediately into the mouth of the Tunnel, in which they make no flay, but are conveyed by it quickly into the Procefi of the Vterus. This Procèfi hath many folds or cells, like as the Gut Colon has in mod Crea- tures, which contribute not onely to the longer flay of the Egg in it, but make it more convenient for the collection of that whitifh clammy hu- mour that fo plentifully bedews it, out of which the Yelks gather their. White. For f. Thirdly, Though the Yelks while they remain in the Ovary are nou- "Zfed U en" r^ecI anc* encreafed by tne Arterial bloud as all other Parts of the Body
are; yet as foon as they are dropt off from thence, they never adhere af- terwards or grow to any Part whereby any Bloud-veflels fhould be infer- red into them : but as they make no flay in the Tunnel, fo do they not adhere to the fides either of the Vterus ( fpecially fo called ) or of its Procefi. But there being great fiore of Arteries difperfed through them both, thefe fpew as it were out of their fmall mouths (that open into the Cavity of the Vterus and its Procefi) a great quantity of a whitifh chy- ♦ lous liquor, which the Yelks by an innate vegetative principle attract
and aflimilate to themfelves, and which conftitutes their White. Now
feeing (as we noted above) that the Yelks as they come from the Ova- ry, have two Coats, one proper, and another borrowed ; I am of an opi- nion that the White is collected betwixt thefe two; namely, that the uterine humour tranfudes through or is imbibed by the borrowed Coat, but is flopped from proceeding further towards the centre of the Egg by the proper Coat which is more denfe and clofe. For the foundation of the Ovary from whence this outer Coat is borrowed, is of a loofe fpongy fubftance, whence 'tis probable the Coat is fo likewife. Onely 'tis likely that fome particles of this humour penetrate through the inner Coat alfo, by which the Yelk receives increafe, and alfo fome alteration in fubftance from what it was of, while it remained in the Ovary. Though I think this opinion is new, yet I am the bolder to profefs it, not onely becaufe it can-
|
||||
|
Chap. IL How an Egg becomes fruitful/. 15
it cannot well be conceived how a new Coat fhould be acquired in the
Vterus, feeing the Egg adheres to no part from which it fhould receive . it ; but much more from the Analogy there feems to be between the nu- trition of an Egg ( in Hens ) and that of a Conception ( in Viviparous Animals. ) Now every Body knows that a Conception when it is never fo fmall, is clad with two Coats, the Chorion and Amnios, and that the Albugineous liquor of the Womb tranfudes through them both for the nouriihment of the Embryo contained in the, Amnios. I fay it paflès through loth the Membranes of a Conception, becaufe it was neceflary it fhould arrive at the Embryo which it nourifheth ; but feeing the Yelk is fo far from refembling the Embryo, that no Part of the Chicken is formed out of it, ( for it onely ferves for a grofïèr fort of nourifhment for it) the like liquor in an Hen paffêth onely through the outer Coat which anfwers to the Chorion, betwixt which and the inner it is collected for the ufe of the future Foetus. But if we will fuppofe with Dodtour Harvey, that there are two Whites, the inner of a thicker confiftence, and the outer of a thinner, and that thefe are included each in a particular Membrane ; then as thefe Membranes anfwer exactly to the Chorion and Amnios, fo mull we fuppofe that the Coat that was borrowed from the Ovary, was originally double, and now onely begins to appear fo. ( But enough of this. ) The Egg then beginning to encreafe in bulk on this manner at firft in the Precefi of the Vterus, doth by degrees defcend down into the Vterus it felf, wherein it grows tó its full proportion. Now the Vterus is of a carnous fubftance, but fuch as may be eafily m Urems
ftretched lengthways or breadthways, and except when it isdiftended with dtf(ribed- a perfect Egg, is very full of wrinkles and folds, as we defcribedits Pro- ce(s (above) to be. When the Egg hath arrived at its juft bignefs, fo that it can no longer be contained in the vterus it begins to acquire a Shell, Which according to Doftour Harvey is hard while the Egg is yet
in the Vterus ; though according to Anftotle and A^uapendent thè Shell owes its original to that vifcous and clammy humour that bedews the fur- face of the Egg when it is lay'd, the watery part whereof evaporating, the remainder prefently hardens into a Shell. But any Country Houle wife may decide this controverfie as well as thefe great Philofophers, who by feeling with their Finger whether the Hen be with >ƒ/ or hard Egg ( as they ufe to phrafe it ) know whether fhe will lay that day or no : for if fhe do, the Egg feels, comparatively, hard, though not quite fo hard as after it is lay'd. Fourthly, If one compare an Egg lay'd by an Hen that hath never 4-
been trod by a Cock, one {hall not find it differ in any one refpeft (fo £-- ^ far as the Eve can judge ) from another that is lay d by one that has ufed fruitful, to be trod every day ; fo that it feems difficult to give a reafon why the one fhould be fruit fall, and the other not. I think it is peculiar to a tame Hen (of which we are fpeaking) to lay as well without a Cock as with him : in whom therefore the treading is no efficient caufe of the Egg, but onely of making it fruitfall. Now it is very confiderable what Dortour Harvey and others have
obferved, that one treading is fufficient to fertilize a whole knot of Eggs, be they twenty or a greater number ; which befides what we lhall fay af- terwards, may fufficiently detect the vulgar opinion of Errour, viz. that thofe fpecks in the Yelk which we commonly call the treddle, are the Seed ot the Cock ; for how can he be imagined to fpend fo much at one |
|||||||
|
time
|
|||||||
|
How. an Egg becomes fruitful!. Chap. IL
time as all thefe muft amount to ? But to pafs by that, it is certain that
none of the Cock's Sperm can come to the Ovary ; for if the Cock have any Penis at all ( which Doftour Harvey denies ) yet it is fo fhort that it cannot reach one quarter of the way between the outer Orifice and the Ovary : yea that part that is between the Vterus and outward Orifice, which anfwers to the Vagina in Viviparous Animals, is fo full of folds and wrinkles that one cannot pafs any thing from without inwards, not fo much as a Bridle ; fo that it is not eafy to conceive how the Cock's Penis ( if he have any) fhould penetrate even fo far as the Vterus, which yet is two or three inches diftant from the Ovary. But notwithstanding the impojibility of the Sperm's reaching the Ovary, and the improbability that it is injected fo far as into the Vterus ; yet it is without all queflion that the fruitfulnefs of the Eggs is wholly owing to fome virtue derived from the Seed. Not that any of its grofier fubftance doth conftitute any part of the Egg ; but fome fubtil effluvia or fpirituous fleams exhale from it into the Vterus, which afcend from thence by the Procefs and Tunnel to the Ovary, fecundating the fame. I fay the rudiments of the Eggs are fertilized in the Ovary ; for it is not probable that the Vterus onely fhould be impregnated thereby with a fecundating virtue or power, which it imparts to the Egg after its defcent from the Ovary into it. For though in a tame Hettthe Yelks feparate and fall ofTfrom the Ovary of their own accord, whether ihe be trod or no : yet in other Fowls it is not fo, in whom, naturally, the Hen lays no Eggs if fbe be withheld from the Cock : and it is not to be imagined but that the Eggs of both are made fruitfull in the fame place. Seeing then it is owing to the geniture of the Cock not onely that the Eggs of wild Fowl become fruitmll, bur that they lay any at all ; (and therefore the prolifick virtue of the geni- ture muft be exerted Upon the Ovary from whence the Eggs iflùe : ) we may from hence conclude, that though a tame Hen ( by a peculiar pro-
perty ) do lay without treading ; yet as thefe Eggs are all of them addle, fo thofe that are hatchable into Chickens were fecundated before they were parted from the Ovary ; for it would be abfurd and unreafonable to fuppofe fo great a difference in the impregnating the Eggs of the fame Species of Animals, as the contrary opinion intimates, viz. that one fhould be made fruitfull in the Ovary, and the other in the Vterus. But thus much may fuffice to have fpoken of the origine, encreafe and
fruitfulnefs of an Egg ; it remains to examine by what means and degrees a Chicken is formed out of it. |
|||||
|
CHAP.
|
|||||
|
Chap. III. What an Egg is* and of what farts it confifts. l 7
CHAR III.
By what means and degrees a Chicken is formed out of
an Egg. A Riftotle in his Firft Book of thè hi (lory of Animals, fays, an Egg
1S An Egg What. that ex cujus parte fit principio Animal, quod generatur : ex altera alimentum ipfi generato, i.e. of one part whereof the Animal is generated, and of another, nourished. It is both the feed and principle of the Young, and alfo the Womb wherein it is formed, foftered and nourifbed. Out of one Egg is but one Chicken generated : for if at any time there be two, then are there really two Eggs included in one Shell, as We many times fee two Kernels in one Nut-ihell. Now that we may the better know out of what part of the Egg the its Pam.
Chicken is formed, and by which part nouriihed, we are to give an ac- count of all the parts of an Egg. The firft and outmoft is the Shell, which is as the Woml wherein the
Chicken is hatched. The next is the White ( or as Doftour Harvey will have it, two Whites, the outer being thinner, and the inner thicker) which anfwers to the nutritious Juice or Chyle in the Womb of Vivipa- rous Animals, and from which the Chicken by its umbilical Vefiels re- ceives its firft nourimment. And indeed it might as properly be called Chyle, as the Chyle whereby the Fetus in Viviparous Animals is nou- riihed, is called Albumen or an alhugiveous Liquor, deriving that name from the White of an Egg, which is fo called in Latin : for their names may well be confounded, feeing they are not onely of the fame ufe, but of the fame nature alfo both as to colour and tafte,. and agree particularly in this, that both of them by the warmth of the Fire will congeal into a gelly.
The next part is the Telk, in Latin called Vitellum, from vita, be-
caufe the Chicken lives by it. It is other wife named Luteum (the Telk or Tellow) from its colour. This part alfo ferves for the nutrition of the Chicken, but is of a more terrene and grofs nature than the White, and therefore'comes to nourifh it onely in the fecond place, when the White is fpent, as mall be lhewed farther by and by. Both the Yelk and the White are each inverted with a Membrane ; yea if there be two Whites, as Doftour Harvey affirms, then is the inner and thicker White divided by a proper Membrane from the outer and thinner. Which two Mem- branes of the White anfwer exaftly to the Chorion and Amnios in Vivipa- rous Animals, which contain the chylous or albugineous Liquor for the nourifhment of the Foetus, as was hinted in the foregoing Chapter. In the Membrane that cloaths the Yelk, towards each end of the Egg is placed a fpeck or little tranfparent knot, which are commonly called the Treddles, from an opinion that they are the Sperm of the Cock, and that the Chicken is formed out of them. But feeing there are two in each Egg (one towards each end) if thefe were the Seed or firft vegetative princi- ple of the Chicken, then mould there be two formed out of every Egg. But Doftour Harvey does moft ingenioufly call them the Poles of this C e C Mierocofm,
|
||||
|
18 The means of hatching a Chicken. Chap. III.
Microcofm, ferving for no other purpofe, than for the uniting of the Yelk
to the White ; for though they adhere to the Membrane that inverts the Yelk, yet does the larger diameter or half of them jet out into the White. They are called in Latin Grandines, Hail-ftones, from their colour, as being of a more white and lucid fubftance than the White, and refem- bling much both in ihape and colour the fmaller Hail-ftones when they have been a little wet. Having enumerated all thefe parts of an Egg, and not fuppofing any of
them to be that which is the firft principle of the Chicken, it may be wondred by fome, what part is left to which we can affign that dig- nity. The opinion of the often before-cited Doftour Harvey is clear and convincing as to this, viz. That it is neither of the Knots before- mentioned, but another white, round and fmooth Speck (about as big as a Lentil) that likewife adheres to the Coat of the Yelk, about the middle fpace betwixt the Treddles. And though it is very little, yet that can ' i ■ be no prejudice to the opinion, with him that confiders, that the Con- ceptions (or Ova) of Viviparous Animals, even of the molt bulky, are no bigger than a Mufquet-bullet, when they are feparated from the Tefti- cle or Ovary, which fiate this white Circle or fpeck is now conceived to be in, and of which I fhall fay no more, left I feem to impofe upon the learned and ingenious Reader, whom I would rather advife to perufe Dodtour Harvey himfelf as to this opinion, than fatisfy his curiofity with this lhort Abftrad: of it. But partly for the fake of thofe that want Do£tour Harvey's Book De generat. Animal, and partly that what follows may be the better underflood, I thought it convenient to give a touch of it. * Having then concluded upon the firft Seed or principle out of which mmsTmd tne Chicken is formed, let us next confider by what means and degrees it
degmt a vegetates, and has an Animal generated out of it. We have fhewn in the chkken h foregoing Chapter, that as to the examination by the Eye, there is no- eflt. mt thing in a fruitfull Egg which is not in an addle one ; yea even this white Circle or Speck laft mentioned is equally found in both : and the reafon why it is barren in one and fruitfull in another is its being or not being impregnated by the Cock's Sperm ; fuch Hens as are not trod laying al- ways addle Eggs, but luch as are, for the molt part prolifick. ( But of this enough before. ) the means it Now the means of putting this generative ( or more properly, I think, Jncubatìon. vegetative) principle into act, is the incubation or brooding of the Hen, which influences this Seed ( or Egg within an Egg ) out of which the Chicken is formed, even as the cherifhing and benign beams of the Sun foiler the Seeds that are committed into theBofom or Womb of their kind Mother the Earth.Onely here is the difference, that the Seed or Egg of a Plant contains nothing but the vegetative principle, in which as foon as the pla- ftick power is excited, it attracts nourifhment from without it felf, from the Capillary Veins or meatus of the Earth, as was fhewed at large in the firft Chapter ; whereas the Egg is both Seed and Womb, containing all within it felf, neceftary both for the formation and nutrition of the Fcetus. The reafon of which is apparent, namely, that a Plant ( be it an Oak of two or three hundred years old ) is ftill but an Infant in regard of its nutrition, by its Roots as by fo many Mouths fucking the turgid Breafts of its teem- ing Mother : whereas a Chick ( like all other Animals ) as foon as its Parts are once formed and animated, is prefently emancipated, as it were, from the Womb of its Mother, neither receiving nor needing any further nurri-
|
||||
|
Chap. III. By what degrees a Chicken is hat chea. ip
nutriment from thence, but becoming its own Caterer and Carver. Now
though the fitting of the Hen excite the plaftick power in the aforefaid white Circle, yet is there no vertue derived to it from the Hen her felf, feeing an elementary heat which is as gentle, equal and conftant as that of the Hen, will have the fame influence upon it. Thus as Hiftori- ans relate, the Egyptians ufed to hatch their Eggs by the warmth of a Stove ; and thus the Eftriches Eggs being covered with Sand are hatched by the warmth of the Sun, (which in Africk where thefe Fowls are bred, is much more intenfe than in thefe European Countreys ) the Hen her felf neglecting that office, if the opinion of divers Commentators upon the Book of Job may be relied upon, where chap. 39. verf 14,15-, 16. it is faid that Jhe leaveth her Eggs in the Earth, and warmeth them in the dufi, 'andfor get t et h that the foot may crufh them, or that the wild Be aft may break them. She is hardned againft her Toung ones as though they were not hers, &c. Concluding then that a gentle warmth, be it Animal or Elemental, is the means whereby a Chicken is formed out of an Egg, we fhall proceed to our every days obfervations, by what degrees it is fo formed.
As for the firft three days all is fo imperfect that the irate or condition
of the Embryo could not with any elegancy or intelligiblenefs be drawn by the Painter, whom I employed to draw the following Figures for the Engraver : but from the fourth day forwards to the thirteenth, and af- m degrees terwards on the fifteenth and feventeenth days, you have in the follow- » fj%Jm ing Table in what fiate it appeared every day, which I thought good to exhibit to the Eye, that the difcourfe may be the better underftood. I therefore for this purpofe fet fourteen new laid Eggs (gathered
from feveral Hens with mine own hands, that I might be fure none of them had been fat upon before,) under one Hen, July the firft, 1680. upon which I made thefe following obfervations. : , At the end of the firft day ( or of twenty four hours ) the Yelk had tbtjpgf
changed its fltuation, being removed from the centre of the Egg up to its £*'* blunt end ; and it was likewife half turned about ; for the Treddles that were towards the two ends of the Egg (the one, oppofite to the other) were now turned towards the fides : and that white Speck or Knot that adheres to its Coat ( out of which the Chicken is formed) inflead of be- ing toward the fide of the Egg, was now on that fide of the Yelk that looked towards its (harper end. This Speck was alfo a little bigger, but without any other fenfible alteration. At the blunt end of the Egg the hollownefs, which is natural to all Eggs, was fomewhat enlarged, and the Yelk was rifen fo near it, that it might be feen through the White, «r rather through the Membrane of the White, the White it felf being al- Ï^Sed to the (harp end. The Shell, laftly, looked a little more dusky than before. , ' -
At the end of two days (or 48 hours) the faid Speck was enlarged stmid*h
to the breadth of a filver Penny, and feemed to be of different colours, fome Parts looking more bright and others more obfeure ; and its whole Body jetted out into the White without making any dimple or impreffiori into the Yelk, to whofe invefting Membrane notwithftanding it fill ad- hered Doftour Harvey compares it in this fiate to an Eye ( yea calls it by that name) fuppofmg its Centre to refemble the Pupilla or fight of the Eye, and its outer Circle (as he calls it) the Ins ; affirming that the Puùi la is the vegetative Seed or principle of the Chicken, and that the ^ G e e % outer |
||||
|
ao By what degrees a Chicken is hatched. Chap. III.
outer Circle confifts of the moft pure and cryflal-like part of the White
(being contained within a proper Membrane) from which the Seed re- ceives its firft encreafe, and that therefore as the former dilates its felf, this latter is confumed and obliterated. And this is juft what happens in Vi- viparous Animals, in whom the Ovum imbibes fome of the pure albugi- neous Liquor that bedews the fides of the Womb ; yea it is the fame that happens to the vegetable Seeds of Plants, which attract the like moifture through their Husks (or Secundines) from the Earth : for they all three receive their nouriihment this way, till their Navel-veflels are formed, and the firft growth of all of them is pure ( and alike proper ) vege- tation. mrd day. At the end of the third day, I took a third Egg, and breaking it at the
narrow end, I found a great alteration in it from the ftate it was in the day foregoing. For in the centre of the aforefaid Speck I obferved a little red Body of the colour of bloud, fometime plain to be feen, and anon difappearing ( by turns.) In the circumference of the Speck a pret- ty diflance from the centre there was a reddiih Circle, betwixt which and the red Body in the centre there run very many (lender red ftreaks. The red Body obferved a conftantturn of dilating and contracting it felf (like to the pulfation of the Heart, which Part it afterward proved ) for almofl a quarter of an hour, in which time the Egg being grown cold, its mo- tion then ceafed. By this motion it appears there is now a progrefs made from vegetation to fome degree of Animality. The flender red (Ireaks that run from the centre to the circumference, feemed all to arife from one Trunk, and afterwards proved the Navel-veflèls, which branch- ing out both into the White and Yelk convey nouriihment from thence to the Chicken. Fourth day. At the end of the fourth day all thefe Parts before-mentioned appeared
more plain. The little red Body in the centre now feemed to confili of two parts, whereof whilft the one contrafted it felf, the other was dila- ted, and on the contrary ; which gave me a fufpicion, that one of them was the Heart, and the other the Earlets, whofe contractions and dila- tations (or fyftole's and diaftole's) in perfect Animals obferve that tenour ; and fo I perceived they afterwards proved. The bloudy ftreaks were now extended further than the reddiih circle, both towards the White and to- wards the Yelk : and the Trunk from whence they fprang, looked not now fo fair red as it did before, but fomewhat more dusky, as if fome- thing of an alhy or dull white colour adhered to its outfide, being as it were of a woolly fubftance, and flicking upon the Trunk of the Vein like mofs upon the bough of a Tree. The cavity at the blunt end of the Egg was grown a pretty deal larger than before. The two little red Bodies continued their beating longer than the one had done the day before ; and as foon as they ceafed I took them out, and alfo the Afii-coloured part of the Trunk of the Vein, and put them in fair-water ; wherein as the firft prefently loft their colour, fo the latter loft its ftiape and afpeCt it had within the Egg; for I had fancied it to appear like the firft rudiment (or ft amen) of the Body of the Chicken ; but the woolly fubftance was not of confidence firm enough to retain its former figure in the water : however I perceived as well by the experiment of the next days Egg, as alfo by another Egg that I fince broke on the fourth day, that I had fancied right. The form it was in, when taken out of the Shell on this fourrh day, you have delineated in the firft Figure of the following T- |
||||
|
Chap. III. By what degrees a Chicken is hatched. 21 •
which fliews the Afh-coloured Trunk and woolly fubftance, andfomeof
thofe red ftreaks adhering to it, or proceeding from it. At the end of ^ fifth day the two little red beating Bodies were grown *** <*
of - fainter colour, for by this time the Parenchyma ol the Heart was
b^mS^teSout them. "A little diflance from thefe there appeared
Srfl rudiments of the Head, confifting of four bubbles, twoofwhich
were clear and tranfparent, but the other two of different colours. The
t^o clear ones were the Brain and Cerebel, and thofe of different colours
were SeT Thefe twolaft appeared much bigger than either of the
X One might alfo difcern the Bill which looked white In the
fame Eag I obfoved likewife the rudiments of the Lungs and Liver,
? iff ft L?hered upon or grew out of the Umbilical Vein. The woolly
fo^lS^&, tlat gathered about the Trunk of the Vem,
wsTnow of a more folid and clofe contexture, and did plainly appear to
S firft rudTment of the Carkafe of the Chicken out of which both
Winas and Legs were begun to bud and to be very difcernable This Em-
Wo though all its Pans were imperfedt, did yet appear to have life m
l To'r I could obferve it to bow it felf to and again. Of what form it
Speared when it was taken out of the Liquor wherein it fwam you
have delineated in the/W Fig*re of the following Table, being drawn
by one hat was taken out of an Egg that the Hen had fe upon :five days
compleat ; which Embryo as alfo all the reft that we (hall hereafter m the
following difcourfe fpeak of, I did preferve by a Liquor prepared for
luuuwuig uuv-u r ,. , asainft a Board in the fame
that purpofe, and have them an nangmg uj g.
blevea there i not any Part of the whole Body but a fcheme of it now
Speared The Heart had acquired its proper fhape, but looked white, and each of them was as much biggerc^^^£^iJ
in all its Parts) wa%blfSf^^^ of which the latter Cerebel were as yet o^.^^^ght make fome faint difcove-
ToJS^^^S^wlA t^ the reft of the Parts Lut it as alfo of the Ribs that were extended forward from it like the fineft and whtaft threads of Lawn. There were alfo the Lineaments of iinelt ana « miai . j Lungs, may be leen the Inteftins, whreh as alfo the.Hea«>£»«» s .*
without diffeaion; for f J«„fhafthe EntS lie bare, the firit rudi-
£ ^rta^bfe bMi «S reaehing forwards by de- menC v™Jf StoSms begin with the Back or Keel of the Ship grees ; even as ^V^^T % Tne Lcgs were not onely ap- ìrft, andrarfeup te W» ^~^ diLguilhed into Claws, both
SïSo^SnTof it you h^ibed»*^ Town I was Ff«f'™ .^^ tada"« I found no alte-
was more plain and eompleat • as ne. her . 6 , (
S, «S^H^^-SdilTeaing che Brlfc, JU
|
||||
|
.22 By what degrees a Chicken is hatched. Chap. III.
was begun to dole it felf over it. The fiate of the Chicken on thefe
daies you have delineated in the fourth and fifth Figures. Ninth day. At the end of the ninth day ( being returned home again ) I broke ano-
ther of the Eggs, and could not now difcover the Heart, for the Cheft: was clofed over it though but very loofely and imperfe&ly. ( Though in another Egg broken at the fame time, which another Hen had lat on, I could fee the Heart move without diffëction. ) I perceived the Chicken to move its Legs, Wings and Head, and indeed all its Parts : Its Head was almoft as big as all its Body befides ; but efpecially its Eyes continued of a prodigious bignefs, flaring out of its Head : They were at leaft as big as fmall Piftol-bullets. The White of the Egg was a great part of it confumed already on the nourifhment of the Chicken ; and I could plainly fee its umbilical Veffèls now reach to the Yelk, which feemed as yet to have no part of it fpent ; its Parts were of different con- fiflence, fome thinner and fome thicker ; that was thinner wherein I could perceive the capillary Threads of the Navel-veliels to be difperfed. Both, the Heart, Liver and Lungs were Hill of a whitifh colour, and their Parenchyma had acquired no firmnefs of fubftance, though they had attained very near to their proper fhape. The fixth Figure exprehes the Chicken in the pofture of this day. Tmb day. At the end of the tenth day I examined another, wherein I found the
Cheft pretty firmly clofed, but the Abdomen or lower Belly lay yet quite open, and the Stomach and Guts hung out of it. On its Back I difcerned a great many blackifli fpecks, which were the rudiments of the Feathers breaking out. The Eyes continued much in the fame pofture as on the day before, being as yet but very little drawn within their Or- bits. Neither were the Brain and Cerebel as yet perfectly withdrawn to within the Skull. The White of the Egg was ftill more decreafed, but the Yelk little or nothing diminifhed. Concerning which there is this one • thing very remarkable ; That though addle Eggs begin to flink and grow rotten by the warmth of the Hen, within four daies time from her firft fitting on them, and every day encreafe in their putrefaction the longer they are fat on : yet till this time the White that remains and alfo the Yelk in fruitfull Eggs, retain their proper fmell and favour ; yea the Yelk, that is not all of it confumed when the Chicken is hatched, ( but is part of it received to within its Belly ) I fay what remains of it till then, talles as fweet as the Yelk of a new-laid Egg. (But this by the way. ) See the Chickens fhape of this day in the feventh Figure. Eleventh day. At eleven days end I broke another, and admired to fee the Feathers
fo much encreafed ; for not onely thofe on the Back, which I obferved breaking out the day before, were now become plain Feathers, but all its Body over almoft was covered with the like. Its Abdomen lay yet open, and its Guts jetted out of it ; but the Brain and Cerebel were now with- drawn perfectly within the Skull ; but its Eyes flood goglihg out ftill. One might difcern its Rump alfo formed, and Feathers budding out of it refembling the Tail. But though the Chicken had attained to this matu- rity, yet neither this, nor that I examined the day before, lived fo long as thofe on the two or three days before ; but this I believe, happened through my chancing to wound the Navel-vefïèls in both, which caufed them to bleed, and thereby I fuppofe haftned their death. The eighth Fi- gure expreflès this days Chicken, |
|||||
|
All
|
|||||
|
Chap III. By what degrees a Chicken is hatched. 23
All the Parts being now entirely formed, it ^*^J^£fffc
tion of the fame things over again and again to.give a pa mular a count umk e u A™c t^mrppHinft from the twelfth to the end ol xb&Jeventeenth,
^^SSS^bMte open filli : onely I fhall give ate ac- uii wm™ ^SgXnition that happens in this interval ; which is not count of fonie little alt.eration ^ fed and h ^ f° ?TCh1 v^lf^S^ fl^fiy» ^umbilical VelTels are five,
umbilical Veflels D°£ou f 0^e J the Veins arifes from the Cava three Veins and two Ar ten .un ^ ^ branches into the above the Lm*: :thlsl*™f™g™' fpent> the branches of the Vein
^ ^^b?^rSiSl: ButtheothertwoVeins hTulZÌ tathe lemForw continue longer, having their branches which fpr ngtrom ™e Y/™ ,. , ^ buta very iittic of it confumed. diftributed into the Yelk, which as yet is but a y ^^
^JST^^ itfpent! the M^ranes that contain d
? L^tXvelup and contraa themfelves and to cleave one to ano-
her £ the^w* cleaves to the Allantoides in Viviparous Animals
ft-a& now y^^^^i^^^^L
themfelves) with its Head commonly under the right Wing. "oned*
tnemieiveï»; wau n* 11 y d have obtained aimoft fea its Breaft, ^ffi^nvXL of fomewhat a yellowifh white,
their natural redaels; but tncuverioojs fubftance, If one open the Head^^^S&c/to confi* of n*
whereas, till o ^f^ Sue ftill to ftand flaring out of their »«J^U they do when **0»S^ ^If-dW^^ t0 within the ^.y^
On the '**f"'*^^^ remains of the Yelk, from«*>
wen, and together w«h «** _hat wm ^ft 110 the chick, which the umbilical Vf^"™^ T^ even after the Chicken is
even after it is thus included ^ ^e Belly, yea was a hatched : for it is not all fpent till ^ ^m affords it no n0uri(h-
neceflary provifion of Na^^ftrYomg ones) but it muft be
ment ( as Viviparous Creaureoo to e Mother does its own Carve^ that it fl,ould ftiU
I fay, Nature for this reaioninaniv ;r acquired fome
be nouriihed by its umbil caiVeflds ti If its pu ^ umbiUcal
flrength, and it ^^^c^^dM^into1heTOte, is
Vein that is derived fromthe'.Cava an ^^ Q now quite obliterated, the White_ oeing hdd ^ tQ
perceive the Chicken to bulle ^^^^^e and more towards
his Ear, it may be heard fometimes o peep, but^mo the twenty-firft day which is the ^^J^^e any Figure of from this eighteenth day it were to no ^ g yJn .* What fiate the Chicken is J,^^ rf its Body which is all there wou d1 appear no Part bu°gje nQ further >f the manner out oXdd a wo'd or two of its hatchng ^
|
||||
|
24 -By what degrees a Chicken is hatched, Chap. III.
How the Three weeks is reckoned the ufual and natural time for Chickens to be
ïhkh~ed H 'hatched in- At tne one an<^ twentieth day therefore, or at the longed on thé two and twentieth the Chicken having fpent all the provifion Nature had provided for it in its little manfion ; but more efpecially wanting a freer Air to breath in, it begins to be uneafie, and to meditate and endeavour an exit, It is to be noted that naturally there is in every Egg a little ca- vity in its broader end, which is filled ( as I may fay ) with congenit Air : As the cavity encreafes, this Air muft needs be rarefied fo as to fill up the empty fpace ; for the Shell feems of fo denfe and compact a fub- ftance as to admit none of the external Air into it : or if we do fuppofe it to be fo porous as that the outward Air can infinuate it felf into it, yet will it not be fufficient for fo free a breathing as is neceflàry for our ma- ture and full grown Animal ; much lefs would that congenit Air, before- mentioned, ( fo much rarefied as it mull be ) fufEce for it. The Chicken hath however fome fort of refpiration, or elfe it could not peep ; for that voice mull be formed by the Air in expiration. But I fay it requires a freer breathing than this comes to ; and therefore by fcratching and pecking againft the Shell, it ftrives to break prifon. In doing which it hath no help from the Hen, ( whatfoever fome may affirm of her breaking the Shell for it ) as Viviparous Animals afford to their Young, whole Wombs that contain the Foetus, being molefted by its tumbling, are ex- cited to endeavour an expulfion ; whence the birth is almoft wholly owing to the Dam, that by her throes excludes her Foetus, and to the Foetus no other wife than as by its motion it caufes an uneafinefs to the Dam. The Shell notwithftanding (that is like an external Womb ) is partly pre- pared for the eafier exit of the Chicken ; for by its having been kept warm io long by the Hen's brooding upon it, and by the White's being COnfumed within it, it is now become dry and brittle, and readily admits of the impreffions of the Chickens Bill pecking againft it; and much
more eafily will the Membranes wherein it is inverted ( which may be called its Secundines ) be penetrated and broken through by fuch means. The Chicken then is wholly owing to its own pains for its exclufion out of the Egg ; for by its Bill (as with a battering Ram) it demolifhes and difmantles the walls of its Prifon, and palling out through the breach ob- tains its freedom. Hitherto it may fufüce to have profecuted this inftance of the genera-
tion of an Oviparous Creature ; it remains that in the next place we pro- ceed according to promife, to give another inftance of that of a Vivipa- rous Animal ; having done which we lhall make a fhort comparifon of the one with the other, and of both with the vegetation of the Seed of a Vlant. |
|||||
|
CHAP-
|
|||||
|
GhapJV. Of the 'Generation of Viviparous Creatures. 2 $
CHAP. IV.
Of the Generation of Viviparous Creatures.
HAving finifhed the hiftory of the generation of Oviparous Animals,
we come in the nekt place to that of Viviparous, wherein we fliàli bé the fhorter, by reafon there is that analogy betwixt them, that to be too particular would be tedious, feeing it were but to repeat the fame things over again. For an Egg is as it were a Conception without the Bo- dy ; and a Conception may properly enough be called an Egg within the Body. I have not had my felf opportunity to examine each days pro- ceedings in the generation of this fort of Animal (viz. of Viviparous) but have fuch obfervations made to my hand by the curious De Graef, whole Inftance is in Rabbets. His obfervations I fhall make ufe of fo far as they are for my purpofe, omitting what is otherwife. But before I proceed to them, a few things are to be premifed. Firft, Thofe parts which we commonly call the Tefticles in Females
are truly Ovaries, from whence the Eggs (one or more at a time) as they are impregnated with the Geniture of'the Male, feparate, and being conduced into the Womb or its Horns, by the Trumpets, become there What we call a Conception. Secondly, This Animal whofe generation we inftance in, forms its Con-
ceptions not in the bottom of the Womb as a Mare and fome other Crea- tures do, but in its Horns, into which it is prefently divided from the Vagina it felf, without any fundus or bottom at all. thirdly, A Rabbet going with young but fo ftort a while, it is to be
fuppofed that all things even from the very firft, proceed with fo much greater hafte, as their geftation is fhorter than that of other Animals re- fpe&ively. .
Fourthly, A Rabbet is one of the placentiferous Animals, each Foetus
having its proper Placenta ; whereas Mares and very many other Crea- tures have no Placenta, but inftead thereof Cotyledons, as was noted in the Firft Book, Chap. 28. Having premifed thefe things I now proceed to the obfervations.
"We made the firft try al (fays the above-named Authour) on a Fe-
" male Rabbet that had not yet accompanied with the Male, in whom " the Tefticles were fmall, but contained very many limpid Eggs, which: " being cut open there ilTued out a clammy liquor like the White of an *' Egg
"We opened another (fays he) half an hour after fhe had taken buck,
" the Cornua of whofe Womb lookt a little redder, but the Ova in the Te- " fticles were not yet changed, unlefs they had remitted a little of their " clearnefs : but neither in the Vagina nor in the Cornua could we per- *' ceive any Seed or any thing like it. t " About fix hours after the coupling we difiecTred another, m whofér
" Tefticles the Cafes of the Ova inclined to rednefs, out of which being « prickt with a Needle a clammy and clear Liquor iiTued firft, but Bloud" « f0iioWed, flowing out of the Bloud-veflêls difperfed through the Cdes. u Thpre was no Seed to be feen in this neither. - ftereW Ddd "F** |
||||
|
Of the Generation of Viviparous Creatures. Chap.IV.
" Four and twenty hours after the coupling we opened another, in one
" of whofe Tefticles we found three, and in the other five Cafes of the " Ova very much changed ; for being before the Coitus limpid and colour- " lefs, they were now turned duskiih and of a faint red, in the middle of " whofe Superficies a little Papilla ( or Teat ) as it were, difcovered it " felf. When the Cafes were cut open, there appeared a little limpid " Liquor in their middle, and in their circumference a certain thicker and " reddifli Matter. " Twenty feven hours after the coitus we infpected another, the Cornua
" of whofe Womb with the Oviducts or Trumpets looked more bloudy, " alfo the extremity of the Oviduct did on every fide embrace the Tejti- " cle like a Tunnel. We found no Eggs in the Cornua, nor were their *' Cafes in the Tefticles much altered from what they were three hours " before. " Eight and forty hours after the coupling we examined another, in
"one of whofe Tefticles we found feven, in the other three Cafes chan- " ged, in whofe middle the Teats were fomething more eminent, through " which, by prefling the fubftance of the Tefticles, there iflùed' a little "liquor like the White of an Egg ; but the remaining reddifh fubftance " of the Eggs being now become fomething thicker, was not fo eafily " preflêd out as before. " Seventy two hours (or three days and nights ) after the coitus we in-
" fpefted another, in which was great alteration ; for the end of the In- " fundihulum or Oviduct did embrace the Tefticles moft clofely, which " being pull'd off we found in the Tefticle of the right fide three Cafes " a little greater and harder, in the middle of whole furface we faw a " little knot with a fmall hole in it like a Nipple ; but diiTeding thefe " Cafes through the middle, their Cavity was -quite empty ; wherefore " we fearched the ways through which the Eggs mull pafs, again and " again, and found in the middle of the right Oviduct one, and in the " outer end of the Cornu of the fame fide two very fmall Eggs little big- " ger than fmall Pins heads, which notwithftanding their lmallnefs are " cloathed with a double coat ; out of thefe Eggs being pricked there if " fued a moft clear Liquor. In the beginning of the leit Horn we found " onely one Egg. " The fourth day from the coupling we opened another, in one of
" whofe Tefticles we found four, in the other three Cafes emptied, and " in the Horns of the refpective fides, we found as many Eggs, greater " than the former, which did not flick in the Oviducts or beginnings of " the Cornua, but were now rolled on towards their middle ; in their " Cavity we beheld as it were another Egg fwimming, far clearer than " in the other before. " The fifth day from the coupling we directed another, in whofe Te-
"fticles we told fix emptied Cafes, that had each a notable Nipple, " through whofe hole we eafily put an ordinary Brittle into their Cavity. " We found alfo the fame number of Eggs, bigger than thofe on the day "before, in divers parts of the Cornua, in which they lay fo loofely, that " by blowing onely, one might drive them this way or that way. The " inner Tunicle of thefe, ( or the Egg within an Egg as it were ) was be- "come yet more confpicuous. " Th&fixth day after the coitus we examined another, in one of whofe
" Tefticles we obferved fix Cafes emptied, and in the Cornu of the fame * " fide
|
||||
|
Chap.IV. Of the Generation of Viviparous Creatures.
" fide we could light of but onely five Eggs near the Vagina brought as "it were upon an heap; but in the Tefhcle of the other fide we found " four Cafes emptied, and in the Horn of that fide onely one Egg. The "caufe of which difference we fuppofe to be, either becaufe fome Eggs '-'by the Wave-like motion of the Cornua, (not unlike the penftaltick "motion of the Guts) being carried downwards towards the Pagina " were driven forth ; or becaufe being confumed in the Cafes they came "not to the Vterus; or light on fome other mifchance. Thefe Eggs " were as big as finali Peafe. . . " The feventh day from the coitus we examind another, in whole Te-
"fticles we found fome Cafes emptied that were greater, redder and " harder than the foregoing, and faw as many tranfparent tumours or " cells in divers parts ot the Cornua ; out of which being opened we turn- " ed Eggs as big as Pocket-piftol Bullets, in which we could difcern no- " thing but the inner Tunicle very plain and a moft clear humour. It is " wonderfull that in fo ftiort a fpace of time the Eggs mould imbibe fo "great plenty of liquor, that whereas before they might eafily be taken " out of the Womb, now they could very difficultly. " The eighth day after the coitus we opened another, in the right Horn
" of whofe Vterus we faw one, in the left two cells; one of thefe was " almoft twice as big as the other : for Nature doth fometimes fo vary, " that there are Eggs of divers bignefs found not onely in divers Animals "of the fame fpecies diffifled at the fame diftance from the coitus but « alfo in one and the fame Individual. In the Horns of the Womb being " opened we faw the Eggs a little bigger than the day before ; but all of " them, their Tunicles breaking, poured out their clear liquor before we " could take them quite out : for which reafon we tried another directed "likewife the eishth day after the *>*&, to take out whofe Ova we « ufed the greai<ScLuIfp^ion ; but their Tumcles were fo very ten- » der that they burli as the former : which when we faw, the Eggs " that remained we boiled with the Womb, whereby the liquor that was "in them hardend like the Whites of Hens Eggs " The ninth day after the coitus we differed another that was old ; The
« Tefticles of this were almoft as big again as thofe of younger : In the "rieht we faw two, in the left five Cafes lately emptied ; and befides "tlfe others that lookt very pale, which we judged to be thofe that «tafuïï^i^ the -^before this although for the moft part "thev leave onely fome palifli points or fpecks, to which the mcreafe « of the Tefticles I owing The Cafes of the laft coitus.had eachh* Teat « unnn them but the others were fmooth. In the right Horn there " were two and in the left five Cells, whofe fubftance being more rare « and cle!r lhan the other parts of the Womb was interwoven with tt* " nv twigs of Veins and Arteries. Opening fome of thefe Cells, we « couldI fee the Eggs, but could not take them out whole ; wherefore be- « S«S»3rfS examine the content of the Eggs in the very hollow «of the Cells, we found it clear like Cryftal; m the midft whereof a " cer ain rare and thin cloud was feen to fwim, which in other Coneys «duTeaed likewife on the ninth day after the coupling for is exceed* «ing finenefsefcaped our fight. The inner fubftance of the Cells, name- "lv that which receives the hypogaftnck Veflels, being more tumid " than the reft, exhibited the rudiments of the Placenta, Dddx ,rThe
|
||||
|
Of the Generation of Viviparous Creatures. Chap.IV.
" The tenth dayafter the coitus we infpe&ed another, in whofe right Te-
*'■ fticle we found one Cafe alone emptied, which by reafon of the Bloud- " veilèls difperfed plentifully through it was redder and had a lefs Teat ; " in the middle of it there appeared as yet a very fmall Cavity : but in " the left Tefticle we found fix fuch Cafes. In the Horns of the Womb " we found alfo fo many Cells, namely one in the right and fix in the " left, diftant a finger's breadth one from another ; in the midft of which " Cells lay a rude mucilaginous draught of the Embryo like a little Mag- " got ; one might alfo plainly difcern the Placenta, to which the Egg by " means of its chorion was annexed. The liquor of the Eggs being boiled " with the Womb hardned like the White of an Egg, and tailed like the " boiled congealed fubftance of the Eggs in the Tefticles, " The twelfth day after the coitus we opened another, in one of whole
" Tefticles we found feven, in the other five Cafes emptied, and as many " Cells in the Horns much bigger and rounder than the foregoing, in the " middle of which the Embryo was fo confpicuous, that one might in a " fort difcern its Limbs, having two bloudy fpecks and as many white " ones in its Breaft : In the Paunch there grew a certain mucilaginous " fubftance inclining here and there to red. We could not difcern more " in this fhapelefs little Animal becaufe of its tendernefs. " The fourteenth day after the coitus we diflèfted another, which had
" the Cells in the Cornua yet larger than the foregoing, and the Bloud-vef- " fels more, and more turgid. We alfo noted that the Cells the larger " they grew, came alfo nearer to one another, the fpaces between them " being fliortned. The Membranes Amnios and Chorion were knit toge- " ther, tearing which we faw an Embryo (fuch as the eleventh Figure of "the following Table reprefents) with a clear and pellucid head, with " the Cerebel copped : its goggle Eyes, gaping mouth, and in fome fort " its little Ears might be difcerned alfo. There was a draught of its Back- " bone, of a white colour, which bending in about the Sternum, refem- "bled the Keel of a Ship : By its fides there run very flender VeflêJs, " whofe Branches were extended f o the Back and to the Feet. The two " bloudy fpecks in the Breaft, being greater than the foregoing were the " rudiments of the Ventricles of the Heart ; at the fides whereof were " feen two whitilh fpecks for Lungs. In the Paunch being opened there " firft lliewed it felf a reddiih Liver, then a white body, to which was " knit a mucilaginous matter like a wnthen thread, being the rudiments " of the Stomach and Guts : All which in thofe that we difïè&ed after- " wards, had acquired onely a greater bulk and perfe&ion. And there- " fore to prevent tedioufnefs by repeating the fame things, we will on " purpofe pafs by all the other DiilecTrions we made in this kind of Crea- " ture excepting onely one which we made the day before the kindling, " that thofe things that in the former were onely confufedly difcerned, " may appear plain in this. " At length on the twenty ninth day after the coitus we infpe&ed ano-
" ther that had kindled fix weeks before, and in the coitus by which Hie " was impregnated had voided all the thicker part of the geniture of the ** Male, which in fome meafure did refemble the confiftence of a moft " limpid gelly. In her Tefticles we found eleven little whitiih Cafes ; " and befides thefe, others far lefs, little or nothing differing from the " fubftance of the Tefles. Thefe Cafes of the Eggs in the Tefticles feem " not to vanilh wholly, but to leave a certain fpeck in them ; whence it "certainly
*
|
||||
|
Chap IV. Of the Generation of Viviparous Creatures.
::rn^rthe°rWomb S"I"found no longer di^ngu^ied into
« Horns of the womb, wii fa was fo kated «Cells, but ^f^^^L^mtick of the Guts, that the
«with a Wave-lite i^üon, ^ t P ^ fa ^ Membmne^ -young ^«T^^g'SftUy, that if we had not cut out the
" were excluded andI that lo na^' he fame way. The Womb ■ whole ^^^Ì^7JnT^ young, (otherwife than it
"WaSZttVÌTi7XZ^^ eleven F Jus fprawling, which
« is in Women. ) In its^avity vv Membrane c^riw (wherein ^»»^ïï SyV-tte foreg01Dg °bf™
|
|||||||||
|
were made*
table XLV
|
|||||||||
|
Reprefetits the Genitals of a She-rabbet, the various figures of the Ova
or Conceptions,- as likewifc a perfect Young one with its Securi- d'mes. Figure I.
Shews the Genitals of a She-coney* > I A
A a The Vagina.
B The Pift-bladder.
CC The Horns of the Woml drawn forwards.
DD The beginning of the Ovidull where it fprings from the Hon).
EE The extremity of the Ovidu.lt, widening by degrees like a Tunnel
FF The cavity of the Tunnel that enclofes the Tefticles.
GG The membranous Ligament that knits the Tunnel to the Horn óf the
Womb.
HH A portion of the Tunnel knit to the Tefticles. II The Ovaries or Tefticles drawn upwards. KK The membranous Ligament that knits the Ovary (or Tejlicle) to the Horn of the Womb.
IX A moft thin Membrane that goes betwixt the two Ligaments, MM The Bloud-veffels that run to the Tefticles. NN Tort ions of the Vena cava and great Artery. OO The hypogaftrick Veffels that are carried to the Womb, |
|||||||||
|
Of the Generation ofViviparout Creatures. Chap.IV.
P A Coneys Tefticle wherein two days from f ^coitus the Teats of the Ca-
fes appear. QA Tefticle wherein on the third day from the coitus the thhknefi, and
Cavities of the Tefticles {in- which the Eggs were included) appearï Figure II. to XI. Shew the various figures of the Eggs or Con-
ceptions. Fig. II. Shews the Eggs as they are found in the Horns of the Womb on
the third day from the coitus. III. The fame Eggs on the fourth day from the coitus.
IV. The fame on the fifth day.
■■■■■■ .
■ ■
V. The fame on the fixth day.
VI. The fame on the feventh day.
VII. The fame ön the eighth day forming Cells in the Horns of the
Womb.
A The Cell in the Horn of the Woml that contains the Egg.
B A Cell opened in whofe Egg is found nothing lut liquor. VÏII. The Eggs on the ninth day from the coitus.
■
A The Cell iti the Horn of the Womh.
B A Cell opened in whofe Egg there appears a thin cloud.
IX. The Eggs on the tenth day from the coitus.
A The Cell full of Bloud-vefels.
B A Cell opened in whofe Egg is f een an Emhryo like a jbapelefiMaggot.
X. The Eggs on the twelfth day from the coitus.
A The Cell.
B A Cell opened in whofe Egg there appear the lineaments of an Emtrye.
XI. The Eggs on the fourteenth day from the coitus.
A The Cell.
B The Emhryo with its Placenta and Zlmbilical-'veffelSi
|
|||||
|
Figure
|
|||||
|
Chap.IV. Of the Generation ofKtfMN*Creatures.
Figure XII.
Shews the young Coney with its Secondine*. aTIx Coney incbdedi, tie girane A^s. EE The raddypart of %**&£#,% (i. e. Feffehthatt4'ƒ«" A
gure is removed.
Figure XIII-
Shews the back-fide of the TlaeenU pull'd from the Wanb. HH Everhard', gW»/« Body having** orfevenUesin it. II the ruddy fart of the Placenta. Figure XIV.
Shews the fore-fide of the « W» which the Navd-veffeis |
|||||||
|
enter.
|
|||||||
|
v ^^ into two parts.
i/£'J%£5 'ïrterS^fierfed thro„gh 'he ««« ^ <*? |
|||||||
|
How far the Generation of Animals Chap, V*
CHAP. IV
Of the Analogy, or likenefs, between tloe generation of Ovi~
parous and Viviparous Animals ; and how far the gene- ration of both agrees with the vegetation of Plants. |
|||||||
|
SUppofing, what has been demonftratéd by the foregoing difcóurfe,
that the firft principle of the Ftietus both of Oviparous and Viviparous Animals, is an Egg, and that the Seeds of Plants have analogy thereto, and may properly enough be comprehended under the fame denomina- tion ; we Ihall as briefly as may be, confider the correfpondence that one of thefe has to another in their procedure towards the production of a perfect Animal or Plant of their refpective kinds. As for Vegetables, the Sun is the common father of their whole genus
or flock, for by his irradiation alone it is that any of their Seeds ( or Eggs ) are matured and become fruitfull : not but that the Mother~$font her felf produces the whole fubftance of the Seed ; but its becoming fruc- tiferous or vegetative, is owing wholly to the ethereal and moft pure and fubtil influence of the Sun. In like manner the Matter of the JEggs in Oviparous Animals, or of a Conception in Viviparous is derived onely from the Female, whofe Egg or Conception it is ; but the vegetative or ^fefttck power refiding therein is derived from the impregnation ( or if you will, irradiation) of the fpirituous geniture oï the Male, by whofe influence alone they are rendred capable of producing a Fmtus of their proper fpecies. The Seed, Egg or Conception then being indowed with a vegetative
virtue by thefe means, have need of fuitable nourishment for the encreafe of the firft Kneaments and rudiments of that which is produced out Of them. Seeds are emancipated from the Womb of their natural Mother the Plant, (viz. the Pod or Shell) and committed to that of their Fofler- mother, the Earth. Into which they are no fooner received, but they begin to imbibe the nitrous and balfamick juices wherewith fhe abounds, through their hulls or husks, by which they are made to fwell and in- creafe in bulk. And even juft thus in Viviparous Animals, as foon as an Ovum is feparated from the Tefticlé and arrives at the Womb, being cloathed with two Membranes (that anfwer to the husks of the Seed) it prefently begins to imbibe fome of the albugineous liquor that plentiful- ly bedews the fides of the Womb at the time when a Conception is made : this liquor I fay is imbibed through the Membranes, for as yet there is no Veffèl formed to convey it, nor does the Conception ftick to any part. And thus alfo the little white fpeck in an Hen's Egg, as foon as the vegetative virtue thereof is excited by the gentle warmth of the Herf brooding upon it, attracts unto it fome of the thinneft and pureft of the White, whereby it is enlarged in its dimenfion. And this encreafe hap- pens to all three, before there are any the Ieaft lineaments of that which afterwards is produced from them. |
|||||||
|
Iff
|
|||||||
|
Chap V agrees with the vegetation of Plants.
" In the next place the Seed begins to put forth a gemm orjjrmt,
wh cht as the fiS Enhryo of the Plant ; and at the to ametto Seed-
f«f Cwhirh ferves for the T lucent a) and Navel-knot are ihaped. liy
hel£e knot which knits the Seed-leaf and trunk of the Plant toge-
her^rnou?tot conveyed from that to thu for its further growth:
Egg or a Con cept «^f ^ftte Navel-vefleb, which in Viviparous
Öt^^ int0 fh^tT S
Animals «at arc p nourilliment to the Embryo. In
Wc^b-cake^w^^ arelnferted into the Membranes
Oviparous, that havehm™ ' h( h Membranes >tis probable may
that f^^^^^J, through which the faid liquors are have, fomc[^^XJk and therefore may anfwer to the Co- vins nf SS ££ « « noi placentiferous. At the fame time or pStly after appear fome lineaments of the Spine, or trunk of the Body, infwerins to the trunk of the Plant. . The na progrefs of the vegetation of a Seed towards a Plant i the
putting fottlfof loots, which are as the Head and Month oi the Plant, Cffiffab non ilhment all its life-long from its Nurfe-motherthe cedure in the formation ot this part leems to uc: iu_w
that the Brain whic his the fpnng of the Ammal fu^on, mg* rure^
a capacity of d^ùn^ tgrfbgg ^ J» P ng ^ h
NeT^mlScimoüL as are necefTary for it in that fiate. And>
weak and ìmperiect »"«""* fnrwardnefs towards fo much per- W/y, that its Mouth ^^^^^fj^o^^ that al-
fedion as is necefTary or ^^gjg <J^g and ^ ^ be„ ^r^ to "in need of for theif
further nourishment and ™«e&- Viviparous or Ovipa-
But now our F*/".}"^^^^ ftate and rank of Vegetables
rous Creature) being advanced beyonatne a into that of Animals, ^ «^^^^ïï^^ffl be further
that: propriety^and^^^^^JSSê^^Ty^Gre^ profecutedaccordato the moltingd ^ themnotonely feve-. in his Anatomy of Trunk s wwn» to ^ Mllky„ ral Sapveffels ^^^^Shk^k, as it Plants were par-
vefTels and Lympheducts) but Air va' of Animahty, takers of Relation alio,anccoota^ ^dl|rence them from
wanting onely local motion and (V^jj^ beyond my purpofe, true Animals. But to doe this would «^ £ l0n) of the which was "^te^g^jgte^ ^ j M1 there.
one to the other, and Mt^(^aloCjyyof Vegetables with Animals; tm]^^^^°^s and "■*"? An"
mals orie with another.
|
|||||
|
E ee
|
|||||
|
How far the getier at ion of Animals Chap. V.
By that time the purer part of the White of an Egg is the greateft part
of it exhausted by the umbilical Veins, and fpent in the encreafe of the parts of the Chicken ; its Bill, Mouth, Throat, &c have attained to that perfection as that they can perform their office of Tipping and fwaliow- ing, whereby the remainder of the White, that is more thick and earthy, comes to be confumed alfo. For that the Chicken fwallows, fome of it, is plain, feeing if one open the Crop of one newly hatched, there is a clear liquor in it öf the fame confluence, colour and tafle with the White, which can be conveyed thither no other way but by fwallowing. In like manner the Feet us of Viviparous Animals having arrived at fuch maturity as to have their Mouths, Stomachs, &c. perfected, though they continue flill to receive part of their nouriihment by the umbilical Veirfy (even as a Chicken after it hath confumed all the White, yet Itili derives nouriihment from the Yelk by other branches of the fame Veflèl) yet partly that the Stomach may be initiated into that office it is to perform after the birth ( viz. concoftion, ) and partly that the Fastus may be trained up and accuftomed to that way of feeding whereby they are to be fuftained after their expulfion from the Womb, they fuck in at their Mouth agrqflèr fort of nutritious juice, (anfwering to the thicker White in an Egg ) wherein they fwim in the Amnios .- which liquor js convey- ed thither by the umbilical Arteries of the Foetus in this manner. The umbilical Vein being implanted into the Placenta, or Cotyledons of the Womb, does imbibe therefrom that nutritious juice that is conveyed thither by the hypogaflrick and fpermatick Arteries of the Dam : which juice confifting of various particles is conducted to the Fcetus, with whofe Bloud it mixes, and its purer particles are affimilated to it ; but the grof fer and more earthy pafs from.the Fcetus by its umbilical Arteries towards the Placenta or Cotyledons again ; but in their way thither-ward they di- vert into thofe branches of thefe Arteries that are difperfed through the Amnios, and are fpued out of their extremities into its cavity, where this liquor is collefted in great quantity for the ufe aforefaid. Laftly, when the Chicken hath fpent all its provifion, and is grown
fo big that it becomes uneafie in its narrow Cloifter, and Jikewife wants a freer air to breathe in, the Shell which is the Mother's ( exter- nal) Womb, begins to be brittle and apt to chap, fo that upon the Chickens buftling about and pecking againft it, it cracks and gives way to its Exit. Thus when the Fcetus ( in Viviparous Creatures ) is full grown, and the fides of the pelvis permit not any further extenfion of the Womb, the Fcetus wanting Elbow-room as we fay, tumbles about and creates an uneafinefs to the Dam, and the Womb it felf is provoked to an endeavour to exclude its burthen which is now become trouble- forrie : whence partly from the endeavours of the Young to free it felf of its confinement, and partly by the {training of the Dam (Nature having prepared the paflàge) the birth fucceeds. Thus I have profecuted the hiftory of the Generation of Animals from
the firft principles of their Fcetus till their bringing them forth ; wherein I muft confefs to have borrowed much from other Mens obfervations : but as the Reader may have obferved me fo ingenuous as to mention my Authours where I have done fo ; fo I hope it will be acknowledged I have produced fome of my own, and improved thofe I have borrowed to
|
||||
|
Chap.V". agrees with the Vegetation of Plants.
to other purpofes than they were firfl publifhed to the world for bf
their Authours : wherein if there be any whofe curiofity I have not fatisfied, I hope there is at leaft enough to excite his emulation, and to put him upon endeavours further to inform himfelf, and others. Either of which effects fhall make me think the pains I have taken well be- ftow'd. |
|||||||
|
SECT;
|
|||||||
|
ee 2
|
|||||||
|
(30
|
|||||
|
^4 ^„jj-----1—H—i-----.-------1-----,-------_-------------------
———..
SECTION IL
Of the Motion of the Ghyle, and Circulation of
the Blond, IAm. now entring upon fo trite a Subjeft, and which has exercifed the.
Pens of fo many learned Anatomifts, that I cannot invite the learned Reader to the perufal of this Difcourfe with the promife of outdoing thofe worthy Perfons that have gone before me : but the main inducement of the annexing this to the before-going Treatife, was from a profpect that this Book will probably fall into the hands of fuch as never read the before-mentioned Authours, fo that this Do&rine will be as new to them as if never any thing had been writ before on the fame Subject. But yet I would not fo prejudice even the learned (Anatomical) Reader againfl it, as that he mould expert nothing but Crambe recolta, and fo naufeate and rejeft it : for befide that the manner and method of the difcourfe is (I think) new, he will find fomething of Experiment, which (for any thing that I know) hath not been made by any other. However in the whole I fhall be very concife, as having faid fomething to the fame pur- pofe in the Firfl: and Second Books, in the Chapters of the Stomach, Guts, and Mefentery, and of the Heart. §. i. In the firfl place we fhall begin with the motion of the Chyle, becaufe
°l l1h «ƒ"/'" Ckyk *s tnat out °f which Bloud is made. Chyle is defined to be a milky
juice, like Barley-cream, prepared and concolled in the Stomach from the Food that is taken. For when the Animal has chew'd his Meat fufficient- ly, and thereby minced and prepared it, (in which aftion the Saliva or Slaver mixes with it) he fwallows it down into his Stomach, which fo contra&s it felf, that be the Meat little or much, it embraces it clofely, and keeps both its Orifices fhut. The Meat being thus ftew'd as it were by the mild heat of the Stomach, enters upon a fermentation, which pro- ceeds from the acidity of the Saliva and the acid or acrimonious ferment of the Stomach working upon the fait particles of the Food and diflòl- ving or precipitating the fame, ( and together with them the fulphureousj which being fo difiolved are diluted and turned into a fluid fubftance by the water or other liquor that the Animal drinks, and this is that we call Chyle. As for the other particles of the Food which are not thus diilòl- ved and made fluid, as being of a more grofs and earthy fubftance, they become like the ChymifVs caput mortuum, and make that we call the fa- ces or Dung, which having once mentioned, my defign will not give me occafion to take much further notice of |
|||||
|
The
|
|||||
|
fe* TI Of the Motion of the Chyle, &c 37
The Chyle then being thus prepared in the Stomach pafïès by degrees
Jii^nwer Orifice Sito the Guts, along which it is gently conducted out at its lower Urince mio , t, Worm-like motion.
(together with **W>*g ^^^ or fewer of thcife r««
Now into every one of the^^ut^ fl hylous H that is comm0n- which are calkd mdky from he^mt y ^ ^ Bloud.ve^ ly t0 be found in Aem, and ^ ^ting^ ^ ^ j that look of a bluilh orOMq _ ( leaden ). Pipes into a large
may fay) into the Guts like 10^J drbkv in t of the Chyle, and
Trunk, do every one of than m£be o dr P 7 The SXt VJS^^S^S^ in whofe folds the greateft
part that fu^Sa7eeIgathered (all but the beginning of the: firft (fmaff) part of the Guts are gam v as for ^ ^^ of thefe j G%Mdwirf«X^ » confult the ninth, tenth, eleventh and
W° in rrtots of h FiS Book, than be tedious with repetition I %
twelfth Chapters 01 ti ie rui » . mouths the then thefe Veins being laid m^e^^bedaubs the infide of the
aforefaid liquor ^&^£^^ the Chyle. But Guts, which ferves as ^ tonef f tlie^con ^ ^ for the more eafie feparation o *^J^™ kind of Mentation in
lent, theiehap^mthe^ttje^^ajnew the Chyle by the «f»^^0!^^^»,^ of the fame
as was ftiewed in the afordàid ^l^auU rather divert into thefe Book. Now the reafon why^tf^, , ide Guts is not from «lender VefTelsthan continue it ^eourfe down the WiO , ^
any magnetici, or ^^^^S^^Oaavauybf^i
but from the continual agimtion and ^^ J ^n/down own periflaltick motion, and^W"H° p f h and of the Mid-
by the continual motion of the Mufcles ot theUuncü, « rÉ in Relation. Thefe ^^f^^fconGdcrs the various
chylousmafs dow„the <*»*^ th'at the fmail ones lie the greateft windings of the Outs, anu uuf h BelJy ( into which moft of part of them in the lowei and fore part °^ ƒ ^ lies more back_ L milky VefTels are inferred) whdimJkc ^ ^ ward) afcendsup J&"*j^ffiSiieot of a pretty finn eoo,
monly is pretty full ftuft J™ ^°fl naturai motion for the Chyle fiftence, muft needs conceive£to.^ ^y ^ whüe ^ s to regurgitate ^J^it^Lybc^td for a fufficieflt mecha-
are thus comprefled. And in iw> y fc n need t0 be much „ical reafon of its ftft <^kXukK by tfc» and the thoracick
thoughtfullfor another, fg*^^ behind muft needs drive on Dtifl: to the Heart; feeing that wM «m for ^ ,eaft f hlgh as that which went befor^*£j^B PFor every body knows that any the place from which «^.^™£ hi„h as the Fountain or Well-fpnng Aquedua will ^^SfXtato^P from the SPfinS-,head *ƒ* '
where it receivd it though n *fJ^through a valley that is (fop- place where it is difcharged, it deicends t z aU Meat and Le) an hundred paces perpendicular^^ wonder that theChyle
Kink thenbeing received *£$£&» the Heart, though it firft that is made of it fliould f^%d^en> feeing the Heart comes fo defend to the ^f.^ft^Z But this motion of the Chyle I^SSWtïï^atotageabove that of "5
|
||||||
|
Of the Motion of the Chyle, and Se<5t It
in a Tree or Pipe ; feeing water defcends, and confequently afcends there-
in onely by its own gravity, and is affifted in neither by the Veflëls that contain it : whereas the Meat and Drink are not onely driven down, into the Stomach by the motion of the Throat and Gullet ; but the upper mouth of the Stomach prefently clofing upon them, hinders their afcent back again, and the aforefaid periftaltick motion of the Guts, and reci-« procal dilatation and .contraction of the Belly (as well as Breaft) in refpi- ration, force the Chyle along the pipes it paries through, as well as it felf makes its way by its own weight. The milky Veins have aliò ano- ther advantage above an Aqueduct, in that they have Valves that hinder the relapfe or retreat of the liquor contained in them ; fo that upon what- foever agitation or compreffion of the Veflèls there is a way open for it forwards, but it cannot return back again. The Chyle then being received into the Ladireals as aforefaid, holds on
its courfe in them through the Mefentery to the common Receptacle at the Loins. In this paflàge the vena Lattea enter feveral glands of the Me- fentery, out of which other branches arife again, and thefe alfo are infer- ted into other glands, and other branches fpring from them again, the branches themfelves likewife inofculating one with another ; but they all hold on forwards towards the great gland at the centre or root of the Me- fentery where it adheres to the Loins, into which fome enter and fome march over it : But thofe that enter it, arife again out of it, and joining with the others that ran over it, difcharge themfelves all together into the common Receptacle before-mentioned. This Receptacle is called common, becaufe it is common both to the
Chyle and Lympha (which latter humour what it is, you may fee in the above-cited twelfth Chapter. ) It is feated behind and a little above the great gland at the centre of the Mefentery, rather towards the Mt fide, by the fide of the Cava defcending, and near the left Kidney. It is like a little bag or bladder, and is nothing elfe but the wider part or root of the thoracick Dull, which is continued from it. All the Chyle being im- ported into this Receptacle, and alfo the Lympha returning from all the Bowels of the Abdomen, and the inferiour parts, mixing with and dilu- ting of it, afcend up the Loins and Back by the faid thoracick Duel, which is a long Pipe ( very thin and almoft tranfparent ) running up the whole length of the Thorax under or behind the Aorta (on the infide of the Spine) but rather inclining towards its left fide ; and at laft pafling under the Thymus it opens into the lower fide of the left fubcJavian Vein, over againft that place where the left jugular Vein opens into it on the upper fide. Though the Duel: ufually be but one, yet it opens with five or fix mouths into the faid Vein, all which on the infide the Vein are cove- red with one broad valve, which permits the Chyle and Lympha to enter into the Vein, but hinders either them or Bloud to flide out of the Vein into the Duct. This Duct has feveral Valves in it as well as the Lafteals of the Mefentery that hinder the retreat of the humours contained in it. You have this Duel with the Receptacle, &c. expreft in the next Table but one, viz. the forty ninth and laft. Thus the Chyle being difcharged into the Subclavian Vein is therein
mixed with the Venal bloud, and paflês along with it to the right Ventri- cle of the Heart, where it begins to be alterd into Bloud. We cannot therefore purfue its motion any further under its own name : for though it be not perfectly turned into Bloud, it may be, in feveral times pafliog through
|
||||
|
Sect II Circulation of the Bloud. 39
tiraoli 'the Heart in its circulation with the Bloud ; yet it is fo jumbled
through the Heart in ts e efteemed to be 0f the fame mafs with it. S3Ï h- and onely advertife this further, that ac-
An. TtSr deft examination and molt accurate experiments ol the
,C°A AS ^s SltteChyfe pafTes thefe ways we have defcribed, and
bell Anatomiits, all the^nyi y ; een ^ to ^ no part of it ^ convf ed g her to tIie Liv ^ > ^ p
Womb in the time of ^G^°^ forit does indeed pals thereto,
mean immediatel).and%^™*s d ^ ^ ^ ^^^tSrSSiSSSd^ farg0ie oourifluncnt of the /to or
Sung,as v-s Oat larfe in the twenty eighth and twenty ninth
Chapters of the Firft Book. That the i?W is continually fome of it ilTuing from, arid other fome _ j n.
,.p™fnS tofhe Heart, by a circular motion, is now an opinion fo &$*%& SS^SS^ winced not takeany pains to prove That it is fo, Bloud. ZZ^Xl™ How and by what Ways this motion is performed In the foregobg Paragraph we had traced the Chyle to the ngbt Ven- £>gf
. • 1 if,he Hear? into which it enters mixed with the vena Bloud ing 'u the
mele of the Heart, ^into wa a d ^ mQre ^ ^.^ the Heart's diaftole or dilatation. Herein ne ui w «i ƒ ^rf
intimately mixed one with another, and us probable enter upon ome J
intimately niixcu une cannot be much, conildenng their ihort degree of fermentation, bu«t cannot: w m , b^.^ ^
flay therem, w^^^^^^Swing/^isdl that
M* T,nd ChvlfSS^the'Veotticle into the pulmonary g* S?^Sl^iSSk.S it from the Gm. by the foregoing fito %efe humoursTn which from henceforward we iteli fpeafc of under Tliele humours tnen, w""-1 . , h puim0nary Artery, are the notion of ^«^a^^^ thefmaller
conveyed ^^^^Jtingwith the like twigs of the pulmona-
twi&oi whichRanches "01cuiah ^ ^ by thlS ]atter Vein is con- ylTtoX faft VeenS The Blondin its parage through the Lungs
ducted to trie leit vemuu nitrous particles of Air received being infpired or ^^^JS^£^ themfelves into the
into the Lungs in Infpiration and here ml nua S han fe ^ Bloud undergo.,,gJ^Jg^^^S^ - * °"e to
done before in ^!fVSjand ^,/fr of both Ventricles are per-- n the other. For ^^'^„/tk interval or ceflation betwixt formed at the fame t^e, ana trie fore of the Heart the thefe two motions is equal In_ ti* ^x^ the ^ or
fame Blouc«to. foj fa fthe ArSies in the Body (except the
Artery, which s e root o thfe Valves ^ he fi pulmonary. I <haU W^jJ. recourfe of the Bloud into them (fuch
of the Ventricles, which hinder trie «co» } h f that hinder the' are thofe of the pulmonary ^fJ^'TjcZlnd pulmonary Vein ;
regurgitation of the Bloud out ^^^£ Cta^ of the Second for of thefe we have &^«?^™J*g he Bloud further takes, Book : but we mall proceed to ™^^,£g of the ^r/«. now that we have fo low d it a far a^ the beg n g ^ ^ The^arStheevBrou^Fwb^ZZ, the nervous Juice, cranyfe^f
once paft it, be they Bloud ^/P fti the Bloud forciblv out of the habit 4 A £ EWES**8 S™g M that which * -
|
||||
|
4.o Of the Circulation of the Bloud. St£t. IL
goes before, and having all other humours either formally or materially
in it ; as new fupplies are conveyed by it or along with it to any part, that which was in the part before the fupply came, mull give way to it and hold on its courfe, till either it be eje&ed out of the Body if it be an excrement, or be returned back again to the Heart if it be a profitable Humour, abating fo much of it as is fpent on the nourifhment and re- fection of the parts, or may evaporate by infenfible tranfpiration. More particularly : The Aorta having received the Bloud from the left Ventricle is prefently divided into two Trunks, the Afcending, and the Defcending, the Afcen- The Afcending Trunk climbing up by the Wind-pipe to the top of the df°f a'*"^" Breaft fenck f°rtn two branches, called the falciavi an, becaufe they run orta. mjer tjie jower flc[e 0c j-^g clavicula? or Chanel-bones. Thefe fend out feveral branches both from their upper and lower fide. From their upper
Tide fpring thofe Arteries called Mammaria ( in Men ) the Cervical ( that are partly fpent on the Mufcles of the Neck, and afterwards entring to within its Fertelrce, afcend into the Brain by that hole by which the Spinal Marrow defcends from it ) and laftly the Mufculte ( that are alfo beftow'd on the Mufcles of the Neck. ) Out of their lower fide proceed the fuperiour Intercoftah. After having fent forth thefe branches, they pafs out of the Cheft to the Arms (or Fore-legs in Brutes) on the parts whereof they are bellowed. Juft where the great afcending Trunk of the Aorta fends forth the fubclavian Arteries fide-ways, it is divided into two large branches (called the carotid Arteries) that afcend diredtly up- wards, which firft fending fome finali flips to the Tongue, the Mufcles of the Os hyoides, &c. are afterwards each fubdivided into the External and Internal branches. The External are beftowed on the Mufcles of the Lips, Cheeks, Temples, &c. The Internal entring the Skull at the hole by which the wandring pair of Nerves (or eighth pair) come out of it, are difperfed through the Brain, the dura and pia mater, in which they make the Rete mirabile and Plexus Choroides, uniting with fome twigs of the cervical Arteries before-mentioned. The Bloud that flows by thefe Arteries to the Brain, &c. after it hath ferved the neceffities thereof, re- turns back again towards the Heart by the Jugular Veins, which are alfo External and Internal, obferving the fame courfe with the Arteries. The External Jugular is that which appears fo fair in the Neck, which we commonly open in Horfes. And here it may be convenient to inquire in what manner the Bloud paflës out of the Arteries into the Veins, whether by inofculating the one with the other, or by what other way. That I might fatisfie my felf herein I made the following Experiment. An Experi- Having bled an Horfe to death, that both Veins and Arteries might be me"vs "that emPty» wifn tne greateft difpatch I could, whilft the Horfe was warm, fthere are no I took up one of the carotid Arteries and cut an hole in it pretty near the Anaftomofes Breaft, into which hole putting a quill I blew into it as hard as I could, net whTthe whereupon I perceived the branches of Arteries on both fides of the Veins. Face, &c. to fwell, yea and alfo the carotid Artery on the other fide of the Neck : but I no fooner left off blowing, but they were immediately emptied again, the wind, 'tis likely, proceeding forward, on the contra- ry fide, towards the Heart. Upon which I tyed the Artery on the other fide about the fame place where I had made the hole on this, to flop the progrefs of the wind, and then blew again ; upon which the Arteries on both fides were very much diftended : and then I fpeedily made a li- gature a little above the Orifice, whereby the Arteries and all their branches
|
|||||
|
I
|
|||||
|
Soft II. Of the Circulation of the Bloud. 4*
j. '- j. tvwIt Fare &<■ continued diftended. Which having
branches in the Neck Fac^ cont after the other, and V1ewed *^ * J^ ^ ways, and to leave the Arteries and all
perceived the= wind tc ^ b f J;hüe ^ j hr vdns were not tlìZlZn^ l made thÌS COndufl°?' Thï the ArTS
iwelled at au . "F"» , y • t n but oneiy Wlth one another. did ^.^^^^^^confirmJ, I afterwards took
In which opin on that I migut De a ^ ^ ^ and tyed up the external jugular Vein on one ^ ^ ^^ r ^
the,fame7hTewTnt^^it af had donePinto the Artery before ; whereup-
mad? al„hr Ve n on the other fide of the Neck fwelled as well as that
on the jugular Vein on tneot ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ on this fide and bo h tneir ora the orfe whereb
they were all wel filled, I^^j their branches continued to be
^iM iS£ ed tt^u.P°n which they prefently became { tr Rut bvtïs blowing into and filling the Veins, the Arteries were
empty. But bytöusD owing & there ar£ nQ Anafto_ not at all moved which farther a sne°™^ { d fliQuld fs
^ftS
to 1 found monXveffels of the fame kind. I fpeak as to the bated
to be found amongu.v ^ rf ^ ^^ as partlcularly
the Bod} ; for thathere are ^ ^ Ar
of the pulmonary Artery ana v o m tfae Uv&.
and Vein in or ^^Öfc^?^ te efteemed rather an Arte-
(thefirftofw^^^^^/bcwondred then, if indeed ry than a Vein ) is P^W* ^ J fll0uld pafs out 0f the Arteries there be a circulation of the Bloud, tow t no p Qa betwixt into the Veins, è there be no eonimunicaUon^^ ^ ^ mucfa
them. But ^5^d^a"Ö (Sarcafe ; for upon the ceflation
more porous *nd iPong f h f Uer paflageS by which of the motion of the humours many o ^ f hdr fldes. So
they ufe to be conveyed «Jte^Xel after deathnopaf-
that although, according to the ^Perimec^ he contra_ fage even for wind out of the Arteries into ^ Veins
r^out of the Veins into the f^^J^^y mofculation hence, neceflary to deny it For though * e canno: g ^ ^^ . of the one with the other (^J^^ Jy be transfus'd out of yet there is another «7^. ^S bloud by the pulfation of one into another, andI that£ thus^ in utmoft ends of he Arf£. the Heart is extracted or™™™™. which being rare and porous
ries into the very ^j1^ f^ permits the Bloud to flow in ; ^™^e influx of the Bloud is conti-
but a fmall quantity, and therefore leeing f f he famej for „ual, there iuft.dfo be.o^^^^v^ which by
which office there are no o tb^eb«to^flD ^ ^^^ their extremities imbibe or fuck up. tte ?loua d &f difch k int0 and convey it back into thegarget b^hes^ ^ .. J^{^ the Cava, and that, to the Heart■ J h is very certainj feeing out of the Arteries into ^^^ ™^.n5urilhBientW.the Bloud;
if it were not fo, ^P^fl^^deed contribute warmth to the for while it is I" the VeflHs it.my 1 feeing even |
||||
|
42 Of the Circulation of the Bloud. Sedi. U.
that glides along their cavity, but by capillary Vefiels running along their
coats. Againft this manner of the Blouds palling out of the Arteries in- to the Veins I know nothing can be objected, unlefs it be the hafty cir- culation of the Bloud, which according to the computation of the mofl accurate Anatomifls is fuppofed to be fo quick, as that the whole mafs of Bloud pafiês feveral times through the Heart in one hours fpace : from whence fome think it neceflary to admit of Anaflomofes of the Arteries with the Veins all the Body over, whereby the Bloud may run in a fuller current out of one into the other, than 'tis probable it can do by way of ■ extravafation ; though from the nutrition of the parts, they believe it neceflary to admit this latter way too. To this objection I fhall onely oppofe the before-going Experiment, which to me feems a plain demon- flration that there are no fuch Anaflomofes at all. Having therefore fhewn all the branches of the AfcendingTmnk of the Aorta, we fhall proceed to thofe of the Defending, the Defcen- The Defcending Trunk of the Aorta is larger than the Afcending, as ding Trunin being to fupply more parts with heat and nourilhment. It defcends by the *ƒ the Aorta, bullet towards the Midriff at which before it arrive, it fends forth the inferieur Intercoftal branches, and the Bronchial, which latter accompany the branches of the Wind-pipe in the Lungs. When it arrives at the Mid- riff, there fpring out of it, the Phrenick Arteries, which are difperfed through the Midriff, andMediaftinum or Partition-membrane of theChefh Having pierced the Midriff, it defcends in one Trunk as far as the Iaft Ver- telra of the Loins, but by the way fends forth many branches : as firfl the C'celiaca or Stomach Artery, which arifes fingle, but is divided afterward into its right and left branches. The right furnilheth the right fide of the Sto- mach, (viz. the Pylorus) the inverting Membrane of the Liver, the Gall- bladder, the right fide of the Cauliand that part of the Colon on which it cleaveth, the beginning of the fmall Guts, and the Mefentery : The left (called its Splenick branch) fends fome twigs to the middle part, left fide and upper orifice of the Stomach, and to the lelt part of the Caul; but the great- eft part of it runs to the Spleen, into which before it enters, it fometimes fends forth thevas breve arteriofum, which goeth to the left part of the bot- tom of the Stomach : but in Horfes thisz^ breve fpringeth from it after it is entred into the Spleen, as may be feen in the feventh Table annexed to the fixteenth Chapter of the Firfl Book, where all thefe branches of the fplenick Artery are delineated. The Veins that accompany this Cceli- ack Artery are branches of the Torta, and have the fame names with thofe of the Artery. Next to the Cceliack there fprings out of the Trunk of the Aorta the upper Mefenterick, that is bellowed upon the upper part of the Mefentery and the fmall Guts. The next are the Emulgent Arte- ries, the right and left; each of which dividing themfelves into two or more branches, enter into the Kidneys of their refpecTrive fides, and dif charge there the ferum or wheyifh part of the Bloud that makes the Urine. Below thefe the Aorta fends forth the fpermatick Arteries, which in Hor- fes are commonly two, and in Mares oft-times more, on each fide. Thefe run to the Teflicles, Womb, &c. Then the lower Mefenterick, that go to the lower part of the Mefentery and to the great Guts. By this time the Trunk of the Aorta being come to the top of Os facrum, having thus far defcended under the Cava, begins to climb upon it, and is divided into two equal branches, called the /Hack ; which are prefently fubdivided in- to the interior and exterior. From the interior fpring the Mafittlte, or Mufclo
|
||||
|
Sect. E bf tbe Circulation of the Bloud. 4$
Mufcle-arteries, being beftowed on the Pfoas, the Buttock-mufcles,,&e.
alfo the Hypo? aft rick, that run to the parts of Generation in both Male and Femalef and alfo to the Bladder, &c. and laftly the Vmbihcal Arteries, which in the Fetus afcending by the fides of the Bladder proceed to the Navel, and run to the Womb-cake or Cotyledons; of which in the twen- ty eighth Chapter of the Firft Book. From the exterior Ihack branches arife Urli the Epigaftrick Arteries, which turning upwards run on the Side of the Rim of the Belly, betwixt it and the ftreightMufcles as far as the Navel, and there meet the Mammary. Secondly, the-Pudenda which% fpent upon the Privities of both Male and Female. Afterwards tie Back branches defcend to the Thighs, and then begin to be called CrUits we have given an hiftory of all the larger branches of M Aorta
whereby the Bloud is conveyed from the Heart to all the parts of the Bo- dy it would not be very material to give the like of the Vezns, feeing every one of thefe Arteries has a Vein accompanying it, for the moft part of the fame denomination ; fo that by knowing the Artery that comes °o any part, we muft know the Vein alfo that returns the Bloud from it, Specially in the Limbs and outward parts. For indeed within the Body, efpecially in the Abdomen, there is fome variation : the rather becaufe fome of the Veins thereof fpring from the Cava, and others from the Por- ta This latter fupplies the Bowels that perform the firft concottion, as the Stomach, Guts and Mefentery ; as alfo the Spleen, Sweetbread, Caul, and the Liver in part. Thefe branches of the Porta receiving into them that Bloud that is fuperfluous to the nourifhment of thofe parts into which they are inferred, unite into one Trunk in the lower or under fide of the Liver • which Trunk fpreading it felf into many roots through the whole fubftance of the Liver/ does transfufe its Bloud into the like roots ot the ofthe Porta into the C^'^^^SàfSc Cava difperfed to
which is «ca^*^^ ïalfo by thofe that run to all other tkV?of tfe Bodywhether from its Afcending or Defending Trunk, pPSsfhrtghtyBoWwel in its return towards the Heart : But eing im- bibed by the capillary twigs out of the pores of the parts, is conveyed firft intòthe fmaller branches, and from them into the larger, and laftly f! thefe into one of the great Trunks of the Cava, by which it is ^^^^^f^1^ theret° ^ lnlPinted
Sew .and fent about in a fecond circulation. |
|||||||
|
table
|
|||||||
|
Fff i
|
|||||||
|
(44-)
|
||||||
|
Table XLVIII.
Reprefents all the fanguiferous Veffels of the whole Body of an Horfe
as well Veins as Arteries, as alfo the feveral Bowels through which they pafs.
A The Afcendent Trunk of the great Artery.
B The Defcendent Trunk of the fame.
C The Afcendent Trunk of the hollow Vein.
D The Defcendent Trunk of the fame.
EEEEEE The divifion of the Afcendent Trunk of the great Artery into the
Carotid and Cervical Arteries which go to the Meek and Head; as alfo into the Subclavians which go down the Fore- legs ; likewife into the Mammary branches, fa called in Hu- mane Bodies, though improperly in Horfes or Mares. FFFF The branchings of the Afcendent Trunk of the hollow Vein into the
external and internal Jugulars, and into the Subclavian branches. GGGG The branchings of the Defcendent Trunk of the great Artery into
the /Hack, Epigafirick, Hypogaflrick and Crural branches. HH The like branchings of the Defcending Trunk of the hollow Vein.
I The Heart in its natural pofition.
KK. The Lungs in the fame.
L The Liver in the like.
M The Spleen alfa in its place.
NN The Mefentery turned on one fide.
OO The Kidneys.
pp The Deputy-kidneys.
QCL The Vreters.
RR The Spermatick Veins.
SS The Spermatici Arteries.
TT The Tefiicles.
VV The deferent or ejaculatory Veffels,
WW The cremafter Mufiles.
X The Bladder of Vrine.
YY The proflate Glands.
7JL The feminal Bladders.
aa The body of the lard.
b Its Glans.
cc The Emulgent Veins.
dd The Emulgent Arteries.
e^e The Mefenterick Veffels.
|
||||||
|
Table
|
||||||
|
(4S)
|
||||||
|
Table XLIX.
Reprefents as well the Chyliferous as Sanguiferous Vefièls of the Body
of a Mare, as alfo her Genitals, &c. A the Heart.
B The Defending Trunk òf the great Artery.
C The lower end of the faid Artery cut off, the better to fhew theRecepta-
culum Chyli that lieth under it.
D The Receptaculum Chyli. E The Mefentery. F The great Kernel of the Mefentery.
GG The Lalleal Veffels running from the great Kernel of the Mefentery to the Receptaculum Chyli, into which they empty their Chyle.
HH The Thoracick Dull that conveys the Chyle from the Receptacle to the fubclavian Vein into which it is emptied.
I The infertion of the faid Duà into the fubclavian Vein. KK The Defending Trunk of the hollow Vein. LL The Afe en ding Trunk of the fame. MM The Afcending Trunk of the great Artery. NNNN The Jugular Veins and Carotid Arteries. OOOO The Deputy-kidneys. PPPP The Cephalick or Baft lick Veins and Arteries which branch into thé' For e-legs.
QQQQjThe Mammary Veins and Arteries. RRRR The Eptgaflrick Veins and Arteries. SSSS The Hypogaftrick Veins and Arteries, TTFYT%The Crural Veins and Arteries. W The Kidneys. WW The Z/reters cut off from the Bladder,
XX. The Spermatick Arteries and Veins. YY The Tejlicles. ZZ The Tuba; or Trumpets of the Womb.
aa The Horns of the Womb. bb The Body of the Womb. e The Bladder of Vrine turned afide. dd The bottom of the Womb where the Foal lies. ee The jagged Orifices of the Trumpets of the Womb. f f The broad Ligaments that fuftain the Womb. g The Clitoris, hh The outward Orifice of the Sheath of the Womb. FINIS, ,
|
||||||
|
A Tjy
|
||||||
|
A
TABLE
O F T H E
CONTENTS of the feveral CHAPTERS
Contained in this Volume.
|
||||||
|
BOOK I.
Containeth a defcription of the Loweft Belly or Paünch. Chap. I. f~\F the farts invefting the whole Body, and fir ft of the Hair.
KJ Pag. i
II. Of the Cuticle or Scarf-skin. 3
III. Of the Cutis or true Skin. 4
IV. Of the Flefhy Tannicle. $
V. Of the Fat, and Common Memhrane of the Mufrles. ibid.
VI. Of the Invefting Parts proper to the ké&er Belly. 7
VII. Of the Ri?» vj' tue tseiiy, called the Peritoneum. 12
VIII. Of the Omentum or Caul. i*
IX. Of the Gullet and Stomachi , i^
X. Of the Guts in general. 2.0
XI. Of the Guts'in particular. 21
XII. Of the Mefentery. 25-
XIII. Of the Pancreas or Sweet-head. x6
XIV. Of the Liver. 2 8
XV. Of the Porus Bilarius, or GaO-paffage. 31
XVI. Of thè Spleen or Milt. 32
XVII. Of the Kidneys, and Deputy-kidneys. 36
XVIII. Of the Vreters, or Paf ages of Vrine. 39
XIX. Of the Pift-b ladder, or Bladder of Vrine. 40
XX. Of the Tard and Sheath. 41
XXI. Of the Parts miniftring to Generation in Horfes ; and firft of the
Preparing, Spermatick or Seed-veffels., 43
XXII. Of the feflicles or Stones, and the Paraftatae or Attenders. 45
XXIII. Of the Deferent or Ejaculatory Veffels, the Seed-bladders and the
Proftates. 47
XXIV. Of the Parts miniftring to Generation in Mara, and firft of the
Preparing Veffels, fo called. 5-0
XXV. Of the Tefticles or Stones in Mares, otherwife called Ovaries ; and
of'the Trumpets of'the Womb. 51
XXVI. Of the Womb and its Horns. 54
Chap.XXVIl-
|
||||||
|
I
|
|||||||||
|
The TABLE.
Chap. XXVII. Of the Vagina or Sheath of the Womb, the Caruncles calfd
Myrtiformes, (of the fhape of Myrtle-berries ) the Clitoris and the external Privity. Pag. 56 XXVIII* Horn the Foal is nourifhed in the Womb ; of the Membranes
wherein it it wrapt, and the lifuors contained in them ; and laftly of the travel-firing. 58 XXIX. Of the Vdder. 66
|
|||||||||
|
BO O K E
Contains a defcription of the Middle Venter, or Cheft.
Chap. I./'"^V F the invefling and circumfcribing farts of the Chefi,
VJ Pag. 69 II. Of the Mufcles of the Middle Venter or Chefi, called the Intercofial
Mufcles. 71
III. Of the Pleura, or Coat which i&vefts or lines the Ribs on the infide, yz
IV. Of the Midriff or Diaphragm. 73
V. Of the Partition-membrane ca/W Mediaftinurn. 76
VI. Of the Thymus or great Kernel at the Throat; and of the Pttrfe of
the Heart called Pericardium, together with the water contained
therein. 77 VII. Of the Heart. 80
VIII. Of the Ventricles, internal Vefels\, Valves and Earlets of the
Heart. "'r'\ 83
IX. Of the Organs of Breathing; and their ufe, Viz. of the Lungs and
Wind-pipe. 89
X. Of the Neck. 96
|
|||||||||
|
BOOK. III.
Contains a defcription of the Uppermoft Venter, or Head. Chap. I. f~\ F the Head and Animal Parts contained therein. Pag. 1 qi
V_y II. Of the Brain in general. 104
HI. Of the feveral Parts of the Brain, viz. that which is firstly called the
Brain, the Cerebellum or After-brain, and the Spinal Marrow. 106
IV. Of the Spinal Marrow contained within and without the Skull. 108
V. Of the Parts of the Cerebrum, or Brain properly fo called, viz. the
Rete Mirabile, Gianduia Pituitaria, Infundibulum, the Ventricles
of the Brain, the Corpus callofum, Plexus Choroides, Nates, Te- ftes, Penis or Gianduia pinealis. 109 VI. Of the Atlion of the Brain, and the exercifes of the Animal Faculty
by the Nerves and Fibres. tx6
VII. Of the feveral pair of Nerves arifing from within the Skull, particu-
larly of the fir ft, fecond and third pair. 1 r 8
Chap.VIIi
|
|||||||||
|
The TABLE
Chap. VIII. Of the fourth and fifth pair of Nerves that arife within the
Skull Pag. i2i IX. Of the fixth and feventh fair of Nerves àrifing within the Skull. 124
X. Of the eighth and ninth pair of Nerves. 12 5
XL Of the Nerves arifingfrom the Spinal Marrow while it is in the Verte- bras of the Neck. 125? XII. Ofthoje Nerves that arife out of the Spinal Marrow whilft it is in the
Vertebras of the Back, *Loins and Os facrum. 130
XIII. Of the Eye-lids, Eyes and their fever al Farts, viz. their Coats
and Humours. 134
XIV. Of the Ears and their fever al Parts. 138
XV. Of the Nofe, Lips and Mouth. 14 J
|
|||||||||
|
BOOK IV.
Contains a defcription of all the Mufeles of the Body. Chap. ì.f^Ontàineth a defer ipt ion of the fever al forts of Fief?, and an
\_j Apology for not expr effing the Mufeles fo particularly in Fi- gures as I have done other farts of the Body. Pag. 149 ti. Of the Mufeles of the Eye-lids. I $1
ÌW. Of the Mufeles of the Eye. t$%
IV. Of the Mufeles of the Nofe. ' 15 S
V. Of the Mufeles of the Lips anJ cUAs. 1 $6
VI. Of the Mufeles of the Lower Jaw. 158
V\l. Of the Mufeles of the Ear. 159 VIII. Of the Mufeles of the Tongt#. 161
IX. Of the Mufeles of the Bone of the tongue, caBed Os hyoides. 163
X. Of the Mufeles of the Larynx or Throttle. 164
XI. Of the Mufeles of the Uvula and Throat. 165
XII. Of the Mufeles of the Head. 167
XIII. Of the Mufeles of the Neck. i<>9
XIV. Of the Mufeles of the Breafl. J 7 *
XV. Of the Mufeles of the Back and Loins. x7ì,
XVI. Of'the Mufeles of the Fundament, the Bladder, the Tefticles, lard
and Clitoris. *7<*
XVII. Of the Mufeles of the Scapula or Shoulder-blade. 177
XVIII. Of the Mufeles of the Shoulder. 17s
XÏX. Of the Mufeles that move the Fore-leg and Foot. * °l XX. Of the Mufeles of the Thigh. *°|
XXI. Of the Mufeles of the Tibia or Leg. ™*
XXII. Of the Mufeles that move the lower part of the Leg and toot. 191
|
|||||||||
|
BOOK
|
|||||||||
|
Ggg
|
|||||||||
|
The TABLE.
|
||||||
|
BOOK V.
Containeth a defcription of the Bones.
Chaplf~\F the nature, definition, differences and parts of Bones. Pag.19 5-
\^} II. Of the Sutures or Seams of the Head. 198
III. Of the proper Bones of the Skull. xyy
IV. Of the Bones common to the Skull and upper Jaw. 204
V. Of the Jaw-hones and their Parts. zoo
VI. Of the figure, magnitude, numher and articulation of the Teeth, zoy
VII. Of the Bone of'the Tongue called Os hyoides. 212
VIII. Of the Bones of the Neck. ibid.
IX. Of the Vertebra of the Back and Loins ; and of the Rihs. z 15-
X. Of the Sternum or Breaji-hone, and of the Scapula or Shoulder-hlade.
217
XI. Of the Os humeri or Shoulder-hone, and the next Bone under it cal-
led the Cuhit. 219
XII. Of the feven Offelets or little Bones of the Knee, of the Shank-hones
which reach from the Knee to the great Taftern, and aljo of the
two Paflern-hones and the Coffin-hone. zzi XIII. Of the Os facrum or holy Bone, together with the Coccyges or
Rump-hones, otherwife called the Bones of the Dock or Tail. 227
XIV. Of the namelefi Bone, commonly divided into the Hip, Haunch and
Share-hones. Z30
XV. Of the Thigh-hone and Patella or little Bone of the Stifle. z 31
XVI. Of the Leg-hone and Ranges of Offelets which make that part we call
the Hock, anfwering to the Heel of a Man. 23 3
XVII. Of the Hoofs of an Horfe anfwerjfg to the Nails of a Mans Fingers
or Toes. 235"
XVIII. Of a Cartilage or Griflle. 2.3 6
XIX. Of a Ligament. 237
|
||||||
|
The
|
||||||
|
The TABLE.
The APPENDIX, containing two Difcourfes : The
one of the Generation of Animals; and the other, of ^Motton of the Chyle, and the Qrculanon of the Bloud. SECTION I.
Of the Generation of AN I M A L S. |
|||||||||||
|
Pag. 3
|
|||||||||||
|
HE Preface.
|
|||||||||||
|
/" ■ ^
|
|||||||||||
|
dp. I. Of the vegetation of Seeds, H^^^^OeVxaJi
II. Of the firjl rudiment of'anEgg, ^vb!l ^ £es frui^S. 13
alfo how it attains to its great bulk, and how it becom J j
III. By what means and degrees a Chicken n formed out of m ^
IV. Of the generation of Viviparous Creatures. Ovipar0us and
V. Of the Analogy, or likenejs between the genen**ƒ P with
Viviparous Animals ; and how far the generation of & ^ ^
^ vegetation of Plants.
SECTION II.
Ofthe Motion of the Chyle, and Circulation of the Bloud. 3*
T H E E N V.
|
|||||||||||
|
E il R A T A.
■W,A lin 40. for outward reade »>»«■.
Pag. 123. Iin. 37- for A*r reade outer. 4»i. hn. 4°- |
|||||||||||
|
442 Post Street
San Francisco California 74 1 o:
(415) 781-6402 Cable: locos
|
|||||||
|
Jeremy Norman & Co.
|
|||||||
|
Rare Hocks Manuscripts Prints Maps
LARGE PAPER COPY
SNAPE, Andrew, jr. (b.1644-?). The anatomy of an horse. Containing an
exact and full description...exprest in forty nine copper-plates. To which is added an appendix containing two discourses:...of the generation of animals;....of the motion of the chyle, and the circulation of the bloud. Folio. 6 leaves, 237, 45pp., 3 leaves. With the frontispiece portrait drawn and engraved by R. White and 49 fine copperplates, the first signed N. Yeats. Eighteenth century tree calf, rebacked, endpapers renewed but a fine copy on large paper (page size: 34 x 22 cm.) London: T. Flesher, 1683. $1250.00 FIRST EDITION [GARRÌSON-M3RTON 298] of the first English book on equine
anatomy--one of the greatest English books on the horse, and the first great English book on veterinary medicine. Although Snape mainly presented an English adaptation of Ruini's Dell anotomia et dell-infirmita del cavallo (1598), he neglected to credit Ruini, thus leaving himself open to charges of plagiarism. However, Snape's own text and illustrations were so outstanding that his own book was later plagiarized. Snape was farrier to Charles II, to whom the work is dedicated. His
appendices on embryology and the circulatory system are chiefly based on the works of Harvey and Malpighi. This copy on large paper must be one of the finest extant.
Wing S 4382 See Dibner 186.
Cole, History of comparative anatomy (1949) pp.83-97; esp. 86-87.
|
|||||||